'"""mm 



'mm 
si;: 




ii:l!llr 



liiiiiiiiiliiilji* 










O 0^ 






./^ 











'</> 



« i ft - -^ ^^ . 



^^ 






0- ,* 









v'^' '^^ 



s^ \ 



#1 



xO ( 



0^' 






■^^. .^^ 



^ « ^ ^ ^ <^ ^r*^ "^ ^ ^ * ^ ' V ^ 



O 



c> 



'"oo^" 



.0 






ro' 






^:^ -n^. 



v^-^ 






.'^ 



GREEK GRAMMAR 



FOR THE 



USE OF LEARNERS 



BY E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. 




HARTFORD: 

H. HUNTINGTON, Jukr. 

NEW YORK : 

F. J. HUNTINGTON & Co. 

174 Pearl Street. 



1838. 






Entered according to an Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by 

H. Huntington, Junr., 

in the Clerk's office, of the District Court of Connecticut. 



:i r*^^ 



New Haven, printed by B. L. Hamlen. 



PREFACE. 



The materials, of which this compendious grammar is 
composed have been drawn from the best sources. The 
best Greek grammars have been consulted. A few expres- 
sions have been taken without any alteration from Andrews 
and Stoddard's Latin grammar. 

The principal tenses, viz. the aorist and perfect active and 
passive, and future active, are derived immediately from the 
present, real or imaginary. I have adopted this method of 
forming them, because, in my opinion, it is natural, reason- 
able, simple and elegant ; because it distinguishes the root 
(the most essential part of any verbal form) from the termi- 
nation, and points out the characteristic of each tense, mood, 
number and person : considerations of no small importance 
in these days of roots and Sanscrit. The method of deriv- 
ing one tense from another is a relic of past ages. In those 
days the Greek verb had thirteen conjugations (viz. ef Twy 
^agvTdvojv Qi^fidTcov, TQsTg xm' neqiunojfxevojv ^ xal Tsaaagsg zibv 
Big fit', as the old grammars have it), and the noun was en- 
dowed with ten declensions (which have been compared with 
the ten plagues of Egypt). This arbitrary method, among 
other inconveniences, very often obliges the learner to go 
through a series of painful barbarisms in order to arrive at 
the desired form : thus, in order to determine the 1 aorist 
passive of dvvaf.iav, he must enrich the language with ^T- 
NASl, dvvr^GO), dedvvr^Kd, forms, which no Greek, ancient or 
modern, ever dreamed of. 



ir PREFACE. 



Instead of confounding the learner with perplexing rules 
and chimerical examples for the formation of the 2 perfect 
and aorist (the number of which, all good Hellenists know, 
is very small), I have given lists containing nearly all the 
2 perf. and aor. that can be found in the Greek language- 

All the examples given in the syntax of this grammar are 
taken from classic authors, that is, authors who flourished 
before the Alexandrian period. Those whose knowledge 
of the Greek language is confined to the New Testament, 
or to some Greek writer of the middle ages, will be likely 
to consider many of these examples difficult. 

Yale College, September 22, 1838. 



GREEK GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



THE GREEK ALPHABET. 

<§> 1. The Greek Alphabet consists of the following 24 
letters : 



Figure. 


Representatives. 


Name 




A 


a 


A 


a 


^^Alcpa 


Alpha 


B 


^8 


B 


h 


J^TJTOC 


Beta 


r 


r 


G 


S 


r&^ua 


Gamma 


J 


d 


D 


& 


Ailxa 


Delta 


E 


B 


E 


e 


^^E ijjtIov 


Epsilon 


Z 


I 


Z 


z 


ZTJrcc 


Zcta 


H 


V 


E 


e 


^Hxa 


Eta 





&e 


TH 


th 


Qr^xa 


Theta 


I 


L 


I 


i 


'Ima 


Iota 


K 


y. 


K 


k 


Kdnna 


Kappa 


A 


I 


L 


I 


A&fj^da 


Lambda 


M 


f^ 


M 


m 


Mv 


My 


N 


V 


N 


n 


m 


Ny 


A 


? 


X 


X 


At 


Xi 














*'0 fiiyiQov 


Omicron 


n 


7t 


p 


p 


m 


Pi 


p 


Q 


R 


T 


'P(5 


Rho 


2 


0" -5 


final S 


5 


2iyi.ia 


Sigma 


T 


T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


r 


V 


Y 


y 


^r ip-d6p 


Ypsilon 


fp 


^ 


PH 


ph 


m 


Phi 


X 


X 


CH 


ch 


XI 


Chi 


w 


^ 


PS 


ps 


Wl 


Psi 


J2 


CO 





6 
1 


V2 ^iya 


Omega 



% LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

These 24 letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 
The vowels are, «, e, ?/, ^, o, v, w ; the consonants are, 

§, 7? ^> £j ^j ^^ >^^ /^j ^? ?5 ^/ ?> <^5 T^^ (fy X^ V^* 

Note 1. £", was originally used both as a vowel and as 
a breathing. It was qualified by the adjective \pilov smooth 
{not aspirated), only when it was used as a vowel. An- 
ciently this vowel stood also for ^ and the diphthong ft; 
e, ^. aid-riQ was written AIQEP, 

H^ was originally equivalent to the rough breathing (§4.); 
e. ^. \naQ was written HEHAP, r^d^f^og^ HEQM02) ^ds^ 
HEJE. 

0, stood also for w and the diphthong ov; e. g. nucrxoa was 
written nAi:XO, e/ovav, EX02L It seems that there w^as 
a time when and SI were distinguished from each other 
only by their size : hence the epithets ^i^^ov small^ and 
idya large, 

T, also was originally used both as a vowel and as a 
breathing. It was called ipilov only when it was used as a 
vowel. As a breathing, or rather as a consonant, it was 
probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma (§ L 
Note 3). The modern Greeks still pronounce it like v or 
/", in the diphthongs £y and av (^ 28). 

Note 2. Before the introduction of ^ and X, the Greeks 
wrote riH for ^, and KH for X; e. g. they wrote EK- 
nHANTOI 'ExcpavTiD, EnETKHOMENO^ ensv/ofisvog. 
Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing (§ 1. Note 1). 
TH, was probably never used for 6>. 

They wrote also Ki: ur x:^ for a, and fp^ for ^^; e. g. 
JEK2AI for de^av, mEJEXUATO iov vnede^axo, 02 T- 
XA2 for ipv^ocg. 

Note 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three 
other letters, which disappeared from it in later times, and 
were called Inlar^i^a numeral marks (§ 1. Note 5). These 
are F or <g, cp or /^, and 2^J. 

F or <;, Bav Vau, or Jtyain^a Digam^ma, (that is double 
gam-ma, so called on account of its form F), corresponds to 
the Latin F or V. It is still to be seen in some ancient 
inscriptions. Some modern philologists imagine they dis- 
cover the digamma at the beginning of almost every other 
H^>meric word beginning with a vowel, and believe, or pre- 
tend to believe, that the omission of it spoils (?) the harmo- 



THE GREEK ALPHABET. 3 

ny of the Homeric verse. It seems however that the ancient 
Greeks who re-cui, sang", and understood the Homeric poems, 
did not take special pains to preserve this letter. The mark 
^ representing ar must not be confounded with the digamma. 

V or Af , KoTTTTu Koppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It 
was probably a deep guttural. 7?^, ^uf or Jaunty San or 
Sainpi, was probably sounded like the English sh. 

Note 4. We observe that oris used only at the beginning 
or middle, and g at the end of a word ; as ueaojafxepo; never 
cegoKuii'ou. Some editors unnecessarily put g at the end of 
a word compounded with another, as el;iq'/ouai iov elulqxoiiuiy 
dvgiv/r; for dvcFTvyr^;, ozTig for odTig. 

Note 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed 
also as numeral figures. The first 8 letters denote vnlts<, 
the next 8, tens^ and the last 8, hundreds. The obsolete 
letters (^1. Note 3), ^, l^^ "Th^, denote 6, 90, 900, respect- 
ively. Observe that the letters denoting units, tens or hun- 
dreds, have an accent above. The thousands commence 
again with a stroke underneath. Here follows a table of 
numerals. 



a 


1 


I a 


11 


V 


30 


t;' 400 


'^ 


2 


^? 


12 


^', 


40 


go' 500 


y 


3 


^i 


13 


V 


50 


X 000 


d' 


4 


id' 


14 


^ 


60 


V' 700 


£ 


5 


IS 


15 


6 


70 


w 800 


?' 


6 


'o' 


16 


7t 


80 


2^,' 900 


K' 


7 


^r 


17 


h 


90 


a 1000 


^i 


8 


ijf 


18 


?', 


100 


J? 2000 


{f 


9 


i&' 


19 


a 


200 


■/ 3000 


t 


10 


y! 


20 


■t 


300 


&c. 



Examples, «c.)A//== 1838, ttV^og;'= 1776, at'>xa'= 1821, ctj' 
==6017, //g=96, ^/==68, /v^7r,9''== 10789. 

Note 6. There is another method of writing numerals, in 
which / ^ log one) stands for 1, 11 [FHvts five) for 5, ^ [Jexcc 
ten, for 10, j^ [nermxig dexd five times ten) for 50, H 
(Uaiop^ anciently HEKATON) for 100, J^ [net^idLKig hyaTdr) 
for 500, X (Xihoi) for 1000, M {nspnlxig XUiot) for 5000, 
M{Mvoioi) for 10000. Here follows a table. 



LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



/ 


1 


J nil 


17 


II 


2 


jniii 


18 


III 


3 


jniiii 


19 


nil 


4 


Ad 


20 


n 


5 


AAA 


30 


ni 


6 


A AAA 


40 


nil 


7 


M 


50 


mil 


8 


M^ 


60 


mill 


9 


JaIjj 


70 


A 


10 


PJ J J J 


80 


ji 


11 


P2 AJAA 


90 


jii 


12 


H 


100 


jiii 


13 


HH 


200 


jiiii 


14 


HHH 


300 


jn 


15 


HHHH 


400 


jni 


16 


m 


500 






VOWELS 



Mn 600 

MhH 700 

Jh[HHH 800 

Jt^HHHH 900 



X 


1000 


XX 


2000 


XXX 


3000 


xxxx 


4000 


M 


5000 


MX 


6000 


Mxx 


7000 


Jx[XXX 


8000 


M xxxji 


: 9000 


M 


10000 


MX 


11000 


6cc. 





^ 2. There are 5 short vowels, and 5 corresponding 
long ones. The short vowels are, a, e, r, o, v; the long 
vowels are, a, ?y, r, w, v. 

The mark (-) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark 
(-), over a long one. These marks however are necessary 
only in the case of «, *, and v, since the letters ^ and w rep- 
resent long E and respectively. 

Note 1. The vowels e and o are often called the short 
vowels, ^] and w, the long vowels, and a^ ^, v, the doubtful 
vowels. By the term, doubtful, we are not to understand 
that the quantity of ci, ^, v, is uncertain ; but that in some 
syllables these vowels are always long, and in others always 
short. E. g. y in the words ^vfiog, nvgog wheat, is always 
long; in the words nvlrj, {fno, always short. There are in- 
deed instances where the quantity of these letters is varia- 
ble ; e. g. cc in "^gi]g, * in fivgtxrjy and v in xoqvvjj : but we 
should recollect that the sounds E and O also are, in certain 
instances, variable ; e. g. h]g6g and ^egog, l/uslgrjTat and Ifistgs- 
Tav, eXdixi^sv and sl'doiusvy Xu^^sv and Xo^xevy ^wr] and ?w/- 

Note 2. In strictness, the Greek Alphabet has but 5 
vowels, viz. Ay Ey I, 0, T. The long vowels differ from 
the short ones in quantity, but not in quality. 



VOWELS. 5 

Note 3. When from any cause tlie vowels e and o are to 
be lengthened, they are generally changed into the diph- 
thongs sv and ov, rather than into their corresponding long 
ones V and w. E. g. (TTTElga) from SUEPSl, riyyeda from AF- 
TEAIl, elg from eVg, aaovoj from AKOfl, doug from dovg, Ionic 
Ttovlvg for Tzohjg, ^elvog for ^vog. in some instances passes 
into ot, as noid for yroa. In some instances the Ionic changes 
B into ?/, as ^autlrpg for ^aadiog, nohfi for noleL 

A (short) may pass into «t or ?;, as ^iet and «te/, (I)ANfl 
and (pali^oj, Tcda) and >ta/o>, Ts&i]la from 0AAS1. — ^ (short) and 
e are frequently interchanged. E. g. The lonians say r^d- 
asQsg for Tscraagsg, ogm for oodw; the Dorians, Trtdjw for nii- 
gw, ^^(i for /€, (pgaai for (jD^ea/. — The vowels ao are changed 
into s(jj ; e. g. Attic ^eca? for ^ciog, Ionic 'AjQeldeo) for ^AtqsI- 
dao. The vowels aw also become ew, as Ionic igoer^eW for 
hcpsT^aviv.—^A (long) and ?/, may be interchanged. E. g. Do- 
ric TcaTot/ig for Kair^x^g, d for '^/j Ionic ngriyfxa for nqayfxa, cpv- 
Ur] for (jD^^/a. We may remark here that the use of a for n 
is one of the leading peculiarities of the Doric dialect; and 
the use of ^ for a is peculiar to the Ionic dialect. — A (long) 
and w are sometimes interchanged ; as ngoi'Qo) and aqih'Quj, Do- 
ric ^ovaav for fiiovaibv, ngdcTog for ngonog. 

E and o are often interchanged. E. g. TSTgocpa from rgsTto), 
loyog from ^£)^u;, (jdo^o^ from 0EIVS1, lyvgog and oyvgog, ' Og/o- 
fievog for ' Eg/o.aevog from sg/o/uai. 

/f and w are, in some instances, interchanged ; e. g. TrTrjaaw 
and TiTchaaa), 'PHFJl and 'PP^rSl, hence perf. act. e^^w/oc. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

<§) 3. There are 14 diphthongs, of which 7, viz. ««, aiy, 
£t, fcv, ot, ou, and vt, begin with a short vowel, and 7, viz. 
(2, au, 1^, 7/1', 0), u>u, and fjt, with a long one. The former 
are called proper diphthongs^ and the latter, improper 
diphthongs. 

The V is written under the long vowel, and is called iota 
subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter, as 
THI 'AriAI Tj (kyia, TJII SOO^PA toJ aocpG, 

Note 1. i2T belongs to the Ionic dialect. — The improper 
diphthong vi is almost imaginary. We may suppose however 
that the optative (^91.2) lelvio was originally written or 
pronounced lelvlw. 

• 1* 



6 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

Note 2. In the improper diphthongs, the seconti vowel 
was nearly swallowed up by the preceding long one, which 
long vowel constituted the leading element t^f the improper 
diphthong. 

Note 3. The lonians often use cav for ccv (§ 3. Note 1), as 

S-(x)v^a for d-avfxa, rgojvfia for rgav/ua. Also ifi for bI', as (Jcyyr[ioy 
for dyyelov. Also r/ ft)r «t, as ri^fifig or n^r^in^ for rvfiaXg or t*- 
^atcrt. — The Dorians use w and o^ for ou, as /wwaoc or fiolua for 
fbiovaay i^wia^ for §ovTi]g, e/oiaa for e^^ovaa. 

BREATHINGS. 

<^ 4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a vowel 
must have either the rough breathing (), or the smooth 
breathing () over that voweL E. g. 

dixovo), 2n7tog, kn6^evog, r^crSslg, (hg, sXsyov. 

The breathing, as well as the accent (^ 19. 1), is placed over 
the second vowel of the diphthong, as otrrog, avTog, afgecn^gy 
Tji^XovTo. Except the improper diphthongs, Ai=q, Ht^=ri, 
and i2t=G) ; as ^'Hlg'/vvov t^G'/vvov, ^'Atduj qdoj, ^Slidri (JJi^. 

Note 1. We may remark here that the vowel v at the be- 
ginning of a word takes the rough breathing; as (ifJ^eXg, {)n&, 
vdojg, vcfTBQov. Except the Homeric ^^^^ or vfi^i^v={)fivr , and 

^^ju 6=1) flag. 

2. The rough breathing is placed also over q at the begin- 
ning of a word. E. g. 

gevfia, gipogmog, gadiog, "^Pchfirj. 

When g is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one 
takes the smooth breathing, and the other, the rough breath- 
ing ; as aggi]Tog, sggcipa, xajaggsoj. 

Note 2. The rough breathing Q corresponds to the Eng- 
lish h ; e. g. Inninog, gsv^xa, algeuig, aggr/Tog, in English let- 
ters, hippikos, rheuma^ hairesis, arrketos. The smooth 
breathing Q represents the effort with which a vowel, not 
depending on a preceding letter, is pronounced. Let, for 
example, the learner pronounce first the word, act, and then, 
enact, and mark the difference between the a in the first, 
and the a in the second word. He will perceive that the 
utterance of a in act, requires more effort than that of a in 



CONSONANTS. i 

enact So of apple and pine-apple, utterable dLXidun-utter- 
able, '^x^^ and (^^-6/oj, uyo) and y.aj-uyo), &lc, 

CONSONANTS. 

<§> 5. 1. The consonants X, ^, ?/, o, are, on account of 
their gliding pronunciation, called liquids, 

2. The consonants 'Cy ^, ip, are called double conso- 
nants ; because S stands for da, I for -/m, and ip for ^(7. 

Note 1. The preposition £J« in composition never coa- 
lesces with the following cf ; as iicasiix), iifaxooTiiL^), ixaahvu), 
not i^sico, l^zooTit'Cp), e^ulevo). 

Note 2. It is not exactly correct to say that S stands for 
Sa ; since, according to the Greek notions of enpliony, a 
lingual is always dropped before (t (^ 10.2). It is said also 
that S stands for (jS, because the Dorians (§ 6. Note) often 
""use crd for c. It is true that the Dorians use ad for $; but 
is it true that they pronounced od like ^ ? As well we might 
suppose that odeUg was by them pronounced oSelog, because 
both these words mean the same thing. It is proper how- 
ever to say that ^ is a mixture of d and cr, just as e is com- 
pounded of a and ?, o of a and u, and h oi m and p. With 
respect to its making position (§ 17. 2), we remark that this 
was probably owing to its strong vocal hissing. 

3. The consonants n, ^, (p, y., y, /, t, d, d-, are called 
mutes. They are divided into smooth mutes n, x, t, 
middle mutes ^, 7, d, and rough mutes cp, /, S-. 

The letters ^ and go, y and ;k, ^ and ^, are modifications of 
TT, n, T, respectively. 

<§) 6. According to the organs with which they are 
pronounced, the consonants are divided into labials tt, ^, 
cp, ip, fi. Unguals t, d, d-, ?, a, I, v, o, and palatals y>, y, /, ?. 

The labials (labia, lips) are pronounced chiefly with the 
lips; the linguals (lingua, tongue), with the tongue, and the 
palatals (palatum, palate), with the palate. 

Note. The Dorians generally use crJ for t, as icontdaSo), 
GVQladw, for y^ouKXi^txt, avQ('rix) : but this can take place only in 
the middle of a word. — The Attics use xr for aa, as Tt^diTtn, 



8 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

Salarru, for Ttgdcaao), S^dclaacra. In some instances they use 
^§ for gcr, as ao^sv, d^uo^ogy for uoaev^ Mgcrog. 

CHANGES AND OMISSIONS OF CONSONANTS FOR THE SAKE OF 
EUPHONY. 

§ 7. When a labial {rt 3 (jd), or a palatal {x y x) happens to 
stand before a lingual (t d S-) ; the former is changed into 
its corresponding smooth, middle or rough (§ 5. 3), accord- 
ing as the latter is smooth, middle or rough. E. g. 

TBTQcn-Tai for Thqi^'TOLU £TQlcp-&i]v for ijqi^-d'rjv 

y^yqan-Tai " yiyqa(p-Tav hTv(f-%r^v *' iTvTt-d^riv 

reTevx-rao " TiTev^-rai^ eXi/S'r^v *' iliy-d'rjv. 
So y^qvTTTO) for y^gv^TO), Qlmo) for glcpro), s^dofiog from krcrd, 
hydoog from 6>fTc5, tniygu^drjv for iniygucpdi^v, lexiog for '^^eyxog. 
So in Latin, nuptum fur nubtum, actus for ag-tus, vecium 
(in Greek letters §bxtov^) for vehtum ((^^/tou^w). 

Except the preposition e;*; as exdegM, ix&g^axoj, not iydego), 
ixS^gihaxo). 

§8. 1. A labial {^^(p) before ^ is always changed into 
i^. E.g. 

T.elei^-fLav for ^HsiTt-fiav Tirgiii-^av for rirgi^S-fiai. 
So ^si^(.ia for IsiTTfia, Xriufia for Xri^ina, yguiuiLia for ygacp^a. 

% A labial ((^ (jp) before o" is changed into ttt. According 
to ^ 5. 2, the combination tto- is represented by V^. E. g. 

Tglip(x) for Tgl^~ao) ygdipoj for yg6L6-G(a. 

So ^^eixpig for a^ei^cfig, "Agaip for aga^g, «j//t^ fur aqxii^g. So 
in Latin, nupsi for nubsi, lapsus for labsus, 

§ 9. L A palatal (>c ;ir) before /i^ is generally changed into 
/• E. g. 

nin'key-fxai for Tcenlex-^av TBjevy-^ai for T£T£f;^-^«^. 
So ^6)^|Ma for doicf^a, rsvy/ua for TSv/iua. The preposition ^j« is 
always excepted ; as exfialvco, ixfiezgea), not ly^aLvix), iy/usTgrn. 

2. A palatal (/ ;^) before cr is changed into ?«. According 
to § 5. 2, the combination 3< or is represented by «?. E. g. 

^e?w for Uy-uo) tstu^oj for tevx-ctm. 

So Tg(x)^ifiog for Tgihyaijuog, e^tg for ?;^o't^. So in Latin, ^e:rz 
for ^eg-^z, ^raa:z for trahsi (T^(i;^(7^). 

§ 10. L A lingual (t J ^ $) before <w is often changed into 
ff. E.g. 



CONSONANTS. 9 

rid-jLiai, for r^d-iiav nensia-fiat^ for nsTtSLd'-fiat. 
So cpgovTiGua for cpgopTLt^/Lia, acrixa for dSua, nlaaaa for TtXdd-ua', 
Id^ev for Xd^ev. 

2. A lingual (t (^ ^ c) is always dropped before o-. E. g, 
niaoj for Trer-CFO} q-aut) for cld-cro) 
TcXa-aco " Tilccd'-ao) q^oovri-croj " cpgopTl'l.-(JO). 

So cpguaig for cfg(K(Jt'g, nslcng for neXd-jig. So in Latin, 
amans for amants, rnoneris for monents, lusi for ludsi, 

3. A lingual [r d & '(;) before another lingual is often chan- 
ged into 0-. E. g. 

r^d-Tai for i\d-Tav nenlau-jav for nhnXad^-rai. 

So cpgovTidTTig for cpgovrtl^Trig, niGTig for nl&rig, I'ctts for I't^xa. 

Note 1. The Unguals (t ^ i^ t) cannot stand before the 
palatals (j« )^ /) ; e. g. ]]5<« for 7|J-;«a, ninsL-xa for nensi.d'-y.a, 
7T£(fg6pTL-xa for necfgoyTt'C^-xa, 

Note 2. In the Homeric language the t of the preposi- 
tion xar (j^axd) is changed into the following consonant; 
as yayyovv for yraryovv (xaza yovvV xadda for xaxde, xaS^dg 
for xarSdg, xaxxslopTsg for xaTxslovTsg, xdllinov for JtccrAiTro)', 
xuTTcpakaga (^ 14. 4) for xaTq)dlaga. Before two consonants 
the T is dropped, as xda/eds for x(ji(ja;(6&€, xd-Kxavs for Jcd;*-- 
XTavs, xaaTogpvua for xotdUT. 

§ 11. The letter or cannot stand between two consonants. 
E. g. ysygdcp&av for yeygacpud-ai, iipdld-aL for bipdlad-ccv. 

§ 12. 1. Before a labial (^r ^ 9), j' is changed into ^. E. g. 
ifi-TtiTCTO) for kp-nlmo) avfi-^alvco for (rvv-^aivco 
iu-cpavr^g '* ei'-gpaj/?]^ d^a-cpadov *' dv-cpadov. 

So saxpvxog (lB}xn(Tvxog) for evipv/og. So in Latin, imhellis for 
inbellis, impius for inpius, 

2. Before a palatal (j« / 7), j^ is changed into /. E. g. 

ovy-xaiix) for ovv-xalix) Gvy-yevr^g for auj^-ye^TJ^ 

dy-x)Uvoj *' uj^-x^tVw (Tvy-/8U) " crvp-xsix). 

So ^/?£w (tyxj-fco)) for h'^iijj, uvy^aivb) (^(Tvyxaaivw) for avvSalroj. 

3. Before a liquid (^ ^w ^), >/ is changed into that liquid. 

(jfA-Xr^Oj for cru^^-Atyw iii'Uhct) for tv-uivo} 

V.-loyog " IV-Aoj^o^ crvg-geot " o"u^-^t'tu. 

So in Latin, colligo for conligo^ commotus for convtotuSy 
corruptus for conruptus. 



10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

The preposition ip remains unaltered before g; as ivQu- 

4. Before a or J, v is generally dropped. E. g. daluo-ai^ 
for duluov-aL, au-'C^vyog for Gvi^-{;vy()g. Except the preposition 
ii^ ,' as tvauTTM, ePdiSevvvo), ivaelu) : and the words c^ucygy 
nicpavuav, neTxavoig, Tlovvg, xevaui. 

In many instances v is dropped before o-, and the prece- 
ding short vowel is lengthened : s and o are changed into bl 
and ov (^ 2. Note 3). E. g. 

f-dld-g for uilav-g rvniov-dv for Tv7nov-uv 

TVTCTUi-av '' TVTCTMV-dV 78TVCfU-(Ji '' T6lvquP-(TC. 

So eFs for eVc, ;<Te/g for ^^r^i^g. This change generally takes 
place when vt, vd, or v&, are dropped before (j- E. g. 
youipa-g for yguiiJavT-g Tvcp&st-g for ivcf&ivT-g 

deizvv-g " decxvuvx-g Itov-UL " kiopi-Gt,. 

So Tteicfoaai for Tret^daouaL, dnBiuoiiav for (TJiev^uoiiai. 

Note 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the 
lingual (§ 10. 2) has any thing to do with the lengthening of 
the vowel before (t- 

Note 2. In some instances, v before o- is changed into u ; 
as (Jv(j(jo)aog for uiypaoj^og, '^ugieGuu for /ocgtspday from x^^g^^'^S 
gen. /aglevTog. 

§ 13. -P, at the beginning of a word, is generally doubled, 
when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand be- 
tween two vowels. E. g. 

Tregtggeoj from negi and ^^fw eggsvxa for egevHct, 

^ 14. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a 
smooth consonant {n y, t) happens to stand before a vowel 
having the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the 
rough breathing form a corresponding rough consonant 
(9 X ^). E. g. 

(kq)-b]iui for d.Tt-li]^o xad'-algsaig for y^ax-aigecfig 

avd^-r^fjiegog " avT-r^^egog dsz-r^fxegog *' dsx-riueoog^ 

Note 1. In the words Te&gin7xov [rtTTagsg and 'Unog')^ cpgov- 
dog (ngo and odog^^ ^oi^6i,Tiov (to Iuutlov^^ 'xfaxsgov (tov IregovV 
the rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it 
does not immediately come in contact with it. 

2. The same change takes place when, of two successive 
words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next 
begins with a vowel having the rough breathing. E. g. 



CONSONANTS. 11 

a(p oB for U7T oh fie&' r^uow for just ri/uoiv 

xoixf kavTov " xocT kavTov ovx 'vimv '' OVK -dfiibp. 

Note 2. The Tonic dialect violates these rules ; e. g. ^^*- 
rAud-av for dq:r/.i(j&ai, xaTSidoj for v^ad-evdix)^ ovx olog for o^/- 

3. If two successive syllables would each have a rough 
consonant (cp x ^), the first rough consonant is often chan- 
ged into its corresponding smooth {n x t). E. g. 

Tiicprjva for cpECpr/va xs/avda for /t/avda 

So Ta;/i5b for 'O-a/vg, Tgicpco for '^gecpo), rgixog for 'O^Qiyog from 
x/^^/i, ufiTzexo) for ccucfe/Oi), du7isu/6fH7]v for uuq:.ea/6iU7^v, d^xaxi' 
cfxoj for d^o(;^/cr;ftu, T^Tragpo)^ for r^cpacpov, eTdq)i]v for it^uopip'. 

Note 3. The^?'6'^ aorist passive deviates from this rule; 
e. g. d(fe&i]v, OiQ&(j)d-i]v , e/v&rp^, ed-g£cp&7]v , not aTie&i'iV, d)0T(6- 
^?;i^, &c. Except BTe&r]v from tIx^7].uv (^&sio), and hvd^riv 
from '^t'W. 

Note 4. The termination '^^ of the imperative active is 
changed into t/, if the preceding syllable has a rough con- 
sonant ; e. g. Tv(fd-i]TL for Tiq)d-i]d^i, jl&sTi for Tixf^sd-L. Except 
the imperatives cpdd^v from (p^/f^i, and xed-va^i^ from S^vr^axo} 
(GNAn). 

Note 5. In the verb e^w (future €?w) the rough breathing 
is changed into the smooth breathing (^';t'^), on account of 
/ in the following syllable. 

4. A rough consonant {cp x '^) is never doubled ; but in- 
stead of this, its corresponding smooth {n x t) is placed be- 
fore it. E. g. drcQpvg, ^Ax&ig, " layr/og, xancpdlaga^ not dq)(fwg, 
'Ad^d^lg, ''laxxog, xacpcpdlaga (^ 10. NoTE 2). 

MOVEABLE CONSONANTS. 

^ 15. 1. All datives plur, in i, and all third persons in ^ 
and e, are written both with and without a final p : they are 
generally written with it when the next word begins with a 
vowel. E. g. 

■d-rjoalv dygloig 'd-r^gal xaxoTg 

^xleiijsp avid sxlei/je tovto 

Ti cpijULv ovTog tI cpriGi Zwxodrr-g 

TvniovcTiv avToig Tvnjovai jovwvg. 



1^ LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

Also, the particles vv and x^, the adverbs niqvai and v6acf)i, 
and the numeral ei'xoav. In some elementary grammars, 
words which take v moveable are written thus, ^VV^^(*')» 
e}iXeiiJs[v), (fr/al[v), elTtef^v), &lc, &c. 

2. The words ovrwg, u/gcg, /ut/gig, £s {^^i)j and a few oth- 
ers, drop the g before a consonant. E. g. ourw q)r^(Tl, li/iJt 
Trig, in x)^eov. 

The adverb od 7?o, not, becomes ovx or ovx before a vowel ; 
as oij (pi](nv, ovK elnov, ovx elnexo (^ 14. 2). 

SYLLABLES. 

<§^ 16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek word 
as there are vowels and diphthongs in it. 

The last syllable except one is called the penult; the last 
except two, the antepenult, E. g. in tv-a7jluy-xvog^ /vog is 
the last syllable, unlay, the penult, and eii, the antepenult. 

Note 1. Consonants which can commence a Greek word 
should be })laced at the beginning of the syllable ; e. g. 
v-anh]^, ay-ys-Xog, al-xi-imog, ip&l-ku), al-^a-crd^at,, Tt-Jfiri-^av, 
d-anlay-xvog, a-ygv-og, because we have, anlr^v, yigag, xlu), 
<fec. &c. 

The following combinations of consonants can commence 
a Greek w^ord : ^d, ^l, ^q, yl, yv, yg, d/u, dv, do, M, S-v, ^q, 
xl, xfi, XV, xq, XT, jLiv, nl, nv, nq, tit, g^, axt, ux, axl, a/u, CTt, 
onl, GT, gtI, GTQ, GCp, Gx, tX, t^, tq, cpd-, Cpl, (pQ, X^9 /l /^i 

XQ. — The following combinations also can begin a syllable : 
TV, cpv, yfi, x^y ^^i y^ ) as s-Tvog, dd-cpvi], i'ydi], xev-d^fLKov. — 
Further, any three consonants can begin a syllable, provi- 
ded the two first and the two last can each begin a word ; 
e. g. xd-To-mgov, because ttt, and t^, can each begin a word. 
After all, the rules for dividing a word into syllables are 
somewhat arbitrary. 

Note 2, We may remark here that the consonants g, y, 
Q, I (Kg), and yj (yrg), are the only ones that can stand at the 
end of a Greek word. Except the preposition ex, and the 
adverb ox)x or o^x- 

2. A syllable is called pure when its vowel or diphthong 
is immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding syl- 
lable. E. g. the following words end in a, a^, ag, og, pure ; 
<r7]7ti'a, T/p-a^, Tafii-ag, ayqi-og. 



QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13 

QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 

^ 17. In any Greek word; every syllable is either long 
or short. 

1. A syiiLtble is long by nature^ when it has a long 
vowel or diphthong. E. g. in the following Avords the 
penult is long by nature : 

olKog, dv&gcimog, rXuri, naaa. 

2. A syllable is said to be long by position^ when its 
vowel being short by nature is followed by two or more 
consonants, or by t, S, w- E. g. in the following words 
the penult is long by position : 

£(7Te, ogy^og, ccGTilay/pog, cpgui^o). 

Note 1. When a short vowel is foliowefl by a mute and 
a liquid the syllable is often short. E. g. ddcppig (-- or --), 
rey.pop (- - or --), vey.qog (- ^ or ^-), v^oig (- w or ^-). But 
before the combinations 61, yl, y,w, yv, du, dv, a short vowel 
is almost always made long by position ; as eSleipa ( — v), 
'eyvoiv ( ), o(^,wr| ( ), rayfia (--), ^dvov (-^). 

Note 2. In Homer and Hesiod, (jy> and C at the beginning 
of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel ; 
as y.akisay.e ^xaiudpdgtop (y^, — v^w, -^^), olis Zdxvrd-ov [—^^, 

3. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be long, 
must be considered short. 

Note 3. The quantity of a, h v, must be learned by prac- 
tice. The following remarks however may be of some use 
to the learner : 

(1). Every circiimflexed «, h v, is long by nature (§ 21.) ; 
as ^ccp, vuXv^ ngayua, dgvg. 

(2). Every «, t, v, arising from contraction (§23.) is long 
by nature ; as tI.ucc, Tcollg, ^oTgvg, from riuue, Tiolieg, ^orgveg. 

(3). Every ag, vg, arising from ccvg, vpg, or avTg, vptq 
(§ 12. 4), is long by nature ; as Ti^J/^^o-t, L^svypvg, luiag, for 
TvipapTUi, L^evypvpTg, laidpTg. 

§ IS. 1. The epic and the lyric poets may shorten a long 
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word wjien the next 
word begins with a vowel. E. g. ltitko Ipv ^earuJ [-^^, — , -), 

2 



14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

allojg (-WW, -V.V., , --, -v.^, __). 

This kind of shortening occurs also in the middle of a 
word ; as dr/loi^o (---, ^), e/unaLOP ov'de (--^, —^), avnfc (-w_), 

TOVTOvi (— u — ), TOIUVTI (v^ — — )• 

2. A short syllahle is often made long by the epic poets. 

E. g. ^TiEidri joi^d' civdQix ( , , — u), dbi^a nat) Jllolov [—yjyj, 

, -), u.{)uvaTog (— oui;), diufieif ucmldog (—uw, — u«^), diauelei- 

gtI (,,, - wv», -X,), fiblnovieg 'ExueQyov ( , - ^^, -^), cfih Ixvoe, 

deivog le (v,, -kj^^, , — »^). 

INoTE. We may suppose that the ancients generally doub- 
led the following consonant in pronunciation. For exam- 
ple, they read InneLdri, y^iollov, dLau^ieleiUTi, tKvotddeivog re. 
There are instances however where the short vowel was ac- 
tually lengthened ; as (5ra i^h d.unidog. 

ACCENT. 

<§) 19. 1. The Greek has 3 accents, viz. the acute ('), 
the ^rai;e ('), and the circumjiex {^). The acute can 
stand only on one of the three last syllables of a word ; 
the circumflex, only on one of the two last, and the 
grave, only on the last. 

When the accented syllable bas a diphthong, the accent 
is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong; as «t^aa- 
ra, ftF^ttj kiotiuMv, S-ixw/ua, fuvta. Compare ^4. 1. 

Note I. The following monosyllables generally appear 
unaccented : ov or ovx or ov/ no, not, (hg as, eI if, Iv or eIv in. 
Big or E^ into, to, ex or ^1 from, and tfie articles o, r^, ol, at. 
When however the following word does not influence them, 
tbey are accented; as -O-Eog d' o)g ET[£To=6)g d^Eog d' etLeto, 
ntbg yuo ov ; pray why not? — When the articles 6, i], ol, at, 
stand as demonstrative pronouns, they should be read as if 
tbey were accented ; as o yaq ^aoilrf x^lw&Elg, to be read o 
ydcQ ^addrii ;(olu)&Eig. — ' 0, takes the acute when it is equiv- 
alent to the relative 6'^ who, or to the conjunction otl that. 

Note 2. According to the old grammarians, the grave 
accent is understood on every syllable which appears unac- 
cented. Thus (Jci^&QH)7ioxT6po,g, Tvnwj, are, according to them, 
di;d-g<^ndxT6i^ug, tltttw. It seems then that the grave accent 
is no accent at all. 



ACCENT. 15 

2. A word is called oxytone, when it has the acute accent 
on the last syllable; as ttluto;, sine, (xyuitoi: paroxi/tone, 
when it has the acute accent on the penult ; as x^e)^i, usus- 
Qia{tai : propai^oxytone, when on the antepenult; as uvO-qv}- 
Tiog, u^ioi, Tiokeix);. 

A word i^". called perispomenon (circumflexed), when it 
has the circumflex on the last syllable ; as Iraxfb), diuTTSouv, 
TiodoXv : properispomenon, when on the penult, as tovtoi^, /ne- 
f.ipr^a&ui, a alio i^. 

Lastly, a word is called barytone, when. its last syllable 
has no accent at all (^ 19. Note 2), as tltttdj, tovtoi^, Tiegieg- 
/oueiog. 

^ 20. 1. If the last syllable is long either by nature or by 
position (§ 17. 1, 2), no accent can be placed on the ante- 
penult. The acute can stand on the antepenult only when 
the last syllable is short. E. g. ai^d^gtjjnog, fj.ucv6uevo;, dit- 
(f&ogspy uli\&6ia, Evelmg, Tvelexvg, 

Note. The endings ac and ot (except the 3 person sin- 
gular of the optative active, 'dSTiar^aac, Ttur^croi ; and the ad- 
verb o\y.oi =zoYy.(D at home) are, with respect to accent, con- 
sidered short ; as UPx^gumoL, dva^wt, leyovrai., eJpai^ oixoi, 
houses. — Also, the terminations oj, g), ojg, wc, wv, civ, of some 
nouns of the second declension (§ 33.), as rgixbgwg^ igix^gtor. — 
Also, the terminations ojg, ojp, of the genitive of some nouns 
of the third declension (§ 43. 3), as Tidlscog, tioIeojv. — Lastly, 
the Ionic termination &> of the genitive of the first declen- 
sion (§ 3i. Note 3), as Tvdeldeo), 

2. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is 
short by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. 
L. g. loyog, ^uGiliiog, ^acnleia, ^lovaijg. 

3. When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable, 
stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, 
this acute becomes grave ('). E. g. lovg novijgovg y.al To^dg 
ayad-ovg (xi'&gij)7iovg^ not Tovg nopijgovg xaL jovg dya&ovg d^- 
xtgibnovg. 

^ 2L The circumflex can be placed only on a syllable 
long' by nature, E. g. Trj; Tiur^g, diaTzeg^b. It is placed on 
the penult only when the last syllable is short by nature. 
E. g. f-idllov^ del^op, ttIps, xccTaTiv^. So sipai^ ojxo^, not mat 
{^20. Note). 



16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



ENCLITICS. 

§ 22. 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent 
back upon the last syllable of the preceding word. The 
follpwing words are enclitics : 

(I). The personal pronouns |t^oD, |t/o/, ui^ aov, ool, oi^ ov, ol, 
s, aq)U)i, aq)uiiv^ acpiixtv^ aq)iug, acptu, ucplai^ Gcply^ acpi^ acfug. 
We must ohserve that of those beginning with (Jcp, only tlie 
oblique cases are enclitic. 

(2). The indefinite pronoun ric, t2, through all the cases, 
as also the words rod, t(2», = jirog, tivI, 

(3). The present indicative of etui 1 am^ and fpriul I say, 
except the monosyllabic 2 pers. sing, el or eJg, and (f%g. 

(4). The particles nod^ty, nod^l, not, nr^, ttov, ttoj;, ttotI, yi, 
S-i'iv, KB or ^^v^ vv or vuv, nio, nu), rt, to/, (kx, and the insepa- 
rable particle ^t to, 

2. If tlie word before the enclitic has the acute on the 
antepenult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic 
throws back an acute on the last syllable of that word. 
E. g. a t^ d^(JU)7t6g Ttg for ^i>d^Qomog rig, dsl^ov (uoi> for deX^ov (lol^ 
o\)i6g iariv for ovTog IcftIv, /uiuvr^Go uov for (ji{:Uvi](to fuov^ 

3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the 
last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. E. g. 
6y(x) cpi]fjiv for ej'cb cprjfil, TTollolg tlgi for nolloTg jlgI. Monosyl- 
labic enclitics lose their accent also when the preceding 
word has the acute on the penult ; as tovtov ye. 

4. An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent : 

(1). When the preceding word has the acute on the penult, 
as avdgsg Tivtg^ dgouoig tluI. 

(2). When the syllable upon which its accent would have 
been thrown back has been elided (§ 25.), as nolV IgtI for 

Note 1. Enclitics that can stand at the beginning of a 
sentence, retain their accent; as o-oi) yao xguwg tcnl ^uiyia- 
Tov, Also, when some emphasis is laid upon them. 

Note 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the 
preceding always takes the accent of the following; as 
ovdluoTB lull ucpLGiv for ovdenoTS earl (jcptaiv. 

Note 3. In many instances, no space is left between the 
enclitic and the attracting word ; as ovts^ firiis, jW^rtj, oW*^, 



CONTRACTION. 17 

^TariiJiv^ &(JTB, egsSocrde, ode, r.de, rods, rovys, rc^ds, ojJe (for 
^de). Much however depends on the taste of the editor. 

CONTRACTION. 

§23. A pure syllable (§ 16. 2) and the one immediately- 
preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This 

is called contraction. It takes place generally as follows : 

«a are contracted into a; as fipua ftva, fivdcag fxvag, xtQuu 
yjoa, Aq(/c lag. 

aa — a; as inrdci ura. 

aav — U.I ; as ^vaai aval. 

as — a; as tI^ols Tiiia, as&Xov a&lov, ocsgyog uoyogj ailuasg 
iTiimg. 

asi — a; as Ttudst Tiaa, usido) qdco, 

aij — a; 3.S Ttiidj]TS jciuais, 

av^ — a; as Tij-iur^g Tiuag. 

a'C — a; as ui(T(Tu) qaaut), yriQai' yr^QCc, 

ao — vj ; as Tiuaousv Tifxibusv. 

aoi-—(D; as Tiauoiusv Jc^CJfisVy d.Oidr\ cu^rj. 

aou — 0) ; as TiuaovGi Tiuwat. 

aa) — oj ; as Tiauix) nucb, IloGSidfuriv no(JBid(ov, 

su — r, ; as 7£ljc )^rj, jsi'/sa Tsi/i], ieosa iporjj xqvdm ZQvcrri. Some- 
times into a ; as ugyvgea ugyvga, ^ovasa '/Qvua, vycsa Tuyca, 

sq — 7^; as /QVGsq /ovari, yea yij. 

sai — 7j ; as TvTTTsai^ Tvniri. Or into dt^ ; as ^Eguiai. ^EguaX, 
ygijcjsai ^ovcrcu. 

es — Si; as cpilss <filsi. Sometimes into ?/; as TQii\gEs rgi^rigr], 

TSi/SS TSl/i]. 

csi — Si; as q)il£Sig cpilsTg, desiv dsXr, 
SI] — 1] ; as cpiler/T6 cpilrixs. 
er^~ — r^ ; as (piler^g (filr^g, doyJv^ doyrj. 
si — Si; as TiuXs'i nolsi, Tsl/s'i Tsl/si. 
so — . ov ; as cpileousi^ cpilovusr. 

SOI oi ; as cpilioLiisv cpiloTfisi^ 

sov — ov ; as (fileovGi cpilovai. 

SO) — i(> ; as (piliut cfil(b, Ilsigtaeiog Tlsiocudjg. 

7js — ' 1] ; as Tiui\suaa TLin\uaa, 

rye — iq ; as Qgr^oaa Ogr^aaa. 

IS — i: as Tiolisg TTollg, isgog Tgog. 

ti — T; as '^Tolii Tioh^ X^f^og /Tog, dliog dlog. 

ou — w or oi ; as r^/oa rj/u), dnkocK tcila. 

oav — ai ; as dinldut' dmXul. 

2* 





hnlri. 


OYI- 


— ot ; 


o'C - 


— ot; 


00- 


— ov ; 


00 i 


01, 


00 V 


— ov 


Ob) 


— u>; 


0(3) 


— cp; 



18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

QB — OV ; as 8rjh')ETE dijlovrs, nhiTioevTo; TxXixitoZvTo;. 

061^ — ov ; as diiloeiv di/Xovi^, OTtoeig onov;. Verl)s in oo> con- 
tract oBi and oBLQ into ov and oiz ; as (5/yAo£t difKo^, di^'Ueig 
dylolg. 

OT] — 0) ; as dij),6i]TB di]lmB. Sometimes into i] : as ^tnh'ji^ 

as diiUri; d)]loT;. This occurs only in verbs in ou). 

as 'Ti/oi '^i/oX^ oi'g olg. 

as dijloojiiBv dijlovuBv^ nXoog ttIov;. 
; as dijlooiuBv diiloTuBv, ttIooi ttIoX. 

; as diih'jovoi di/lovaL^ ttIoov ttIov. 

as diilou) dip.(b, di^louJOL di^lwdb, 

as 5tAog> nhi). 
vB — V ; as i/6vBg i/6vg. 
v'C — vi ; as nhjQvi nhfivX^ yiy.vC vixvb. 
oj'i — 0) ; as ^u/twj/ lii)(x)v^ r^QvJL Tjoq). 

Note 1. The Doric dialect contracts cxb and (xbl fnto ^ and 
y}; as icpoiiaB Icpoiri], oqub ogt], ttoOoqixbl tzoOootj. The Attic does 
the same in the foMowin^ verbs, viz. S^t^> 1 live, nBcvfjcot I hun- 
ger^ Siipuoj I thirst, /ououai I use, (rudio) I wipe off, ipu.ui / 
scour, clean, and J^^t^w I scrape, scratch; as 'C,uBig Jrj^, tibi- 

vdLBi TtBtt^Ti, /QUBuduL '/Or^oQui. % 

Tne Ionic and the Doric contract so into bv ; qs crTBcpaveov' 
rccb aiBcpavBvviai, ly^iolfJiBv, nliovBg TikBvvBg, 'Ege^sog *Egt(^Bvg. 

Note 2. The contraction is often left to pronunciation ; as 

ni]hfi(xdBa) (-, — v^vj, — ), diOixr^dBa (ou, ), ucpoBOv ( ), Aiyv- 

TtTiojv ( — , -), 'iGTiaiav ( — , -). In 11. XVII, 19, viov may 
be read as a monosyllable. This kind of contraction is 
called synizesis or synecphonesis. 

Note 3. Accent. If one of the syllables to be contracted 
has the accent, the accent remains on the contracted sylla- 
ble ; and if this syllable be a penult or antepenult, the ac- 
cent is determined according to ^ 20., and § 21. ; e. g. q)dB6' 
liiB&a cpiXov/UBda, lixJtcnwv XiLujojv, cpdeofzai cpi^oviiai ; if it be a 
final syllable, it takes the circumflex, as goog govg, 7tbq(xbiv 
TiBQav, drjXoix) J?/Ao); except when the uncontracted word has 
the acute accent on the last syllable, as Mj^ tjj^, {DB'Suihg ^B^wg, 
earaog huTAhg. 

If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the accent, 
the accent of the word retains its place, as nolsBg nolBig^ 
rl^as Tlfia. Except a few instances, as ugyvQBog dLQyvQovg^ 
nsQinloov nsqinlov, dileag gen. dBlmiog contracted dalT^wg. 



ELISION. 19 



CRASIS. 

§ 24. Two contiguous words are, in many instances, con- 
tracted into one, when the first ends, and the next begins 
with a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. 
The coronis (' ) is generally placed over the contracted syl- 
lable. E. g. 

Tovvaviiov, Tovvofia for to evavrlov, to ovofia 
copy'iQ, ovfiot, y.ayd) " 6 avriQ, ol aftot, Tial eycb 

S^OitAULliOV, d-aJHQOV " TO ludlLOV, TOV ItSQOV 

rdlr^d-eg, Tidra " to dh]&eg, Tcal eha. 

The (^ is subscribed only when it stands at the very end of 
the syllables to be contracted ; as tyfL^av for ^y^ olfxav^ but 

7idy(b not y^dy{}) for ^o^l ay(b. 

Note. The crasis is sometimes left to pronunciation ; as 

^Evvall(o dvdgEicpovTri = ' EvvallcvrdgsocpovTrj (^,, — o«j, , ), 

ri siaoKev =z f^aoxev {- ^^), Compare § 23. Note 2. 

ELISION. 

^ 25. When the first of two contiguous words ends with 
a short vowel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former 
often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe ( ' ) is put 
over the vacant place. This is called elision, E. g. 
di' ifiov, Tiaq sfwi for did e/uov, nagd sjuoL 
in ai)i(jj^ zaT ifia " enl avT(jj, jcard ifii 
e(p T^^lv (6^ 14. 2) " inl f^fuv. 

The prepositions neoi and nqo never lose their final vowel ; 
as Tieql avxov^ nQO 'AO>]v(j)v, 

Note 1. The diphthong a^ is sometimes elided by the 
poets, but only in the passive terminations ludi, oav^ T«t, and 
dd^ai ; as yv6(T6T snena for yvihasiac enSiTa, ^oilofii €y(h for 
fJovlo/uai eydj^ Tcaleluxf dnay^ai^riv for TcalsTa&aL dn(xy^aifj,Tjv, 

Note 2. The epic poets in some instances reject the final 
vowel even when the following word begins with a conso- 
nant ; as di^ ve-Kvag for dvd vixvag, d<ii novop (§12. 1) for dvd 
Tiovov^ nag Zrjvi for nagd Zi]vi, xancpdlaga (^ 10. NoTE 2) for 
xard cpdlaga. 

Note 3. Accent. In prepositions and conjunctions, if 
the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut ofl* 



20 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

with the vowel ; as (xuxp avxQ, dU' eliiL In all other worcU 
the accent is thrown back upon the preceding syllable ; as 
9T],a ^j^oj, nolV ai', for q)i]ul lyd)^ no)Xu. ilv. 

SYNCOPE AND METATHESIS. 

^28. 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the mid^ 
die of a word ; as TTurgd;, yiyvotjKxv^ for ttutloo;^ y\ylvo{.iui. ■{ 

2. Metathesis is an interchanj^e of two contiguous letters 
in the same word ; as xQudiu, td(Ju!foi^, for xuodla, Ibduolfop. 

Note. The combinations //^, (*/o, vo^ arising from a syn- 
cope or from a metathesis, are changed into (j^jI^ /uSq^ rdo, 
respectively ; as lueup.umu for /tuulujxa^ ^Ibjcrxut (strictly /n^iloj- 
uxu)) f »r jWAwaxu), ya^^Qo; for yuitego;^ iiu^gowt^ for \uootoi^ from 
'AMAPTR (by metathesis AMPATJl, AMFOTSl §96. 19), 
^rdgog for upsgog from ui'riQ (§ 40.). 

PUNCTUATION. 

§ 27. The Greek has the following punctuation marks : 

Comma, . . . . • ( , ) 

Colon, . . . . . ( • ) 

Period, . . . . . ( . ) 

Interrogation, . . . . ( ; ) 

Apostrophe (§ 25.) . . . (') 

Coronis(j24.), . . . .(') 

Marks of quantity (§ 2.) . . (-) and ( - ). 

Marks of parenthesis, . . ( ) 

The diaresis ( ) is placed over ^ or v to prevent its forming 
a diphthong with the preceding vowel ; as yr\gut (-^v^), but 

'yTjgai ( ), diir?] (->v, -), but cxvtti ( ). 

The mark of admiration ( / ) is not much used. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

§28. It is supposed by many that the ancient pronuncia- 
tion, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians and 
of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost. 
The best expedient according to some, is to observe how 
the Romans expressed Greek, and the Greeks Roman names. 
This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pro- 
nunciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as 
that of the Greek. According to others, the best rule is to 



PRONUNCIATION. 21 

observe how the ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made 
by particular animals. This rule is, to say the least, very 
ridiculous, because dogs and sheep are not the best teachers 
of pronunciation, and because there are as many ways of 
expressing the sound made by any animal, as there are na- 
tions upon the face of the earth. The frog, for example, 
in ancient Greek sings brekekekex koax koax {Soey.ey.e/.e^ 
y,ouB, y,ou^), in modern Greek nihaka kaka [unuyu y.uxa), in 
English croak croak {agiby jfowx). 

Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the 
only source from which any definite notions concerning 
the ancient pronunciation may be derived. First, because 
this language is immediately derived from the ancient; a 
circumstance of no small importance. Secondly, because 
its pronunciation is remarkably uniform ; and uniformity in 
matters of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. 
Further, the modern Greek method is based on tradition ; 
all other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of 
the curious we proceed to describe it. 
Of and a are pronounced like a in father. After the sound 

/ (^, Vi ^^ ^''> '^•> ^^) it is pronounced like a in 'pecvliarity. 
cft like c; as KaTaao^ pronounced Ksaao. — It is represented 

by (B or ai ; as AY'^'vnjog JEgyptus, Maia Maia. 
av, £u, 7/u, b)v. before a vowel, a liquid or a middle mute {^ y^) 

are pronounced like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively. In all 

other cases, like af, ef, eef, off, — Represented by au, eu, 

eu, 6u : as AvToiddojv Autoviedon, Evtsoth] Euterpe, ?/^';^6- 

/«^//2^ euchomen, Oowua thouma, 
§ like V ; as Ai^iog Livios, 
y before the sounds E and /is pronounced nearly like y in 

yes^ York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the Ger- 
man g in Tag. 
J7 and 7^ like ng in strongest, — Represented by ng, no, 

respectively. 
/'?)/'/ like nx, ng-li ; as Uy^ lynx, ''Ayyjur^g Ang-hiscs, — 

Represented by nx, nch. 
^ like th in that. 
£ like e in fellow, nearly. 
^i' like t ; as iy.sTrog pronounced iy.Tyo;. — Represented by 

ei or I (long) or e; as e/eip echein, IleiaiaToacog Pisls- 

tratus, M/fieia Medea. 
pv see «f . 

like z. 



22 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

V and ji like t ; as /*^>«o^, ^7](7TT)g, pronounced /a;toc, harl;. — 
Plato [KoaTil.^ says; Nvv de ui^tI jutt^ tov iroiu^ i) f, t] 
-s^TCf iueTu(TToe(pov(jiP, d.i>Tl dt dilTix^ C'Titu, ok dq peyixlojioFTii' 
aTFoa oPTa .... ()i ^dv wr/ai^TuiOi I ^ i i)u v ir^p ^i/tiiQuv 
ixalovv, ol da tfisQuv, ol de vvv i^^iQuv. Dionysins 
Halicarnasseus [IIeqI HvvO. ' Ovou.) says that this letter 
HijLTix) negl Tr^v ^(xcriv rrj; ylibaaiig loFldev rov ri/op dmulovHoi'^ 
dXV ovx ufut, xul iu6T()lu); ai'oryouipov [rod (Tt6uuto;^. Sex- 
tus Empiricns (Kuiu r^uau.^ remarks ; '^^xnlovOr^aei yul to 
E xul TO H bP eJpuL uioi/elov kutu Tr^v (xvir^v dvpuuip (quality) 
aoivov 1] yuLO avir^ duraing in^ (/.acpoTiqixiP iuTip. Kul (judux- 
Xep fAtv TO H yipeiuv E- IxtuO^p dk Td E ylperui H. This 
letter therefore was pronounced (and should be pronoun- 
ced) nearly like ey in they, 

f]v see ocv. 

like th in thin, 

I' like i in machine, — Dionysius (ibid.) observes ; "EcjyaTov 
de navTOJp \Tb)p (pm)pj]ipTUt)p^ to / • ttsqI Toiug ddopTag te yuo 

7] XQOTTJGLg TOV TlPSuUiXTOg yiPSTUi^ ^IXOOP (XPOiyOuiPOU TOV aTo- 

fiaTog^ xal ovk emhxunovpoPTMP tC)p /etliotp top t^/op. 
X like k, — Represented by c or k ; as KoXog Cceus, Ke^acrovg 
Cerasus. 

1 like Z. Before the sound /, like Italian gl. Compare v- 
/u like m, 

f^TT like 7nb ; as e/nTTooaOev pronounced embrosthen. Com- 
pare VT. 

flip i^fjLTiu) like mhs, 

V like n. Before the sound /, like Italian gn. Compare ^- — 
The words top^ ti]p^ ep, crvp, before a word beginning with 
X or I (^or)? iire pronounced roy, rrj^/, ay, crvy ; as top y^aioop^ 
ep |uA6/q), pronounced Toyxatgop, ay^vlo/co. Before ^ or 
'ip {ncr)<, they are pronounced to^ll, t?)//, ta, avfi; as top 
7Topi]q6p, ovp ipv/Ti, pron. TOUTtoprjoop, avuipv/r^. 

j^T like Tirf ; as apTi^og pronoun, endimos. Compare ^Tt. 

I like X or ks, 

o like in ^porter, 

©(''like^; as Trolog, loLfiog^ pronounced mo?, litxog. — Repre- 
sented by (E or oi ; as OXri] (Eta, ojy.og oicos, 

ov like 00 in moon, — Represented by u or ou ; as MovaaXog 
Musceus, 

7t, Q, like, p, r. 

a like 5 in soft. Before ^, y, d, //, q, it is sounded like 'C ; as 
xddfiog, or^acrat^, 2{xvopi], pronounced xo^uog, l^aaaL, Zfivopij : 



PRONUNCIATION. 23 

SO also at the end of a word ; as ^ovg ^aadelg t^- y9jg pron. 

Tov'0a(jclelg Tri'Cyrig, 
T like t in tell. 
V like I' ; as Kvgog pronounced Ktgog. — Represented by y ; as 

Kvqog Cyrus ^ Bv'QavTiov Byzantivm, not Cvrus, Buzanii- 

^iiffi^ — Dionvsius says; ^'Ean de rirzov roviov [tov i2] to T- 

Ttegl yuQ aviu tu /elh] avcFTolr^g yevo{XBvi]g u^ioloyov npiyexaL 

md uTBvbg ixTiLiTev 6 r^/og. It was therefore pronounced 

like French u. 
^'^ like «'/ as vlog, pron. log, — Represented by yi ; as "^^- 

nviao HarpyicE. 
(f like ph or /. 

/ like German ch or Spanish j. 
^f like -ps, 
M and 0) like o. 
Mv see «i^. ^ 

The rough breathing is silent. So far as quantity is con- 
cerned all the short vowels are equivalent to the long ones. 

The written accent always guides the rising and falling 
of the voice. The accent of the enclitic is disregarded in 
pronunciation : but when the attracting word has the ac- 
cent on ihe antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary 
accent. E. g, del^ov luoi^, xlv&i (lisv, are pronounced del^ov- 
fiwi, y.lv&iuev, but lelsxral fiov has the primary accent on the 
first syllable Ae, and the secondary on y^Tai., 

Those who imagine that reading by accent injures the 
quantity seem to forget that the rising and falling of the 
voice have little to do with the lengthening and shortening 
of syllables; and that what they call quantity is nothing 
more nor less than sheer accent very often placed on the 
wrong syllable. 

Plato (KQaTil.) says, Ilgmov /nh yug to Toioi'de del evvor^aau 
Ttegl ovofJvcTMP^ on Tiollaxig eneu^ullo^uer ygauinxTa^ to. d' €s«^- 
govjusi^, nag o ^ovl(\ueOa opoiiuZopTsg • aal lug o^vttjt ag fie- 
Toc^dlXofiSP • oiop^ ^ Li cp iko g ^ tovto 2pa dpil griuixTog bio/na riuXv 
yepijiai^ i6 ts eregov aviodev iO)Ta i^elloiuev^ y.al vcptI o^eiag 
Trig f.d(Trig'avlla^y\g ^ageXav icpOey^&ineda. — ''ApQgxxmog^ accord- 
ing to him (ibid.), is derived from the expression uradgCop a 
oTioine reflecting on what he has seen, by dropping the sec- 
ond « and pronouncing to grave ; therefore oci'dguKjog not dp- 
OgwTiog, 

Aristotle {rfegl SocpiGj, 'EUyx- Cap. IV) says, Kal ihv 
^^ O^ngop ipioi diogdovPT(XL ngog jovg bliyxoPTccg^ (hg uionwg aigr^xdva 

(U. XXIII, 328), 



24 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

TO jLih' V aaraTtvOeiat, ouSoiD • 

'kvovGv y(io avTo ttJ Tigo a(i>d ia ^ ItyovTsg to, ov o^vieoov. 
Which shows that the tone of oti where, was different from 
the tone of ov not. Kid to neol to Ivvnpiov tou ^ Ayu^e^vovog^ 
ijTv ovit aiuTog 6 Zevg sins (H. II, 15), 

d { d (I e V 8e ol sv^og aoiaOui,, 

(where we now read Toioeaai^ da y.r'^d' Icfr^Txiai^ ulXu to) li'vnrlijj 
ii^srillszo dvdovai, Tliis shows that, as far as pronunci- 
ation was concerned, the difference between the 1 pers. 
pkir. dldoiiisv^ and the Homeric infinitive didousv (^ S9. 
Note), lay in the tone. 



PART II. 
INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

^ 29. 1. The declinable parts of speech are, the noun, 
the verb, the pronoun, the article, and the participle. 

2. The indeclinable parts of speech are, the adverb, 
the preposition, the conjunction, and the interjection. 

3. The declinable parts of speech have three num- 
bers ; the singular, the plural, and the dual. The dual 
may be used when two things are spoken of; but not 
necessarily. 

NOUN. 

<§) 30. 1. The noun is grammatically divided into sub- 
stantive and adjective. The substantive is divided into 
proper and common. 

2. The noun has three genders ; the masculine, the 
feminine, and the neuter. The masculine is, in gram- 
mar, distinguished by the article o, the feminine, by ->/, 
and the neuter, by to; as 6 avriq the man, vir, i^ ywri the 
ivoman, to avHov the Jig. 

Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to 
be of the common gender. Such nouns are, in grammar, 
distinguished by the articles o, ^; as 6 i^ oi^OgijjTio; a human 
being, homo. 

3. The noun has three declensions ; the first declen- 
sion, the second declension, and the third declension. 

4. The cases are five ; the nominative, the genitive, 
the dative, the accusative, and the vocative. 

3 



26 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Note 1. All neuters have three cases alike, viz. the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these cases 
end in a ; except some neuters of the second declension, 
which end in w. 

Note 2. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual, 
are alike ; the genitive and dative dual are also alike. In 
the plural, the vocative is always like the nominative. 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

§ 31. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
first declension. 



Sing, 


Fern. 


Masc, 


Plur. 




Dual. 


Norn. 


Vi «, « 


V?, «^ 


Nom. 


CiV 


Nom. a 


Gen. 


^?, (^g 


ov 


Gen. 


U)V 


Gen. aiv 


Dat. 


Th ^ 


v^ ^ 


Dat. 


aig 


Dat- ccLv 


Ace. 


rjv^ ay, av 


tjv, av 


Ace. 


ocg 


Ace. a 


Voc. 


V, ^, « 


V, « 


Voc 


av 


Voc a 



2. Nouns in J/ or s or « are feminine ; as fi n^-^ honor , 
-fi dlriOsia truth, -^ x^Qoc place. Nouns in i^g or otg are mas- 
culine, as 6 7ioL7]Tr]g poet, 6 Aiveiug JEneas, 

3. Nouns in a pure {§ 16. 2), o«, and some others, re- 
tain the « throughout the singular; as aocpla wisdom, 

Gocptag, crocpla, aocpiuv. 

4. The following classes of nouns in rjg have a in the vo- 
cative singular. 

(1). Nouns in t?/^, as TtollTTjg citizen, noirjTrig poet, voc. 
TTolixa, Tioujrd. Homer has aivagsii] from aipagiTTjg one who 
makes ill use of his valor. 

(2). Nouns derived from verbs by adding rjg to the last 
consonant of the verb ; as aXlavTon(hlr]g a vender of sausa- 
ges, yswfisTQj^g geometer, naidoTQl^yg instructor. 

(3). All national appellations, as negci^g a Persian, 2'xt;- 
6i]g a Scythian. Also a few proper names, as Aaxvrig Lack- 
nes, nvgal/fii]g Pyraechnies. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



3T 



Sing, r] (honor) 
Nom. Tt/irJ 
Gen. Ti/Lirig 
Dat. THifi 

Ace. TlfiqP 
Voc. Tifiri 



EXAMPLES. 

Plur. [honors) 
Nom. Tvfiai 
Gen. Tviuibv 
Dat. TLfiaTg 
Ace. Ti^acig 
Voc. rmoe^ 



Di/aZ {two honors) 
Nom. Tt.^cJt 
Gen. Tt/Lialv 

Dat. TtjLialv 

Ace. T^^tt 
Voc- Tt/td 



Nom. f^ovcfa 

Gen. fiovcrrjg 

Dat. ^OIJCTT^ 

Ace. (novorav 

Voc. fiovaa 



Sing, ri [truth) 
Nom. (i^i^^etof 
Gen. dhjOsLocs 
Dat. dch^deia 

Ace dXTJ^E^OfJ/ 

Voc. d:^?]^e^a 



Z>2^aZ (^-M^o muses) 
Nom. iKoijo-a 
Gen. (novaaLv 
Dat. fiovaaiv 
Ace. fiovcra 
Voc. (Liovaa 



Dual (two truths) 
Nom. dXi^Oeia 
Gen. dihideiaLv 

Dat. dil7]d6l(XtV 

Ace. cch]66ia 
Voc. dhjOela 



So C^^'^ girdle, xscpalri head, Unrj griefs Kqi\t7] CretCj 
riai] victory, AavdLnTii] Xanthippe, 

Sing, ri (muse) Plur. (muses) 

Nom. f^ovaav 

Gen. (uovdibv 

Dat. /LiovaaLg 

Ace. fiovaag 

Voc. fiovcraL 
So ^ola opinion, ddclaacra sea^ oixavda thorn, a^wala cflr- 
riage, yliocraa tongue. 

Plur. (truths) 

Nom. d^TJ^efcae- 

Gen. ^ih/dsiibv 

Dat. dXrjOeiaig 

Ace. dXrjdsiag 

Yoe. dArj^e^ai' 

So ao^/of loisdom, r^^eqa day, X^Q^joy, X^Q^ place, noiriTqia 
poetess, ii6LxaiQa sabre- 

Sing. 6 (publican) Plur. (publicans) Dual (two publicans) 
Nom. T£l(hvT]g Nom. rslo^vav Nom. Tsl(hva 

Gen. rehbvov Gen. TEX(x)P(bv Gen. reXwvaLv 

Dat. TsXm>ri Dat. relibvatg Dat. Telibvaiv 

Ace. TeX(bv7]v Ace. Teliovag Ace. Tsl(bva 

Voc. TsliopT] Voc. TeXibvav Voc. rslibva 

So 'ATQeldi]g Atrides, nr^leidi]g Pelides, xUttti^q thief, (uadj]^ 

TTJg learner, jexvixrjg artist. For the vocative of nouns in 

T?yg &e. see <^ 31. 4. 

iSz/ig*. o (steward) Plur. (steioards) Dual (two stewards) 

Nom. Tafxlag Nom. TOf,t^/a^ Nom. Ta,w/a 

Gen. rafiiov Gen. Tauiiap Gen. ia}.iiaiv 

Dat. Taiila Dat. Taidatg Dat. rauiatv 

Acc. TOLuiav Ace. Taulag Acc. Ta,(//a 

Voe. Ta^/a Voc. Tauiav Voc. xa^/a 



28 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

So vsaviag young man, ^icpiag sword-fish, (pgovTjfiaTlag a 
high-minded person, Alveiag JEneas, Aewvidag Leonidas. 

Note 1. Quantity. The termination a of the nomina- 
tive is always short, when the genitive has rjg ; fiovcra /uovert^g^ 
e/i^dpa h/idvi]g. It is very often long, when the genitive has 
ctg ; as (Joopid aocplag, Kicjuai&a KtacrciiOug. 

The termination ccv of the accusative always follows the 
quantity of the nominative ; as /novaa fiovaav, x^^ ;(d)Q(7v. 

The termination a of the vocative singular of nouns in 
(xg is always long ; as veaviag veavia^ Aeujvldug Aeuvlda. In 
nouns in r]g it is always short (§ 31. 4); as yiUmrig TtXlnja, 
xgnrig XQnd, 

The termination ccg is long; as ra/uiag, {xlrfieiug from dirj- 
Obi(x, Except some Doric ace, plur., as rixpoig for t^x^^S 
from TE/i^rj^ Ttaaag from nacrag. Compare ^ 33. Note 4. 

The termination a of the nom. ace, and voc, dual is always 
long ; as Tt^ud from Tt/^r], Iriaxu from Ar^airjg robber. 

Note 2. Accent. The endings of the genitive and da- 
five, take the circumflex, when the nominative has the ac- 
cent on the last syllable; as Tt^urj?, tl^t^^ nfialg, from t^utj, 
X(XQag, ^aoa, from yciQ(ji, Irjcrrov, Iricriaig^ from Ir^cFTrig. Compare 
^ 33. Note 3, and ^ 35. Note 3. 

The termination o)v of the genitive plural takes the cir- 
cumflex, as dh]66L(bp, Tel(x)p(hv, Except the feminine of bary- 
tone (§ 19. 2) adjectives and participles in og, as ci^^og, d|/a 
d^iojv not d.^i(hv, TVTtTOfJievog^ TvnTo^uivi] TvnTo/uevcjp, Except 
also the following substantives, viz. xQ^crrr^g usurer, ;^orJo-Twj/- 
ot BTi](Tiai etesian winds, hrjalLov' dcpvrj anchovy, dccpiuojr. 

The accent remains on the same syllable as in the nomina- 
tive, if the last syllable permits it (^20.); as dulacraa, da- 
laaaav, d&lacraai ; and if not, it is removed to the next syl- 
lable ; as Oald(Tcn]g, Oalacjuavg. The genitive plural is of 
course excepted. Compare ^ 33. Note 3, and § 35. Note 
3. J6(Tn6Ti]g master, has voc diarTtora. 

Note 3. Dialects. The Dorians use a for ?;; as d cpojva^ 
rag gowj^ag, &:,c. for -q cpcovri, rrj? gpwz'rjg, &c. The lonians often 
use in the sing. ^ for a long ; as rjfisQrj ri^eqrjg, for r^aiqa^ rnuagag. 

The Homeric language has some nominatives masc. in 
a ; dL^litiioTa for InnozTjg horseman, fir^Tlsra for /uipisTT^g coun- 
sellor, vBcpeh^ysoha for vscfslri^^aqhi^g cloud-compellingj Bvi^ 
(fxa for GviaTTjg Thyestes, 



SECOND DECLENSION, 



29 



Homeric genitive sing, masc, in ao, ew ; as 'Ajoeldao from 
^ATgsldi]g, Jlijlrfiddstx) from ni]lEidi]g. The ending £w becomes 
0^, when il is preceded by a vowel, as 'Eg/uelo) for 'Eq^ieieb) 
from ^Egiuelag. Genitive plural in awz^, sojv ; as f^ovcKxMv 
from (uovaa, ecpez^Bij^v from ecpeifxri. The lonians make use 
of the gen. in ew plur. fwi^. The Dorians contract «o into 
«, and c^Mv intoa^; as ^AiQelda, dgecri^uTa from doecn8(jcT7]g 
one who wanders on mountains, (xqstccv from doeT?]. Even 
the Attics sometimes make use of the Doric genitive sing., 
especially in proper names ; as bqwOodriQa from dovidodriQag 
hird'Catcher, rw^gva from roj^gvag Gobryas, Evomu from 
Evqmag Eurotas. 

Homeric dative plural in aiai{v)^ 5^K^) ^^' T^^ ' ^^ ^^^' 
aai(Xi[v)^ or ^ov(T7](n(v')^ or /uovarig^ from fiovaa, d8cuUL(r^^ or 
^£7jor^(^), or ^^5?, from ^ed. The lonians use the dat. in r^ui 
or rig. 

Homeric genitive and dative^ both singular and plural, 
in ^()Di^; as 6vvriq)i for e^^r^?, ^b]cpv for /^t'a, xlLairjcpv for 'cicala. 
Compare § 33. Note 4, and ^ 35. Note 2. 

§ 32. Nouns in soc, aa, o?], and ea?, may be contracted. 
The syllables oi] become ?/• The syllables sec, sag, if prece- 
ded by a vowel or by g, becomes «, ccg. E. g. 

avaia avxT] fig-tree, gen. av^sag avxrig^ dat. crvxea avxrj^ 
ace. (fVKeav uvxriv, plur. (JvxeaL ovxaX, avxicop avxwv, avxiaig 
avxalg^ uvueag cru;<a^. 

fxv&a ^va mina, ^aj^dag ^vag, /avaay fiav, plur. fJ-vdav ^vaX, 
jLivdojv iJ.v(x)v, ^vaaig fivalg, /nvdag ^z^a^. 

dnloi] dnlri simple, dnloi^g d/r^^g, &C. 

""EgiAeag 'Egurig Hermes, ^Egf^eov 'Eg^aov, ^Egiuea '"Eg^r^, 'Eg- 
fimv ^EgfAnfiv, "Eg/Lisa '^ Eg^ri, plur. ^Eg^eai "EgfiaT, &,c. 

dgyvgea dgyvga of silver, dgyvgeag dgyvgag, <fcc. 

^ogiag ^oggagboreas, ^ogia (^ 31. Note 3) §ogga, (fee. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

§33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
second declension. 



Sing. Masc.^Fem. JVeut. 
Norn, og, iog ov, mv 
Gen. oy, M 
Dat. 0) 

Ace. OV, MV 

Voc. B, (og 



G) 

or. u)p 



Plur. MascSz-Fem. JVeut. 

Norn. Oi, (D 

Gen. (OV 

Dat. oig, (x)c 

Ace. ovg, ojg 

Voc. or, 0) 

3* 



tt, 


w 


CUJ^ 




0/?, 


<i>^ 


«1 


a> 


^, 


w 



Dual. 
Nom. 0* 
Gen. ofj', cor 
Dat. orr, (pr 
Ace. io 
Voc. w 



30 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



2. Nouns in og or u^g are masculine or feminine ; as 
6 " Oiu7]oog Homer J 6 MsvilsMg Mcneldus, -^i vr^uog island. 



iNouns I] 


Q OP or OJV 


are neuter ; as to 

EXAMPLES. 


uvxov Jig, 


Sing. 


6 (word) 


Phir. [words) 


Dual [two words) 


Nom. 


Xoyog 


Nom. -^0/0^ 


Nom. Uyu) 


Gen. 


loyov 


Gen. I6yix)v 


Gen. loyoiv 


Dat 


Xoyco 


Dat. loyoig 


Dat. loyoLv 


Ace. 


loyov 


Ace. Uyovg 


Ace. -^o/w 


Voc. 


loys 


Voc. )^6yoi 


Voc. "^oyix) 


So 6 voaog law, 


6 vofAog pasture-ground, ^ vQdog disease., 


6, '^dvOo(x)nog man, 


human being, 6 'Haiodog Hesiod. 


Sing. 


^Hfig) 


Plur. ifgs) 


Dual [two figs) 


Nom. 


(JVHOP 


Nom. Gvza 


Nom. oTLJfw 


Gen. 


(TVTiOV 


Gen. oi'}io)v 


Gen. avKoiv 


Dat. 


au:i(D 


Dat. uvKoig 


Dat. crvxoLP 


Ace. 


(JVXOP 


Ace. av'/.a 


Ace. GvyM) 


Voc. 


(JUXOV 


Voc. uvaa 


Voc. (JVTCCO 


So «?t'> 


'Ov wood. 


6i]oiov beast, nuidiov 


child, xdTOTCToov mir- 


Tor, acjTQoi^ star. 






Sing. 


[temple] 


Plur. [temples) 


Dual [two temples) 


Nom. 


V6(bg 


Nom. veil) 


Nom. v£(x) 


Gen. 


vsd) 


Gen. vBihv 


Gen. veQv 


Dat. 


V6(D 


Dat. veGg 


Dat. yei^v 


Ace. 


VBibv 


Ace. vsibg 


Ace. v£io 


Voc. 


vs(bg 


Voc. vb6 


Voc. J^£c6 


So ^swg people, 


lay(hg hare, Tachg peacock, r^ Eix)g morning. 


Sing. 


TO [hall) 


Plur. [halls) 


DwaZ (^ii^o halls) 


Nom. 


dcvchysujv 


Nom. (Jivchysa) 


Nona. dv6yEco 


Gen. 


dvibystx) 


Gen. iiv(hy8(x)v 


Gen. d^w^'ewj' 


Dat. 


dvwysco 


Dat. uvfhysiDg 


Dat. dvoryecov 


Ace. 


dv(hysij)v 


Ace. avibysco 


Ace. di^coj^eoi 


Voc. 


avijjysojv 


Voc. dv(x)yeoi) 


Voc. dvihyeo) 



Note 1. The following neuters, viz. a^ro, tovto, ixelvo, 
TO, 0, alio, from avjog, oviog, IxeXvog, 6, (ig, dllog, respectively, 
have instead of ov. 

Further, "the termination (av of the accusative sing, often 
drops the v ; as to^ "A&ix), ttiv K(b, ttj^/ eo), from "Ad-^g Athos, 
K(bg Cos, eujg morning. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 31 

Note 2. Quantity. The termination a of the neuter 
plur. is always short ; as crvxa, ocnia. 

Note 3. Accent. The endings of the genitive and da- 
tive take the circumflex, when the nominative has the ac- 
cent on the last syllable ; as a^ioii, avzwv, aijrw, avToTg, ckvtoTp, 
from ax'Tog. Compare ^ 31. Note 2. 

The accent remains on the same syllable as in the nom- 
inative, if the last syllable permits it {^ 20.) ; as Uyog, Uyov, 
'koyov, (fee. ; and if not, it is placed on the next syllable ; as 
dv&QojTvog, avd-Qcbnov^ dv&QchircD, ap&oujjtov, &c. Compare ^ 31. 
Note 2, and I 35. Note 3. 

Note 4. Dialects. Homeric genitive sing, in oto ; as 
uoyvqiovo ^voXo from doyvosog §i6g silver how. Doric genitive 
sing, in w; as llrivei(h from nr/vsiog Peneus^ Jlti^dix) from 
ntvdog Pindus. Homer has gen. JlsTe^o from UsTe^g. 

Homeric dative plur. in oi(ti{v) ; as d^Qiyv>oXui{y) from S^oiy. 
7(6g a coping, ib(ioiGi{v) from ^uog shoulder. 

Doric accusative plur. in w? or og ; as Umg for Umvg 
from Unog wolf, Tihg Mr^d^g from 6 Mridog a Mede. Com- 
pare § 31. Note 1. 

Homeric genitive and dative dual In oiXv ; as ^iTinoup from 
l,7tTtog horse, (nad-^ouv from aTa&uog a resting place. Com- 
pare § 35. Note 2. 

Homeric genitive and dative, both singular and plural, in 
ocpL^r) ; as i9-e6^t(^) for SsoTg from Ssog god, GjqaT6q:i[r) for 
oT^aToi} from (JTouTog camp, army. Compare ^ 31. Note 3, 
and § 35. Note 2. 

§ 34. Nouns in boq, oog, eov, and oov, are contracted. The 
syllables ?« are contracted into «• E. g. 



^. 


6 [mind) 


p. 


(minds) 


D. 


{two 


minds] 


N. 


voog 


vovg 


N. 


voov 


vol 


N. 


v6(x} 


V(b 


G. 


voov 


vov 


G. 


VOOJV 


vXhv 


G. 


voovv 


VOlV 


D. 


VCKD 


ViD 


D. 


vooig 


voTg 


D. 


vooiv 


VOOiV 


A. 


voov 


vovv 


A. 


voovg 


vovg 


A. 


VOix) 


ViO 


V. 


vos 


J'OU 


V. 


VOOi 


VOL 


Y. 


VOiO 


V(i) 



So nUog nlovg sailing, Qoog Qovg current. 

S. t6 (bone) P. (bones) D. (tiro bones) 

N. oaiiov dawvv N. ouiea ocjtu N. dcriko djnb 

G. do'Teov oaiov G. daieaiv daTCov G. oareoiv octtoTv 

D. oarm oorco D. oareoig ouToTg J), oarsoiv dawTv 

A. daiiov ouTovv A. oarea dard A. oarko danb 

V. daiiov dcTTOvv V. darea dam V. oaiiu) oorw 



32 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Note. The contracted nom. ace. and voc. dual takes the 
acute accent, contrary to the general rule (^ 23. Note 3). 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

^35. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
the third declension. 



Sing. 






Nom. 


? 




Gen. 


OQ, 


u)g 


Dat. 


X 




Ace. 


«j 


V 


Voc. 


9 





Plur. Masc, Sf Fern, Neut. 
Nom. eg a 

Gen. wp (jjv 

Dat. (Ti[v) ul(^v) 

Ace. cig fx 

Voc. eg a 



Dual, 
Nom. e 
Gen. oiv 
Dat. oLv 
Ace. e 
Voc. e 



2. In the third declension, the gender must be determined 
by practice. It is observed however that : 

(1). All nouns in evg are masculine; as o leosvg priest, 
6 Ircnevg horseman^ 6 ''Axiklevg Achilles, 

(2). All nouns in oj and abstract nouns in rr^g are femin- 
ine ; as ^ rix6 echo, '^ Aipcj Latona, ri ^eioTTjg divinity, ri lad- 
tr^g equality, 

(3). All nouns in a, rj, i, v, og, og^ ov, eg, ev, are neuter ; 
as TO TTQay/Lia thing, to jcuqi] head, to laelL honey, to vunv muS' 
tard, TO ^ilog arrow, to rirog heart. 

Note 1. Quantity. The terminations ^, c^, a, «^, are 
short ; as TcogaxX, ndgavM, y^oofx^H, ic6gay.ag. Nouns in evg may 
have ci, otg in the accusative, as top ^acrdea, zovg ^aadiag. 

Note 2. Dialects. Homeric dative plural in €ai[p) or 
eacTL^^p) ; as den^eucfi from din:ag denaog, ;^£/^ecr^^ from ^elg 
^eigog. 

Ionic genitive plural in e^p for o)p (circumflexed) ; as/^- 
vicop from ^rip, dcpdgmp from ccprig dcpdgog. 

Homeric genitive and dative dual in oup ; as -Tet^youV 
from ^ei^g-qp, nodoup from novgnodog. Compare ^33, Note 4. 

Homeric genitive and dative both singular and plural, 
in (Jcpv[p) ; as o/ecrcpL for o/sX from 6/og o/eog, urri&ecKpt^ for 
arrjxf^eojp from crTri&og oxr^d-sog, 'Ege^svacpip for ' Ege^eog from 
^Ege^og Erebus, Navg has vavq)i for ^?;co?^. Compare § 33. 
Note 4, and § 31. Note 3-. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



33 







EXAMPLES. 






Sl7lg, 


6 (crow) 


Plur. 


(crows) 


Dual 


(two crows) 


Nom. 


xoga^ 


Nom. 


xogaxeg 


Nom. 


xogaxe 


Gen. 


y.6gaxog 


Gen. 


XOgUKbOV 


Gen. 


xoguxovv 


Dat. 


Kogay.v 


Dat. 


icogu^L^v) 


Dat. 


xooaxoiv 


Ace. 


xogaxa 


Ace. 


Kogaxag 


Ace. 


xogaxs 


Voc. 


xoga^ 


Voc. 


xogaxeg 


Voe. 


xoQaxe 


So 6 liga^ legaxo: 


, 6 dgrtrx^ aonayog 


ji^g^^' 


rg^x^g (^ 14. 3). 


So also 


6 yvip yvnog, 6 'Agaip Agapog, 


ri xaTr^)uifj xaTr^)u(pog. 


Sing, 


rj {hope) 


Plur. 


(hopes) 


Dual 


(two hopes) 


Norn. 


hlTtlg 


Nom. 


ilnideg 


Nom. 


elnlds 


Gen. 


slTitdog 


Gen. 


llnidojv 


Gen. 


blnidoiv 


Dat. 


elnldo 


Dat. 


eX7itGt(v) 


Dat. 


ilnldoLV 


Ace. 


anida 


Ace. 


tlrcidag 


Ace. 


ilnide 


Voe. 


ani 


Voc. 


iXnidsg 


Voe. 


iXnlds 


So ri xGcgtg j^dotTog 


, rj v.ogvg xogv&og, 


6 UdiQvrig ndpyTj&og. So 


also ri eluLvg e^utvS^og, i] Tigvvg Tigvv^og. 




Sing. 


6 [giant) 


Plur. 


(giants) 


Dual 


(two giants) 


Nom. 


yh^ag 


Nom. 


ylyavieg 


Nom. 


yiyavTB 


Gen. 


yiyavTog 


Gen. 


ytydcPTCJV 


Gen. 


yiyavjoiv 


Dat. 


ylyavTu 


Dat. 


ytyacTc(v) 


Dat. 


yiyavToiv 


Ace. 


yiyavza 


Ace. 


ylyavTag 


Ace. 


yiyavTS 


Voe. 


yiyav 


Voc. 


ylyavTsg 


Voe. 


yiyavTS 


Sorj, 


A'lag AYavTO 


?. So 


also 6 odov 


g odovTog, 6 Tvcp&etg tv- 


cpd-svTog, 


6 Xevyvvg ^ 


evyvvvTog. 







Sing. 6 (weevil) Plur, (weevils) 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 



xlg 
xiog 

Xit 

xiv 
xlg 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 



xlsg 

xiibv 

XLcrt(v) 

xlag 

xieg 



Sing. 6 (age) 
Nom. cild)p 



Plur. (ages) 
Nom. aloi^eg 



• Gen. alibvog Gen. 
Dat. ai^PL Dat. 

Ace. ai(bpa Ace. 

Voe. cii^i' Voe. 

So 6 nidiTviv nXdcTLOPog. 



Dual (two weevils) 
Nom. ^ie 
Gen. xidlv 
Dat. xioXv 
Ace. yils 
Voe. ^is 

Dual (two ages) 

Nom. ai(by8 

Gen. (xWors 

Dat. akbi'oiv 

Ace. ai(bps 

Voc. ai(j)i>6 



ai(i)P(x)p 
ai(bai(v) 
alojpag 
ai(hveg 

So also 6 "Elhji/ ^Elhp'og, 6 '/\v 



34 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Sivg, 


6 {god) 


Plur. 


{gods) 


Dual 


{two gods) 


Norn. 


daifiMv 


Norn. 


dal/Liovsg 


Norn. 


dulfJOVB 


Gen. 


daljuovog 


Gen. 


daijuovixiv 


Gen. 


duLifxdvoiv 


Dat. 


daifxovi^ 


Dat. 


daiuo(n{v) 


Dat. 


daifiovoi'V 


Ace. 


daljuova 


Ace. 


dal/uovag 


Ace. 


dalfzope 


Voc. 


dal/iiov 


Voc. 


dul/uovsg 


Voc. 


dalfiovs 



So '^ Aa}iEdalfxb)v Aaxedaljuovog, ^ (xrjdwv dcr]d6vog 
6 "ki^rpf lifiivog, 6 noL/uriv noi/uivog. 



So also 



Sing, 


6 {lion) 


Plur. 


{lions) 


Dual 


{two lions) 


Nom. 


li(x)v 


Nom. 


XiovTsg 


Nom. 


HOVTS 


Gen. 


HovTog 


Gen. 


XedvTMv 


Gen. 


keovToiv 


Dat. 


liovTv 


Dat. 


liovui {v) 


Dat. 


XedpTOiv 


Ace. 


MovTa 


Ace. 


XeovTcxg 


Ace. 


Xiovxe 


Voc. 


Uov 


Voc. 


liovjeg 


Voc. 


XiovTB 


Sing, 


TO {thing) 


Plur. 


{things) 


Dual 


{two things) 


Nom. 


nqay^a 


Nom. 


TtQayfiara 


Nom. 


ngdcyiiiuTS 


Gen. 


7iQ(kyiuaTog 


Gen. 


nQayficcTOJV 


Gen. 


TlQUyiLKXTOlV 


Dat. 


TlQLCyjUaTO 


Dat. 


7TQ(xyiuacFt' {v) 


Dat. 


nquy ^(jLTOiv 


Ace. 


ngay/ua 


Ace. 


TTQuyjuaia 


Ace. 


7iq6LyixaTE 



Voc. Tiqayfia Voc- 7Tgu.yf.iaTu Voc. ng6Ly^(xTS 



So t6 aw^a acbfiaTog, to onigua aneguaTog. 
fiih ^iliTog. 



So also TO 



Note 3. Accent. (1). In poly syllables^ the accent gene- 
rally remains on the same syllable as in the nominative, if 
the last syllable permits it {^ 20.) ; as xoga^, zogaxog^ Hog(x7io}v, 
&c. aicbv, ai(bvog, ai(x)vix)v, <Slc. Compare § 31. Note 2, and 
^ 33. Note 3. 

(2). Monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive and 
dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable ; as idg, y^i^og, 
icU, iCL(bv, Titai, Hiolv : it is observed that the terminations olv, 
wv^ are circumflexed. 

Except monosyllabic participles, as Sovg, dovTog^ 86vTi, 
Except also the plural 'K)f nag, TtdvTojv, naari.. Except also 
the genitive plur, and dual of the following nouns, '»] dag^ 
torch, Sddujy, odiuwg slave, d/Li(i)u)v, 6 Oibg jackal, dmw, to 
KPA2 head, icg(ho)v, to ovg ear, Iotojv, 6, r^ naXg child, naldujv, 
6 (jTJg moth, (Ticx)v, 6 Tg(bg Trojan, Tgcbujv, i^ cpcog blister, qpo)'- 
dcov, TO (f>(bg light, cpd)T(x)v, Except also the Homeric dative 
plur. (§ 35. Note 2), as Ttaideaao from naXg, 



THIRD DECLENSION. 35 

§ 36. 1. Most nouns of the third declension form their 
nominative singular by dropping the termination og of the 
genitive and annexing g. E. g. 

6 itriqv^^ 6 negdi^ g^n. ariovaog, niQdTxog, ^ 5. 2. 

6 ile'Aoi//, 6 Kiy.QOJXp " Ililonog, KixQujnog, ibid, 

6 nevijg^ rj difjlg " TCBvrjTog^ dipldog, ^ 10. 2. 

6 forrd:^, deiTiPvg " lcrTd:j/Tog, deixvvvTog, ^ 12. 4, 

(1). Masculines and feminines change eg and og into ^g 
and wg ; as "^^ TQcriQrjg rgirigeog, r^ i^bg rfiog, 6 TeTV(p(I)g T£tv(jp6- 
Tog. — Some masculines change sg into ff g ; as 6 ^aadevg 
^aai^Xiog, 6 Innevg Inniog. 

(2). Many neuters change eg into og; as to TsT/og rsixsog^ 
TO ^e'^og degeog. See ^ 2. Note 3. 

(3). Some neuters change ginto^; as to CTeag aTeawg, 
TO dilsaQ ^eAeojTog, to finag r^narog. 

Note 1. The nonns, ^i ygcivg, r^ vavg, gen. ygoiog, vaog^ (ori- 
ginally perhaps 7^«F6g, vaFog, ^ 1. Note 3) changes ag into 
avg. — The nouns 6, ri ^ovg (Doric |^wg), 6 ;^oi5g, 6 Ttoug, gen. 
^oog, ^oog, 7TO(J6g, change og into oug. See § 2- Note 3. — The 
word ^ dAwTTT^.? yba:, has gen. dl(i)7T6xog. — The nouns to (Tx6g, 
and TO vdiiig^ gen. cxardg, vdaTog, change «g into cog. — The 
noun TO o?^g (Doric o)g) ear, gen. ^rog, changes wg into oug. 

2. Many form their nominative singular by dropping the 
termination og of the genitive, with such consonants, as 
cannot stand at the end of a Greek word (^ 16. Note 2). 
Masculines and feminines change sv, eg, o, ov, og, into i]v, 
Tjg, (I), ojv, WO, respectively. E. g. 



y'Eiinv, 


6 ni6iT(x)v 


gex\." Ellrjvog^ 


Ill&Twvog 


6 lifiriv, 


6 '^yaue/iivojv 


" iLuevog, 


^^yafxB^ivovog 


6 leoiiv, 


n r/^ ^ 


*' leoyTog, 


ilXoog 


6 awTrjo, 


6 naxrig 


" awTTJoog, 


naxigog 



So TO didov didovTog, to Xbx^^v l6/&evTog, to ngayjua Ttgdy/na' 
Tog, TO /Liikv juehiog. 

Note 2. The noun -^ yvvij woman, gen. ^uj^a^xog, changes 
at into ^. It is not necessary to manufacture FYNAIZ for 
the sake of ywaiyidg, yvpaixl, &c. 

Note 3. Neuters in ag are contracted when this ending 
is preceded by e; as to sag ^^, to aiiag aTrj^, to delecxg, to 



36 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

cpQsag^ TO iceag ^frjo, gen. eagog %o^, OTicnog an^Togy delaocTog di' 
^r]Tog, cpqiaTog (pgrjidg, xiagog icr^gog. 

Note 4. Nouns in sig and ev, gen. sprog, are contracted, 
when these endings are preceded by ^ or o; as o rTur^eig 
Tifir^g^ TO Ti^riev TLjur^v^ 6 nlaxdeig Tiluicovg, to nluxdev nXuxovv, 
ri Tganet,6eLg Tga7iet,ovg, gen. ivfir^evzog Tt^/Lir^vTog^ nlandevTog 
nlaxovvTog, Tgans'C^devTog Tgane'C^ovviog. 

Note 5. The quantity of the last syllable of the nomi- 
native, and the quantity of the penult of the genitive, must 
be learned by observation. Nevertheless we remark here 
that: 

(1). Monosyllabic nominatives are long; as "^idgvg^ t6 nuv. 
Except rig, rig, xt and tI. 

(2). The vowels a, ^, f, in the penult of the genitive are 
short, wh(Mi this case ends in og pure ; as to yr^gcxg yr^guog, 
r^ 7i6lig ndkXog, to d&itgv daycgvog. Except '^ yguvg ygaog, i^ 
yofv^ va6g. 

(3). The penult of the genitive of substantives is long, 
when this case terminates in avog^ ivog, wog ; as 6 Tn(xv t^- 
ravog, r^ ^alajulg ^alixfiXvog^ 6 fl^dgyvg fl^ogxvvog. 

§ 37. 1. The accusative singular is formed by dropping 
og of the genitive and annexing «. E. g. 

6 xoga^ xogaxog Ace. xooocxa 

6 ^'jtga^j ^'ytga^og *' ^'^gtx^a 

6 yiyag yiyavjog *' yiy avxa 

2, Nouns in tg, vg^ avg, ovg^ of which the genitive is in og 
pure (§ 16. 2), form their accusative by dropping g of the 
nominative and annexing v. E. g. 

6 iXd-vg i/d^vog Acc. i/di^v 

7j nokig Tcoliog " nohv 

ri ^ai5^ raog ^' vavv 

If the genitive is not in og pure, they can have v in the 
accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is 
not accented. E. g. 

7] xdgvg xogv&og Acc- xogv&a or xogvv 

6, 71 oqvvg ogvld^og " ogvi&a or ogvtv 

6, ri eijekni^g sMlnidog " avelnida or sveXni^v. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 37 

But never ilTtlv, cpgovrlv, TtaTglv^ from i^Jilg iXnidog, cpqovxlg 
q)govrldog, naiQlg naiqidog. 

Note 1. The Homeric language has ace. /?o«, evq^a, ix&^ta, 
pia, ddea = 'i]dia, /goa, from ^ovg, evgvg, i/^vg, vuvg, r^d{}g. 

Note 2. The nouns 'AtioIImv Apollo^ noasido^v Poseidon 
or Neptune, 6 xvaschv a kind of mixed drink, have ace. 
^Arcoklcova and ^AtzoIIcj, Iloaeidibva and lloaeidcb, Kvas^va and 
xvHSb) Homeric icvKei^oj, 

^38. 1. In many instances the vocative singular is like 
the nominative. 

2. Many nouns form their vocative singular by dropping 
og of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot stand 
at the end of a Greek word {^ 16. Note 2). E. g. 

6 dalixwv daiuovog voc. daXfiov 

6 leojv "keovTog " Mov 

6 yiyag yiyapTog " yiyav 

r^ fir^TTjQ (.irjTeoog " jLLr^reg. 

3. Nouns in ig, vg, svg, drop the g of the nominative. 
The ending sv is always circumflexed. E. g. 

rj Ttolcg, Tj ilnlg voc. noh, elTtt 

6 i'/d-vg^ 6 innevg " ^/^j Innev. 

4. Nouns in rjg gen. eog, shorten ^]g into eg, E. g. 6 
Siay.qajr^g^ voc. I^chxgaTeg. 

5. Feminines in w, wc, gen. oog, have or in the vocative. 
E. g. -^ ^/c6 r^/ooc, voc. ^;^or. 

Note I. A few proper names in ag ^en. ocvrog, have a in 
the vocative ; as 6 nolvda^iag TIolvdaaavTog^ 6 Adodaixag 
Aaodd/iiccpTog, voc. Tlovlvda^a (Homer.), Auoduaa. 

Note 2. Observe the vocative sing, of the following 
nouns ; o ^AtioDmjp ^AnollMi'og^ 6 Iloaeidwp Iloascdibpog, 6 
(jojTr^g (TOJTrigog, VOC. ^'AtzoHop, Iloasidop, ameg. 

Note 3. Vocatives which end in a short syllable, may 
throw the accent back on the antepenult; as voc. I^coxga- 
jsg, Jyjudad-eveg^ d-vyareg, 'Anollov^ from 2{x)7cg6.Ti]g^ ^T]fxo- 
ax^ipT^g, S^vyuTijg, ^Anolhxjv. 

§ 39. 1. The dative plural is formed by dropping og of 
the genitive and annexing en, E. g. 

4 



38 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

6 xriQv^ xr'iQvTcog dat. plur. ariQv^t, ^ 5. 2. 
6 yvip yvTiog *' " 7^*/^^ ibid. 

rj Xaundg la/itTKxdog " " luunixac^ ^ 10. 2. 

6 y/^ag ylyavwg " " ylyaui^ ^ 12, 4. 

2. Nouns in ei^^ form their dative plural by dropping g of 
the nominative and annexing (jv. E. g. o ^uadevg, 6 ^Jto^- 
oTTfit'^, (Za^. pZ?/r. ^aadevaL, aqicjievai. Also the nouns '>^ 
7^ai5c, ?] vavg, 6, i^ /^oi)^, 6 ;^oi5g, dat. plur. yQuvai, vavcri, ^oval^ 

Note. For the Homeric dative plur. see i 35, Note 2, 

SYNCOPATED NOUNS. 

§ 40. Some nouns in t^q gen. BQog^ drop the e in the g*e7ii- 
^ii5e and dative sing, ; as 6 Trarr^o father^ gen. nujiQog na- 
TQog, dat. najeqi naiQi. In the dative plural they drop the 
^ and insert an a before o^^; as ncxTodcut^ (regularly nujiqav). 
So "^ ^r^TTjQ mother^ r^ d-vydTT]Q daughter, ri yaairj^ venter. 

raGTTig, 9^, has dat. plur. yaargdaL and yaair^oui,. — ^'^ctttJ^, 6, 
5ifar, gen. daTEQog, imitates nurr^g only in the dative plur. 
daiQUGL. — ''Avr^Q^ 6, man, vir, gen. dvtoog dpdgdg, dat. di't'^i' 
dvdgi, ace. (i:>^t'^« ardgoc, voc ai^eo, plur. (jcreQs; dpdgsg, dvigwy 
dvdQ(bv, d.vd()6i(ji^ dvioag drdgag^ dual, dptoe ap^QS^ d.vsQOLv dpdgoXv. 
For the insertion of ^, see ^ 26. Note. — APHN, 6, ri^lamby 
gen. d:^J^o?, dat. (ioj^/, ace. agva, plur. aqveg^ uovdcri. — Kvijjv, 6, 
2o£*, xvvog, xvvi, xuva, xvov, plur- Jfi^^e?, Ttvvo))^^ xvai, xijj^ag. — 
Jrj^riTi^o, Tj, Demeter or Ceres, gen. Jr^fur^rsgog JrifA,rjgog, dat. 
drjfiriTSQi Jri^T]TQv^ acc. Jr^^ur/Tga, 

Note. The poets often drop the ^ also in the accusative, 
nominadve and genitive plur. ; as S^vyouQa^ 'i^vyajqeg, najg^y, 
for S^v^aTega, '&v:yaTBgsg^ naxki^v, 

CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

^ 41. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the 
genitive ends in og pure (^ 16- 2), are contracted. 

The contracted accusative "plural is always like the con- 
tracted nominative plural. 

\ 42. Nouns in ???, eg, og, gen. fog, nouns in ag gen. ao?, 
and nouns in w, ing, gen. oog, are contracted whenever the 
termination is preceded by a vowel. E. g. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



39 



s. 


6 (Socrates) ^ 


s. 


t6 (wall) 


N. 


2b)HQ&zi]g 


N. 


TsT/og 


G. 


ScuxgdcTsog Sotxg&Tovg 


G. 


XElxsog Tsi^ovg 


D. 


Smxq&Te'C Huixq&tsi, 


D. 


Tsixs'i relxsi 


A. 


SmXQ&TEoi 2u)y.gixzrj 


A. 


rsXxog 


V 


SihxqaTSs 


V. 


TeXxog 


P. 


(Socrateses) 


P. 


(walls) 


N. 


Smxo&Tesg Zoixq&Tsig 


N. 


relxea tbI/ij 


G- 


2ojitgaTi(ov Smkquiwv 


G. 


TBixibiv zeix&v 


D. 


SoixqixiBai (v) 


D. 


XBlxeai (v) 


A. 


SMXQ&Tsng 2my.q&TSig 


A. 


TBlxea retxi] 


V. 


2iaxQ&Tssg Suxgdisig 


V. 


tsixea TBlxri 



D. (tioo Socrateses) 

N. A. Y. ^ojxgdTSS IJooxgari] 



D. {two walls) 

N. A. V. T81/66 TSC/T] 
G. D. TSlX^OiV TBlXOlv 



So ^ TQiriQrjg a galley with three hanks of oars, Lat. tri- 
remis, 6 'AQKjTorshjg Aristotle, 6 Jr]iuoad-ivi]g DemostheneS' 
So TO ^ilog arrow, to bgog mountain, to nevd^og grief. 



S, TO [prize) 


S' 'h (echo) 


N. ysgag 


N. riX^ 


G. yegaog ysgcog 


G. 'hx^og iixovg 


D. ysgoc'C yega 


D. r^xoC ijxol 


A. ytgag 


A. '^X^cc iixia 


V. yegag 


V. iixoi 


P. (prizes) 


p. (echos) 


N. yegaa ysgd 


N. 'hxoi 


G. yegdix)v yegwv 


G. rix^y 


D. yegacFL (v) 


D 'hxo^s 


A. yegaa ysga 


A. rixoiug 


V. yegoia yega 


V. iixoi 


D. (two prizes) 


D. (two echos) 


N. A. V. y^goLB yega 


N. A. V. rixcb 


G. D. ysgdoiv yegi^v 


G. D. r^XOlv 



So TO dinag gohlet, to ailocg effulgence, ro yrigag old age, to 
degag skin, to acpilag bench. So ^^ Fogyib Gorgo, '^ Ai]T(i) La- 
tona, ^ 2ancpih Sappho, -q i](bg morning, ^ aidfhg respect. 

Note 1. Proper names in xXez/g, contracted ii^g, undergo 
a double contraction in the dative sing., and sometimes in 
the accusative sing. E. g. 



40 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

N- 6 TlsQixXiT^g IlFQixlrig Pericles 
G. JleoiKlleog nsQixliovg 
J). llFQixXee'C neQcaliei negixleZ 
A- negcxXiea IleoLxlbOc Ile^iyclT] 
V. nsfjialeeg UeglxXeig 

Sometimes they have gen. -xleog, dat. -ycXi'i ; as o 'Hga- 
^Xrig Hercules^ gen. 'H^ajcUog, dat. 'H^ultcU'C. The vocative 
"Hgaiileg occurs. 

Note 2. The ending fa, when preceded by a vowel, is 
generally contracted into «; as toj^ -vyUa i5/t« from o vytrjg, 
rd xXseu vMu from to xltog, top Qefiiaioxliea Qe/LiiaToxXia 
from 6 Qe^iiuTOTilrig. 

Note 3. The nouns to xa^ag AorTi, and to jioctg prodigy, 
often drop the t and are contracted like ytoag- thus gen. 
yJgaTog xigaog 7(igit)g, dat. xIqutl xega'C yigcc^ &C. 

Note 4. The dual and the plural of nouns in o), ojg, fol- 
low the analogy of the second declension. — The lonians 
make the accusative sing, in ovv ; as '^ ^?^tw t^v Atjtovv, ri 

'JW TijV *IOVV. 

Note 5. The Homeric language contracts ssog into r^og 
or etog, esv into ^"t or ft^, «£« into ^a or eta; as 6 ^HgaxXrig^ 
''Hgaxlaeog ^Hgaxlr^og, 'HgaxXesi '^HguxXrjC, '^ HgaxXtsa ^Hgaxlria • 
t6 aneog, gen. Gnieog crnsXog, dat. anie'C QrcrjC and (JneXt^, 6 ^ii^- 
^e?jg, gen. evggsiog ivggelog. 

§ 43. 1. Nouns in ^?, i^g, gen. log, vog, are contracted in 
the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative plural. E. g. 

S. 6 (serpent) S. 6 (fish) 

N. o(p(.g N. i/^^vg 

G. ogD^og G. i/d^vog 

D. ogptt ocpZ J), i/&vC ixd-vZ 

A. 0(pLV A. ixd-vv 

V. og)^ V. ^^(^i:. 

P. (serpents) P. (fishes) 

N. ogDteg 09)Tg N. i/d'{)6g l/^vg 

G. bcpiixtv G. 1/&V0W 

D. 0(j()tO-(' (j^) D. l/d'VGL (v) 

A. 0(jDfcag ogot^ A. i/&vag i/d^vg 



THIRD DECLENSION. 41 

D. {tioo serpents) D. ( two fishes) 

N. A. V. o(pc6 N. A. V. i/&vs 

G. D. dcpiotv G. D. i/Moiv 

% The nouns o, 17 i^o^^? ox^ ^i ygavg old woman, ^ vavg ship, 
and 6, ri oig sheep, are declined as follows : 

Bovg, gen. ^oog, dat. (^ot, ace. i^ovj/, voc. ^ov, plur. nom. 
j?6s^ ^ovg, gen. (5oco^, dat. /^oucr^, ace. |56a^ (^ov^, dual nom. ace. 
voc. ^06, gen. dat. §ooiv, 

rgccvg, gen. /^fto^, dat. yQat, ace. y^avi/, voc. /oav, plur. nom. 
ygasg ygavg, gen. yga^v, dat. ygavcri, ace. y^aaj y^«{;^. The 
lonians say /o?-/!?^, ygijt, ygrjv, ygr^eg. 

J\^avg, gen. vedjg, dat. ^^/t, ace. i^«i}j^, plur. nom. vv^sg, gen. 
j'fwj^, dat. raval, ace. ^ai)?- The regular form is, gen. i^«6^, 
dat. i^at, 6lc. The lonians say, vrjvg, gen. i^?/6g and psdg, dat. 
^V^ ace. ^^a and via, voc. ^^^iJ, plur. nom. vrieg and ^e'e?, gen. 
vr^cbv and ^e^j/, dat. yai'cr/ Horn. vrieudL and viBcri, ace. ^^ag 
and yeag, dual dat. veoXv, 

"Dig olg, gen. olog olog, dat. olt oU', ace. ol> ol^, plur. nom. 
&g olc(w-) oleg, dat. oeat Hom. oscfcrv, ace. ol«g ol'g(w-) ofa^. 

3. Most nouns in ig, *, vg, v, change ^ and v into f, in all 
the cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
singular. Substantives in i^g and vg generally change og into 
wp. K g. 



s. 


■fj (state) 


S. 


6 (cubit) 


N. 


ndXig 


N. 


nrjxvg 


G. 


7i6i.S(ag 


G. 


rn^/smg 


D. 


ndXsX noXst 


D 


mfixs'C TTij^e* 


A. 


Tiohv 


A. 


Tcrjxvv 


V. 


niXt, 


V. 


yiTixv 


P. 


(states) 


P. 


(cubits) 


N. 


n6Xseg ndlsi^g 


N. 


niqxesg 7r^/c»s 


G. 


TTolsuV 


G. 


ni^x^^" 


D. 


noleai (v) 


D. 


7ii/\xe<Ji (v) 


A. 


7i6leoig Ttolsig 


A. 


nrixBng jTiJ/ets 


V. 


noleeg ndlsig 


V. 


n-i\xeoig 7Tij/e»s 


D. 


(two states) 


D. 


(two cubits) 


N. 


A. V. noXsB 


N. 


A. V. nixes 


G. 


D. noXeotv 


G. 


D. mixioiv 



So 6 oc^ig, 6 Txmig husband, 17 i^to-fc position, t] e^tg habit, 
t] yUpi^Gtgf ^] (fvaig, 7] v^gvg insult. So oTiilexug ax, 

4* 



42 INFLECTION OF WORDS* 



S, t6 (mustard) 


N. 


TO (city) 

li(TTV 




G. Oivrineog 


G. 


uaiBog 




D. Oivrine'C (TivriTtBb 


D. 


acTTB'C (x(Txe§ 




A. alvrjTtv 


A. 
V. 


a(TTV 
(JLGXV 




P. 

G. Uivrjnmv 

A. cr^^rj/rea aivriTtTj 


P. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


(cities) 
acTTBa iHari] 
ddTiojv 

UUTBCfi (v) 
^aiBa UCTTT] 




V. c^j/TJTrea glpt^tti] 


V. 


UUTBOL ciCFTT] 




N. A. V. (JlvriTtSS 


N. 


(two cities) 
A. V. oiaTBS 




G. D. at,vi]Tiiocv 


G. 


D. ^(TTBOLV 




TO TiBTtEQv pepper, 10 xiwdt 


8aQL 


cinnabar- So 


TO n(bv 



flock. 

Note 1. Contracted genitives, as nr]x(bv, '^ifitaovg from 
Tifiicrvg half, neiit. r^uiuv, belong to the later Greek. — Geni- 
tives in wff from neuters in t and v are rare. 

Note 2. The old grammarians tell us that the Attic geni- 
tive and dative dual of nouns in i^g and vg ends in ^Vy as tuXv 
ii61b(ov, toIp nri/B(i)v. Such forms however are not found 
in any Greek writer of any authority. 

Note 3. The noun ^i nohg has, in the Horn, language, 
gen. nohpg, dat. nolrj'i, plur. nom. nolrjBg, ace. nolrjag, 

§ 44. Nouns in Bvg are contracted in the dative singular, 
and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural. They 
generally have o)g in the genitive. E. g. 

S. 6 (king) P, (kings) 

N. ^oLddBvg N. ^aadsBg ^aadetg 

G. ^(xailsix)g G. ^(xadeuiv 

D. ^(xcrdei ^acrdBl J), ^uulIbvul (v\ 

A. ^uaLlea A. ^oLcnlmg ^aaiXBlg 

V. ^(xctlIbv V. §(x(nXBBg ^aailBTg 

D. N. A. V. ^aadie G. D. ^aadioi^v 

Note 1. Contracted gen. and ace sing, occur ; as toi; IIbi^ 
gaiibg from nevoaiBxjg Pirczeus, top avyyoacpj] from 6 avyygu- 
(fBvg writer, top le^i] from 6 UgBvg priest, — The endings fa, 



ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 



43 



^a^, after a vowel, are contracted into a, ag ; as rbv yoia yoa^ 
To\>g %oiag ;^oag, from 6 xosvg, — The ending eeg is sometimes 
contracted into ^?; as ol Innrig from 6 innevg horseman^ 
oi 'u4yaQvrig from 6 ''Ax^Qvevg an Acharnian, — For the quan- 
tity of « and ag-i see ^ 35. Note 1. 

Note 2. The Homeric language declines nouns in evg as 

follows : ^(xddsvg, ^aadriog, ^auilrf, ^aadria, ^aadT]6g, |5«a*-» 

INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 

^ 45. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one 
form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are : 
(1). The names of the letters of the alphabet ; as to, tov, 

T© al(pa, TO, TOV, T(0 $?, (fee. 

(2). The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 inclusive ; as 

ol, alj zd, T(bp, Tolg, raXg, nivTS, e|, dexa, &c. 

(3). All foreign names not grecized ; as 6, tov, tw, xoy 
"AM^a Adam, ^i^ Setfi, &lc. 

ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 

§ 46. L Nouns, which have, or are supposed to have 
more than one nominative, are anomalous. Such are the 
following : 



d.rid(hv, ovog, v, niglitingale, 
regular. From AHJfL 
come, gen. ai^dovg, voc. 
d.ridoi, 

dcidi^g, ov, 6, the infernal re 



vaTot, yovdTOJv, yovacv, yd- 

VaTS^ yOVOLTOLV. Horn. TOV 

yovpog, T(D yowl, tu yovvccy 
tG)v yovvMv. 
yvvri, see <^ 36. Note 2. 
g*ion5, regular. From^i-2' datg, idog, jight^vegu\?^v. Yvom 
come gen. aidog^ dat. ofK^^, JA2 comes dat. ^«t. 
ace. oLi^oL. dhdqov, ov, to, tree, regular. 

(jcljiri, rig, i], strength, regu- From to dirdgog comes dat. 
lar. From AAa comes plur. derdgeat. 
dat. ^l>il- ^12 see Zevg. 

(xvdgdnodoy, ov, TO, slave, regU' dogv, to, spear. From dO^ 
lar. Frum A A^JPAnOr:^, PA2 come dogaTog, Joo«- 



-TTo^oc, comes Homer, dat. 
plur. (jcvdgccnodecFdi, 
yopv, t6, knee- From rO- 
NA2 (Mod. Greek y6pa) 
come yoi^aTog, yovaTi^ y6- 



Tt, doQOLTa, dogdcTUJt'y dogaai. 
Horn. Tou dogog and ^ouoo;, 
T(5 dogl and dovgl, tu dovga, 
T(by dovgun'y Tolg doigeaai, 
Tw dovgs. 



44 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



dogv^6og, ov, 6, spear-polish' 
er, regular. From dOPT. 
A 02 comes voc. dogv^i. 

eixihv, opog, r^, image^ regu- 
lar. From EIKSl come, 
gen. elKovg, ace. e^J«c6, ace. 
plur. elKovg. 

Zevg, 6, voc. Zeu, Zeus or 
Jupiter- From ^12 come, 
Tov diog, T(5 dci, Tdv ^la. 
From Ztjj^, tov Zi]v6g, t(5 
Zrivl^ TOV Zr^va. 

dsgtxTTWP, ovTog, 6, attendant^ 
regular. From QEPA'^ 
we obtain, ace. S^igcxna, 
nom. plur. S-iganeg. 

ixcbg, (bgog, 6, ichor, regular. 
Ace. sing, ixihga and l/^- 

xd^wg, 0) or wog, 6, cable' 
From KAAOi: come, o^ 
a&loi^ Tovg yculovg. 

9((jcga Ionic >fci:07/, to, /iea(i, gen* 
xdgr]Tog, dat. J<«07;Ttand 3«d^ 
(like negaTL xegaL aiga), nom. 
plur. xdoa (like xegaTa xi- 
Qua xsga). From KPA2 
come, gen. xgotTog, dat. 3<^«- 
t/, ace TO or tov xgdcTa, gen. 
plur. agdiojv, dat. plur- ^gcc- 
oL From KPAA2, gen. 
x^darog, dat. xgdiaTv^ nom. 
plur. ;t^d«Ta, ace. plur. tov? 
xgaTag. From KAPHAHy 
tov xagriaTog, zqi xa^rjar^, rd 

xXd^og, ou, 6, bough, regu- 
lar. From the imaginary 
KAA2 come, dat. xladl, 
Horn. dat. plur. xl6Ld8uv. 

xotvMvog^ oi), 6, partaker, regu- 
lar. From7CO/7\^i2iV^come, 
nom. plur ol xoi^vmsg^ ace. 
plur. xot^vmag. 



KPAA2 and KPAH see xdo(7. 

xgivov, ou, TO, Zz'/?/, regular. 
From TO KPIN()2 comes 
dat. plur. xglveat. 

xgdxTj, ?/?, '^, i/joo/, regular. 
From KPOa comes ace. 
sing, xgoxa. 

l^xug contracted Aag, 6, stone, 
gen. ^(iccos Ado?, dat. ^dat 
Adi', ace. Adaj/ Adj/, nom. 
plur. l(xaeg lusg^ gen. plur. 
\tx(jL(x)v luu)v, Hom. dat. plur. 
Xdceaacv, dual l(xae lus. 
From AAA 2 ( — ) comes 
gen. ^6lov (like tix^Iov from 
T«a/a?). 

fi6LQTvg^ 6, witness, ace. (LKxgTw^ 
dat. fx6igTv(Ti. From MAP- 
TYP come, Toi3 /u/xgTvgog^ 
Tw fiagTvgv^ toj^ /LKigivga, ol 
/udgTvgeg, twv juagTvgu)v, Tovg 
fiugivgcxg, to) fidgTvge, loXy 
(xagrvgoiv. 

iudaTt^, rpg, 1^, scourge, regu- 
lar. From ^/^2'T/2' come, 
dat. ^d(jTu contracted /ud- 
o^Tt, ace. /mxaxi^v. 

ovBi.gov, TO, dream. From 
0NEIPA2 come, tov oy^r- 
gaTog, tw oveigaTt, tu ovsiga- 
TOf, &,c. 

ov? Doric S?, TO, ear, tou d)r(5?, 

TO) d)Ti, Td Stw, TWy (OTOJV^ 

ToXg iduL 

ngicr^^vg, 6, old man, ace. 
Tigicr^uv, voc. ngsa^v. The 
rest from 6 ngea^vTTjg, ov. 
A nom. plur. ngia^r^eg oc- 
curs in Hesiod. 

Ttgia^vg, 6, ambassador, tov 
ngealS eoog, ot, ngia^eig, roTg 
7igiG[3eGv, The rest from 
6 TigBO^^VTrig^ ov. 



ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 



45 



ng6(TO}7TOv^ ov, to, face, regular. 
From the imaginary nPO- 
2J2nA2 come Tp\ur, uom. 
TtQoadmara, dat. ngoawTTocat^. 

ngd/oog, ov, r^, ewer, regular. 
From nP 0X0X2 comes 
dat. plui. TiQoxovdv (like 
§ovai from ^ovg). 

Tcvg, TO, fire, gen. nvQog, dat. 
tivqL From UTPOJV come, 
rd Ttvga watck-fires, rcbv 
Ttvgm', ToTg nvgoig. 

ax cog, TO. From I^KAU^ tov 
axazog, to) axaTi, <fcc. 

(jTay6y, ovog^ ri, drop, regu- 
lar. From UTAa comes 
al (TTdyeg. 

(jTl/og, ov, 6, roiu, regular. 
From 2TI^, come, t^^ 



Taco?, CO, 6, peacock, regular. 
From TA02, ol tccoL 

vdojg, TO ^ water. From' ^^^-2*, 
TOV vdaTog, tQ vdari, Tuvda- 
Ttt, TW^ vduTiov, Tolg vdacri. 
From vdog comes vd6L= £- 
dart,. 

vlog, ov, 6, ,9072, regular. From 
'TIEYi: come, gen. vUog, 
dat. vleT, <fec., like §audevg. 
From 'TI^: come the epic, 
TOV vlog, T(5 vU, TOV via, xd) 
i^Fe, 0^ visg, ToXg vlecrv and 
vldcri^, Tovg vlag. 

{lafilvrj, rig, ri, battle, regular. 
From ' r2MI2, dat. U^lvi. 

Xsliddiv, ovog, i], swallow, reg- 
ular. From XEAIJIl, voc. 
;^£^tJor. 

Sp see oi)^. 



OTixog, ttJ o-t^;^/, &c 

2. Nouns, which have one nominative, but more than one 
form for any one of the cases, are anomalous. Such are the 
following : 



dliog, ri, threshing' floor, gen. 

aho or alvjog, dat. alco or 

dim, <kc. 
yelcog, 6, laughter, gen, yeha or 

yelojTog, dat. /fc^o) or yeloJTi^, 

(fee. 



;«XerJag, and ;<^er^. 
firiTgcog, 6, maternal uncle, 

gen. firiTgoj or (xr^Tg(x)og^ dat. 

(aTJroo) or (i^i^'roo/i, (fee. 
fivxi^g, 6, mushroom, gen. /wu- 

3«?/To^ and luvxov, (fee. 



S-e^mg, ^, justice, the goddess o^J^^?, o, r^, 52r(f, gen. ogvid^ocy 

Themis, gen. t^o^ or ^xog or dat. bgvT&i, <fec. plur. nom. 

iOTTo, or to;, dat. t^t or trt, and ace. ogrTg or ogveig, 

(fee. ^6"' ogvscov. 

idgchg, 6, sweat, gen. idgcb or 7rdTg(x)g, 6, paternal uncle, gen- 

IdgCoTog, dat. t(J^(5 or Idgmi^, ndTgio and Ticir^woc, (fee. 



(fee. 

jcAetc, ^, key, gen. xXsidog, dat. 
xXsidl, ace. yiXelda (fe xX^r^, 
plur. nom. and ace. ;<A£r(5f;, 



0"^?, 6, 7720^^, gen. aeo; and 

(TTiTog, (fee. 
;i;'^c6;, wros, 6, shin, regular. 

Dat. sing. XQ^ and XQ'^'^^- 

Note 1. All proper names in r^g gen. sag (^ 42.) have r] 
and rjv in the accusative sing. ; as o \'fgiaToq:uy)]g, tov ^Agi^ 
(iToq}(jcveog, top ^Agicriocpuyi] and ^Agioiocfikyriv. 



46 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

The lonians make ace. sing, in sa from nouns in rjg gen, 
ov ; as o rvyi]q^ tov Fvyov, tov Fvyea — 2!iQeipL(xdi]g^ ov, has 
TOG. I^gsipiadeg. 

Note 2. Some nouns in i^g have gen. tdog or log ; as o 
ndtQcg Paris, lov Udgidog and i^og, i^ //r^i/^g resentment, ir^g 
(Liriridog and i^og. For Oefiig see ^ 46. 2. 

Note 3. A few proper names are declined according to 
the following models: 6' lawr^g Jannes,iov' Iuvvri^T(^' loLvvr^, 
TOV 'lavvr^v, co ' lavvij. 6 Flovg Glus, tov rXov, toJ FIov, toj' 
rXovv, w rlov. 6 ^iovvg dimin. of dtovvaog, tov dwvv, t(5 

dwVV, TOJ/ ^iOVVV, 6) ^iOPV. 

DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

§ 47. Defective nouns are those of which only some parts 
are in use. Such are the following : 

iTi](Tiav^ wj/, ol, etesian winds. ' OU/UTtta^wv, xd, the Olympic 

No singular. games. No singular. 

%a an ace. plural, in the for- ovag^ t6, dream, only in the 

mula ^^a cpigsiv to show nom. and ace. sing. 

favor. 02 and 02 2 ON, t6, eye, 

^lu&liiLa, My, T(x, the Isthmian dual nom. and ace. ocrcje, 

games. No singular. plur. gen. ojgmv, dat. oa- 

^t?, 0, ZzoTi, ace. 'i^iV' (Jovg Homer, oaaotcri^v. 

AI2, 6, fine linen, dat. ^^t/, ocpslog, to, advantage, only as 

ace. ^tra. nom. 

^6,h], ?;g, 1^, armpit, only in Uvd-ia, wv, rd, if/te Pythian 

the iphrQ.se ^nd fidlr]g under games. No singular. 

ifAe arm, clandestinely. rd^in the formula d) zdj/ O^feow. 

Nsfiea, COP, rd, the Nemean i^Tra^, to, Tua/czTig*, as opposed 

games. No singular. to o^a^; only as nom. and 

NIW, % ace. sing. viq)a, snow- ace. sing. 

ADJECTIVES. 

^ 48. 1. In adjectives of three endings, the feminine 
is always of the first declension ; the masculine and the 
neuter are either of the second or of the third. 

2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the second 
or of the third declension. The feminine of adjectives 
of two endings is the same with the masculine. 

3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first or of 
the third declension. Such adjectives are either mascu- 
line, or feminine, or common. 



ADJECTIVES. 



4T 



ADJECTIVES IN og, 

^49. 1. Most adjectives in og have masc. o?, fern. ?/, neut. 
ov ; as aocpog, ri aocpri, to aocpov. When og is preceded by a 
vowel or by ^,' the fenninine has a instead of ^; as u?*o;, 
d^^a, a^LOv fiaxQog, fuaxgd^ fiaxgoi^. 



Sing, 6 [wise) 
Nom. (Tocpog 



Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 

Plur* 

Num. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 
G. D. 



aocpov 
cro<jp(5 

(JOCpOP 

(Tocpa 

(TocpoC 

crocpcbv 

aoffoTg 

aocpovg 

uocpol 

cro(p6 
uocpolv 



"Ti {wise) 
aocpi] 
crocprig 
aocpij 

GOCpiqV 

ao(pri 

ao(p(xl 

aocpibv 

GocpaXg 

Gocp6ig 

oocpaL 

fjocpd 
(Tocpalv 



TO [wise) 
aocpov 
aocpov 
ao(jpcj 
aocpov 
aocpov 

aocp6c 

aocpov 

aocpoXg 

aocpd 

aocpd 

aocpih 
aocpoXv 



Sing' 6 [worthy) 
Nom. a^iog 



Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
&c,, like aocp6g. 



So >t«X6g beautiful, Sc/aMg good, fiovog alone, icanog had, 
di^fiQTixog popular, niaxog faithful, 

ri [worthy) to [worthy) 
d^iog d^la d^uov 

d^lov d^lag d^lov 

d|to d|/a d^lco 

cx^iov d^lav d^LOv 

d^ie d^la d^tov 

So dy wg holy, cpihog friendly, vcoTiatog spi- 
nal- So also /LiaxQog long, novijqog wicked, evil, xa&agdg pure, 
^delvQog disgusting, i^evd-egog free, veagog dead, nixgog bitter- 

Note 1. Adjectives in oog have rj in the feminine ; as 
S'oog, ^01], d^o6v^ swift, oydoog, oydoi], xiydoov^ eighth, dnXoog, 
dnloT], dnXoov, simple. Except when oog is preceded by ^; 
as dd^Qoog^ dO-qda dd-Qoov, all together. 

2. Adjectives in eog, ea, €ov, and oog, -o?/, oov, are contract- 
ed according- to ^ 32, and ^ 34. E. g. 

XQvaeog /qvaovg, /Qva^a xgvari, XQvaeov xgvrjovv, RGH. XQvaiov 
Xgvaovj x^^^^^9 X^^^^9, &c. 



48 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



dQY^QSog d^yi^^oi;?, ^oyvQsa dcoyvga^ ^gyvgeov ^gyvgovv, gen. 
^gyvgeov uoyvoov, (jL^yvqiag dLqyvqrxg^ &,c. 

anloog anlovg^ dnXor] dnlri^ dnloov dnlovv^ gen. dnXoov dnXov, 
dnldrjg dnXrig, (Slc. 

Note 2. The ending a of the feminine is long. Except 
dlog, dla, dlov, divine, and a few others. 



ADJECTIVES IN 0)g, 

^ 50. Adjectives in cog have masc. and fern, (og, neut. wy. 

E. g. 

Sivg. 6, r/ (fertile) to {fertile) 

Nom. evyeojg svyacov 

Gen. evyeui sHysco 

Dat. evyecd evyeco 

Ace. £1^'/^^^ svyeojv 

Voc- £ii/ew? ei^Yewy 

&c. like v6(x)g and (jLV(hyEO)v, ^ 33. 2. » 

Note. Adjoctives in -yelojg (from yAwg laughter), and 

-x£^w^ (from >«^o«g how), have gen. w or wto? ; e. g. ^^^^/.o- 

^e^^g /oTZcZ of laughter, gen. (jctAoj^eAa* or gjdoyikuno;, dat. 

<3DtA6)^e>la) or g)iXo^/£^uiT^, &,c. jgiae^g having three horns, gen. 

jglxeQco or jgLxegunog, &c. 

nimg full, has fern, yr^ea, neut. plur. yr^.t'a. 

ADJECTIVES IN vg, 

have masc. v?, fem. £ta, 



^ 51. Adjectives in vg gen. ^o^, have 
eut. V i as ^'^i^Jft'^, ''5 }'^wi;;ca«, to ylv/.v. 



neut 



5^mg-. [sweet) 
Nom. 7^u;(it? 
Gen. 7Au;ffc'o^ 
Dat. ylvTteC ylvxeZ 
Ace- 7Au;ci;l/ 
Voc. y^vxv 

Plur. 

Nom. ylvxeeg ylvaslg 
Gen. ylvysMv 
Dat. yAujfecT^ (v) 
Ace. j'^fjfeag y^vx^r^ 
Voc. y^^vxeeg ylvxeXg 

Dual 

"^.A.Y.ylv^ie 
G. D. ylvxioiv 



ri (sweet) 
ylvxeTa 
ylvKsiag 
ylvxeia 
yXvxeXav 
ylvxeXa 

yXvxsiav 
ylvxsicbv 
ylvxeia^g 
ylvxsiag 
ylvxelav 

ylvxeia 
ylvxeiaiv 



> (sweet) 
yKvxv 
ylvxiog 
ylvxi'C —el 
ylvxiLf 
ylvxv 

ylvxea 
ylvxacov 
ylvxeav (v) 
ylvxicx. 
ykvxiu 

ylvxis 
^/Ivxioiv 



ADJECTIVES. 



49 



So ^ad-vg deep, ^gadvg slow, Sga/vg short, oHg sharp, -^riXvg 
female, r^dvg pleasant, o)Kvg swift, r^fnavg half. 

Note. The lonians make fern. £a and srj for s^a ; as 
wHta from ^^vg, ^a&ia or ^cxd^sy from ^a&vg. 

ADJECTIVES IN rjg AND ig, 

§ 52. 1. Adjectives in ?/? gen. eog have masc. and fem. rig, 

neu£. Bg ; as o, riulrid-rig, to dh^^ig. 



Sing, 


6, ri, [true 


) 


TO (true) 




Norn. 


alrjd-^g 




dlr^Mg 




Gen. 


dchi^iog 


dh]&ovg 


dlrjd^iog 


dlrjd-ovg 


Dat. 


dlrj&ei 


dhj&el 


dh]&8i 


dhi&€l 


Ace. 


dhj&ia 


dh]&ri 


dh]d^Bg 




Voc. 


ahi&sg 




dhiMg 




Plur. 










Nom. 


dlri&hg 


dl7]d-£lg 


dlrjma 


dh^&ri 


Gen. 


dlr^&eijjv 


dh]&(bp 


dh/&eii)v 


dlrj&ibv 


Dat. 


dh]&i(iL [v) 


dhjd^euv 1 


-) 


Ace. 


dhi&iag 


dlri&sig 


dlrid^iu 


dlrj^ri 


Yoc. 


dhid-seg 


dh^&sTg 


dhjd-ea 


dhj^ri 


Dual 










'N.X.Y. ulr/^is 


dh]&ri 


dlri&h 


dh-jdri 


G. D. 


dhi&ioLv 


dh]&OiP 


dhj&aocv 


dh]&OiV 



So (TacpriQ manifest, dua^r^g ignorant, stae^rig pious , B^xUr^g 
renowned, dvarvxr^g unfortunate. 

2. Adjectives in ig gen. toe, have two terminations, viz. 
masc. and fem. tg^ neut. i ; as 6, ^i I'dgig knowing, to Xdgi, gen. 
idgiog. So 6 vT^dng fasting, 

ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES IN cEC, Big, 7]V, OVg, vg, 0)V,(x)g, 

§53. 1. Adjectives in ag gen. ccpTog have masc. cic, fem. 
aaa, neut. «^ ; as o nag, t] ndaa, to nav. 

Sing, 6 (all) -^ (all) xh (all) 

Nom. Tidg ndaa Tidv 

Gen. navTog ndar^g navjog 

Dat. TiavTi ndatj TravTi 

Ace. ndi^Tu ndcrav ndv 

Voc. Tidg Txdaa nav 

Plur, 



Nom. Tjdvjeg 
Gen. ndyio)i> 



TKXCrCiL 



TlUl'TCt 
7lUVTi*)y 



50 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Dat. 


Tiaui [v\ 


TTuaatg 


naui {v) 


Ace. 


ndpTag 


TTuaag 


ndvTa 


Voc. 


Ttdv Tsg 


nauav 


TlULVJa 


Dual. 








N.A.V, 


, TKXVTS 


Ttdcra 


ndvTS 


G. D. 


ndvTOiv 


ndcraiv 


navToiv 



So all participles in ag ; as rioipag, ygdii^ag, Icndg, axdgy gen. 
Tvipaviog, ygdipavTog, &lc. 

Mslocg fislatva juslcxv, gen. (uelavog, (fee, black, 
Tdldg lAlaiva idlav, gen. %dlavog, (fee, unfortunate. 

2. Adjectives in eug gen. eviog have masc. Big, fern, ^crcro?, 
neut. ^y ; as 6 xf^gtei^g, ri ^aQieaaa, to xaqiev. 



Sing. 


{graceful) 


ri (graceful) 


TO [graceful) 


Norn. 


XotQlsLg 


yagteaaa 


)((xgiev 


Gen. 


^cxolevTog 


/agiecrcFrjg 


yaglsvTog 


Dat. 


^agtsvTL 


Xagduuri 


)(agievTi, 


Ace. 


'/agievja 


Xagleuuav 


yagisp 


Voc. 


Xagisv 


XaglecTcra 


/agiep 


Plur. 








Nom. 


/aoisvTEg 


XaglsaGCii 


XccgiepToc 


Gen. 


^agiivTCOV 


/agLsaacbv 


yagiivTOJP 


Dat. 


Xaqieau (v) 


/agLsaaavg 


yocglsaL (v) 


Ace. 


^agieyjag 


XcigiEdaag 


yagie vja 


Voc. 


y^aglevxeg 


yagieacrav 


yaglepTa 


Dual. 








N.A.V 


. yaglevre 


^agiBGaa 


yaglspTS 


G. D. 


yagUvTOiV 


Xagiiauaiv 


yagihxoiv 



So alfxajoBig bloody^ alOaloeig burnings daxgyost^g weeping, 
q}wpr\eig vocal, nlavyOSLg broad, flat, T^/^7jetg valuable, esteemed. 

Note 1. The dat. plur. of adjectives in ei^g forms an ex- 
ception to § 12. 4. 

The endings rjsig, i]euaa, tjsp, are contracted into jig, rjuaa, 
7]P ; and osig, oeaaa, osv, into ovg, ovaua, ovp ; as TT(4(rieig 
TLjiirig, Tifir^euGa TLjuricraa, tv^tibp T^^rj^, Z^^' Tt,a?]ej^Tog rm^/^Wg^ 
Ti}JLrjE(J(n]g rij[i7\acn]g • nlaTideig nXaxovg, nlaxosaaa nXa'Aovaua, 
nlav.oBP nluxovp, gen. nlaKoepiog nlaxovvTog. See § 36. 
Note 4. 

3. Participles in eig have masc. etc, fern, etaa, neut. £v ; 
as ^ Tvcpd'Eig, T/ zv(p&elaa^ rd xvapd^ip. 



ADJECTIVES. 



51 



Sing; o {being struck) r^ [being struck) to {being struck) 

Nom. Tvcpd-ei; Tvcp&sicra rvqj&ev 

Gen. rvcp&svrog Tvcpd^eiarig rvcp&evTog 

Dat. Tvcp&ivTo Tvcp&sicnq Tvcp&ei^rv 

Ace. Tvqjd^h'Ta Tvcp&sTaav Tvcpd^ii^ 

Voc- TV(p&6lg rvcp&elcra rvcpd^sv (fee. 

4. There are but two adjectives in 7]v ; 6 rtoi^v, ri jBQSiva^ 
TO Tsgevy tender, gen. rlgerog • and 6 aga7]v or ag^r^v, to agasv 
or dggev, male, gen. agaevog. 

5. Participles in ovg gen, ovrog have masc. ovg, fern, ouaa, 
neut. ov ; as 6 didovg, r^ didovaa, to dcdov. 

Sing. 6 (giving) ri [g iving) to [giving) 

Nom. didovg didovua didov 

Gen. didovTog didoiurjg didovTog 

Dat. SidovTV Scdovari didovTb 

Ace. didovTcx. didovdav didov 

Voc- didovg didovucc didov &,c. 

6. Participles in vg gen. wjog have masc. vg^ fern, vera, 
neut. f ^ ; as 6 dsixvvg, ri dsijcvvaa, to deizvvv. 

Sing, d [showing) ^i [showing) to [showing) 

Nom. dsizvvg dsacvvaa dsixvvv 

Gen. deizvvvTog dsizvvai^g deacvvvTog 

Dat. dsiKvvvTv dsixvvar^ dsinvvvTL 

Ace* deizvvvTcc dsixvvcrav deixvvp 

Voc. dsizvvg dsijcvvaa dsixvvv (fee. 

7. Adjectives in oru gen. oj^to^ have masc. (ov, fern, ovaoiy 
neut. ov ; as 6 ax(hv, r^ anovaa, to ixov. 

Sing, 6 [willing) -ri [willing) to [willing) 

Nom. excbv sxovaci kzov 

Gen. kxovTog kyovarjg exovrog 

Dat. exovTi kxovori ixovTi 

Ace. exovTa kxovaav shop 

Voc. ex(bv kxovaa ixov 
Plur. 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Dual, 

N. A. V. ixorre 

G. D. kxOVTOlV 



txovTsg 

kx6vT0)V 
IxOVGi [v) 

IxdvTag 
kxdvTsg 



kxovaac 

hxovoibv 

hxovdaig 

Ixovdag 

kxovuav 

hxovGa 
kxovdaiv 



exopTa 
hxovTa 
exovai [v) 
hxovra 
hxovxa 

ixovTE 

kxOPTOiP 



Sing. 


6, tJ (chaste) 


Nom. 


aihcpQoiv 


Gen. 


a(hcf}Qovog 


Dat. 


a(.o(f)Oorv 


Ace. 


(jihopoova 


Voc. 


a(hcpQix)P 



52 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

So ^.yiO)v unwilling' So also participles in o)v, as ivnro)Vy 
rvTtcbv, Tvnmv contracted rvnibp, gen. Tvniovxog, rvnorjog, 
TVTtiovTog contracted Tvnovvjog. 

Note 2. The feminine of adjectives and participles in ^c, 
£tg, ovg, vg, and ix>v, gen. viogy is formed by dropping og of 
the genitive, and annexing oa ; as Tiag navz^g {em, Tidvjcrvi 
itdaa, /uQlevg /aolepTog fern, /(xoleviau x^qIevgu, /of^/£<Tcr«, <fcc. 
See § 12. 4, and Note 2. 

8. Adjectives in o)v gen oj^o; have masc. and fem. oyv, neiit. 
ov ; as 1^ (Hx)q)ou)Vy to aij)(f (jop- 

10 (chaste) 
GC)q}Ooy 
aihcfooi'og 
oojqooyi 
aC)qQov 
oC)Cfooy <kc. 

9. Participles in f»g gen. orog have masc. wg, fem. via, 
neut. og ; as o jezvcp^g, i] jexvcpma^ to zexvcpog. 

Sing. 6 (having struck) -^i (having struck) to (having struck) 
Nom. TSTvqxhg TeTvq)vXa T6TV(p6g 

Gen. TSTvcpoTog leTvq^vlag rsTvcforog 

Dat. TSTVCpOTV TETVCpvia TSTVCpdzi^ 

Ace. TBTVQpOTCC TBTVCpvlaV TBTVCpOg 

Voe. TSTVCpchg TSTVCpvXa TSTVCpOg (fcc. 

§ 54. 1. The compounds of ddicov tear, have masc. and 
fem. vg, neut. v ; as o, ri ddaxgvg^ to aduxQv, tearless, gen. 
d:(5d;^^i;05. 

2. The compounds of '^too heart, lar^rrjQ mother, and TraTrJo 
father, have masc. and fem. ojo, neut. oq; as o, i^ ^eyalrixMOy 
TO /LtsyalriTog,. magnanimous , gen. ^eyalr^rooog • 6 t^ d,t/t]T&>^, to 
«/iTJroo, motherless, gen. uarjooog • 6 -j] djKiTwo, to djiaroo, ya- 
therless, gen. dTraro^og. 

3. The compounds of £^-^/> Ao;?e, and nohg city, have 
masc. and fem. i^g, neut. ^ gen. idog ; as 6 'fi (knolig^ to anoUy 
vagabond ; 6, i^ ei^eXjr^^, to evelni, having good hope. Those 
of /Aq'^^ grace, have masc. and fem. ig, neut. *, gen. tTog ; 
as 6, 1^ £i^'j«§t?, TO eijxaqi^ graceful. 

4. The compounds of novg foot, have masc. and fem. ovg^ 
neut. ouj^ ; as 6, i^ dinovg, to dinovv^ two footed, gen. diziodogy 
voc. ^ dinov. 



ADJECTIVES. 53 

5. The compounds of dal/uwr deity, and cforiv mind, have 
raasc. and fern, w^, neut. ov, gen. ovog ; as 6, ^ ol^wdaiiiojv^ to 
o'k^mdiujj.ov^ fortunate ; o, -j] acpqojv^ to acpgov, foolish. 

Note. In general, compound adjectives follow the analo- 
gy of the last component part. For the compounds of yO^ixjg 
and ^egag, sec ^ 50. Note. 

ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 

§ 55. '0, 71 «j/^c5^, Sto^, unknown; 6, 'j^ d(^.f/'^'?, ^toc, unsub- 
dued ; 6, 1^ "O)"^^, ^T^og and £to^, ii;Af^e ; o, ri alythip, mog, 
steep ; o, r^ ai'Ooi/j, onog, burning ; 6 ai'Oojp, wrog, blazing ; 6, 
7] cUnaLg, aidog, childless ; o, i] agna^, ccyog, rapacious ; o ri 
avrd/sig, ei^gog, a suicide ; 6 ^Id^, axog, stupid ; 6, ri dgoudg, 
ddog, that runs ; 6 Idslovxrig^ oil, voluntary ; 6, r^ e7ii]lvg^ vdog, 
that has neioly come ; t] sttIts^, sxog, on the point of lying- 
in ; 6, rj svgip, ivog, having an acute sense of smelling ; 6, 
rj fili^, i-Aog, full-grown ; 6, t^ ev(bip^ (bnog, having beautiful 
eyes ; 6, ri riuiOprig, Tjrog, half dead ; 6 a&y.ag, gog, happy ; 6, 
'j^ luaKgalijjv, cjvog, that lasts long ; 6, r^ f-iaxgav/i'/v, svog, long- 
necked ; 6, ri inaxgo/et^g, gog^ long-handed ; o ri iu(bvv^, '^/og, 
having solid hoof s : o, rj naga^lchip, wnog, that squints; 6, ri 
naganh'fi^ riyog, giddy, crazy ; 6 7ievi]g, T}Tog,poor ; 6, v^ cpoivi^, 
tKog, purple. 

Note. Som.e of these are also used as neuters, but only 
in the genitive and dative, 

ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 56. The Adjectives ^eyag and Ttolvg, are declined as fol- 
lows : 



Sing. 


6 (great) 


^ (great) 


TO (great) 


Nom. 


^leyag 


^eydlrj 


^dya 


Gen. 


(.leyulov 


(.iBydlrig 


jiieydlov 


Dat. 


fiieydlco 


(xsydly] 


(.leydlio 


Ace. 


f.iiyav 


^eydlqv 


fieyoc 


Voc. 


ILieyuls 


fxeydlj] 


^leya 


Plur, 








Nom. 


(iisyulov 


^eydlav 


f-ieydla 


Gen. 


(neyuX(x)v 


fisydhov 


jLisydh'ty 


Dat. 


fieydloig 


(.leydlaig 


(.leydKoig 


Ace. 


fieydXovg 


f/sydlag 


fiieydla 


Voc. 


fiieydloL 


^leydlav 
5* 


jiieydXa 



54 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Bval 






IS.A.Y.fieyaco 


(Lteydila 


(tteyulo) 


G. D. ^eydkoi^v 


fieyuhxLV 


fieydilot'V 



The nom. and dat. sing., the plural and dual, and the whole 
of the feminine, come from fjsydclog, ?/, ov. The vocative 
fA-eyaXs is very rare. 



Sing, 


(ranch) 


'^ (much) 


t6 (much) 


Nom. 


nolvg 


nollr^ 


noli) 


Gen. 


nollov 


nollrig 


TTolloV 


Dat. 


nolKo 


Tiollr^ 


' tioDa^ 


Ace. 


nolup 


noKXr^v 


nolv 


Plur. 


{mamj) 


(many) 


(many) 


Nom. 


Tiollol 


nollixi 


TToD.i 


Gen. 


nollibv 


TtoU^ibv 


Tiollihv 


Dat. 


TTolloTg 


Tiollaig 


nolloXg 


Ace. 


nollovg 


no^ylug 


7xoX)A 



The dual is of course wanting. — The form nollog^ r], ov, is 
used by the lonians. — The epic poets decline nolxjg like y^v- 
iivg (^ 51.) ; thus, nolvg nolsTa nolv, gen. noliog. 

' E'ijg and ^/^c, neut. ti), rfi^ good, gen. iT]og (for ieog like y^v- 
icsog), ace. tvv and rfip, neut. plur. gen. i^ojv (for iriwv) of good 
things. The neut. el contracted from iv, means well. 

Zibg living, alive, (contracted from ZA02:), borrows its 
parts from the regular ^w6g, 7J, 6v. 

IlQaog meek, borrows its feminine and neuter from ngavg, 
Ttqaela^ ngrxv, gen. ngociog, &c. 

nQ6q)gix)v, 6, i], well inclined. Homer has fem. Tigocpgauaa. 

2(bg safe, (contracted from 2 A 02), fem. awg seldom oa, 
neut. (Jb)v, ace. sing, oqw, ace. plur. oibg (contracted from 
2 A 0X2), neut. plur. ua (2AA). The rest comes from the 
regular uihog, acha, amv. 

fTjQovd'og, riy ov, gone, used only in the nominative of all 
genders and numbers. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

COMPARISON BY TBQOg, TttTO;. 

^ 57. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping $, and 
annexing leoog for the comparative, and Taiog for the super- 



DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 55 

lative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is changed 
into w. E. g. 

aocpog wise., uocpmegog wiser , cfofprnajog wisest, 

^tz^oq dishonored, dcTTfioieoog^ ujitioTuTog. 
So (SBiivdg veii'erahle, aeinvoxegog, (lefivoTaTog- Ttvavog dense, 
TivicvoTegog, nvy.voxaTog. 

Note 1. Homer has aaxo^etr^Tegog, lag^Tazog, oi'C^vgmeqog^ 
for —voTegog, -QOTuTog, —goTSoog. 

In general, o remains unchanged when it is preceded by a 
mute and liquid (^ 17. 2, and Note 1). 

Note 2. A few adjectives in og are compared according 
to the following models : 

q)il-og^ cplK-regog, (pil-raTog, 

(Ueo'-og, /uecr-alTsgog, /uecr-aiTaTog, 

UTCOvdaX-og, anovdaL-Edregog, (jnovdau-euxaTog , 

oipocpdy-og,- dipocpay-lijTegog, oipocpay-iaTaTog. 

Those in oog are always compared by ecrregog, saraTog ; as 
dnloog contracted drtlovg, anloeuxegog, djiloecnaTog, contracted 
(knlovGTegog, dnlovCFTaTog. 

2. Adjectives in vg gen, sog are compared by dropping g 
and annexing xegog, Tuzog. E. g. o^vg sharp, o^vregog sharper^ 
d^vjarog sharpest, 

3. These two adjectives, fxelag hlac'k,, and rdlag unfortu- 
nate, drop og of the genitive and annex regog, jarog ; thus, 
xdhxpog, TaldvTsgog, TaXoLVTaTog- ^elavog, /nsXdvTsgog, fxeldviarog. 

4. Adjectives in i]g gen. eo?, and eig gen. svjog, shorten r^g 
and £tg into eg, and annex regog, xaxog. E. g. Bv(je8i\g pious, 
evaa^enTsgog, svas^saxaTog' x^gieig graceful, xagUaxsgog, /agii' 
axatog. 

Note 3. ^^evdrig false, gen. £og, has also ^svdiaxego^, 
Ilevi]g poor, gen. ?/T0^, has neviaxegog, neviaxuxog. 

5. Adjectives in w/^ gen. ovog, drop og of the gen. and an- 
nex 8CfX8gog, saxaxog. E. g. £i'(^«t(«w^ svdaluoi^og, eiudaruoii- 
Gxegog, evdati^iovecrxaxog. 

6. Bld^ (9X«x6c, ^laxicrxsgog ^laxiaxotxog' agna^ agrrayog^ 
dgitayicrxsgog dgnayiGxaxog- fudxag /udiccxgog, luuTcdgxegog {.layidg- 
Taxog- a/agig d/dgtxog, dxagiaxegog. 

Note 4. Substantives denoting an employment or charac- 
ter are sometimes compared like adjectives ; as l^c^udeig 



56 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

king^ ^aadevTFQo; more kinghj, ^uadevTUTog most kingly ; 
TilbuT)]; thief ^ xlenTiaTaTog very thievish ; nlsoviaTrig a covet' 
ous person^ nleoveTcrldjuTog ; v^0L(ni\g an insolent person^ 
{i^QKjjoTuTog — The comical forms uviojEQog and vLvxoiajog 
ipsissimus, from «i;to?, and Juvonhmiog from Juvixog, run 
parallel with the superlatives, Don Quixotissimo, and his 
Squirissimo. 

COMPARISON BY lOOV, KJTOg. 

^ 58. Some adjectives in vg drop this ending and annex 
Tmv for the comparative, and icnog for the superlative. E. g. 
'^i'^vg pleasant, \diuiv pleasanter, i\diuTog, pleasaniest ; ^uOig 
deep, ^olOLujv, ^uOidiog. 

Comparatives in mv are declined according to the follow- 
ing model : 

TO [pleasanter) 

ifiiopog 



Sing. 


6ri (pleasanter) 


Norn. 


7]dl0iP 


Gen. 


7]SiOPog 


Dat. 


r^dioi'v 


Ace. 


-r^diova i\dlb) 


Plur. 




Norn. 


'f^diovsg i\diovg 


Gen. 


'i<8i6pb)V 


Dat. 


r^dioav (v) 


Ace. 


ri^lorag 't^dlovg 


Dual 




N. A. 


r^dlovs 


G. D. 


r^diovoiv 



r^diova r^8i(^) 
r^diovs 

It is observed that the ace. sing. masc. and fem., and the 
nom. and ace. plur. of all genders, drop the v and contract 
the two last syllables. 

Note. A few adjectives in vg form the comparative by- 
dropping vg with the preceding consonant, and annexing 
u(JO)v ; as ^a&vg deep, ^uaacov, ^ad-iuiog- nayvg fat, naxiitiv 
and TTcicrcrw^, naxKyTog- i'kayvg small, tluuoo)v^ el(x/L(jTog' ra- 
Xvg (originally ^a/vg^ ^ 14. 3) swift, tu/lu)v and S-uaaojv, 
%(!/.Xi(TTog. Further, v.oaTvg powerful, y^gmuMv and xgelaaojy. 
Compare the verbs i^^aorwand BHXft,nluauo) and FlAAQSl, 
q)Qiaao) and 0PIKII — Meyag has comparative /ue'^wv^ Attic 
fisiiiwv, and dllyog, oU'Qmv. Compare the verbs Ttoa'Qia and 
KPArJl, /Lmaii^ and MAZTIFfL, § 96. 3. 



DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 57 



ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISONS. 

^ 59. 'Ayad^o; good ; dLfie iv o)v and § sir Imv 'dx\^ 'aqb la^ 
(T(t)v, and ^^o^t(x)v or ^ojoj^ and ^tlregog and dioeiviv and (fio^ 
regog better ^ ag i err o g and ^alTtcrTog and x^aTtdTo^ and 
lih'CaTog or AworTogand (pigicnog and cpegraTog best. The 
regular comp. and siiperl. ayad^d^Tegog, uyad^maiog, occur in 
the later writers. The forms ^geiucnxxv and J<^(iTtaTog come 
from xgarvg (^ 58- Note) dgsicov agtarog, imply a positive, 
APT2' hii'cojv.^ IchiGTog, come from the verb ^.w = \^£Aw ^e^- 
regog, cpigTarog and (pegicnog, are derived from <jpiow. — 'y^i- 
j'etj^og i^AArX^) painful, dclystvoregog and aP^^/wy, dLlysivojaTog 
and ulyccFTog.- — Ala/gog (^AIi:XTJ^) shameful, aia/iodv and 
alaxgoTsgog^ aiJ/oaTog. 

EAErXTH infamous, eleyx^cTTog. No comparative — 
'EcT'/f^Tog extreme, last, a defect, swperlat. — 'E/d-gog [EX- 
0T^) inimical, iz^i(or, sx&LaTog. — Kaxog bad, xaTclwv and 
^slgcjv and iqaacov (Ionic eacroov) and y.atcmsgog worsen 
xdxtdTog and xelgvGTog and r^Kiuxog worst. The 
forms /siobjv, xelgtuTog, come from XEPHU^ dal. ;^£V;l*, ace. 
;if£^7/a, plur. /^gj^eg, neut. xigeia, 

Kalog beautiful, KalUo)v^ rADuawg. — KEPJTZ crafty^ 
xsgdiojv, yJgdiaTQg. — Kvdgog (XTz/TJ") glorious, Tcvdluv, zidt^ 
(jTog.-—KvvT6gog (from J^t-w^* xwog dog) more impudent, a de- 
fect, comparat. 

Ma-Agog [1SIAKT2 or MHKT2) long, tiotxgoTsgog rare iido--^ 
awv^ uriKLGTog and /uaxgoTarog. — Meyag greats fisl'Cwv Ionic 
|Ws>ojj/, ^eyiuTog. — Miyg6g small, iXd cr acjv and fielvjp and 
fiiyigoTsgog smaller, eXd/HTTog and fi£T(TTog and fiixgoTarog 
smallest. The forms eldaaojv, ildxtcnog, come from tla^ig 
(§58. Note). 

' OA/j^o; Z/f //6>, oAr^wy Ze55, oliyicnog leasts — OlTngo; ( /X Tru) 
pitiable, oixTgozegog and oixTlojv, oixTgoTarog and ot'xTtffrOj. — 
' OnloTegog younger, onXoTaTog youngest, derived from onlov, 

niTCix)v ripe, nsTcaiisgog, TtenalraTog. — Jltcjv fat, zrtOTf^oc, 
TtLoraTog — Ilolvg much, nlslMP and nliuiv more,, nleXcnog most. 
— llgoTsgog former, ngmog first, 

^Padwg easy, gdojv, gauxog. — ^PirX2 terrible, gTykoy^ gC- 
yiCTTog. 

'"Tnegrsgog higher, vnsgTcxTog and vTcaxog highest, — 'TWT^ 
high, i5(///wi' vipLawg, — "Taxegog later, vaxaxog latest, 

(hAA2 (from cpalva))^ (fadvxego; more bright, q^udrxaxog most 
bright, — fp^giegog^ qigruxog, cfigiaxog^ see dy a-d-og. 



58 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



NUMERALS. 



CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



^ 60. 1. The numerals eh, duo, ToeTg, and JCGaanF; or Ttr- 
Taoeg, are declined as follows : 



Sing, o [one) 



Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 



kvL 

a 

bP(X 



"Ti [one) 
(.Ua 

/uia 
fuiav 



(o7ie) 

n 

hog 
hi 

o 



Dual masc. fern. nent. 
Norn, dio and ciuo) 
Gen. duoip and dvelv 
Dat. SvoLP 
Ace. ^<^o and dvo) 

Plur, ol, al (three) 
Norn. ToeTg 
Gen. T^tw*/ 
Dat. Tgi(Ti ()/) 
Ace. TOft^ 

PZi/r. ol, al [four) 
Nom. TsaaaQeg or TijTaoeg 
Gen. tb(j(t6lou)v or xeTTccou)?^ 



(iw;o) PZwr. (^2/7o) 

Nom. 

Gen. dvibv 

Dat. ^i^cr/ [v) Ion. dvoTcn (j^) 

Ace. 

T(i [three) 

TQCibv 

TQiai [v) 
jglu 

Tu. {four) 

Tscraaoa or TSTTaga 
TeaauQujv or TeTidgov 



Dat. reufjaoui (v) or TtTTaguL [v) Tiaaaguv [v) or TiTTugai (p) 
Acc. T8(TGagag or rexTagag Ttacraga or TbTjaga 

Note 1. The compounds oi;j£/g (oi'Je eF^) Tzof owe, and 
/dijdelg [iajda elg)^ have nom. plur. ovdeveg and (nr^dspag insig- 
nijicant -persons. — The epic poets have fem. t'a, Irig, i^, i'up, 
and iCo == hi. — Observe the accent of the gen. and dat. fem. 

Note 2. ^vo is found indeclinable. — The Homeric lan- 
guage has also ^otw, doiol, dat. docolg and doiolai., acc. doiovg, 
from JO lO:^. 

Note 3. The lonians say Ttaaegsg, the Dorians Teirogsg 
and T£Too£^, Homer has nlavgeg, for reaaagsg — ThgauL oc- 
curs for riaaagao or TexTagui. 

2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 inclusive are in- 
declinable (§ 45.) : 



NUMERALS. 59 

5. nhis 40. TEdGaqd/AovTa 

6. fc<? 50. 7T£VTli\y,0VTa 

7. £7rT(^ 60. £«?TiJfOI^T« 

8. o^TCo TO. hSdof^iT^y.ovTa 

9. ^^i'sa ' 80. o'/(^orJ;<o^T« 

10. ^£^cf 90. evpevr^y^ovTa 

11. evdexa 100. ty.uTov 

12. dwdexa 200. Siayoacoi^, at., a 

13. dsxcngetg or TOicrxaldexa 300. JQiaxoGioi, ui, a 

14. dsTcajeauaqeg or reaaags- 400. Tergaxoawi, ul, a 
uxaidexa 500. nevTaxocnoo, uv, a 

15. SexoTtevTS or TTSVTSxaidsxa 600. £s«;fO(Tto^, «*, oc 

16. dexaet, or hxxaidsxa 700. hmuxocnoi, ai, a 

17. dexasTiTix or enjaxaidsxcc 800. oxTaxorrcOL^ ai, a 

18. dsxaoxrd) or oxTwxaidexa 900. evvaxouioi^ av^ a 

19. dexaevvea or evveaxaidsxa 1000. ;^/^>'tot, at, a 

20. el'xoat(i/) 2000. dior/iliOL, at, a 

21. si'xocrc elg or ^Fc ;fat sl'xoao 10000. lAigioi^ ai, a 
30. rgiaxopTa 20000. diuaigvoi^ ai, a 

Note 4. Doric 7re«7re=5, si'xaTc =^ 20> — Epic islxoac =^ 
20. — dvd)dexa and dvoxaidexa = dojdsxa, occur. — dsxargelg 
and dsxaieacTageg or Teaaageaxaidsxa are declined like r^etg 
and Tscraageg^ respectively ; as toc dsxargia, jibv dexargixbv, tovc 
TEUCfagaGxaidExa. But TCt and Td^ TEUCTEgEOxaidExa occurs. — 
The lonians say T^trJxoz^Ta = 30, T£a(7£^?];ioyTa = 40, o^^ca- 
xo^T«=80, ^/7;j«o(7^o^== 200, T^t^yjcoo-tot = 300. — Thc ^Ao7/- 
sands are formed by prefixing the adverbs (^ 62. 4.) ^t>, 
T^^s J <fec. to /ilwL ' as rgta/lliOL = 3000, nevTaxia/ilioi= 
5000. — The tens of thousands are formed by prefixing these 
adverbs to juLvgioi- as Tgca/uigtoi^ =30000 ; hnraxiGuvgioi = 
70000. — Homer has cj^j^ea^rAot = 9000, and dsxaxiloL = 
10000. 

Note 5. Instead of dxrcoxatdExa or ivvsaxaldExa the Greeks 
often said (^t^or*^ or e/^o^ SeoviEg elxogv twenty wanting tico or 
0716 ; as £T£a Juwj^ deovTa eI'xoctl eighteen years, literally, 
twenty years wanting two. Instead of oxiCa xal el'xotTcr^ or 
Ivvta xal El'xoaip^ they said SvoTv or tro: deofjEg rgiuxovja thir^ 
ty wanting two or one ; as bteu dvCji^ dtoira Tgn\y,ovia twenty 
eight years. So vrisg ,«ta; diovaai lEGuagayovia thirty nine 
ships. — This principle is also applied to ordinals; as ^>'o> 
diov ElxoGTov eiog the nineteenth year. 



60 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



The participle 3eu)p with its substantive may be put in the 
genitive absolute; as Tre^Trjjcoi/Toe /uidg deovarjg IbhiBs jQir^oeig 
he captvred forty nine galleys, dvdlv deovGucv el'xocrL vuvaL 
with eighteen ships. So with ordinals, ^^og diovxog jQiaxo- 
am sTBi, in the twenty ninth year. In this case the verb 
dsiv means to be wanting^ not to want. 



ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



§ 61. The ordinal numbers are : 



1st. TTOWTOg, t], ov 
2d. devTSQog, a, ov 
3d. TQlTog, Tj, ov 

4th. TfcTttOTOC, T]^ ov 

5th. ne/biTiTog, rj, ov 

6th. BitTog, ?/, ov 

7th. s^dojuog, Tj, ov 

8th. bydoog, r], ov 

9th. evvaTog, t^, ov 

10th. dixuTog, ?/, ov 

11th. kvdtKarog, r], ov 

12th. dix)de>caTog, rj, ov 

13th. TQcaxatdexcxTog, rj^ ov 

14th. TeaaaQaxaLdsxaTog, ?/, ov 

15th. TievTSxaidtxaTogy rj, ov 

16th. hxxaidixoLTog, t;, ov 

17th. snraxaLdexaTogy i], ov 

18th. oxTotxaid^xaTog, rj, ov 

19th. ivvsaxaidexaTog, tj, ov 

20th. elxoarog, ri, ov 

21st. BiXOdTdg TTQiOTogy or ngw- 

Tog xal BlxodTog 

Note 1. Homer has TSTQarog for TeiagTog, k^dofjarog for 
B^dojuog, dydoawg for oydoog, Bl'varog for evvazog or Bvaiog. 
Herodotus has JBaaBQBa.navdBxdrrj for TBacragaxaidBxdrrj. 

Note 2. The Greeks say TiraoTov r^^iTf^AavTov = 3i taU 
ents, E'^dofiov riULT&lavTOv = 65 talentSy ewarov r^/uiTulavTOv =: 
8i talents, ntjjLnTOv r^fufxvaXov = A^ wincBi TsraQTOv riJLii(x)8olov 
= 3i oboli. But Teccraoa rifiLTdlavra == ^ =2 talents, tnidc 
rifindlavTa = I. = 3| talents, evvia r^^uuXavTa z= |. = 4^ tal- 
ents, nevTB rifii^fivala = ^ ==: 21 mined, T£TT«^a r^^u(xi^olu =1 ^ 
= 2 oholi. 



30th. TQiUXOCTTOg, tJ, 6>/ 
40th. TBaoaouxoarog^ tJ, ov 

50th. TTBVTTiXOaTOg, tJ, 61^ 

60th. k^itXOGTog, 7], 6j/ 
70th. ^^douijxocnog^ ij, 6y 
80th. dydoTixoGTog, tJ, 6y 
90th. ivvBvijxoaidg, tj, 6^ 
lOOlh. ixajocFiog, 1], oy 
200th. dLuxocnocTTog, ri, 6v 
300th. TQiuxoaioiTTog, rj, 6y 
400th. TBTgaxouLOGTog, ri, ov 
500th. TiBPTaxoawGidg, r^, ov 
600th. t^uxocTLoaTog, tJ, 6v 
700th. tTTTixxoaioaTog, tj, ov 
800th. oxTaxoaioGTog, r], 6v 
900th. hvaxouLOUTog, tj, 6*/ 
1000th. xilioGjog, 7], 6y 
10000th. juvQLOcrxog, ri, ov 
20000th. dtcTfivgw(jT6g, t], 6v 
<fec. 6lc, 



ARTICLE. 



61 



OTHER NUMERALS. 



§ 62. 1. The numeral substantives end in ag gen. «Jo^ ; as 1 
ri fj,ovuQ nionad^ 2 ^ dvug, 3 ^i T(jiug triad, 4 ^ TSToug, 5 ^^ ^^^- 
irdg, 6 ^ ^s«?5 7 ^ e[^do/udg, 8 ^/ 07(^oc<:i;, 9 ^i hveug, 10 -»] (^£xd;-, 
11 9] svdeKug, &c. 20 '^ eixouug score, 30 '»^ T^tc<;<G(:g, (Slc. 100 
71 aKaiGPidg. iOOO ^ /*^t(i», 10000 r^^voiug myriad, 

2. The numeral adjectives in -nloog or -nlaaiog corres- 
pond to those in -fold in English ; as unloog simple, dcnloog 
double^ twofold^ TQinUog triple, threefold, Tejoanloog quad- 
ruple^ fourfold, nevianloog fivefold, t^anloog sixfold, hnia- 
Txloog severfold. Also dtnl(xuwg, TQinldawg, TETQanluaiog^ 
TtevraTtl&crwg, h^anl&atog^ hmanluaiog. 

3. The numeral adjectives answering to the question 
noGxaiog on what day ? end in cuog ; as devzeqaXog on the 
second day, rgnalog on the third day, TsraQTalog, nsunTalog, 
earalog, e^dofimog, o'^doalog, ivaraXog^ dexaTalog, tvdsTtaTalog^ duj- 
Ssxaratog, 

4. The numeral adverbs are, aW? once, Stg twice, rglg 
thrice, TSTgdmg four times. The rest are formed by annex- 
ing (iici^g, to the cardinals and dropping the vowel preceding 
this ending ; as Trej^rd^t^ five times, t^uTug^ eTiTdHtg, (fee. 
ipvB(k7ccg and ivvccKig nine times, 6>lc. axaTovidjctg hu7idred 
times, diaKouLUTCcg two hundred times. 



ARTICLE. 

6 63. The article 6 the, is declined as follows ; 



Sing. Masc. Fern. Neut. 
Nom. 6 7] TO 
Gen. Tov TTjg Tov 

Dat. T{5 TTJ TO) 

Ace. 10V TTJJ/ TO 



Plur, Masc, Fern, Neut. 

Nom. ol at Td 

Gen. Tihv Tibv J(J)V 

Dat. Tor^ Talg Tolg 

Ace. TOvg T(/a T(X 



Dual, Masc, Fern, Neut. 



N. A. TCO 

G. D. loiv 



Talv 



TCO 

ToTv 



Note 1. The feminine rd is long (^ 31. Note 1); the 
neuter to. is short (§ 33. Note 2). — The Homeric language 
has Tolo == Tov' the Doric has tw = toD. Homeric ToTGL\r) == 
Torg, Twio-^ (i^) = T«rc. Doric tco,' rarely T6g=To(g. The 
Dorians say c^= ^i, rag = Trig, m = Tr^, idv = n\y. Hoaieric 

6 



62 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Tdoi)v== fem. Twj/, Doric rav = fem. t(ov. See ^ 31. Note 3, 
and ^ 33. Note 4. -The Doric has to/, rai, = oi, «l. 

Note 2. It seems that the original form of the article was 

Toc, TTJ, to; hence the oblique cases rod, Trig, toJ, &c., the 
Doric to/, Ttt/, and the adverb rojg. — In modern Greek t(5?, 
TTJ, TO, = otijT^^, a^TTJ, oct}t(5, kc, skc, it ; as dvuL Jog ixel ; is 
he there ? 

PRONOUN. 

PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

^ 64. The personal pronouns are i/co, av, ". They are 
declined as follows ; 

S. ( /) S. (thou) S, {he, she, it) 

N. £/w N. <T{> N. 2 

G. ^f^OV & iWOU G. (TOV G. O^ 

D. eibtoi &L fioL D. 0^0/ D. ol 

A. ^/^^ & fii A. <y^ A. -£ 

P, (we) P. (ye, ?/02z) r, (they) 

N. i^i^^er? N. ^/nelg N. atpet^ neut. a^ea 

G. riiLi(bv G. T5,u6)y G. ucpxbp 

D. i^/wri/ D. i3^arj/ D. ocplat M 

A. ^,««^ A. V^^ A. t/^a^ neut. acpia 

D. (we two) D. (you two) D. (they two) 
N. A. ^coi.', i^c^ N. A. crcpoii, acjDCu N. A. crcpcoi 
G. D. J'oitV, 1^0)1' G. D. crq)(oiv, (TcpiDv G. D. ocpixiiv 

The nominative ? is obsolete. — The dual vd), ucpd), are very 
often written without the iota subscript, thus, /^w, a^ox 

Note 1. The particle y^ is often appended to ^yc6 and av 
for the sake of emphasis; as syinye I indeed, for ray part, 
Lat. egomet, e^ovye meimet, (rvys tutemet, crovys tuimet- Ob- 
serve the accent of eycoye. 

Note 2. Dialects. Homeric and Doric nominative 
ey(hv= iy(b, Doric tv (Lat. tu) = (fv, Homeric tvvtj= oi), 

Homeric genitives, ei^io, hf/Elo, if^ed^sv, efASv, iuev,= ifwv^ 
ixov' Gso, UBlo, oid-ev, aev, = gov- £0, sIo, s&sv, ev, = ov. The 
loniaiis and the Dorians use the forms s/uev, fiev, aev, s^. 
The Dorians have also tsv and ravg = tov. Further, Homer 

has TfiOlO = GOV, 



PRONOUN. 63 

Doric datives^ ^i^lv = ^,tto/- xiv, xbIv^ to/, == uol- i'l^ = of. Ho- 
meric €0l == oL 

Doric accusatives^ ts, riv, rv (enclitic), =^(Ti- Homeric 

Homeric nominatives plural, cifJiueg = r^aaXg- iju^ueg = 
{)/ue.ig. Doric dueg = riueZg* \)^eg = v/uBlg. 

Homeric genitives plural, riut(x)v, riixeio)v, = r|,uo)i/- i3,(/e'o;y, 
{j/ueimv, = vi^mv oq)mv, acpeicjv, = acpcbv. The lonians use 
the forms ^uiwv, v/ueojv, acpivjv. 

Homeric datives plural, ap^^^v^ ri^dv (—), \at.v,= r^uXv 
vi((u, ijfiiv (— ^), v/it^v, == v/uXv acptv or CTq)t = Gcpiuvv, 

Homeric accusatives plural, rjueag, a^u/ue, r^^dg (-J), = r^fxag- 
t\usag^ vfi/Lis, ^^ad^ (_^)^ = i»^ag. acpeag, acpdcg (short), (j(pi,= 
(7(pag. Doric d/ui, 'viLie,^= rifiag, i3,t««g, respectively. Theo- 
critus has y^e for crepe (by metathesis (p(Te, ncre, ipe). The 
Attic poets use (reps for aviov, iqv, 6, avTovg, dg, d. 

Lastly, the accusatives i^lv, vlr, stand for all genders and 
numbers, him, her, it, them- The Homeric dialect uses 
tily, the Attic poets, viv. 

§ 65. The pronoun avrog is declined like (J0(p6g (^ 49.), ex- 
cept that its neuter has o instead of ov (^ 33. Note 1.) ; 
thus, avTog he, himself, oLi^rri she, herself, olvto it, itself, gen. 
a^TOv, adrrig^ (fee. 

With the article, 6 aiurog, -q a^Tij, to oc^to, it signifies, the 
same. In this case it may be contracted with the article 
(^ 24«) ; thus dvTog, gen. t«^toiJ, dat. TavT(D, tocuttJ ; the neuter 
has T«^ TO and xavjov. 

Note. The lonians say «^T6'q), a^Tai^v, aTurecov, ainioiai, = 
ai;T(5, avT)\Vy avTm>, aviolg, 

REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 66. The reflexive pronouns are ifiaviov, asavTov, iavTov. 
They have no nominative : 

S, Masc, {of myself ) S, Fern, [of myself) 

G. euavTov G. ^uuvrr^g 

D. if^ocvTO) D. iuavTTi 

A. i/UUVTOV A. l(-nivi)\p 

P. {of ourselves) P. {of ourselves) 

G. riu(bv aTuxibv G. t]f.iO!)v a^iibv 

D. '^]I^Xv avTolg J). i^aXv avraXg 

A. '^iliidg avwvg A. 'fl^idg ixvidg 



64 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

S. (of thyself ) S. [of thyself ) 

G. (jeavTov or cruvrov G. oaavrr^; or cravir^g 

D. (TsavTio or (faviQ D. oeavTi] or (Tuvi-q 

A. creuvidp or or«i'T6>' A. a^MUTrJ*' or crai^ir^y 

P. (o/ yourselves) P. (0/ yourselves) 

G. I'wtoi^ avTbw G. T5.<ya)i' «urwy 

D. ^,ar^ avToTg D. i'MtJ' «i)rarg 

A. T3,uac ft^rotig A. i3aaj ai;T(i:^ 

/S. (0/ himself) S. {of herself) 

G. iaviov or olvtov G. tctirrj^ or tti^rr^j 

D. ^aurw or ft^r(5 D. tixvir^ or «i5t7J 

A. haviov or avTov A- tocfrrj*^ or wijTrJv 

P. (0/ themselves) P. (0/ themselves) 

G. eccvT^v or (xvtCov G. tavT(jiv or (xiuT(hv 

D. euvToTg or (xvToTg J), havuxXg or (xvTuTg 

A. eccviovg or uviovg A. tuvidg or «i3Tug 

Also ^(jpwj' a{)T(bv = kavTcbv ' dcpiaiv avToTg, -aTg,z= lavroTg, 
-«rg • cfgpag cfi;To^?, -ttg,=^ai;TOi'g, -(is. The singular has neut. 
ace. eavTO or «i5r6. — The contracted forms «i3To£i, «(5Trj;, ifec. 
must not be confounded with ai^rov, a^r^g, &.c. from avio^. 

Note. The reflexive pronouns are compounded of the 
personal pronouns and avxdg. — In Homer these pronouns 
are often written separately; as e/ti {ijui) avxdv for tfiavrov^ 
ijLiBv avTYig for e/uavTrig^ aol avT(o for (JsavTio, ol avico for ^«vt(5, 
e a^Tov for eavTov, also ck^tov (jlip for eavjov. — The lonians 
say e/u6uwTov, GeiAWiovy mvTov, &lc, for iiuaviov, GEavrov, ifec. 
See ^ 3. Note 3. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 67. The possessive pronouns are derived from the per- 
sonal pronouns. In signification they correspond to the 
genitive of the personal pronoun : 

e^u6g, Tj, 6i/, my, mens 
rifisTsgog, «, o/^, our, noster 
T^ojLTsgog, «, OP, of us two 
Gog, Gr\, Gov^ thy, tuus 
v^hagog, a, op, your, vester 
GcpwUegog, a, op, of you two 
og, ^, OP, his, her, its, suus 
Gcpixsgog, a, op, their^ SUUS 



from 


iuov 


4( 


r^usTg 


(6 


voiC 


(( 


gov 


ki 


-dueig 


44 


Gap^'i 


a 


ol 


44 


Gcpslg 



PRONOUN. 



65 



Note. The forms vofijeqog and (TcpMi'Teoog are poetic. — Ho- 
meric and Doric oc/u6g (--)? i], 6v^ =riiuh£gog, «, ov - vuog 
( — ^), »j, 6p^ =-6iueTsgog, a, ov - <T(p6g, tJ, 6//,= acp^Tegog, «, oj^ • 
T£dc, d and -^i, oi^, = aog, a?j, (k^i/ • £0^, d and -»], ^j^, = og, r^, ox^. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 68. Thf^ demonstrative pronouns are ode this, ovrog this^ 
and bKBipog that, "Ode is simply the article (^ 63.) with the 
inseparable particle ds ; thus, o(^e, r^t^e, ToJe, gen. rovde, Triads, 
dat. Tw^a, T^(^e, &.C. 0{)Tog is declined as follows : 

S, Masc, (this) Fern, (this) Neut. (this) 



N. 


ovTog 


avTTj 


TOVTO 


G. 


TOVJOV 


TavTi]g 


TOVTOV 


D. 


TOVTCd 


ravTT^ 


TO I' TO) 


A. 


TOVTQV 


TavTTjV 


TOVTO 


P. 


(these) 


(these) 


(these) 


N. 


Oi)TOV 


ahraL 


Tttijrof 


G. 


TOVTMV 


TOVTOJV 


TOVTOJV 


D. 


TOVTOig 


Ta^Tavg 


TOiUTOt^g 


A. 


TOVTOVg 


TaTL)T(xg 


TaCJTot 


D. 


(these two) 


(these two) 


(these two) 


N. 


A. TOt'TW 


TaijTa 


TOVTO) 


G. 


D. TOTOTOIV 


ravTaiv 


TOVTOiV 



So i^slpog, ixsivi], sKslvOj g®^* ^^^i^^ov, ivMvrjg. See § 33. 
Note 1. 

Note 1. Homer has dat. plur. ToXadem and ToTadsaai for 
ToTads from ods. The Ionia ns say tovtbov^ TovTsrjg, toutsg), 

TOVTSCOP, TOVTeOVg^ = TOVTOV, TDlVT7]g^ TOVTCO, TO{)T0JV , TOVTOVg, TC- 

spectively. Compare ^ 65. Note. They say aslvog, ?/, ov^ == 
ixeXvog, ?/^ oj^ ; the Dorians say Tr^pog, a, o, and the jEolians 

urivog^ a, o. 

Note 2. The letter / (long) is appended to the demon- 
strative pronouns for the sake of emphasis : thus, ovtooL 
this here, Lat. hicce, gen, Tovjovi^ &,c., fern. avTnf, gen. Tau-. 
Tjycr/, (fee. aasipoai that there, gen. ixeivovt, &,c. 

The short vowel disappears before /; as 6dl, 'f^di, Todl, for 
odst, 7(6 Si, Todet - tovtL for tovto'c ^ tuvtI for Taviat. 

relative pronoun. 

^ 69. 1. The relative pronoun og who ^ which, that, is de- 
clined as follows : 

6* 



66 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



S, Masc. Fern. Neut. P. Masc. Fern. NeuU 



N. 


o 
0? 


n 







N. 


ol 




(d 


& 


G. 


o5 


% 




oi> 


G. 


0)1/ 




(ov 


£yy 


D 


4i 


r 

5 




& 


D. 


or? 




ul? 


olg 


A. 


ov 


^j/ 




(i 


A. 


ovg 




&S 


u 






i>. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 










N. 


A. 


(3 


a 




& 










G. 


D. 


olv 


alv 




oiv 







2. The relative ocTJig whoever^ who, is compounded of o; 
and rig [^ 71.) : both the 05 and the Tig are declined at the 
same time. Thus : 



S. Masc. 




Fern. 




Neut. 


N. OCTTl^g 




CI 

ring 






T^ 


G. ohiivog or otov 

D. i^TlVV or OTO) 




r^cnivog 

r^Tivv 

r^vTiva 




obzivog or otoi/ 
(LJTtj'i or oTca 


A. OVTLVa 






St. 


P. 










N. o'iivvEg 




fx^iTivsg 




artx^a or 5tt« 


G. ^J^TiJ^WJ/ or OTWl^ 




(iiVTiVO)V 




{})vTivo)v or oro^j/ 


D. oiuTiai (v^ or oToiav (1^) 


ccIdTiaL 


(-) 


OlUTiOl^ (v^ or OTOiUV (j/) 


A. ovarivag 




UGTiVUg 




UTLva or ttTTa 


Note 1. Homer has 
OTOU • oreo) = oro) • ortj^a = 


= o^T^^ot and 


OTT 60, OTTSV, OTSV , = 
UTLVa • OTBixiV z=z OTMV . 


6TBOi^av=x=:OToiai, H 


erodotus has 


dat. 


plur. fern. oTirjuv = 



alaTiav. Compare § 70. Note. 

Note 2. The particle 7r£o may be appended to og ; thus, oa- 
TCBQ, rinsQ, oTtsQ, &c. written also separately og neq, r^ neq, ttsq^ 
&c. The particle olv is appended to the compound rela- 
tives oo-z^? and octtcsq; thus, OCT ktovj/ whosoever, Lat. quicum* 
que, dgnsgovp, &c., written also oaTi^g ovv, oansq ovv, (Slc. 



interrogative pronoun. 



§ 70. The interrogative pronoun tU 
is declined in the following manner : 

S. Masc. (^ Fern. Neut. 

N. Tig Ti 

Tlpog or tov tivog or ^ov 

Tivv or T(3 TtVi^ or tw 



G. 
D. 
A. 

D. 



, i^Ao ? which ? what ? 

M. ^ Fern. Neut. 
N. Tiveg Tlva 

G. Tlvixiv tIvmv 

D. TlUl (y) T/(7t (y) 

A. Tivag riva 



Masc. Fern. ^ Neut. N. A. tLvs G. D- tIvoiv 



PRONOUN. 67 

The forms tov, tw, =zjivog, tIvi^, must not be confounded 
with the articles tov, tG. 

Note. Homer has t6o= tov, rivog • ibMv z=zTivu)v. Hero- 
dotus has T£0)= T(5 or tLpi^ reot^g, rioLGi., =Ttat. Compare § 
69. Note 1. ' 

indefinite pronoun. 

^ 71. 1. The indefinite pronoun Tig (grave accent) any^ 
certain^ sovie, is declined as follows : 

S, Masc. ^ Fern, Neut. ' M. <^ Fern. Neut. 

N. Tig tI N- Ttj^e? Tivu. 

G. T^J'og or TOV Tivbg or tov G. Tivihv tiv^w 

D. Tivl or T(5 Tvvl or tq) D- Ttai (v^ jial (v) 

A. Tf^^oc tI a. TiJ^d^ TtJ^d 

D. Masc. Fern, <^ Neut, N. A. Tivh G. D. T^?/otj/ 

The neuter plural has also auoa Attic aTra = r^yu. The 
forms TOV, T(5, are always enclitic (^ 22.). 

Note. The forms t£o, rewy, tsg), = tov, tlvcop, tivI, (^ 70. 
Note) are always enclitic. 

2. The indefinite pronoun deXva such-a-one, is declined 
as follows : 

6, ri, TO dsTva ol dsTvsg 

TOV, TTig^ TOV dsXvog twv dsivMv 

T(5, T7], T(3 deXvv ToTg, jolg 

TOV, TTiv, TO deXva Tovg, rug 



Aristophanes has tov dsXvu for tov dsXvog. 

reciprocal PRONOUN. 

^72. The reciprocal pronoun is ullr^lixyv of one another. 
The nominative case and the singular number are of course 
wanting : 

P. Masc. Fern. Nevt. 

G. dXl^llixiV dX'kl^lix)V (xXh'ikMV 

D. dAArJAotg ak}.Y\kai>g d.l.h'ikoig 

A. (j.)^)^r^^ovg dAArjAw^ a/,A/^A« 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



D. 

G. D. d(XXrikovv dXlr^aiv dikh\loiv 

A. dXXr^lif) (j}Xi^.a (xAA/j/.uj 

Note. These forms are derived from the combinations 



PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 



^73. 1. From the obsolete 1102 what? 'On02 who, 
and T02 (^ 03. Note 2) this^ and from the relative pro- 
noun o; who, we obtain the following corresponding pro- 
nominal adjectives : 

Demonstrative Relative 

louog or to- ogo; or 

ooude or to- onoaog as 

quan- quantity govto; so much aSy 

much, tantus quantus 



Indefinite 

noaog of a 
certain 
quantity 



Interrogative 

Ttdaog ; how 
much ? how 
many ? 
tus 1 

Ttolog ; of what noiog of a 
quality ? certain 

qualis ? quality 

noTBQog ; which wanting 
of the two ? 
uter ? 

Ttdarog ; ofivhat wanting 
number ? 
quotus ? 



Tolog or Toioads 
or TOLovTog 
such, talis 

wanting 



TtoaraTog ; in 
how many 
days ? 



wanting 



wanting 



wanting 



oiog or 
unoiog aSy 
qualis 

OTTOTsgog 

whichever 
of the two 

OTtdaTog of 
what num- 
ber soever 



onoGTcxiog m 
whatever 
number of 
days 

The demonstrative rvwog or rvpvovrog so little, so small, 
as large as the hollow of my hand, Lat. tantillus (corres- 
ponding to quantillus ?) wants the other forms. 

2. The pronominal adjectives nrjUicog ; how old? of what 
age ? of what size ? indefin. n-qUaog of a certain age, of a 
certain size, demonstr. TipUx-og or Ti^hxoade or rr^yi'^ovTog so 
old, so large, relat. r^Uxog or oTCT]lUog as large as, as old 
as, are derived from n02, 'On02, T02, and ^A^? gen. 
'ihxog {?). 



VERB. 69 

Tlodanog ; of what country ? cujas ? and relat. onodanog 
of what country soever., are derived from 1102 and ddinedov. 
"Hfiedandg our countryman^ nostras, and^f^sdanog your coun- 
tryman^ vestras, come from ri/usTg, i5^er^, and dunedov. 

Note 1. The demonstratives roaoviog, TowvTog, and rrih- 
xovTog^ are declined like ovwg (^ 68.) ; as Tocrovrog, Toaavxri^ 
neut. ToaovTo and togovtov^ g^ti* t^ocfoutov, joaauji^g, &,c. 

Note 2. The demonstrative forms may take i (^ 68. Note 
2) ; as ToaouToai so much as you see here, Toaoadl, tocovtoctI. 

The particle oIp (§ 69. Note 2) may be appended to the 
relative forms ; as oaoaovv hoiv much soever, quantuscunque, 
dnoioaovv of what quality soever, qualiscunque, 

3. ' A^KpoTSQog , a, ov, and nom. and ace. oc,a()pw, gen. and dat. 
(x^(f)oXv, both, ambo, "Idwg, a, ov, proper, peculiar, his own, 
proprius, is perhaps derived from the pronoun l (^ 64. 
Compare Lat. is, neuter id). "Ereoog, «, ov, other of two, 
another, alter. "Allog, ?/, o, other of many, alius, 'EauTSQog, 
cc, ov, each of two, uterque. "Eaaawg, i], ov, each of many, 
every, quisque. 

VERB. 

^ 74. 1. The Greek verb has three voices ; the active 
voice, the passive voice, and the middle voice. 

2. There are five moods ; the indicative, the siibjunc- 
tivCj the optative, the imperative, and the infinitive. 

3. The primary or leading tenses are, the present, the 
perfect, and the future. The secondary or historical 
tenses are, the imperfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist. 

The indicative is the only mood in which the imper- 
fect and pluperfect are found. The subjunctive and im- 
perative want also the future. 

4. There are three persons ; the first person, the 
second person, and the third person. 

See the paradigm of tvtttoo. 



70 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / strike, I am striking. 
Sing* TvTtTM Plur» ivmouev Dual ivmouev 

TVTtTetg rvmeTS rvTiT&joy 

TVTlTet^ TVTITOVUL (v^ TvnJBTOV 

Imperfect. I struck, I was striking. 
Sing, eTVTZTOP Plur, hvmojiEv Dual Itvtitoufv 

eTvmeg stvtttets Iivjitstov 

^ervme {v\ %Tvmov iivnTiii^v 

Perfect 1. I have struck. 
Sing, TSTVCpa Plur, Texvcpaiiev Dual JSTvcfuijiBv 

lizvcpag TSTvcpaTS jeTvcpurop 

rirvcps (j^) TSTvcfuav M TSTvcponot^ 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 

rirvTta declined like Perfect 1. 

Pluperfect 1. I had struck. 
Sing, hBT{)cpBiv Plur. iTeTicpsifxev Dual Itbtvcpeiubv 

eTBTV(pBig bTBTvCpBLTB ^TBTVCf)BlTOV 

iTSTvq)Bi, hTBTvcpBidav or -Bcrav iTBTvcpBirr^v 

Pluperfect 2. Synonymous with Pluperfect 1. 

ixBTvnBiv declined like Pluperfect 1. 

Future I. 1 shall or will strike. 
Sing, tvipo) Plur, Tuipousv Dual rvipouBv 

TVlpSig TVljJSTB TVlpBTOl^ 

TVXpBV TVlpOVCFV {v\ TvXpBTOV 

Future % Synonymous with Future 1. 

Tvnm contracted ti'tico declined like cpiUix) -w. 

Aorist 1. / struck. 
Sing, ^STVipa Plur. eTvipainBv Dual trvipu^uBv 

exvijiag aTvipaze tTvipaiov 

^TViiJS (r\ sTvipav eTvipdrijv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 

ervTTov declined like the Imperfect. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 71 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. I strike^ I may or can strike. 

Sing, TVTtTti) PIUT, TVTITM^SV Dual TVTtTMflBV 

TVTTTYig TvnTrjTS TvmrjTOV 

Perfect 1. I have struck, I may have struck. 
T6Tvq)0) declined like the Present. 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
rervntx} declined like the Present. 

Aorist 1. I strike, 1 may or can strike. 
Sing, Ti;j//w Plur, rvipw^uev Dual rvipwinsv 

Aorist 2. Synonynious with Aorist 1. 
TvTt(» declined like Aorist 1. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / might, could, would, or should strike. 
Sing, Tymoii-ti Plur, rvTtJoifiev Dual TvnTovf.iBv 

tVTTTOig TvmOlTS TvmOVTOV 

Tvmov Tvmoiev TVTtToixrjv 

Perfect 1. I might, could, would, or should have struck. 
TSTvcpoi^t^ declined like the Present. 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
TBxvnoi^i declined like the Present. 

Future 1. I would or should strike, 
Tvijjov^v declined like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
TVTXBOi^v contracted Tvnol^v like cpiMot^fjiv ^otfic, 

Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should strike. 
Sing, Tvipavfii, Plur, rvifJaituBv Dual rvipavjUBV 

Tvipat^ xvipaiBv rvipalTi])^ 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
ji}'jtoi^(^ declined like the Present, 



72 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Strike thou, be thou striking. 
Sing. Plur, Dual 

TV7TT6 TV71T6T6 JVTXl^TOV 

TvnTiTCO TvmbTumav or —movjuiv Tvniiiviv 

Perfect 1. Have struck, 
Tirvcps declined like ihe Present. 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
Tixvne declined like the Present. 
Aorist 1. Strike thou. 
Sing. Plur. Dual 

TVlpOV TvlpUTS TVlpUTOV 

Tvip(xTOJ Tvipdiutaav or —dvTOJV rvipUTUjp 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Tvns declined like the Present. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, rvmeiv to strike, to he striking. 

Perfect 1. rsTvcpsvat, to have struck. 

Perfect 2. TSTvnBvav synon. with Perfect 1. 

Future I. rvipsLv to be about to strike. 

Future 2. rvniecv contracted TvneXv synon. with Fut. 1. 

Aorist 1. Tvipat to strike, 

Aorist 2. TVTieiv synon. with Aorist 1. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present, t-vtitcov, ovaa, ov, striking. See § 53. 7. 
Perfect 1. JSTvqpthg, via, 6g, having struck. See ^ 53. 9. 
Perfect 2. TETvn6g, via, 6g, synon. with Perfect 1. Ihid. 
Future 1. TvipMv, ovaa, ov, about to strike. See ^ 53. 7. 
Future 2. rvnewv, iovaa, iov, contract, tvttwv, ovaa, ovr. Ibid. 
Aorist 1. Tvipag, aaa, av^ striking, having struck. See § 53. 1. 
Aorist 2. TVTubv^ ovaa, 6v, synon. with Aorist 1. See § 53. 7. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 73 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. I am struck, 
Sing> T{)'jtTi*actv Plur» JvrcTOus&a Dual tv7tt6ub&ov 

Tvmnq or —SV TV7tT6a&6 TVTlTeaxtOV 

ivmeiav TvnrovTav ivmeob-ov 

Imperfect. I was struck. 
Sing, Itv7Tt6iui]v Plur, Irvmoued^a Dual iTvmoue&ov 
sTynrov iTvmea&s aiLmea&ov 

iTVTlTSTO eiVTlTOVTO eTVTiTiaxtrjv 

Perfect. I have been struck. 
Sing, TBTv^^av Plur, TSTvttfjexfa Dual tbti it uf&ov 
TbTvipai Teivqjxte isTvcpxtov 

riiVTiTao TSivftjuevoi eluL rsTvcpifov 

Pluperfect. I had been struck. 

Sing, sTeTvuiii]v Plur, iTsivuue&a Dual hejiuus&ov 

hervipo STSTvcpxfs eTSTvcpitov 

eTaTVTiTO jeTv/Lifievoo riaav eT£T{(px^rjv 

Future 1. I shall or will be struck. 
Sing, xv(pd-r^GOuav Plur, Tvq)&rja6f-ie&a Dual Tvq:i&rjcr6uB&ov 
TU(jDt^7](T7? or — £^ TvcpitriC/ea&s rvcp&r^aea&ov 

TVCp&r^USiai^ TVCpxfv^UOVTaV TVCfjxfy^QEfJxfOV 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
Tvnr^Qoixav declined like Future 1. 

Future 3. / shall remain struck, 
jSTvipo^uaL declined like Future 1. 

Aorist 1. I was struck. 
Sing, Mcp&TiP Plur. eTicpd^rjuev Dual eriq^&rjuev 

iriqiitrig ^liqthjTS eTifftfijoi' 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
hvTiriv decline^ like Aorist 1. 
7 



74 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. / am struck^ I may or can he strvck. 
Sing, TvnTMfxav Plur. Tvm(l)iue&a Dual TVTiTihue&ov 

Tvniri TvTJTr/G&e tvtitijg&op 

TTL)7TT1]Taif TVTlTWVrat TVTlTT^O&Oy 

Perfect. / have been struck, I may have been struck. 

Sing. TETv^^h'og [rj, ov) S), rig, r^ 

Plur, TBTVfJlljlivOi (UV, a) 6)U6P, riTSy S)GC (j^) 

Dual. TBTv^fAivoj («, to) wjuevy riiop, r^xov 

Aorist 1. / am struck^ I may or can be struck. 
Sing. Tvq)&(b Plur. TV(p&o)U6p Dual rvcp&wiuEv 

Tvcp&iig Tvcp&riTe jvcpx^riiov 

TV(p\)-ri Tvq)d^(baL M 7V(p&riToy 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
TVTTW declined like Aorist 1. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / might, could, would, or should be struck. 
Sing, tVTCToi[Jii]v Plur, rvnioiued^a Dual TvnTol/ue&ov 

Tvnwco TvTiTOiG&e ivnroiud^ov 

TVTtTOiTO TvmOiVTO TVmolO d^TjV 

Perfect. I might, could, would, or should have been struck. 

Sing. TBTV^fJiivog (rj, ov^ eXi]v^ Bi'rjg, eI'tj 
Plur. TSTv^^hov {ai, a) el'rj/uep, ebjrey sl'j^aav 
Dual, T6TVfifiiv(jj (a, a>) eXrjfxsv, ehjTOv, eiriTi]v 

Future 1. I should, or would be struck, 
TV(pd^i](joifjiriv declined like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 

ivTiTjaoljUT^v declined like the Present. 

Future 3. I should or would remain struck, 

TSTviiJoifiTjv declined like the Present. 

Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should be struck. 
Sing. rv<px)^6ir]v Plur. Tvq)&elrjfiEv or -ei/uev Dual rvcpd^BlrjiiiBv 

TVCp&Blr^g JV(pd'Bb]T6 or —BXtB TV(p&BlT]TOy 

Tvcpd^BlT] Tvcp&Elr/aav or —bTbv tVqtd-BlT^TTJV 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
jv7tsl7]v declined like Aorist 1. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 75 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



. Present. Be thou struck. 
Sing. Plur. Dual 

TVTTTOV TvnT€G&6 TVTlT6(ld^0V 

TVTtTscr&o) TvjiTicrd'ijjaav or —a&wv jvmia&cov 

Perfect. Be thou struck. 

Sing. Plur. Dual 

rirvipo TeTvcp&s lixvcpd^ov 

TeTvcpd^o) TBTvcp&cjtjaav or —Cpd^OdV TBTVCp&COV 

Aorist i. Be thou struck. 
Sing. Plur. Dual ■ 

TV(p&7]Tt, Tvq)d~T]T6 TV(pd^l]TOV 

TVCpd^V^TO) TVCpS^riTOJCfaV or —g)d'ivTCOV TV(fd"lf\T(aV 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Ti)'jxi]di declined like Aorist 1. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. vvmecfOav to he struck. 

Perfect. tajvcpOav to have been struck. 

Future 1. rvcpOriascrdav to be about to be struck. 

Future 2. rvnriGeuOai synonymous with Future 1. 

Future 3. TSTvipeadaL 

Aorist 1. TvcpOrivai to be struck. 

Aorist 2. TVTirivav synonymous with Aorist 1. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present. rvTtTo^usvog , rj, ov, being struck. 

Perfect. TSTvtiuhog, ?/, ov, struck^ having been struck. 

Future 1. TV(pdt](T6(i6vog, rj, ov, about to be struck. 

Future 2. TVTtr^aofievog, j], ov, synonymous with Future 1. 

Future 3. reTvipdiusvog 

Aorist 1. Tvcpdeig, eTaa, sV, being struck. See ^ 53. 2. 

Aorist. 2. TVTceig, elaa, iv, synon. with Aor. 1. See Ibid. 



76 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / strike myself, 
TvnTouav like the Present Passive. 

Imperfect. I was striking myself. 
irvTtTouTjv like the Imperfect Passive. 

Perfect. / have struck myself. 
Thvu^oLi like the Perfect Passive. 

Pluperfect. I had struck myself. 
iTBTvfifiriv like the Pluperfect passive. 

Future 1. 1 shall strike myself 
Sing, Tvipouav Plur. Tvipoued-u Dual ivipofjiBd^op 

Tvipsiav Tvipovxao ivipeax^ov 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 

Tvnioiiav contr. tvttovuui declin. like cpt,Xiouoii-ov^ott. 
Aorist 1. I struck myself. 
Sing. sTviijduj]v Plur, eTvipuue&u Dual livipuue^oy 
iivifjix) sTvipucr&e irvipua&or 

STvipato iTvipayjo iTVipdccrd^Tjv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
tTvnouTjv declined like the Imperfect. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. I strike or / may or can strike myself 
Tvmo){iav the same as in the Passive. 

Perfect. / have struck^ I may have struck myself 
TETv^iiiBvog (?/, ov) d) as in the Passive. 

Aorist 1. / strike^ I may or can strike myself 

Sing. Tvipomat, Plur. Tvxijihfjed-a Dual Tvip(x)ue&oy 
Tvilir^ Tvipi]0&B Tviprjd&oy 

TvipriTav Tv\p(x)pTai rvipr/ax^oy 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 

Tvnoj^uoiv declined like Aorist 1. 



MIDDLE VOICE. 77 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / might, &c. strike myself. 
%v7tToiiui]v the same as in the Passive. 

Perfect. / might, &c. have struck myself. 
Tszvu^uivog (?/, ov) ai'i]p as in the Passive. 

Future 1. I should, or would strike myself 
Tvipoifir^p declined like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
rvTteolfii'/v contr. rvnotfir^v declin. like cpileoi^rjv -ol/iirjv. 

Aorist 1. I might, &c. strike myself 
Sing. Tvxjjaifiriv Plur. Tvipai^ed^a Dual Tvip a Ifxed^ov 
Tvipaio T{)ip a iud^s Tvipaiad^ov 

Tvipano TvipaivTO Tvipala^Tjv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 

T:v7tolfi7]v declined like the Present. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Strike thyself 
rvTZTov the same as in the Passive, 

Perfect. Strike thyself 
TBTvxpo as in the Passive. 

Aorist 1. Strike thyself 
Sing. — Plur. — Dual 



rvipdii&Cit) Tvipdad-ixjaav or-^cr&ojv jvipdad-ojv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous w^ith Aorist 1. 
tvTtov declined like the Present. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. rvTusod'av to strike one^s self 

Perfect. leTvcpd^ai to have struck one's self 

Future 1. Tvipsod-aL to be about to strike one^s self 

Future 2. Tvneea&av contracted TvneXo&ai,. Synon. with 

Future 1. 

Aorist 1. Tvipacr&aL to strike one's self 

Aorist 2. Tvnia&at. synonymous with Aorist 1, 



78 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. rv7tT6\uevog, ?/, ov^ striking himself. 

Perf. TETvuuivog, ?/, ov, having struck himself. 

Put. 1. Tvipauevo;, ?/, oi^, about to strike himself. 

Put. 2. TVTiBo^evog conlr. -outiepog, tj, or, synon, with Put. 1. 

Aor. 1. Tvipuuerog, ?/, ovj striking or having struck himself. 

Aor. 2. TV7i6/ii6 pog , ?/, opj synon. with Aor. 1. 

AUGMENT. 

<§) 75. 1. The perfect and third future of all moods 
and of the participle, and the aorist and pluperfect of the 
indicative, receive an increase at the begirming, called 
augment. 

2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic aug- 
7nent, and the temporal augment. 

SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 

^ 76. 1. When the verb begins with a consonant fol- 
lowed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment of the perfect 
is formed by prefixmg that consonant with an e, E. g. 

TvTtTOJ perf. rhvcpa, TSTVfxfjiai 

yoacpb) «' ytYga(f)a, yiyga^u/uav. 

So ciyao} (js(jlyi]7<a, S^ioj Te&vita (^ 14. 3), q)vot) ne<f)vy.ay ^alvoi} 
xBx^va. This kind of augment is called reduplication. 

2. When the verb begins with a double consonant 
(^ I I//), or with two consonants the second of which is 
not a liquid, the augment of the perfect is formed by 
prefixing an e. E. g. 

axdrcTOJ perf. sayMcpa, scrza^^oiv 

Note 1. The following perfects take bl instead of the re- 
dupliration : eYhjcfa^ eXh]ya, el'lo/a^ sltiaouat, elor^xa, from 
laaSdro), 'kayyavv.)^ leyixi, MEIPJl, 'PES! say. Observe the 
breathing of a^^uaofiai,. 



AUGMENT. <y 

Note 2. The few verbs beginning with ^^, y^, yr, and 
f^iv, are variable in the augment of the perfect ; as yUcfO) 
ey'Kvq)u and yiylvcpa^ yi'u)gi':^oj iyvibgi'^a, fivuuj fxiiuyriUUL^ invr^uopaio) 

KzdouaL possess, has perf. 'AeKTr^uai and ly.jr^fAOLv. 

Note 3. The verbs nlTCToj fall, TtTr^aau) crouch, have perf. 
fTi:TTO)xa (fiom IlTOfl), TieriTr^a participle nemr^ihg (from 
IITAP.). 

Note 4. The Homeric language has deldoixa and de(5ia 
from dEIfl and dito^deideyuaL irom^s;(ouav, {oi ^tdoixcc, didiu, 
didayuai. 

<^- 77. The PLUPERFECT prefixes an b to the reduplica- 
tion of the perfect. E. g. 

TL'TTTW TBTVCpa pluperf. hSTVCpSiP. 

But Vv^hen the perfect begins with ^ {§ 76. 2) the plu- 
perfect takes no additional augment. E. g. 

aadjiTM eazacpa pluperf. lay.dcfeiv. 

Note 1. The additional augment e of the pluperfect is 
often neglected ; as TeTelevTr^xsiv, from Televjuai. 

Note 2. The verb 2aTrjui^ [2 TAP.) perfect EcTTJjxa, has 
pluperf. huTi]y.Eiv and eiaTr^xecv. 

<§) 78. When the verb begins with a consonant, the 
augment of the imperfect and aorist is formed by pre- 
fixing an s. E. g. 

Ti'TTTw imperf. sivnrov aor. sTvyjoc. 

So ^£W, edeov^ edr^aa' axuTiTCi)^ eaxanrov, laxdcpriV' yvoyqi'^M^ 
iyrihoi'^oy, eypibgicra, iyvcogtad-riy. 

Note 1. These four verbs, ^oilouav will, dvvauat can^ am 
able, lavixi (com p. d7ToA«t'u>) obtain, and (.lilha am about to, 
may take the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic ; 
as e3ovl6;njv and r^SovX6(j.riv , i]dvi>6Li.ir^y and idvyuujjp. Compare 
§ 80. Note 3. 

Note 2. In the Homeric dialect the second aorist act. and 
mid. often takes the reduplication throuoh all the moods and 
participle ; as xexuuov, leluSour^i' infin. ^elixSeaO-ui, ntnl^yor, 
from xdiuu), Att,(/p>di'w, nkr\(f(jo). Ill some instances an £ is 



80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

prefixed to the reduplication, but only in the indicative ; as 
(pgd'Co)^ fl^ENSl, 2 aor. iTiecpQudov, Inecpvov (for iniq^Evovy — The 
augment of the imperfect and aorist is often neglected by 
the epic poets (Homer, Hesiod, ifec.) ; as (fiqov for '^qf()ov 
from cpeQit), (^rj for s^i] from ^uIpu), Tgixnof-ir^p for iiQctno^iriv from 
Toenoj, juu/d/uriv from fKjc/Ofuui. 

<§) 79. When the verb begins with ^, the augment is 

formed by prefixing an e and doubling the ^ (<§> 13. ). E. g. 

ganTu) perf. e^^ucpa pluperf. ^^(JiCf^eiv imperf. e^Qamov aor. 

Note. Homer has ege^ag, tQels, Iq/xtito^bv^ eqaipev^ from 

qbC^m^ ^(xttto). Also QegvTTOJuipa from Qvnoui MEIPSl has 2 

perf. e/uifOQa^ 2 aor. effuooov. 2evo) (simpler 2T/2) has perf. 
pass. eaavfiaL^ pluperf. baav(jii]V' dEIJl I fear y aor. eddeiua. 

TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 

<§) 80. When the verb begins with a short vowel, the 
augment of all the past tenses is formed by lengthening 
that vowel : « and e become v, and o becomes w. E. g. 

dcicoXov&iixt perf. r^xolov&rjxa pluperf. r^y>oXov\fr^xBLv imperf. 
7jyoXov&8ov aor. r^ycolovd-ijCFoi. 

dg^ouj, {^qd^Mixav^ ^xtdjurjv, (bgd^ov/ur^v, o)Q&b)(r(x. 

i]vXT]xeLv, Tivlovp, iivXiiGOL' £v/oiuai^ riV'/ofjirjVy r/v^djur^V' oixioj^ 
cjxT]y,a, (dX7]au, ojK7]fLiaL. For the iota subscript see ^ 3. 

If the vowel is already long, no change takes place ; as 
^fiegooj, iifji^Qoov ^divM, il^divov. A long however is commonly 
changed into r^; as a'couin aor. ^is«- 

Note 1. The following verbs lengthen b not into ^ but 
into et; i(JL(}) permit^ eOi'Qoi accustom, tXlaaco twirl, sXxoj ^nd 
kXxvo) draw, tno) am busy, 'EAfL choose (see algew), egno) and 
k^TTvi^oj, creep, loyat^o^av I work, hcmdix) entertain, e/M have, 
ESI . E. g. imperf. Bi'aov, Bi'di'Qov, b'lXlgctov, bIXxov, Blnofjitiy ^ 

£lXOV. 

Note 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the 
syllabic augment ; as ayvvui, dllaxof.iai, dvddvoj, Bi'xoj, eXno)^ 
EPrSly OTugioj, d)6iM, m'sofiat^ • 2 perf. eaya^ eoixaj eoXnay eog-jfa. 



AUGMENT. 81 

(fee. 'Arddivco has 2 aor. eadov, adop, and evadov (originally 
perhaps E FA J ON), 

Note 3. A few verbs take both the syllabic and temporal 
augment at the same time ; as oq&m see, oiyixt open, perfect 
ewgaxa, mya. The verbs sivm), elnu), and EPTSl, 2 perf. 
■ioLxa^ eolncK. soQya (*^ 80. NoTE 2), have pluperf. idtzsiv, iihl- 
nsiv^ eiogysLv. Compare § 78. Note 1. 

'EoQTd';ot Ionic 6gTu;(D celebrate a festival, imperf. hihgTa^ov 
aor. emTaaa. 

Note 4. The temporal anorment is in many instances neg- 
lected. E. g. svgrjxa, dr^dL'Q6ui]v, ol'roov, from evgicFito)^ ur^dl'^^o- 
(lav, olvoo). Verbs beginning with ov are never augmented ; 
as oviat^or, ovguvoov^ never ojvtu'Qov^ wvguvoov^ from ovid^o), 
ovgavSo). 

The Homeric and the Ionic dialect may omit the tempo- 
ral augment in all verbs ; as e'QsTo, oj-Ulei, dyogr^aajo, from 
e'i^o^uaLj ofiilioj, uyogioj. 

§ 81. 1. Some verbs beginning with a, s, o, followed by 
a single consonant, form the augment of the perfect by 
prefixing the two first letters to the temporal augment. 
E. g. 

ijcyelga), dcxovco perf. dy-r^yeg^ia, aK-rJxoa 

eiiiix), ogidCFto " e^-r^^SKa^ dg-iogv/a. 

This kind of augment is called attic reduplication. 

2. The PLUPERFECT rcceivcs no additional augment ; as 
d.yi]yBgyieLv, ktirjuey.civ, dgo)gv/£iv. Except r^yniKoeiv from (xxotw, 
and r-hjldfLcrjv^ rjAr]A«TO, from elavvco. 

Note. 'EyeigM has 2 perf. eygr^yoga for ^yr^yoga. "Exco has 
(§ 96. 19) 6/u)za (contrary to ^ 14. 3) part, d/atyio;. The 
lonians say dga(g?ixa, dguigi]^iai, for figr,}ca, r^gijuaL, from aigiw. 
Homer has ifni^riiwxa compound TUTi-eui^r^^uvxa from r^uiix). 

The epic poets sometimes omit the temporal augment of 
the second syllable ; as dldhiuai for dlr^hi}.iav from dldoaui, 
dgagvXa from APJl. 

AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 

<§) 82. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition re- 
ceive the augment after that preposition. E. g. 



82 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

dTto-aoTtro) perf. dcno-xixo/ifiuocL aor. ^n-^xoipa 
BTC-Xvix) <f ix-Xilvxa «' i^-tlvau, (^ 15. 2). 

avfi-^ovlevoj ^^ av/u-^^e^ovXevxa <« avv-e^ovXevGa^ (6\ 12. 1). 
avy-ygdcpijj <« uvy-yiyqacpa «' avp-eyguipa, (^ 12. 2). 

So ai')^;fttT-(/^/o>, (TU'^xttT-TJ^^oi/ • avansiOix), Gv^ninetxa, uvvi- 
TCvOov, avv6TietaOi]v • iyxglpu), ivixocpov, iyxexQixu • ikleiTTO), 
bvilemop, llUlsLcpa [^ 12. 3). av'C^vuout (& I2. 4), avvet^viuutaa. 
The prepositions (//-v(jr/, d^ci, (/j^t/, 0:71:0, Jtu, inl, xaid, /neTu^ 
naqd^ -bno^ lose their final vowel before the syllabic augment 
s (see ^ 135. 3). Ueql and 7r^6 are excepted ; as TTSQixdnTcj, 
7t£Qiixo7tTor^ neqiexExdcpeiv • nQOTsivoj, nqoexevvop. In fi^ci the o 
is often contracted with e ; as ngoijleyov for nooileyop from 

Note 1. Sonne verbs compounded with a preposition take 
the augment before that preposition ; as r^q)iovv from dccplrjfii, 
(another form (/gpteo)), r^f^KfieG^av from d.iuq:vivpvjUL, ri/ucpiaSr^ir^aa 
from (^/ucpLG^r/Teuj, 7^711 (nd/urjv from inlGTa/uai.. 

Some take it either before or a/^er the preposition ; as 
ix&Oevdop or xaOrjvdov from xaOevdu), tTiQodviuovjurjv or ngovOv/uoTu- 
fir]p (for ngoeOvtioii/uiip ^ 82. 1) from ngoOv/utouaL. 

The following verbs take the augment before and a/ifcr 
the preposition at the same time: Ccpog06o)^ ^ve/o/uui, dtundo), 
tvoxlm, duKXOPSoj, naQOiveu), imperf. r^PijigOovVy r^vei'/o^riv, r^v(h- 
X^ovp^ S7tag(i)vovp, a or. ripchgdojaa, &c. 

2. In verbs compounded with other words the augment 
stands first. E. g. 

^ae^icx) perf. rifT^^j]xa imperf. t^gb^ow 

avTOjuoleo) <' i]vToiu6h]xa '' rj^To^oXovv. 

Note 2. Lycurgus (the orator) has perf. InnoTSTqdcprixa 
from inTtoTQocpm {Jnnog and r^egow) / /reep horses. 

Note 3. The few verbs compounded with the particles bIj 
and dvG-^ if they begin with «, e, or o, take the augment 
after these particles; as svaQSGrioj, dvGagsGTea), imperf. e-urjqi- 
axovp, dvGi]08GTovv. In all other cases the augment precedes 
these particles ; or, in compounds with el, may be neglect- 
ed (^ 80. Note 4); as dvGxeQalvw, dvGMTTeio, avdoxifieoj, svoj/ov- 
fiott^, imperf. idvaxsgaLpov, idvGwnovv^ rfudoxifA^ovv , svw/ovfiriv. 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 83 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 

'^ 83. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which 
are found in jevery part of that verb. It is obtained by 
dropping o> of the present active (^ 94. and ^ 96). For ex- 
ample, ^eyoi, navM, Tifi6i.u)^ t/w, root ^£/, nav^ TLfA,u, ri. 

2. The 7*00^ of a tense consists of those letters which are 
found in every part of that tense. For exanriple, rvip is the 
root of the first aorist and first future, active and middle ; 
Tvns, of the second future active and middle, and of the 
second aorist passive ; rvcpOs or rvcpdrj, of the first aorist 
passive ; TvcpOria, of the first future passive. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 84. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
the primary tenses (§ 74. 3) of the indicative. 

Active. 
Pers. 1st. 2d. 3d. 

Sing, fii^ o-fr, ?, ada (n, tv 

Plur. fiBv, fiiFg 78 vai^ vxi 

Dual, (^svy /ueg rov tov 

Passive and Middle. 

Pers. 1st. 2d. 3d. 

S ng. l^OLv crav, at, rat, 

Plur. fisOa, fxsrrda gOs vrctv, aToc^ 

Dual' fiedov, (leadov aOov uOov 

2. The following are the terminations of the secondary 
tenses (^ 74. 3) of the indicative. 



Pers, 
S'ng. 


Active. 
1st. 2d. 

V g, oda 


3d. 


Plur. 
Dual. 


juev, fieg oOs 
fi8v, fieg aOov 


uav, V 
uOrjv 


Pers. 


Passive and Middle. 
1st. 2d. 


3d. 


Shig. 
plur. 
Dual. 


firiv, (Lidv ao, 
(le.Ou^ jueaOa ade 
fiaOotf, fieaOov qOov 


TO 

vjo, a TO 



84 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Note 1. Mi^ (Lat. ~m) is found in verbs in fii^, as (prj-^il, 
didix)'^i, Tidi]-fxi, daixvV'fiL' in some Homeric subjunciives 
(§ 86. Note 2); and in the optative of verbs in w; as 
Tvnioi-fxi, TBTixf oL-itiL, Tvipai-^L^ ivifjoi- j-u. \{\ all otHcr cases 
it is dropped ; as Agyw, tutijoj, fur Uyofiv 'Uyuitxiy tvtxto^v tu- 

Meg (Lat. -mus), luav, belong to the Doric dialect ; as 
pres. ioladofjeg^ ^dcxovueg, perf. dedol-^aueg^ imperf. eifJTioiueg, 
aor. evQotieg, fut. koipovjueg. 

Mecfifa, fieu^ovy belong to the old or Homeric dialect; as 
idivEoiJiea&u^ TeTtfiriuea&tx. It is often found in the Attic poets 
(Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, <Slc.). 

Note 2. The termination at of tfie 2d person sing-, act. is 
found only in the old iaat= el or elg thou art. In all other 
cases it becomes g ; as Uysv-g fur Uye-cn, rhvcpa-g fur tstv- 
(pa-Gi. 

Sd-a (Lat. 21 pers. perf. -sti) bel mi^ to the old dialect. 
The Attic dialect uses it in some words ; as imperf. e(f)i/U&a 
for scp^g, perf olad^u (for oid-ad^u^ ^10. 2) for oidug from 
£t'(Ju>, iiG&a iovr^g from el^i. See also \ 86. Note 2, and ^ 87. 
Note 4. 

Hui, GO, are found in the perfect and pluperfect; as t£- 
ivipav (reTvn-GOLi)^ tTsiviiJO (^reruTT-ao), ntTnxvaai,, iniTiuv^ro, 
from TVTtTix), navu)' and in the present, imperfect, and 2d 
aorist of verbs in /uh as 2(jTu-aaL, lara-ao, Egtu-go. In all 
other cases they become «t, o, as jime-ut, tTinie-o, iivipa-o 
contracted rvnTji, hvnTov, eiviiJO). The Homeric dialect 
sometimes drops the or even in the perfect pass. ; ?is Se^lr^ixi, 
fiifjivi]ai, fur ^i'^h/uaL, juefivrjcrai. — The Al< xandrian dialect 
has crtj^t' even in the present pass, of verbs in w; as odwde^ 
oav contracted odwauai from odwdioiiat.. 

Note 3. The termination ol of the 3d person sing, is 
found in verbs in ,<^^, as T/6^?/-a^, dlduj-Gi- and in some Ho- 
meric subjunctives (^ 86. Note 2). In all other cases it is 
dropped. 

T^, vTv (Lat. -t, -nt), belong to the Doric dialect ; as 
ecpl7]TL, Ti&fjTc, dldix)TL, =* ecpb]uc, tIx^i^gv, diduiOi (See «S 1 17. 

Note 2)* /HO/dt'C^O-VTi, UI^UTiIbKO—VTL, = /LfO/d^i(iOV—Gi, UVUTiXB' 

Kov-GL' perf. (sidriy.a-vTi,, sGidy^u-viL, == ddr^xa-Gi, kGTuxa—Gi. 

2av is found in the pluperfect, a>; hervcpev-Gav ; in the 
aorist passive (§ 92.), as arvcpOrj-Gav, aUyn-Gap ; and in verbs 
in /w^, as iGia-Guv, eOe-Gav, edo-Guv. In all other cases it 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 85 

becomes J' ; as "ervmo-v for hvnJo-Gctv, ejvxpa-v for h<)ipa- 
(Tav,'—The Alexandrian dialect has imperf. ia/dQa-crav , icfalvo- 
cap, 2 aor. si'do-uav^ svgo^aav, r^Wo—aav. 

Aiai^ «To, belong to the Homeric and Ionic dialect. They 
are found in the ^perfect and pluperfect; as perf. plur. 
iwOdg-aTat for eopOa^fxhov elal^ pi u perf. 7i6q)o^7]-aTo for nsq)6- 
^qpTo. — The vowel ^ and the diphthong bl are commonly 
changed into s before arott, axo ; as olici-aTat, elqe-aioa, 6q- 
f/i-aTO, ax£)coaiLfe-aTO, for O/'xt^— j/rat, sVorj—vTaL, &()iii]-vto^ iy.eTcd- 
uai]~vTo. — The letters n and |^, y^ and y, generally become (p, 
and /, before these terminations ; as TsiQucpaTaL from TQ£(f.o), 
}cexQv(paTaL from aqlnzix) (^KPYBIl), tiBTdiyaTO from xdacrw 
[TAP Jl).— The letter J becomes d before these termina- 
tions ; as dy(x)vldcxTav from dyixivtl^a), saToltdaro from (noUtw 

Herodotus has xearat =^ xslvrai, dvvbaj(xi= dvvavjav. — Axo 
is found also in the imperfect and in the optative (^ 87. Note 
4); as imperf. eneiQihajo for ineco(bvjo from nsL(jdoiLiai, idgiaxo 
for idgvvTo from tc^oiw, eiLdiaTO for hidevjo. The cormecling 
vowel o before «ro is changed into s ; as dneygacpeaxo^ iat^vi^ 
aro, for 0:716*^^0:90 //to, ^gLvovto. 

§85. 1. The vowel immediately preceding the termina- 
tion is called the connectivg vowel. It is an in the first 
person of all the numbers, and in the third person plural ; 
in all the rest it is an e. 

The connecting vowel of the perfect active^ dtm] first ao- 
rist active and middle is an «. But perf. and 1 aor. act. 
3d per. sing, have s. 

The pluperfect act* has £^ throughout : in the 3d pers. 
plur. it has et, or s. 

The pres. and fut. have w in the 1st pers. sing., and et ia 
the 2d and 3d sing. 

2. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 

Pres. 4" Put. Act. Pres. iSf Put. Pass. <^ Mid. 



Pers. 1st. 2d. 3J. 
Sing. 0; Etg ev 

Plur. o-/Ltev E-T6 ova v(^ 12.4^.) 
Dual. Ojiiev E-Tov e-tov 



1st. 2d. 3d. 

0-U(tV E-Ut, 7^, EL E'TOLV 

0-f.ieda e-oOe o-vTctb 

o ^eOop E-aOov e-oOov 



Imperf (Sf 2 I Aor. Act. Impf Pass. <^Mid.Lf2Aor. Mid. 



Pers. l^t. 


2d. 


3d. 


1st. 


2d. 


3d. 


Sing, o-v 


e-g 


e 


o-^iiv 


6-0, ov 


S'JO 



86 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Plur. O'fiev B-je 

Dual. 0-(JiBV B'TOV 


o-v 
B'jr^v 






o-^edcx 
o-fXBQov 


B-ads 
B-aOov 


0-VTO 

B-aOriv 


First Aorist Act. 
Pers. 1st. 2tl. 3d. 






First Aorist Mid. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 


Sing. « cc-g 
Plur. a-/iiBP a-TB 

Dual. OL'^lBV a-TOV 


£ 

a-Trjv 






afjrjv 
a-fjaOa 
a - jits do V 


a-o, w 

a-adB 
u-aOov 


U-TO 

avTO 
a-aOrjv 


Pers. 1st. 


Perfect Active. 
2d. 


3d. 




Sing, a 
Plur. a-jUBv 
Dual. a-fiBv 




a-TOV 




B 

U-Ul (^ 12. 
a-TOV 


4) 


Pers. 1st. 
Sing. Bi.v 

Plur. Bt-fiBV 


Pluperfect Active. 
2d. 
BL.g 

Bt>-T6 


3d. 

Bl 

Bi-oav and B-uav 


Dual. Bt-fiBv 




ev- 


wv 




Bl'TTlV 





Note 1. In some instances the perfect active takes in the 
3 pers. plur. av for aai ; as eogyuv, nicpoiKuv, lyvixiTiav^ for 
idgyaav, nBq)QUaai, ^yvdacacfv. 

Note 2. In the Alexandrian dialect, the 2 aorist act. and 
mid. often lake the connecting vowel of the 1 aorist; as 
Bida for Bidov'*^ plur. elinav^ecpvyav, forf^tTTO^, dcpvyov- 2 aor. 
mid. B{)0(kjLi7]v for BiqS^rjv. — In some instances the 1 aor. act. 
and mid. takes the connecting vowel of the 2 aor., as fc|?r]ae- 
To, idoaBTo, imperat. U^eo, oqgbo, oIub^ ajexe, for t^r^aaTo, (fee. 

Note 3. The Doric dialect has 2 pers. sing. Bg for Big ; 
as (TvgiadBg, difielyeg^ for crvgtadBig^ dinelyBLg. Compare § 89. 
Note. 

Note 4. The Homeric and the Ionic dialect have pluperf. 
sing. act. £«, eag, bb, for biv^ Big^ bl ; as eycB/rivBa^ eTcs/r^vBag^ 
^i^sxrivBB, for BKB/rivBtv, 6lc. from /aivw. The Attics some- 
times contract bu into ^; as exs/ripi], mBnovOrj, r^xrixor], for 
^xB^'^vecv, anenovOsiv^ r^minoBiv. In some instances the 3 pers. 
sing, takes v moveable (^15. 1); as ^'^e^?^, ecjTri'ABvvy nBTioU 
dsiv, for Tidsv, edTTixEc, tietioIOel. 

Note 5. The Homeric dialect often takes Bcr>cov, saxsg, 
euytB^ plur. BGxojjiev, eajfere, bgkov, for ov^ ac, e, oiusv, &lc., and 
eaxofj^Bv^ BGXBo^ BGXSTO, plur. idnofAeOa^ BaxBods^ bghovto^ for 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 



87 



our^v^ CO, 870, &c. ; as nianeay.ov, ^alveG'Aov, from nefinco, ^aivo). 
After a vowel these endings generally become ciitov, aaeg, ay,€, 
&.C. ; as eaaaov, vinauxov, froni ^«w, y^xdcw xaleaxdf^rjv. nuile- 
ay.ojUT^v, from aaltu)^ nutlioi). The 1 aorist has aaaop, aaxeg, 
aaxe, &c., a?, ■avdr'^aaanov from avddu). The imperfe( t some- 
times takes auaov for saxor ; as xgvmaaxoi^, ^imuaxov^ from 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



§ 86. The subjunctive mood borrows the terminations of 
the primary tenses of the indicative [^ 84. 1). Its connect- 
ing vowels are oy and rj ; in the 2 and 3 sing., r^. The follow- 
ing table exhibits the terminations and the connecting vow^els 
united. 



Active. 
Pers, 1st. 2d. 

Si7ig. w f/-? 

Plur, OJ-ILISV rj-TS 

Dual, CO ^sv rj-Tov 



Passive and Middle. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

cO'/ueda Tj-ads co-vrac 
oj-fieOov V'ddov Tj'Odov 



3d. 

!? 
wa^(§12.4) 

Ti'TOV 

Note 1. The perfect active subj. may be formed by means 
of the participle and ^Ivao to he ; as TeTvq)(bg (yXa, bg) o), r^g, -jj, 
&c., for T£Tt'(jDw, Texvcfr^g, TSTvcpri, &,c. Compare § 87. Note 
1, and ^91. 2. 

Note 2. The Homeric language often has sing, mim, riada, 
riCTi; as iOela^uL, tv/ojul, 2 pers. idilriada, jv/r^aOa, 3 pers. 
iOslriGri, Tv^ricfi.—li may use the connecting vowels e and o 
of the indicative; as eqi^o^ev for egv^cofxevj i'ofiev for Xij^fJiev^ 
ei'dsxe for Bl'Sips^ (pOlBTav for cpdb]Tai. 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 



§87. The optative mood borrows the terminations of the 
secondary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 2). Its connecting 
vowel is 01 ; but in the first aorist act. and mid. it has ««. 
The 1 pers. sing. act. takes the termination ^t ; the 3 per. 
plur. act. ends in ev. Here follows a table. 



Pers, 
Sing, 
Plur. 



Active. 
1st. 2d. 

oi-izv 01- g 

OV-HSV Oi TS 



Dual, oi'fxev oc-TOP 



3d. 

OL 

oi-ey 

Ot'TlJV 



Passive and Middle. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

01 (ftjP Ol-O 01-70 

oi-ue6a 01 ads oi-p70 

oi-(xe6ov oi'oOov of"(jOii% 





1 Aorist Mid. 






av 


-f^rjv 


aV'O 


at 


'TO 


at 


-juedu 


av-aOe 


(Xi- 


VTO 


(XL 


-fxeOov 


ai-udop 


VLl 


'O-OtjV 



88 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

1 Aorist Act. 
Sing. OLi'fiL ai^-g av 
Plur. ai'fiBv at-re ai-Bv 
Dual. ai-}iBv ai-TOV aL-Trjv 

Note 1. The perfect active opt. may be formed by means 
of the participle and elvai. to be ; as TBTV(f>C)g (via, o^) ft>/»', 
Bii]g^ Bi'f]^ (fee. for TBTuq)OL/iiL, TBTvcpoig^ jBTv(poi>, &c. Compare 
^86. Note 1, and ^91. 2. 

Note 2. In many instances, particularly in contract verbs, 
the optative active takes ou]v, oirj;^ oirj^ p]ur. oujUBf.oujTB^ oir^- 
(Tav^ for oi/ut^^ oig^ ot, &.C., as uBcpevyoifxiiv for necpBvyoifjc, ttb- 
TCOiOoirj for TCBnolQoi, ihjlvOoirjg for th^luOoig, crxobiv for (J/olfxi. 

Note 3. The 1 aorist opt. act. has also biu, Biag, bib [v)^ 
plur. Biu^BVy BhaTB^ Biav ; as tvipBia, rvipBiag, Ttn/yeie (y), &c. 
for Tvipai^i, Tuipaig, zvipai, 6lc. Tfie 2 and 3 sing, and the 
3 plur. of this form are more common than the correspond- 
ing persons of the other form. 

Note 4. In the Homeric dialect the 3 pers. plur. opt. 
pass, and viid. often takes «to for vto (^84. Note 3); as 
(igrjaalaTO for (xgr^aavvTO from uouo^ai^ yBvoluio for yivot^vjo 
oipolaw for oipoii'To. — In some instances the 2 pers. sing. act. 
takes oOa ; as xluloiaOa for ^lalotg, ^uXocada for ^uXoig. 

Note 5. The Alexandrian dialect has 3 pers. plur. opt. 
act. oiaav for oi^bv, and aicrav for ccibv ; as iBlnoicrav for ^Bi- 
TioiBv^ Tvipaiaav for TvipaiBv. See also ^ 84. Note 3. 

imperative mood. 

^88. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera- 
tive mood. 







Active. 


Passive 


and Middle. 


Pers. 


2d. 


3d. 


Pers. 2d. 


3d. 


Sing. 


di. 


^ TW 


Sine. (TO 


aOot) 


Plur. 


T6 


TOOCjaV^ VTCOV 


Plur. (tOb 


(rOotaaVj adcov 


Dual. 


TOV 


Tix)V 


Dual. (tOov 


gOojp 



Note. ©^ ao, are used when the connecting vowel is 
dropped. But when the connecting vowel is used, Ot^ disap- 
pears, and (TO becomes o. 

2. The connecting vowel of the imperative is an b. But 
the first aorist active and middle has an «; in the 2 singu- 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. b9 

lar it ends in ov and at respectively. The following table 
exhibits the terminations and the connecting vowels united. 

Active ' 
Pers. 2d. 3d. 

Sing, ' e 8-70) 

Plur, B-TE e-rojaav, o-vjo)v 

Dual, S-TOV S-TVJV 

Passive and Middle. 
Pers, 2d. 3d. 

Sing, e-o, ov e-aOco 

Plur. e-oOb 6-aO(j)(Tav, s-adojv 

Dual. B.odov e-gOojv 

1 Aorist Active. 
Sing, ov a-Tij) 

Plur. (X'TS a-Tix)a(xv, a-vTOJv 

Dual. a-Tov a-TijJv 

1 Aorist Middle. 
Sing. OLL a-aOo) 

Plur. a-ade a-oOijoaav, a-adcov 

Dual. a-aOov a-adojp 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

^ 89. The terminations and connecting vowels of the in- 
finitive mood are : 

Active. Passive and Middle. 



Pres.Fut.&2Aor.Mid. e-adab 
1 Aorist Mid. a-adai, 



Present, Fut. & 2 Aor. e^-j^ 
Perfect e-pai 

1 Aorist (XL 

Note. The Homeric language has s-^uevav and e-f.iBv^ for 
Bi-v or B-von, ; as nvvtfABvai or mpi^uBv for ttIpbiv, ilOtuBvai or 
tXOefiBv for HObIv, hcTTauBvav for hdrAvai^ sdfisrat for edsiv, 
IdfXBvav for Bldhai (root I^). — The jEolo-Doric dialect has 
Bv and ■i]v for blv (compare ^ 85. Note 3); as ^octkbv for 
^oaxBiv, xalQi]v for /a(()Bir. — The lonians change bTp of the 

2 aor. act. into isip ; as TvniBiv for rvneip, faliBiv for 
^aleXv from ^(jcIIoj. 

PARTICIPLE. 

^ 90. The root of the participle pros. fut. and 2 aor. act. 
is formed by annexing ovt to the root of the tense (^ 83. 
3); as 

8* 



90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Present, rvm-ovr tvtctmv (^ 36. 2), gen. riunrovTog, 6lc, 

Future I. Tuxp'OvT rvipojp (ibid.), gen. Tviporiog, iScc. 

Future 2. tvub-opt rvniixiv contract. Tvnibv, <fec. 

Aorist 2. TVTidt^T jvnoiv^ g^""^* Tynoi^Tog, ^c. 
For the participle of 1 aor. and perf. act, we annex w^'Tg and 
org respectively ; as 

Aorist 1. Tvip-apig Ttn/^ofg (^ 36. I), gen. ruxpavjogy ifec. 

Perfect. TeTvcp()Tg rsTvcp^g (^ 36. 1, (1)) gen. rsTvcpdiogy (fee. 

The participle passive and middle ends in o^evog, 1 aor. 
mid. (xfxepog ; as 

Pres. TVTiT-o^usvog, ?/, ox^, Aor. 1 Mid. rvip-uiuevog, iy, oi'. 

It is evident that the vowels o and « preceding vt, vzg, ig, 
(xBvog, are connecting vowels. 

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 

^ 91. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle 
have no connecting vowel. E. g. 

Perfect. 

Indie. 8, TBTVfjifjav (rirvn-uai) P, jSTviuueda (TBTvn-fxeQa^ 
TBivipui (reTUTT-aat) TtTvcpde (T^Tvn-adB) 

rsrvniac D. rsTv/ufjedov, (fee. 

Impr. S, T^Tvipo (rirvn-uo) S. TeTvqjOe (jErvn-ods') 

TBTvcpdixi (reTvTC-udo)) T6Tv(f)QiDGav (jBTvn-adcoaav) 

Infin. TBTvcpOai (iBivn-adai) 

Part. TBTv/u^epog (TBTVTt'/uevog), tj, ov. 

So y^cigow yeyqafx^ai, {yiyqacp-fjiav), ysygaipav (yiyqoLCp-oai), yi- 
yqamai, (yeyqacp-jai^^ (fee. ; tbv/w TBTBvyfJiai (jBTev/'iuai)^ jiiBv^at^ 
(rsTBvx-aai,), TBXBVKTai (^tbtbv^-tcxv\, (fee; ttbIOuj ninBia/uai^ (tt^- 

TtBid-fiaiV TlBTTBiOai InBTlBid-UaLS, TIBTIBLUTUL {nBTTBlQ-Tai'^y (fec. 

For the changes before (W, a, and t, see ^ 7 — ^ 11. 
Pluperfect. 

Indie. S. BTBTVflfJiriV {BTBTvn-lll]v\ P, BTBT{)fji^Bda 

BTBTVlpO (eTeTVTt-ao) BTBTVCpOs 

BIBTV71T0 D, BTBTVfXfJLBOoV, (fec. 

When the root of the verb (§ 83. 1) ends in a consonant^ 
the 3 pers, plur. of the perf, and pluperf. is formed by 
means of the participle and Biat are, ^crav were ; as 
Perf. JSTVfji^Bvoi (aL, a) Bial for tbtvti-vtoh^ 
Plup. TeTvjx^ivov iat^, a\ r^aav, for iTBivn-vTO 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 91 

When it ends in a vowel they are formed regularly ; as 
Ttoim^ nenobivTav, InenolrjPTO • ^uadevw, ^s^aailevvTuv, i^e^u- 
GilevvTo. See also ^ 84. Note 3. 

2. The perfect pass, and mid. suhj< and optat. is generally 
formed by means of the participle and the verb ^^^"^ to be. 

Subj. TBTV^ahog (?/, ov) S, r^g, r^ &C. 
Optat. TSTv^^ivog (rj^ ov) shiP, sl'rjg^ ei'f], &,c. 

The perfect subj, of verbs in ao), £o>, ow, may be formed 
by prefixing the augment of the perfect (^76.) lo the con- 
tracted present subj. In this instance «e becomes rj. E. g. 

itT&ofjiav perf. subj. xsKTcbiuai, '^, Tjra^, (fee. 

fiiuvricrxo) {^MNAJl\ " ^Bfxv(huai^ tJ, TJTott, (fee. 

jejupuj (TMAJl) '' T6T^ih(jiai, r^^ if\Tai^ &C. 

Others accent xsHw^aai., Tcaxrri, 7tsy.Ti]TaL, &c. — We observe 

that such perf. subj. are rare. 

The perfect opt, of verbs in «&j, eo), ow, vo), may be formed 
by dropping fnai^ of the perf. indie, and annexing |W?/^, o, to, 
4fec. (§ 84. 2) preceded by an i^, E. g. 

Hxaonav xixTtjuat perf. opt. y.exrr^^rjv^ r^o^ tJto, &c. 
uv^vr^GXii) ^d^vi]^ixL «< fief.ivyiai]v, tjo, i^ro, &,c. 

^(aAiui x,exh]iiav <« zexlrnurjv^ ijo, r^io, &c. 

Others accent fiifivrio, (ib^vt^to, &lc. The verb ^^5w has 
perf. pass. opt. Islviujv^ vo, vio, (strictly leXvliurjv, IslvTo, Xs- 
Iviio), &c. Compare ^ 117. Note 4. — Such optatives are 
rare. 

Note 1. These two verbs, ^lavrioxM (simple present 
MNAP^) and xTdo^uav have also perf. pass, opt, (^b^ivo[^ui]v and 
ILi£uv(oui]v, 010 and (5o, (5to, &c. ; xexTQ^fiijv^ cuo, cDto, &,c. Ho- 
mer has flBf.lV8(iiUl]V^ fLlSUVeCLiTO. 

Note 2. In some instances the second perfect and 
pluperfect act. drop the connecting vowel in the indica- 
tive, imperative, and infinitive. Verbs in «o> are contracted 
in the subjunctive and participle: their optative follows the 
analogy of verbs in //^ (^117.). E. g. from p«/i/w (simple BAJl) 
we have 

Perfect 2. 
Indie. S, ^^^oca P. §i8afiev D. ^e^ctf^sy 

^tSuag ^i3uT6 ^i^iaiov 

^epue ^edacji^ (y) ^i^uioy 



92 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Subj. S. §e§(h P. ^e^w^uBP D. ^ef^thfisv 

^^■^fi9 §e§iiie ^eSriiov 

§8^-^ §e^{hai. (v) §8^riTov 

Optat. S, ^e8ixb]v P. ^e^ixiriasp D. ^e^ubjfiep 

§e^ubig ^e^uhjTS. ^e^uhjTOv 

Imper.>S./?^^«(9.(§88. N.) P. f^fc'i^^Te D. ^i^axop 

Infinit. ^e^avav 

Particip. ^e^ixb);, ^s^awaa and ^e^avXa, (^£(?a(i^ contracted ^e- 
^(hg, ^e^^aa ^e^d);, gen. ^s^mog ihai]g, <fcc. The 
uncuntracled fern, ^a^uibcru is not used. 

Pluperfect 2. 

S. i^e^dsiv P. iSi^aiuev J), i^i^afiev 

E^e^&eLg i^e^axs i^i^arov 

t^B^ueu e^e^acrav t^e^aiiiv 

So Ovr^CTHix} (^OIVAfl) die, rtOvaa^ T6dva[rjv^Tidi'adi^TEdv6Lvaiy 
TsOvs^g- TAASl sujffer, tItIucx, TSTlaiijv, jbjlaOi, TSikdvuL' 
iGTr]jiii i^^TASl) 'place, bUTua, iaiib, iaiixhjv, eaiaOi, iuTuvai^ 
laTaihg conlr. sanhg. 

The sing, 2 perf, and 2 pluperf, indie, from verbs in «w 
is not used. 

Kgd^oj ery, 2 perf. tciygaya, (fee. 1 plur. ^iixgw^/usv for itexod- 
yafiev, imperat. Tciy.Qu/dv for xexQccyedi, pluperf. iicsxgdyeiv, 1 
plur. sxeKgay/UEv. 

^ioi) fear, didia Horn. dEtdia, plur. dsldL/uEv dEldne, im- 
perat. SEldidL, pluperf. plur. idEldijUBVy &c. 

Eidix) i^UJl) see, oWa, plur. i'dinEv and tcr/iiEv (^ 10. 1), I'ctte 
(^ 10. 3), subj. and optat. Eido), eidElrjv (from EIJEIl), imperat. 
i'adv i'aTOJ &c. for I'dOi^ I'dTO) (^ 10. 3), infin. I'd fuBvai^ ^^ Eider ai, 
2 pluperf. plur. fidfiEv, r^are, riaav.. 

'Arcbyd) command, avujya, I plur. (ivory ^ev for dvibya^JEv^ im- 
perat. dvM/dv^ dcvLxjyeTix) and d.v(jix6(x) (avibx-oOix), ^11), dv(hyETS 
and dvLoxOs {avix)x-(Td6). 

Ei'-zM seem, eoi^jca, 1 plur. eoiy/tisv (^ 9. 1), 3 dual el'y.To'v, 
pluperf. 3 dual iinTi^v. 

AORIST PASSIVE. 

§ 92. The 1 aorist passive borrows the terminations of 
the secondary tenses of the active. The root of this tense- 



ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 

* e 



(^ 83. 2) is formed by annexing 6e or drj to the root of th, 
verb. All the oioods, except the subjunctive, drop the con- 
necting vowel. E. g. 

Aorist 1. 

Indie. S, hv(f)6i]-v P, 6T6cpdi]-usv D, iivcpdri^usv 

tTvcpOrj—g eivq.0Tj-T6 iTvcpOtj-TOP 

icucpdrj hvcpdrj—aav iTvqiOri—Triv 

The Homeric dialect sometimes changes the 3 plur. 
i](Tav intofi^; us eTvq)d£v^ tor^ivOev^ xoa-ui^Oev. Com- 
pare ^117. Note 2. — Mi^dyO/jp for ^uiuvOei^ = tixiuvOr]' 
(T(xi^ is found. 

Subj. S, TvcpOiix) Tvq)66rig rvcpderi^ &;c. contracted TvcpOih tv- 
cpOf^g TvcpOf^, &:c. — Homer- also rvq^Os ioj vcpdsli^g 

Opt. S. ivcp66-h]v Tvcpds-lrjg Tvcpde-trj, (fee. like iiOeb^v from 
TidrjUi^ which see. The syncopated forms TvcpOel^ 
fisv TvcpOelTs Tvcpdslev (see the paradigm) are more 
common than the regular ones. Compare §117. 
Note 5. 

Imper. S. rvcpdrj^Ti (§ 14. N. 4) P. Tvcpdrj-Ts 

Tvcpdri-TOJ TVCpQr^-TbiCrciV or —6ivT0)V 

Infin. TV(p6^-vav — Horn. TvcpOr^-^usi^aL and r^-fisv (§ 89. 
Note). 

Part. 7:vq)6eig (Tvq)d8-~vTg'j rvcpdeTaa TvcpQiv, &c. 

Aorist 2. 
Indicat. iivnTj-v, <fec., (fee, precisely like Aorist 1. 

Note. The old or epic or Homeric language has some 2 
AoRisTS Mid. without the connectinu; vowel. E. g. eysvTo 
for tyevovTo from yiyvoiiai i^FENSiy idiyitirjif edexio' infin. o^- 
Oai. {oo—adai^y part, oouet^og, from ooyvui (OPJl). 

ACCENT. 

§93. Note. 1. The accent is placed on the antepem/It 
if the last syllable permits it (§20. I); tvutoubi', eivniov^ 
TBTvcpa^ T6Tvcpu(jv, jiiv^uui, (ki^ctys : if not, it is placed on the 
penult; as Tuniuj^ eivcpOt^v, iivipix)^ (pdtuj^ (jptA/jaia, q}iXj\um, 
evcpijdii^ai^, cjotArjcfot, 7ieq>di\xoi^ (§ 20. Note). 



94 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

2. The 2 aor, wid, and per/, pass, infin., and "perf. pass, 
part, take the accent on the penult; a.s Tvuiudav, lexvcpOdii, 
rsTvfjifievog. Also ihe 1 aor, act. ivjin., as cpdriaui^ B\)(f)Quvai. 
Also all infinitives in vai (except Homer, infin. in fjievui, 
fiBv) ; as TSivQpivai^ jvcpdr^t^ai, laidt^ai,, di86v(xv. 

Dissyllabic verbs take the accent on the penult ; as/^^icjpw, 
Tvipop, ecprjp, edujv, (pegs, 

3. The 2 aor, act, infin. and part., and all participles in 
wg, vg, evg, ovg, ag (except 1 aor. part, from verbs in o), as 
Ttu//«g), take the accent on the last syllable; as Tvnelv, reia- 
y(x)v, Teivnibg, dsiTivvg^ dtdovg, laidg^ (rrdg. 

The 2 sing, of the imperat, of the 2 aor, act, of the fol- 
lowing verbs takes the accent on the last syllable : EIIlfL 
elTT^, BQxoviai aids, evglaxuj e{)gs, Jya/u^uvix) la^e and ^(x^e^ eldijj 
ids and I'ds. The 2 aor. wid. imperat. 2 sing, usually takes 
the accent on the last syllable ; as la^ov, yepov^ laOov, from 
la/u^dpio^ ylyvofjiuv^ lupOdvoj. In composition these forms fol- 
low the general rule (^ 93. Note. 1); as ftcreA^e, divdlu^e, 
ci'ai^ds, induOov. 

4. In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back 
than the augment ; as ngoaelxov, zaOr^vdov, dvellov, duf^axov^ 
dvBcrioiv ^^= d,ve(TTi](javy 

5. When the augment is omitted (^ 78. Note 2), the ac- 
cent is placed on the next syllable ; as nlnre for envnxB^ dais 
for adaiB : in this instance monosyllabic forms take the cir- 
cumflex ; as ^ri for b^i], yv^ for eyv(x). In compound verbs the 
accent is placed on the preposition ; as B^cpaivov for hBcpm- 
POP, avft^ixLPOP^ for avpB^aiPOP, 

FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

present active. 

^ 94. The first person of the present indicative act. 
is the foundation of the Greek verb ; all the other tenses 
are derived from it. 

Verbs are divided into pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid 
verbs, according as the letter before w is a vowel, a mute 
{n^cp, Tiyx^ Td&), or a liquid (l^vg), E. g. dgdo), notio), di]- 
looj, devKvvo)^ navij}^ are pure verbs ; ^slnoj, ygdcpoj, nlexoi), Isyoj, 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 95 

qidco, 7teid-(x)f are mute verbs ; (utlix), vi^oj^ xglroj, aTreigoj, are 
liquid verbs. 

<§) 95. The penult of a pure verb, if short, is length- 
ened in the perfect, future, and aorist : a, when it is not 
preceded by s, i, or q^ is changed into rj. 

For examples see ^98, ^ 102, ^ 107, and ^ 109. 

Note 1. Some pi/re verbs retain the shf)rt vowel through 
all the tenses : such are d.y&o^aij (xldeofjai^ uxioiuuc, uA^o*, drtoi, 
oQxiix), d^ow;, d^u>, e/UEO), OMui, xXda) break, yeXaco)^ xuleo), Tcoe/udo), 

fut. aldeuo^ai, dyJaouac^ ulicnx), avicnx) (^^-), Alc. aor. rjoxeaa, 
r\q6Ga, r\^e(Jix^ &c. perf. a'Qexa^ TsO-laxa, ycixlocKix^ &:c. 

Note 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs 
is variable. E. g. 

aivsoj, fut. aiveaco and -^jo-w, aor. f^vsaa and riP7](Ta, perf. pass. 

r^vri^ai^ aor. pass, r^vid^r^v. 
alQSn), fut. tttV^O"a>, perf. pass, r^orj^ai, aor. pass, r^qid-rjv. 
diu) bind, fut. cJrjcrw, aor. ediiaa, perf. Sedsxa, dide/uac, aor. 

pass. ids&TjVy 3 fut. dedr^ao^aat. 
yafAeix), fut. ya^duo)^ perf. yeyaui-jxa, ysya^irj^ai^ aor. pass. 

eyauri&r]v, part, also yujuextelaa. 
B-vgiaxix) (also ^ETPEIl), fut. £i5^rjaw, perf. evgr^xa, evqrj^av, 

aor. pass, evoe&rjv. 
fiaxouoLV i^MJt XEJl^, fut. ^ax^ao^iai and r^aofmt. 
vi^ix) i^NEMEJl)^ fut. nsiui\(ju), perf. vevifiiixa, vevEixrj(,iav^ 

aor. pass, he^v^d-riv and £^^^7/?^. 
TTOiL^sw, fut. TTOxfiaa) and '^]0"a>, perf. 7tS7i6&rjxa, 7i67r6&i]fjat^ 

aor. pass, enoifecfd-riv. 
/PEJl I say, perf eUgijXa^ El'gi]^uat, aor. pass, ig()r^x^1]v and 

Note 3. A''^d:o>, ;^o(i:o,woft, has fut. /oi]0-a>, /mjao/zat, perf. pass. 
XBxqrj^vLL, aor. [)ass. i/gricr&rjv, aor. mid. iyj^U^^^l^^i^- 'Axgodio* 
^«t has fut. uxgouao/uai (^^^-^-^ 

^ 96. The present in use is not always the foundation upon 
which the other parts of the verb rest. Many verbs have, 
or are suf)posed to have, more than one present. In order 
therefore to l)e able to ascertain the original ov simple pre- 
sent, the learner must become acquainted with the methods 
by which new presents may be derived from a given pre- 
sent. These methods are exhibited in the following para- 
gtaphs. 



96 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

1. Some verbs prefix the first consonant with an ^ if that 
consonant is followed by a vowel or liquid (compare §76. 
1). E. g. TiMixt from ^^w (§ 14. 3), dtd6ixi from z/0i2. So 
fxlfjiVM (for fJii^hm, § 26. I) from ^eVw, ninro) (for nmeivj) from 
HE Til, ylyvofiav (for yiyivouai) from FEN ft. 

In all other cases they prefix an i or i (compare § 76. 2 
and § 80. Note 2) ; as loiuoj from 2TASI, Imdijj from 
UTAH, leoj horn 'ESI. 

Note 1. A few take the Attic reduplication (§81. 1), but 
without the temporal augment of the second syllable ; as 
AFArSl from ayw, AnAd^Sl from 'A0SI (§ 14. 3),APAPn, 
from A P SI — ' Ovipi]Ui from ONASl may be compared with 
d.TLT&'k'kif) from dTdA^w, dninjsinx) from dmeviij. Mdo) gives 

2. Many verbs in ttw, f^w, q)0), annex a t to the last conso- 
nant of the root (§ 81. 1). E. g. Tvnru) from TYFISI, xQvnTot 
from KPYBSl (§ 7.), ^/Trra^ from 'PIrlJSl (ibid.). The conso- 
nants m appear only in the present and imperfect. 

3. Some verbs in >fw, ya), /o), change these syllables into 
aaoj or ttw (§6. Note). E. g. cpqiuaut from fpPIKSl, nQdaacj 
from nPArSl, raQdcrm} from TAPAXSl. 

Many change these syllables into 'C^m ; as Jf^c^^w from 
KPArSl, crierdtoj from aT£/^d:;/a>. 

All the tenses, except the present and imperfect, come 
from the simple present. 

Note 2. ^fPATSl becomes o-qcdiTw or aqpdjw, aor. pass. 
kGcpayi]v, fut. orgoa^w, (fee. 

4. Some verbs in rw, c^ui, i9^w, chang-e these syllables into 
aaw or tto*. E. g. l^&GUix) from 'IMATSl, Uacro^av from At'ro- 
jU«t, KOQiadix) from KOPY&Sl. 

A few change them into loj; as 9^^^^^ from ^I^PAJSl, ojw 
from 0Z//2. 

The letters crcr, tt, or S? appear only in the present and 
imperfect. 

Note 3. 'APMOJSl becomes dojuo^o) or dguoTTO), aor. %ao- 
<ra, &:c. — The verbs dgnd'Ctx), nai'Cy), ^aaid^of, vvaid'QM, vdacroj, 
dcpiouM, suppose 'APriAFSl and -^Sl^ llAIPSl and -^Sl, 
&,c. fut. dgndaoj and d^TKiJt^, &/C. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 97 

Note 4. In most cases presents in ^w are considered sim- 
ple. The introduction of it, y, /, is necessary only when 
the fut. has Iw, the aor., fa, x^^^, the perf. /a, yuai.. 

5. Some annex a j^ to the last letter of the root ; as SdxvoD 
from ^AKIl, 'zuuvo) from KAMSl, Ti/uvo) from rtiw), cp&dvoj 
from ^OAJl, nlroj from IIISl — 'Eldoj gives lluvvoj, and BAfl, 

6. Many insert a v before the last letter of the root. E. g, 
§alh) (for §ilvlo), ^ 12. 3) from BAASl, artUu) (for ajivloj) 
from 2TEAJI, XANAR f^om XAAJl, EKEFKJl (^ 12. 2) 
from ENEKJl, AAMBfL from ^^jSi2 (^ 12. 1). It is hardly 
necessary to remark that all verbs in ^Aw and ^^w belong 
here. 

7. Some annex a^^w or cctvo) to the root. E. g. a^fd^w 
from tti^'lw, ^laaTdpoj from BAAHTH, duagrf^m) from 'AMAP^ 
Tfl, dlca&alvoj and dhad^dva) from OAII^QSl, aiad^dvofiav 
from AI2esi. 

Some insert a j^ before (^ 96. 6), and annex «^w to the last 
consonant of the root; as fxav^dvtx) from MAOSl, dt^ddvcx) from 
'AJIl, &tyy6vuj (for ^/^^/dj^u^, ^ 12. 2) from 0/ri2, (fvyydrco 
irom^^yrJl, Tvyy/ivM from TTXfl, lafj^dvo) (for luv^dvia, 
§ 12. 1) from AABJl, hundvoj from Ae/jrw simple AIIISI. 

8. Some pure verbs annex a>f&» to the root. E. g. 7^9^- 
Oiio) from yriQdat, q)dax(x) from 0Afl, ^daxix) from BAH. Some- 
times the vowel before orjfw is lengthened ; as d-vriaxto from 
GNASl, &Qioax(x) from QPOH, ytyvcbaxuj (^ 96. 1) from rNOJl, 
§L(h(TAOfxav from j^tow. 

Some verbs annex ioxm ; as eiuolcrxcx) from 'ETPSl, dTracpiaxta 
(§96. Note 1) from '^^>i2, GTe^laKOj from ^TEPJl, xvtfjxio 
from «tw. 

9. Many annex ^i^w or J^vt/^ to the root. E. g. daiviM from 
^a/oj, (.ityviijt from MirSl^ oopvul from OPSl, t^iypviiv from 
ZETPJl, deixvvixt from ^EIKSl. In pnre verbs the ^ is very 
often doubled; as Cf^ivvv^u^ tIpvvuv^ aaeddi^vvuL, from 2!BESl, 
rib), 2KEAASI. Sometimes the vowel preceding these end- 
ings is lengthened ; as /(hvpv^u from /6w, t^ibrvvuv from ZOSl. 

10. New presents may be obtained by annexing fo>, aw, 
00), or l'w^ to the root of tbe given present. E. g. Qimeoj 
from Qiniu), xTVTitoi [rom Krrnjl, OMOJlhom OMJ\dW(o, 
(for dfUto, § 96. 6) from OAJl, hiptLo from e'v^w, 'PYEJl from 

9 



yo INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Pr/2, cpiU(y) from ^PTASl, MENER from fiivoy, TXTlTEn. 
from TvnxM, 'EYPESl from "ETPSl, AISeER from AI^QfL, 

11. Some presents are formed by changing « of the per- 
fect act. into o). E. g. ^eyccJfoi from /"^/2 perf y^ydv^a, ds' 
doUM from ^EISl dldo^xa, 'E^THKJl from 'i(TTi]ai eaTi]7(cc^ 
7tsq)vx(o from ^^t'W nkpvxa, KEKPAFJl froQi icgd'^co tcixguYa. 

12. Sometimes the present is strengthened by the endings 
«^a>, e<9^w, or y^^M ; as Slojxi^&m from ^iojxo>, eiyidd-oj from fl'^toj, 
(pleyid-ix) from cpleyu), cp&ii^vx^u) from cp^tvot. 

Here belongs £cri^w or to-^^/w (for £(J-t^w, id-d^lo), ^ 10. 3) 
from £(^w ea^ 

13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic verbs, 
which have e in the penult, by changing this s into o and 
annexing ew. E. g. nog & em from nioxl^oj, Tgo^jsox from tq^^m, 
(poqm from (joe'^w, K TONE II from uTeivtx) simpler KTENSl, 
Or by changing e into o> and annexing aa> ; as crTQujcpdoj, tqux- 
;^(iw, vojudco), from crToecpix), Tgi/oj, veuoj. — IlBTo^at, crives nojiofiai'y 
TtoTd^oiuaL, and TKOTdofiai. 

14. A few insert a cr before the last consonant of the root ; 
as (niayix) from MIFIl^ luaxco from AAKfl, iiaxoj from ft'jfw, 
TMi3a>{w (^ 96. 1) from TYKJl.—JIJAXSl (whence ^t^a/rj) 
gives ^t(5da>fa>, and IlAQSl gives nua/ix). 

15. A few annex aw to the last consonant of the root ; as 
aUoJ from AYrSl (Lat. augeo), dU^oj from AAEKn, HEUSl 
(hence eneaov) from LLETSl. Such presents may be easily 
mistaken for futures. 

16. A {e.w change s in the penult into v\ as nlivoi (^96. 5) 
from IlETSlj Ti^cm) from TEKJ7,, Tcigvdbo (^96. 6) from J^e^dw, 
uaidvrjfii^ from J^KEJASl. 

17. In dissyllabic verbs the radical vowel is sometimes 
placed after the last consonant of the root (^ 26. 2). E. g. 
0^7V/2 becomes GlVAJl, BOPJl BPOJl, TOPJl TPOSl, 
2 TOP SI ZTPOfL, KAMfl KMAJl, Te/uoo TMESl, GOPSl 
SPOfly BAASl BAAn, 2KAASI 2:KAASl, 

18. In many instances the penult of the original present is 
lengthened : a is changed into^ or at.; ^into £*; s into^t rarely 
7] ; uinto €v, and o into ou. E. g. AABSl becomes AHBH, 
MAKSl MHKH, rpAJVIl (paivta ^HNSl, AIUIl Xelmo, EPinSl 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES- 99 

igslTiO), STIEPSl uneim), fijQEPn (f&eloo), ush) MHASl, fpTril 
(fe{>yoj, njYYJl njYETSl, EATQR EAEYQIl, AKOJl uzovix). 

19. The radical vowel-sonnd often vibrates between a, e, 
and (rarely o>). E. g. SHEPR 2:nAPn i:nOPO, 2: TE- 
AR 2TAASI- :ET0ASI, KTENSl KTANSl KTONSl, reuca 
TAMR TOMR. So in English, get, gat, got ; break, brake, 
broke, broken; swear, sware, swore, sworn; further, toothy 
teeth ; man, men ; long, length. This takes place chiefly 
in dissyllabic verbs. 

IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 

<§) 97. To form the imperfect active, dropoj of the pre- 
sentj amiex ov^ and prefix the augment. E. g. 

Tvnw), /iiavMvco iniperf. srvmov, eu6cvd^avov 
dxovotj^ s/o) '' r^Kovov, sl/ov. 

FIRST PERFECT ACTIVE. 

^ 98. 1. To form the first perfect active of a pia^e or 
liquid verb (§ 94.) drop w of the present^ annex y.a^ and 
prefix the augment. E. g. 

yrocijoj, ^aailevo) 1 perf. nE7xavy.a, ^eSocatlsvxa 

fua&ooj, S'Tjodo) '' ftsfiiad'ujxa, Tsd'r^gaxa, ibid. 

The 1 perfect active of liquid verbs is always derived 
froni the simple present. E. g. l(^eiq(x) (IMEPR, ^ 96. 18), 
2,u6oxa' dyyillo) (ArrEAR, §96. 6), r-/yelxa. When the 
vowel-sound of the root vibrates (§ 96. 19) between a, e, o, 
the 1 perfect of liquid verbs of tioo syllables takes a; as 
GTsllu) {2TEAR, § 95. 6), euTaUa, Gneioix) (2:nEPR, § 96. 18), 
eanagxa. Liquid verbs which have at in the penult of the 
present, take a in that of the 1 perfect ; as xad^algoj xexd- 
'd-agxa (§ 96. 18). 

Note 1. The following liquid verbs drop v in the 1 per- 
fect act. ; xllvix), xgipix)^ xreipo)^ ttIvj'O),^ leh'O)- 1 perf. xix)uxfx, 
xaxQixa, exraxa (§ 96. 18, 19), Trenlvxix, xixaxa (ibid.). 

2. The first perfect oimiite verbs in n-o), ^o), and xco, ycD, 
is formed by annexing « to the root, and changing ^ and 
^ into 9, and y- and y into /. E. g. 



100 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

rgi^oi), lelTTbd 1 perf. rhgTcpcx, lilsKpa 
nliicuj, Xeyu) <^ nsnle/a, Xile/a. 

So r{,7tTix) ( rriJw, ^ 96. 2) TtTvcpa, TiQi'xGUix) (nPAFoj, ^ 96. 3) 
TtiTTQaxoi. 

Verbs in tw, duj, d-co, go^, drop w and annex xa. E. g. 

cxdio^ neid-ix) 1 perf. '»)>««, nineiaa^ ^ 10. NoTE 1. 
tlTi/^ci), xo/uiQix) '' rjX7ri;<a, Hax6iLiiX(x^ ibid. 

So gporitw (^ffjPAJix), ^ 96. 4) nicpoaxa, nhxaaoj [UAAQo), ^ 96. 
4) 7r67rX«;ca. We may remark here that verbs in tw are rare. 

Note 2. The verbs nefinw, xXstito), to^ttw, Aep>, ^EIo) I 
fear, ENEKu I bring, edu) (another form EJEut, ^96. 10) / 
eat, have 1 perfect nenoiJicpa^ xiyilocpa, Tirgocpa, el'lo/a (in com- 
position uvveiloxct)^ didoixa, ivripo/a (^ 81.), tdr^doxa. See 
^96. 19. 

FIRST PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 

<§> 99. To form the first pluperfect active, drop « of the 
first perfect, annex slv, and prefix the augment (^ 77.}. 
E.g. 

Ti^TTTw rhvcpa 1 pluperf. tTeTicpevv 
SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE. 

<§> 100. The following 87 verbs form their perfect also 
by dropping ^ of the present, annexing «, and prefixing 
the augment. The perfect thus formed is called the 
second perfect, 

(iyvv^i (^Arco),2 perf. Mya Ion. ^i^gchaxo) [BP Ow), [^sSqoa) 
erjya. part, ^s^oibg. 

ditovoj (^AlCOo)), dj«7]jfoa. ^ovlo^xav, ^ii^ovla in comp. 

dcletcpu) (^AAIfl^ix)), alrihq)a. ngo^Si^ovla prefer. 

dvddvoj i^AJix)), mda and Mdu. ^glduj^ ^e^gida, 

AJVEGoj, dLvi\voda, * ^gv/do/nao (BPYXoj), ^iSgv/a, 

av(byMy cirojya. y7]&8U) (^rHQoj), yeyrjd-a. 

agagiaxoj (APoo)^ cxgaga Ion. yiyvo}jiav (^FENoj, PAoj), yeyoca, 
(xgrigoL. yeyova. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



101 



^Av)^ dsdua. 

dagxotiai^ dedooxa. 

dioj, dediu. 

dovTieoj, (^J OVnoA, didovTta. 

JPEMii)., didootia. 

iysLgo}^ syor^yoga, 

«Jw, 6d?jda. 

^d-d-tx), siioi^a Ion. eot)d-a, 

Ei'dojj old a. 

eiyo), eoixa and ely,a and olxa. 

EAETQu) and EATGix), il/^Xv^ 

Oa Horn. slh\lovda. 
fA7ra>, eolna. 
EjYEGw, ep^voda, 
igslTtOi)^ egr^gtrca, 
exM, o/w;;m part, bxom^bg, 
ddlko {eAAu)), TBdrjla. 
GA0ix}, Tbdr^Txa. 
Ovvaxbo (^QMAo)V Tsdvaa. 
lairjuc [UTAoA^ ecrTaa. 

yMloi {KAArroj, KAHFi^j), 

xixlrjya, rjxlayya. 
xomoj i^KOIJa))^ >:exo7ra. 
jcgdcl^ix) (^KPArco), xexgaya. 
y.Tslvoj (^KTEJVix)), exiova. 
luyxupo) (^AHXm, ylErXoj), 

eXhi/a and liloyyu, 
XdiLiTTO), lelaUTxa . 
lavOui^o) i^AHQixi)^ }Ah]Oa. 
luaxto (^AAKuj^y liluxa Ion. 

'ksinM, liloiTta. 
juatvouui^, utju'jva. 
fK^gniuJ i^MAFHu)^^ fduagrrcx. 
MAix)^ jLie/iiaa. 

MEIPlo, MEPv)^ MOPoj, £>- 
fiiogcc. 

Add to these all verbs in 
yeygacpa. For the changes of 
paragraphs 18 and 19. 

9* 



MEN(x) = MAo), iLieuovoc. 

fjirixuouav ( MHKo) ) , a iu i]xa. 

(iivxuodai (3/T/Co>), (xi(-i\jxu. 

oto) ( OAu)). od(jjda. 

ol'yo), ecjya. 

bllvuL ( OAo))^ olojlcx. 

OTlu)^ 0710)71 a. 

ogvvuL ( OPo)), ogojga. 

nua/u), {HEN el), nHQoj) ne- 

Tcrfia and 7iE7iopdu. 
TtSiOu)^ TieTioiOa. 
Ttegdo), TcsTiogda. 
nr^yvvfii^ (IIHrot)), 7te7ir]ya, 
TTLTinx) (^IlETo)), part. nsTtJiog. 
nlr^CTUM (nAHFw), jitTtlr^yoi. 
ngdaao) (^nPAPo)), TiiTTguyoc. 
Qi\yvv(n i^PHFixi)^ eggioya. 
glyeu) {^PIFoj), eggJya. 
Gulgo), aeaijgoc. 

CFTieigo)^ eaTToga. 

azellv)^ [IJTEAoj), eaiola. 

aisgyo), eaTogya. 

rsv/ij)^ TeTEv/a. 

TrJxW, TbTTiXa. 

rgecpM, TtTgocpoc. 

jtXTix) [TEKm)^ TbTOXa. 

TAAm, Tsrlaa. 

To/> [TPIFv)), Tfc'ror/a, 

(faii'v), n8q:7]va. 

(pBvyv), 7Tecfevyu. Homer has 
7T&'(^u'^« part. TTEqv'lb); from 
YZto. 

cpdelgot^ ecpOoga. 

cpglacFu) (0P/iuo), nacfglxa. 

CfA'U)^ Tiiqvu. 

yalvLt}^ xt/)]i'a. 

yai'duvo) (XAIVAo))^ xi/aida. 

yi'^o) (A'£'-it'>), xe/oda. 
cfo) and Xoi ; as ygi^cfio 2 perf. 
the root see ^ 90, particularly 



103 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

We may remark here that derivative verbs have no se- 
cond perfect. 

Note. Homer has a few 2 perf. part, in ^oj; from verbs 
in «w or sm : as i(6xaq)i](hg, ^e^uor^ihg^ tbtIi^w;, from KA^PEu), 
^aQtix), TAAoj. 

SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 

<§) 101. To form the second pluperfect active, drop « 
of the second perfect annex eiv, and prefix the augment. 
E.g. 

dcaovo) (^xr^xoa 2 pi 11 perf. 'i]icrjy.6eiv 

lavOuvoj Hhfia «' i'kelrfiet^v, 

FIRST FUTURE ACTIVE. 

<§> 102. To form the first future active drop w of the 
present and annex oo), E. g. 

TtavM, ^aGilevix) 1 fut. navaw, ^aailsvGO) 

(ft^lm, TLjiidu) " (pilf^ao)^ Tiur^auj, ^ 95. 

fxiaddix), avi^doi) " /ULaOdjcFix)^ uviacTix)^ ibid. 

dU^oj, ygdccpo) " dUipM^ youipo)^ ^ 8. 2. 

TSvxM^ Isycj '* Tev^ix)^ l^^OJ, ^ 9. 2. 

Q,da), neldio " ocVw, ttbIgoj, ^10. 2. 

So dgdot) dgdaco (long a), t/oj tloto) (long v), daitgvM daxgiuaca 
(long y), y-ocUix) xaliau) (^ 95. Note 1), upvoj ut^vauj (short v), 
TV71T0) (^TYIIm, §96. 2) Tvipix), Tagdaauj [TAPAXo)) Tugu^o), xo- 
^it(x} xofjLiuM (§ 10. 2), cpgd'QM (^0PAJo), ^ 96. 4) cpgdaoj, nldaaa^ 
[nAAQoj, § 96. 4) nXuaoj, anivdcx) ansicru) (§ 12. 4). 

Note I. Futures in ta-w from verbs in ^coi, often drop the 
or, and are declined like contract verbs in eoj (§ 116»). E. g. 

xofJii'CM — aap-ldii) and ito/uto), elg^ st, ov/usv^ etre, ovcri^. So uacpri- 
vit^iOy dTgs/ui'Cix)^ KajanXovTl'Qui)^ ngoni^Xaxit^o}, jst^/rrix}. 

Some futures in acrw and scrco also drop the a, and 2LYe con- 
tracted like verbs in ftw and ew (ibid.). E. g. re^ew — TsUaoj^ 
TBlsix) contracted relib, eXg^ et, ov/uev, sXis, ovav ihxv) — ildaoj^ 
sldu) contr. £^c5, a^, a, (busvy are, ibui^ diacrxaddloj — diaaxeddaoi^ 
doaaxsddoj^ (o, &c. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 103 

Note 2. Very few liquid verbs have their future in cro). 
Such are dgaQlcfyM) (^^Pui) agao), :ivqo) xvgaoj, oopvul (^OFo)') oqcfco^ 
q)vga) cpvgaoj, zilloj (^KEAuyxilcroj. Cumpare ^ 104. Note 4. 

Note 3. The Dorians, in the inflexion of the 1 future, 
follow the analof^y of contract verbs in sm. E. g. j^ofjevo), 
vo/Lisvao) Doric voiisvaib, slg, eT, evfiev for ovusv (as if from 
so^usv, ^23. Note 1), bTts, ovvti.(^?)' y,i]oi'^uj Dor. ^c2ov|w. — 
They often form fut. in |w from pure verbs, or from verbs 
in 'Cw, which among the Attics have coj in the future. E. g. 
yeldojj yeldaca Dor. yeld^oj- cp&uvix), (pd^uauj Dor. cpxfu^u)- 'Aoai'ly)y 
xoiulaoj Dor. youi^to. 

The poets often use (T(jo) for o-w, in order to make the pre- 
ceding short vowel long by position ; as yeldarrix), di^vaaojy 
jeliaao), dixdaaoj. 

second future active. 

^ 103. To form the second future active, drop o) of the 
simple present {§ 96.), and annex £(^ contracted «. E. g. 

fiivco, Teu(o 2 fut. /LiSTso) -c5, rsum -ca 

(paivb) (^(TiANb}) ^' cparico cpavio 

cp&etgu) [fPOEPb), ^QAPto) << q)&6Q£0j and q)&agaco -(o 

aTe^yloj (^2!TEAuA *« aTsleoj gtsIc). 

So yjdlhj) ipalko -c5, dyyelloj dyysleoj -co, xielvco xTSvio) and 
xravm -S (^ 96. 18, 19). The penult, if long, is shortened 
in the 2 future ; as ygTrio xgXv(b, xItpoj yJuv(d, cxla/vvcj aia/i^r^. 
The diphthong ca becomes d (^ 96. 18) ; as ,<ua/>co (iiav^by 
GT^juaU'Ot) ar^iiiavib, xa&algo) y>ud'ag{b. 

Note. The jovre and mute verbs have no second future 
active : ivnii^) jvtiCo, in the paradigm, is introduced merely 
for example's sake. 

FIRST AORIST ACTIVE. 

<§> 104. 1. To form the first aorist active of a pure or 
mute verb (^ 94.), drop u> of the present, annex o-«, and 
prefix the augment. E. g. 

q)dH'), Tiudii) 1 aor. ^(f(^'f,(Tcc, tT(u)-cra, ^ 95. 
fiL(r{/6u), dguLO '« luiaUtona^ tdgudu^ ibid. 



104 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

TQlf^co, yqucpo) <•(■ tTQiipa^ tyouipu, ^ S. 2. 

adu)^ TTslO^oj <^ 7](7a, tneiaa, ^ 10. 2. 

So t/o) fTtcrw, zovTtTO) (§ 06. 2) eyoviljcc^ 7<xj(jbt (^ 96. 3) hu^cc^ 
(pgu'^oj (6 96. 4) e(pQU(Tu, xo/itiC^u) iHOf^LCiu (^ 10. 2). 

Note 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex « instead of aa : 
see the anonnalous uXioixuv, daTio{.iai^ EIHuj, Ipeixu), ENEFKio, 
Kuiix), uevu), and ;^fcw. 

Note 2. The verbs tv/'^ C^^0» '^^•^'//'^ (dio)), and dldcout 
[JOixi)^ take, in the first aorist, 3«w instead of crw; thus, ■r^xa^ 
^S'Tjxa^ edujxa. 

Note 3. The Dorians have 1 aor. in fa from pure verbs, 
or from verbs in 'Qoj (sec ^ 102. Note 3) ; as lyilaca^ Mjuitu, 
from yeMu), xoi^iro). — The poets may double the a after a short 
vowel ; as lyeluaaa, ripvcraa, liiXecraa^ elaaaa. 

2. The first aorist active of liquid verbs is formed 
from the present by dropping w, annexing «, and prefixing 
the augment. E. g. 

xteIpm, xqIi'O) (long i) 1 aor. exTeiva^ exoTva. 
(xyeigu), UTistouj '' nfiyewu, tdTzeiQa. 

The penult, if short, is lengthened in the 1 aorist act. : cc 
becomes ?;, and s becomes e^ ; as riim apsiua, acpuXlo) (<^ 96. 
6) e(jcpi]la^ Tillix) (ibid.) hila. Those which have «t in the 
penult of the present, take ?/ or ol (long) in that of the 1 
aorist act. ; as q)alvu~) ecpi]va^ (.aaivix) eiuiupa and 7]va^ xa&cclgio 
iKdd-i]Qa and «o«. 

The verbs cd'ooj and ullo^av change cc into rj only in the in- 
dicative (in consequence of the augment) ; thus rjo«, aoo)^ 
agaijuv^ uqov^ aoau^ agag- alXoixav 1 aor. mid. r^^tJc^ijv, alojua^^ 
(jcXaifii]v, alaa&ai^^ dlufisvog. 

Note 4. A few liquid verbs take o-« in the first aorist ac- 
tive ; as rigaa, exsgcra, Soaw, exslaa, sTegcra, from agaglaxoj, 
xslgiOj xvgio, ogvv(.u^ xelloj, Tslguj, Compare § 102. Note 2. 

SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. 

§ 105. The following 89 verbs form their aorist ac- 
tive by dropping w of the present; annexing ov, and 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



105 



prefixing the augment, 
the second aorist. 



The aorist thus formed is called 



dLyyilU) {ArrEAoj), 2 aor. 

riyyelov. 
ayoj, riyayop. 
dxa/l^o) (/iTCoi), riTca/ov. 
dli^ix), riXalxov. 
akiTalvix) (^AAITixi), rilnov. 
okcpaLvo) (^AA0a)), rikcpov. 
dfiagidvix) {^AMAPTm), ri/uag- 

TOV Horn. riJU^OOTOP. 

(jc/tinlaxlaxco and dLtj^layiiaxo} 
{AMTIAAKm ) , t]// 7rA« ;{ 2^ a n d 

dvddroj {^AAo))^ eadov and oidov 

and Evador, 
dnacpiaxoi) (*^0w), rinacpov, 
dgoiQlo'}iO) (^APijjV rigagov, 
ATPoj^ algov, 
^dllcOy s^alov. 
^lacridvo) {BAA^Tix)), e^la- 

UTOV. 

^X6(jK0t) {JS'IOA(x))^ e^olov, 

BPAXto, e^qaxov. 

ddxvo) (JAKa)), edaaov, 

dAco, sdaop. 

dagd-dvo} {JAPOoj), edagd-ov. 

dignouciv^ edgaxov, 

z/JlCw, edixov. 

dPAMoJ, edgafiov. 

bI'Soj (/^w), eWop rarely Idov, 

EIIIoj, elnov, 

EAET0b)^riXv&ov. 

'EAm, bUov. 

EJVErKoj, riveyxov. 

ivimtx) (^E]Vino)'j, hevXTtov and 

i^vinanov. 
ivicrnco, epianov. 
ETiu), sanop. 
igelxo), rigLXOP. 
igsinoj, 'i^gi^nop, 
igeiuyo), rigvyop. 



igvxct), rigvxaTioP. 

£iugl(jyM) {^EYPijjV svgop. 

e/cx)^ s(T/op. 

QA^(x)^ BTacpop. 

S-iyyupix) (0/ra>), ed-iyop. 

S-priCFica) ( QA]\^o))^ 6&apop. 

S'gd)(nia) ( Q OPo>), s&ogop. 

KAdo)^ xsxadop. 

xdupo) (^KAMix)), exafiop. 

xevd-o)^ exvd-op. 

XL/dpco (^KTX(x)), exiyop, 

xatpcx), sxapop. 

yM'Co) (KAAroj), sxlayov. 

xgd^oj (^KPAFm), sxgayor, 

Terslpcx) (^KTAIVq)), exTapop. 

XTvnia) (^KTTIJoj), sxrvnov. 

Xay/dvoj [AAXixi) slayop, 

Xa/u^dpQ) (^AABu)), ela8op. 

lap&dpuj IAAGoj), elad-op. 

Maxix) (^AAKio), sXaxop. 

Isino) {^AIFIm^^ eXmop. 

fiapd-dpco (^MABm), £^ua&OP. 

fidgniM [MAPIIix))^ fie^uagnop 

and e/iianop. 
METPoj, e/ufjogop. 
(jii]xdoaai (MAKix*)^ euaxop. 
(xvxdofAai (iV/T/Cw), euvxop. 
ocpeiXix)^ (hcpelop. 
dcpliGxdvcx) (^O^^Ao))^ d)q)lop. 
Tida/oj (nAQu)\ enad^op. 
Tieid-M^ eTTi&op. 
7Tsgdix)j enagdop. 
neg&ix), engad-op, 
TTiTTTO) f^UEHix)^ IIETw), eneaop 

and erceTov. 
Tiipcx) (77/u>), emop. 
nlricraix) [TlAHrix))^ neTxlriyor. 
IJOPb), errogop, 
GTvytbi (^rrrw), saivyop. 
TArWy TBiayop. 



106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

rijiivo) and Tttio), he/uov and rvy/ui^u) [TYXut)^ stv/ov. 

STauov, fJ^yf Tut^ ecpuyop. 

TETMot, heruov. (IjENo*^ 7ii(pi>ov and enecppov. 

rlnTix) (^TEKui), erexop. cpsvyot (0Trw), eipvyov. 

TiTva^oaav (^TYKu)), Tervxov. qQ''^'lo) i^fVP^Jui)^ eq)oudop. 

r/uriyix) [TMJFixi)^ ETuayov. /('/;u) (^KyfJuj), xlxudov. 

TOQSU) (^TOPix))^ tlOOOV. )(ull'bi, b/Ul'OP. 

T^£rro>, tiQUTfOP. ^ai'dui'bt (X-^-^u>), iyudov. 

TQacpu), erqaqov. XPAI^Mix), e/ouiaaop. 

jgchyu), i^TFAFo))^ arofxyov. 

For the changes of the root see ^ 96- 

Note. The verhs ycTFlvb)^ uyytllo), ENErKu), nstd-o), ^yo)^ , 
CcQa(Diai(M,nl7tToj, xlu;o), ttuct/o), EIJIu), have also a 1 aor. See 
in the catalogue of anomalous verbs {^ 118.). 

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 

<§) 106. 1. To form the present passive^ drop w of the 
present active and annex o.u«^. E. g. 

Tt'TTTo), pres. pass. TvnTo^av. 

2. To form the imperfect passive^ drop ofiav of the pre- 
sent, annex ouijv^ and prefix the augment. E. g. 

TvTiTbj TvTiToiiuv imperf. pass. Itvtixo^t^v. 

PERFECT PASSIVE. 

<§> 107. To form the perfect passive, drop m of the pre- 
sent active, annex the terminations /mt, aat, cul^ &c. 
(^ 84. and ^91.) successivelyj and prefix the augment. 
E.g. 

TTavo), ^acrilsvo) perf. pass. Ttercavuai, ^e^auilevfjiav 

qjilso), Tiaum <' necpllrjuaL, jejlarj^uv^ (^95.). 

Xstrtoj, yodq)0} ^« Xilsiutiai^ yiyouaiAav^ (§8. 1). 

^e'yty, T6V/UJ *^ leXeyiuaL^ jhevy^aiy (^ 9. 1). 

ado), nsi&o) " r^u^ai, nineiaaai^ (^ 10. 1). 

So TjjTtTw (TTTJw), TETfa^aat- jdaaoi [TAFoj) ThayjUiXi' cpgd'C^oj 
(<t>PA^(x)) 7itq>Qa(TfiaL' ;/oj^t^oj, y^s/chgLd^uav (^ 10. 1). 

The perfect passive of liquid verbs is always derived 
from the simple present (§ 96.). E. g. dyyelltA) {^ 96. 6), 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 107 

ij/ye^"^- When the vowel-sound of the root vibrates (^96. 
19) between a, e, o, the perfect pass, of liquid verbs of two 
syllables takes «; as areUw (^96. 6), ecnuluuo' arre/ooj (^ 96. 
18), edrcaGixai. Liquid verbs which have «^ in the penult of 
the present, take u m that of the perfect pass. ; as auxtuiga)^ 
H8xd&agfi(xv' cpatvoj^ necpafxfxav (^ 12. 3). 

^AlsicpM has dXr^lLfiai, ar^^gpw saTQatniLiai^ rgenia Tirgaix^aiy 
jgscpo) Te&gafifuai (^ 14. 3) : see <^ 96. 18 and 19. 

Note 1. Some pure verbs, especially such as retain the 
short vowel in the penult (§ 95. Note 1), insert a cr before 
the terminations fion, rai^ fusd^a, and ^b(}ov ; as jeUo), Teiile- 
(jixai^ TSTElscFiaL' uKovojy riKOVG^ai^ r^xovoTav' xelsvoj^ xey.ilsvdfxcxC'^ 
zBHtlsvaTai. Compare ^ 109. Note 2. 

Note 2. The liquid verbs mentioned in ^98. Note 1,' 
and a iew others, drop the v in the perf. pass. ; as iiUv(o 
^inh^iai, Teivo) Thafxai. Some change v before (Ji into a ; as 

Note 3. If the terminations luai., /ue&a, /us&ov^ be preceded 
by two consonants, the consonant immediately preceding 
them must be dropped ; as Tisixnio, nercs.uiiai., TiineinijaL, ni- 
'KB^nxai' TeQTtco, Tsieguai, Teiegipav' aqjiyyot), eacpiyjuai^, sacpcy^at^, 

Note 4. Some epic perf. pass, retain the lingual (dS-) un- 
changed before f^ (§ 10. 1); e. g. xogvaaco [KOPTQuj)^ as- 
Hogv&iLiaL' KA^co xixad/naL' cpg^.tjiji) (0PA^w), nicpgadiLiat^. 

PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 

§ 108. To form the pluperfect passive, drop uai^, o-w^, 
Tat, &c. of the perfect passive, annex ^ufjp, ao, to, &c. 
(^ 84. 3, and <§> 91.), and prefix the augment. E. g. 

TiavM nenav^av pi up. pass. insTxavuijv. 
TvniLJ TeivfiaaL '« " iiexv^^iiv. 

FIRST AORIST PASSIVE. 

<§5 109. To form the first aorist passive, drop m of the 
present act,, annex ^//i^, and prefix the augment. E. g. 



108 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

(fdia), TifidiO) 1 aor. pass. l(fdr\^rjv^ iTiui\&T]v^ (^ 05.). 

leinu)^ jQiBix) " *' iltUfif>iP, hoUfifnp^ (^ 7.). 

TiUTiO), Uyixi " " ijiU/O-i^r, lU'/ifrip^ (ibid.). 

tceI&uj, dfO/LKx'ro) " *< inelcj&tif, djt^ouuaittjv^ (^ 10. 3). 

So ti'tttw ( TTJloi) hv(f&T]v^ q:ofx^o} (^fJ^P^Jo)) icf^xG&r^Vy 7i)Aa^ 

3), ai(T/vvuj yTxvvd^ijv. 

The 1 aorist'pass. of liquid verbs is always derived from 
the simple present {^ 96.). E. g. iyelgo) (^ 96. 18) ^<7^V^^*'> 
dyyOJ^o) (^ 96. 6) v/'/fcA.^/^//. When the vowel-sound of the 
root vibrates {^ 96. 19) between ce, f, o, the 1 aorist pass, of 
liquid verbs of two syllables takes «; as urOloi (^ 9(5. 6) 
i(jT(x).d^7]y, GTzeloo) (^96. 19) iamxu'&iiv. Liquid verbs, which 
•have «6 in the penult of the present, take cc in that of the 1 
aorist pass. ; as f^itxlroj ifiidcp^^r^p. 

Note 1. The liquid verbs mentioned in ^ 98. Note 1, 
often drop the v in the 1 aor. pass. ; as xlii^oj ixklv^r^v and 
ixkid^ijv, x(jIpuj IxQipd^rjv and iTcold^ijp. 

Note 2. Some pure verbs, particularly such as retain the 
short vowel in the penult (^95. Note 1), insert a a before 
S'ljv ; as TfAf'u) tTtliud^r^v^ xIlojj (— ), ixluad^rji/. Compare 
§ 107. Note 1. 

second aorist passive. 

<§> 110. The following 64 verbs form their aorist passive 
also by dropping ^ of the present, annexing ^v^ and pre- 
fixing the augment. The aorist in ?/^ is called the second 
aorist passive, 

^yvv^i [AFu)), 2 aor. pass. Sioo), Idixq-qv. 

dUdaaw [AAAAPb)), r^lluyr^v. tevy^vui (ZYFoj), e^vyi^v. 

aQTiaC^oj ('APIlAro)), r^gndcyriv. S^utttu) [0A fPot)^ bTdq)i]v. 

^drtTM (^BAfPuf), e^uq:i]t^. S^eoouat., td^eorjv. 

^l&jtTOJ and ^l&^(^), e^ldi^Tjv. Ml^u), imdrjv. 

^gex^o, i^qayi]v. S^qvtitio (QPY<Pot), eTQiq)7]v. 

yg&cpoj, lyqucpriv xltmcfj [KAELIu)), exlccTti^v. 

^Acx), edarjv learned. xlh^C'), ixlXvrjv, 

dafi&u) i^JAMix))^ ed(jciLir]v. y.omu) [KOffoj), ixoTtrjv, 

diqxofiai^ tdgdKi]v. y.aioj and ^«w, ixarip. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



109 



ixalvoiiat {^MAN(x)), i/LidvTjp, 
/LilyvvuL {^MIFw^^ l^iyi]v, 
ol'yoj, compound r^voi-yriv from 

dn'oiyo), 
dgvaaoj (OPTT^w), ^Qvyrjv. 
ndllu) (IlAAif}^, inakrjv, 
tieIqoi)^ £ndg7]v. 
n^ypvav (^flAro)^^ en&yrjv. 

nlriacruj (IlAAro), nAHFco), 
inkriyr^v^ in Compos. enXdc- 

Ttviybi)^ hrcviy-qv, 
geo) rPYui), igQvi]v. 
gr'iyvvfii {^PAFixi)^ egg&yrjv, 
Qimo} f^PI(Tj(Ai)^ eijgl(pi]v. 
a-tfru) {^SAJlixi)^ sa&nrjv. 
uxdnroj {^2^KA^(o), iaxdcpT^v. 

GilSoj iail^r^v. 
For the changes of the root 



arello) {ZTEAo)), iamlrii/. 
aiegiuj (^ TEPujV Icriigrjv. 

GVQOJ^ BGiQljV. 

acpdlku) {^2^fPAAu))^ lacfuXriv. 
acpdaau) (-S'0^/"w), iaq^uyriv. 
Ts/uvoj an(i tsjuoj^ sto, {litiv, 
TeO/TO>, iTdgnrjv. 
TegaoiAai^ iTsgar/v. 
jr^Hix) i^TAKw)^ iTd>CT]V, 
Tjurfyix) {^TMAFu)), iifi&yijv. 
rgenoj^ iTgdnrjv, 
Tgiq)U)^ sjgdcpTjv. 
rgl^ix), hgi^i]v. 

TVTlTlxt (TYJlix)), BTTUTTt^V. 

(pd^elgo)^ iq)&(xgrjv. 

cpy^eyixt, ecpleyrjv. 

(pgduuix) (0PAFa}), iq)gdyt]v, 

cpgiyOii, icpglyrjv. 

<pvix), tcpvi]v. 

Xoclgoj [XAPo))^ £xdgT]v. 

yjvx^ (^T/"wy, iipiyrjv. 

see § 96. 



FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE. 

^ 111. 1. To form the first future passive, drop &r^v of 
the first aorist pass., annex xi-T^GOfjixt, and reject the aug- 
ment. E. g. 

TvTTTw iTv(pd'i]v \ fut. pass. Tvcp&T^aoiuav. 

2. To form the second future passive, drop i]v of the 
second aorist pass., annex ?/ao^«^, and reject the augment. 

E.g. 

TtjTTTW hvTiTjv 2 fut. pass. Tvni^GO(.iav. 



THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 



<§> 112. To form the third future passive, d op oai of 
the 2 person sing. perf. pass, and annex ao^/a^ E. g. 

10 



110 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

TVTtW) TBTV^fjlXXV ThvipUL 3 fut. TSTVlpOflUV 

fiL/Lit^r^axu) ^i^vijiiuL fiifxvijauL " jueibipV^ifofiaL, 

Note. Liquid verbs and verbs beginning with a vowel 
have no third future passive. 

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 

<§) 113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect 
middle, are the same as in the passive. 

FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE. 

^ 114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop o) of 
the first future act. and annex o,(/«t. E. g. 

Tvmoj Tvipo) 1 fut. mid. Jvipo/uoci.. 

2. To form the second future middle, drop w of the 
second future act. and annex o/uat, E. g. • 

ji/uu) Tsaiix) 2 fut. mid. Tejueojuau contr. reiuovjuat^ 
GTslkx) aieXioj *< GTslioiiav <« aielovaau 

fjLialvOi) jiiiaviix) '^ fiiaveo^ai " fiiavovfiat^. 

Note 1. When the first future act. ends (<^ 102. Note 1 
and 3) in co (circumflexed), the first future mid. takes ovf^on. ; 
as otofilt^oj^ yofiLW, xouLovfiav declined like cpih)vuav' xulioj, 
7CuX(S)^ xaXovfiav. So tvttkx), rvipoj Doric Tui//aj, jvipov^ai. The 
Attic dialect sometimes makes use of the Doric 1 fut. mid. 

Note 2. The 2 fut. mid. is found chiefly in liquid verbs. 
The following mute and pure verbs are the only ones that 
have a 2 fut. mid. : SL^ouaL ('EJ/l) kdovfiav, /nav&dpo) {MAQff,) 
^ad'ov^Jiav Dor. /ua&evfzai^ fidL/o^av fia/ovuai^ nivo) (Illfl) nvov- 
fj^av, tIktoj ( TEKJl) xsy^ov^iai,, ttItitoi) (^IlEUfl'j nsaovfiui. JJeaov^ 
(Wat often passes for a Doric 1 fut. mid. 

FIRST AND second AORIST MIDDLE. 

^ 115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop a of 
the first aorist act. and annex a^ui]v. E. g. 

rvTTWj 6Tui//a 1 aor. mid. hvipa^i^v 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



Ill 



<§> 2o To form the second aorist middle, drop ov of the 
second aorist act. and annex o/utjv. E. g. 

dyot) Tiyayov 2 aor. mid. r^yayo^rjv 

CONTRACT VERBS. 

§ 116. Pure verbs in aw, eo), and ooj, are contracted by 
the Attics in the present and imperfect. 

Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in eware contracted only when 
two s come together ; as nleix), nUetg nlsTg, nUev nleX, nUo- 
fi6p, nlesTS nlelTS, tiIbovul — Yet ^ew hind^ has deovoL dovac, 
part. ^£Wi^ ^(bv, diov dovr, pass. Sio/uai, dovfiai. 

Note 2. For the contraction of the verbs tccca, nst^vdoj, 
Jti//da>, xQuouav^ a/nacj, ipdoo, zvdo), see § 23. Note 1. 

Note 3. The moveable v (^ 15. 1) is very seldom ap- 
pended to the contracted 3 pers. sing, of the imperfect act. 

Note 4. The Homeric language sometimes changes ew 
into^tw; as S-eiot) for S^boj^ Ttveloj for Ttveoj, oKveioj for oxveoj. 

It contracts ssai, into sXai^, and eso into sTo ; as /uvS^esao 
^vd-Blai^ aldsso aidsXo. Sometimes one of the s is dropped ; 

It protracts « or a contracted, into «« or ««, and winto ow 
or t*>w or 0)0 ; as Tcsdaij} n£d(b Hom. nsdoo), ixEdaevg rcedag Hom. 
Ttsddag, dyogdeaSs dcyogaad^s Hom. dyoqaadds, yeldovav yslibao 
Hom. yeloixtui^ ri^dcj part, ri^ocovaa ri^coaa Hom. r/i^cowaa, r^^dovfxo 
r^^C}^v Horn, -r^ihoi^v. Verbs in ow sometimes follow the ana- 
logy of verbs in «w; as ^?/t6w imperf. dr[c6ovTo difiovt^w Hom. 
di]'L6(jjvT0 (as if from drjidoj^ 

In some instances it changes «w into cow ; as ?cow from 
^do) live. 

Note 5. The lonians very often change «w into eco ; as 
/QEOfiaL for xQ^ofiat., cponiix} for cpoirdo). They often change 
«o into ew ; as /W?/;^aj^£W)^Ta^ for lni]/apuovTaL from /Laj/avdojuai. 
See also ^ 84. Note 3. 

Note 6. Some critics suppose that the contracted ending 
of the infinitive act. of verbs in «w comes from ocer (^ 89. 
Note) ; accordingly they write -dv not -dp, as Ti^.udv not Ti.udy. 

See the paradigms. 



112 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




I honor 


/ love 


I manifest 


S, iT/udo) 


S. (ptUia 


S. diiUoi 


TlfJXO 


(pilib 


diil(i) 


TtfKxeig 


cpdisvg 


diiXoBig 


Tt^uag 


cpilelg 


d}fXoig 


Ti^judet^ 


cpiliev 


di^loBt, 


rt/ua 


qtileZ 


dr^lol 


P, Ti^/uvcofjev 


P, q)iHo^Bv 


P. drjldo/UBP 


Tt^ibuev 


(pdov/uev 


dtjlovfiBv 


Tt/udeie 


cpdesTS 


drjXdBTB 


Tl^/LtaTS 


(fdeire 


drjlovTe 


Ti^fxdLOvai (v) 


cpiXiovav (y"^ 


drjkoovGi (v\ 


TV(JL(S)(Ji (v^ 


cpdovGti iv\ 


drjXovat. (y) 


J), Ti^/udofiev 


J), cfdio^sv 


D, drjXoouBv 


TljUO^jLlSV 


(piXovfjLBV 


drjlov/iiBV 


Ti'fJL&eiov 


q)d£BTOV 


drjloBToy 


Ti/udcToy 


(fdBlTOP 


drjkovTOv 


TVfXUeTOV 


(pdeBTOv 


dT]k6BT0V 


Tt^/uaioy 


(fd^BLTOV 

Imperfect. 


dijloviop 


S\ irlfiaov 


S» icpUeov 


S. idi'iloop 


eTiiuwp 


Bcpilovv 


idriXovp 


iTl/Liasg 


icpllBsg 


ldr^.OBg 


iTi/uag 


icpO.Bi^g 


i8r^lovg 


irlfias 


IcpllBB 


idr^loe 


iti^ua 


BCpilBV 


^drilov 


P, bTi^aofxsv 


P, IcpdhOflBV 


jp. idi]l6oaBP 


kTVfxib^ev 


icpdovfiBP 


idrilovfJiBv 


BTi/udeTS 


icpd.eBTB 


idrjloBTS 


ETi^aTS 


BCpdBlTS 


idr^lovTS 


ert/uaov 


icpdeov 


idrikoop 


ejlficop 


icpdovv 


Idr^Xovp 


J), txi^ao^Bv 


D, Icpdio^uBv 


D. idrjloo/UBP 


eTifJiibixev 


ecpdov/iiBv 


edi]lovfiBP 


BT1^6l6TOV 


iq)d8BT0P 


idrjloBTOP 


irt^fiaTOP 


ecpdBlTOv 


idriXovJOP 


kTi^fjiahi]v 


iq)dB6Ti]v 


iSijlohr^p 


iTi^^drriv 


icpdslTijp 


idrjlo{}jrjp 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



113 



S, Tt'/il(XO) 

Tf^/uag ' 

P, TL/UCCOJUSV 
TiUibaSV 
Ttfidl]T6 
TLUdcTS 

Ti(AU0)a6V 

Xiua.Toi' 
Tifiarov 



D. 



TifjidLOvg 
Tiumg 

p. Tt^dioifiev 

TlflfD/LlSV 

Tt^fudoi/LlSV 

TijLtdOLTOV 
TLfliOTOV 



TLjj,(6i]V, (^rjg, (hiq 



D 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

S, cpt'leoj 

(pv}^By]g 
q)d^g 

P, q)dm/u£v 

q)ll(bU£V 

cpilw/iisv 

<p lie 7] TOP 

q)ilriTOV 



D 



di'jlor^g 
dijlotg 
drjhjv 
diiloX 
P, di]}.6u)uev 

drjXorjTOv 

SljlibTOV 

drjloi'/Tov 

drjliDTOV 



cpiXei]Tov 
cpilriTOv 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
S. cpdeoi^uo 
cpdolfjiv 
cptleoig 
(fdolg 
cpvleoi 
cpdol 
jp. (ptMoiiisv 
q)doi(xsv 
(pilioLTS 

CpilolTB 

q)dBOiSv 

cpiXdiBv 
D, q)iliovfji6v 

cpiloT^usv 
qiilsonov 

(filolrop 

Or thus (^ 87. Note 2). 
(pdotrjv, ob]g, ob] dr]lot7]v, olrjg, ob] 

ihrj^Ev^ wj^TC, (07]crav ob]uev, ob]Te, ob](xap ob](iiev, objTS, objaay 
iorj}xEv, wr]TOVy m\T7]p oirj^ep^ oitjtop, o^7]T//i/ oitjjusp^ ob]TOP, oii[t7jp 

10* 



di]loXiJ.v 
drjXooig 
di]lolg 
drjlooi 
dijlol 
P, drjlooiixsp 
di]loXfjLSP 

drjkolTS 
dr]l6oiEP 
dijlolEP 

d7]),6oi^UBP 

djjloTuEp 
dijXoonop 

dr^lotTOP 
dr^looiT7]p 

dl]lolTJjP 



D 



114 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 





IMPERATIVE MOOD. 






S, tIuocs 


s. 


(flXee 


S. 


dr[loe 


Ti/LlU 




(fllev 




d/iXov 


' Tifxaho) 




(pileiTb) 




dijXoeTix} 


TtUlXTO) 




(pdelTO) 




difXovToy 


P, Tvf.i&eTe 


p. 


q)desT£ 


P. 


difUjBje 


TtjUdcTS 




qilslre 




dljXovTB 


Ti^uiiMGav or 




(fU.eijoKjuv or 




Sr/XoiiuKiav or 


Ti^u6l'T0)P 




(fiKeovTUiv 




diiXoopTOiP 


jiuunoduv or 




(pilelnnauv or 




difXovTUiduv or 


JiltijJl^TOJP 




(ptXovVTOJV 




di^Xoxjyxuiw 


D, TikKXeiOV 


2>. 


qi'Uerov 


D. 


dffXoeiov 


Tl^KxTOV 




(filelTOv 




dijXovxov 


Ti^abTMy 




(pUeirwv 




difXoiiuiv 


Tt.(UUTUJV 




(pdeliojv 




di^XouTOjy 




INFINITIVE MOOD. 






TLUdsiV 




(pdisiv 




driX6eLV 


Tiuav 




cptlaXv 




dijXovy 




PARTICIPLE. 






Tif.t6iO)v^ dovaa, doy 


(pMixjp, iovaa, eov 


drp*6o}Py oovau, oov 


Tvu(br, Coaa, Cw 


q)t) 


C)r, ovcrcc^ ovp 


df^x 


(by J ovaa^ ovy 


gen. (xoyjo;, (bi'iog ge 


n. eopTog, ovpto; 


gen. oovTog, ovvrog 


PASSIVE VOICE. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. — Present. 




S, Ti}i6iOf.iai 


s 


. (pdeouaL 


S 


drjXooiuao 


TtjUw^tiai 




qdov^av 




dr^XovfAUb 


li^&ri 




q)dii] or -St' 




drjXori 


TifAa 




cpdr^ or -bZ 




dr/XoZ 


TiU&ETOii 




cpdesTaL 




dr/XdsTao 


Ti^azaL 




(pdeXxav 




dr^Xovrac 


P, T^iitaoiusda 


p, 


Cpdeo/ueOa 


P. 


dr^XoofXEda 


Tv/ucb/usOa 




q}dov^eda 




drjXoufxeda 


TLjudsads 




cpdesaOs 




SrjXoeade 


TL/uacrds 




(pdelods 




diiXovads 


Ti^diovTao 




cpdtovTai^ 




drp.doyjaL 


ri^lLi(bvToco 




Cfdovvrav 




drjXovvTai 


D. ro/LLaoiusdov 


D. 


(pdso^asdov 


D. 


dr^Xoo/uedoy 


TlfXibfJLedoV 




(pdovtiedor 




di]Xovfiedov 


Ti^/udeaOov 




cpdescrdov 




di]X68adov 


TLjuaadov 




cpdeXcfdov 




dr/Xovordoy 


tiIi6l6j0ov 




CpdsBcrdov 




dijXoeaOoy 


ii^^aadov 




(fd^laOov 




dr^Xovadoy 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



115 



S, eTiiia6(i7]v 

P, BTiuadiuedcc 
aji^iuchusdoc 

STi(ildc(jOs 
BTiflUOVTO 

tJiuaaOov 
iTijJiadOriv 



S. 



P. 



D. 



Imperfect. 

Icpileofxriv 

ecpilbov 
ecpilov 

ecpilslTO 
ecpdeousda 

icptloviiieda 
icpLlesads 

icpolslGds 
icpLliopTo 

ecpilovPTO 

ecpiloviusOov 
icpilieaOov 

scpdsTcrdov 
i(pile6(T07]v 



S, edrjloouriv 
idijlovfirjv 

edijlov 
idrjloeTO 

edi]lovTO 
P, idrilooaeOa 

idr^lovaeOa 
idriloecjOs 

idrflovads 
edijloopTo 

idrjlovvTO 

D, edrjlooiuedop 
edi]lovU6dov 
idijlosfrdop 

idr^lovadov 
idrjloeaOr/p 
bdriloxjddriv 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



jP. Tifjiaihfieda 
TifJLaiiuds 
Ti^6.{x)PTav 

ll^UiOPTaV 

D, Ti^fiawiuedop 
TLfiihiiiedop 

TL^U(Xl]aOoP 

TLudaOop 

Ti^i&7]a6op 

TLudadop 



s. 



D. 



(ftlbcouai, 

, (pile (hjus dec 
cpiXibfieda 
g) lie 7] a 6 6 

(ptXetxjPTai^ 

(pilibPTaO 

(pdeih/LieOov 
cfilbiueOop 

cpdiijaOop 
cpilriaOop 

q)vler}GOop 
cpilr^uOop 



S, d7]l6o}^av 

P, drjlod)uedci 

driloixiPTao 
drjlcbpTat^ 
D, dijlooHisdov 
dijkojuedop 
dijloijaOop 
diilCoaOop 
driXoijudop f 
d)jl(baOop 



116 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 



s. 


TLfiaotfiijv 


S. cpi^Bolfirjv 


S. drjloolfiTjv 




TLfK^flTjV 


cpdoi^ijv 


drjloijuriv 




TL/udOLO 


g)dsoLO 


dr/looio 




Ti^(^0 


cpdolo 


dr^loXo 




Ti^6.ono 


q)tliono 


drjhjOLTO 




TLjUCJTO 


CpiloiTO 


diiloXro 


p. 


Ti^aoifiEOa 


P, (pileolueQa 


P. dijlootfieOa 




Tt^lUCOjllBda 


(pilolaeda 


di^loifieda 




TtiudcoLads 


cpilioiCjQe 


drjldoi^ade 




TLjuGads 


cpdolaOe 


drjloXads 




TLfldoLVTO 


CpdiOLVTO 


dljloOlVTO 




Ti/uQvTO 


qjilolvTO 


dijkoXvTO 


D, 


TifJUOifJlEdoV 


D. cpileolaeOov 


D. dr,loolf.ia6ov 




TtfMDUsdoP 


cpdoi(.ieQov 


drjlol^edov 




ri^fidoiddop 


cpdioLodov 


di/looiuOop 




TLficnadov 


cpiloXaOov 


dijloXaOop 




TLiLiaol(jOi]P 


cpdsolaOi^v 


di^looiaOr^v 




Tiimadqv 


CpdoLGOl]V 
IMPERATIVE MOOD 


drjloiaOyjv 


S. 


TLfldoV 


S. (fdiov 


S- di]l6ov 




TL/LiCb 


(fdov 


drjXov 




TLfiaiado) 


cpdeeuOif} 


di]loi(rd(0 




Ti^fidadoi) 


cpdeiadif) 


Sj]Iov(j6oj 


P. 


TL^dsaOs 


P, q)d£S(j66 


P, dijloeaOs 




tvjjLolgQs 


cpdeXaOs 


di]lovuds 




Tt^fiasaOooaav 


or cpdsiaOojaav or dr/losaOcxJcrav or 




rt/LiaEddijJv 


q)dssa6ui)v 


d7]loaa6uJv 




Ti(ji6iCF0o)(Tav 


or g)dsla6(x)(jav 


or dijlovudixiaav or 




Tifidcrdiav 


(f>deiGdix)v 


di]lovaOiav 


D. 


Ti^dsGdov 


D, (pdEsadov 


D. driloecrdov 




Tvfiaadov 


qjdeladov 


di]7,ov(ydov 




Tl/LCaSddcxJV 


q)de£adojv 


drjloiaOojv 




Ti^dCfd0)V 


cpdeiadiav 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 


dr]lova6(ov 




Tv^jidecfOav 


cpvlhadau 


drilosudav 




Ti^aaQav 


(pdsladav 
PARTICIPLE. 


di]lovadab 




Tifzaofisvog , t], 


ov cpdeo^tsvog^ y, ov drjloofXEvog, t], ov 




jcfj^ib/nsvog, 7] 


, ov cpdovf-iBvog, ?/, 


ov dj]lovfX6vog, t], ov 



VERBS IN /Wt. 117 

VERBS IN MI. 

^ 117. 1. Some verbs in aw, sm, ow, vw, form their jt?re- 
sent^ imperfect^ and second aorist active and middle, by 
dropping o>and annexing the terminations (^ 84t.) loithout 
the connecting vowels {§ 85.). 

Note 1. All verbs in ,at may be declined like verbs in w ; 

as Tl'd'SCO, Ttd^BSig^ fut. Tl&T^aOJ. 

2. The radical vowel («, e, o, v) is lengthened in the sin- 
gular of the INDICATIVE ACTIVE : oc and e become rj^ and o 
becomes w. The present indie, act. takes ihe terminations 
^«^, s% o'S &c. E. g. 

foTTdoi gives ^arrj^v^ torri^g, ?i7T?/crt, tcrr^v 

T^^£W *' TlOrjILli, Tiding, TiOi](Ji^ Wrjv 

dsixvvco '' dslTcrvfn^, delxvvg, dsUvvov, 

The termination i^ort of the 3 pers. plnr. act. often becomes 
afjv^ as Tt^e'acjfr, didoacFv^ dsatvvaoi, for ndelcFv^ didovcrv^ dsLXvvcrt^, 
(that is TcOevat, dt^dovav, dsLXvvvav, ^ 12. 4). 

The INDICATIVE PASSIVE and middle generally retains 
the short vowel of the root. In the 2 pers. sing, it takes 
aa^, go; as idTaaav, didoaat^, jldeaocL, eOeao. The or is often 
dropped, and «at, eat, ao, so, are generally contracted ; as 
tdTauai Icnaav contr. tora, jideGav tIOsocl contr. TiOrj, The 
old writers (Homer, Hesiod, Herodotus) generally use the 
uncontracted form. 

Note 2. The Doric uses n and vrt, for cn^ and rcrt (^ 84. 
Note 3) ; as didujzv, Tidi]Ti, cpaxL, Tidevxv^ IcridvTi^, iadvit^, for 

The Homeric dialect often attaches (rxov, axsg, axe, <fec. 
GHoiiriv, Gxso, (TK6T0 (fcc. (^ 85. NoTE 5) to thc root of the verb ; 

as lidsGXOV = iliOTJV, doGKOV = edix)V, Gt6lGX0V = 6GTT]V. It 

often drops era in the 3 pers. plur. of the imperfect and 2 
aorist act., and shortens the preceding vowel ; as enOei' for 
ixidsGav, EGxai^ for sGTrjGav, edoy for edoGixy, edvy for edvGav. 
See also ^ 84. Note 3. 

The lonians often use aroct, aro, for vrat, vto (^ 84. Note 
3); as TiOmi(xi=x=: Tldeviai, idsDcpvaTO = ideUvvio, iGiiaiai, 
(for iGidtLaxai,, ^ 116. Note 5) = Ijiavxat,. 



118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

3. The SUBJUNCTIVE lakes the connecting vowels and is 
contracted : «^ becomes ?/. E. g. 

laTdcoj, IdTdrig^ lar^cri contr. l(n(b, larrjg, laxr^ 

didooj, didorig, dcdori " didib, (^t()w^, didiv. 

So subjunctive pass, and mid. l(fT(xii}iuut^, ^o^^^^]?, Icrjurjion, 
contr. IcTiCj^cei, icFTTj, Igititul, The subjunctive of verbs in 
vfjiv is generally like that of rvmuj ; e. g. delnvv^i subj. deixvvot, 
deinvvr^g, pass. dEixi'LOtuai., deiyiviy]. 

Note 3. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in 
i5|at rejects the connecting vowel; as subj. (xnoxjelvvviuev = 
^.TtonTELv i^vot^ev ^ dLacrxeddi^vvffL = diocaxsdavvuri^ diixay,£d(jcyvvTcxL 
= di(xaiiedavpvi]TaL. Such forms are very rare, and may be 
easily mistaken for indicatives. 

Note 4. The Homeric dialect often uses theuncontracted 
subj. ; as Om), dirig, also Oeio), Otir^g [^ 116. Note 4). It changes 
cto) into e(x) (^ 116. Note 5) ; as arsw, GTir^g^ also are/uj, uTtir^g 
(^ 1 16. Note 4). The syllables f j?, £^, are sometimes changed 
also into ?/7^, ?/?/ ; as o^r^I|?c, 6r(rig^ for o^ttJ^, dr^g. — It shortens the 
connecting vowel (^86. Note 2); as Oeioixev ^gteIbtb , =6iui)^ev , 
aveipe, = Oibfiev, orrrjifc. — In the 3 pers. sing, it uses o^^ (ibid.) ; 
as ^wat = (^(5. — Verbs in omi change the radical vowel o into 
w; as (^ww for ^(5 (contracted from 86b)), duxr^g (dor^g) for ^w?, 
ddxofiev or dmfiev for dibuev, diLojcrL for debate (o(k«at). 

4. The OPTATIVE ACTIVE annexes to the root of the verb 
the terminations ^/j^, ^/?, ^, plur. rjuev, j^ts, i]uav, dual rjjovy 
TjTrjv, preceded by an t^ (§ 87. Note 2) ; as loTa-lrjv, jLOs-irjv, 
dLdo-b]v. 

The OPTATIVE PASSIVE and middle annexes lurjv, o, to, 
ifec. (^ 87.) likewise preceded by an i^ ; as laTa-ifirjv, TiOe-lfiT^v, 

The optative of verbs in v/ui. is generally like that of tvtito) ; 
as dsUvvj-ii optat. dsKvvov^t^y deixvvoig^ pass. dsLXwol^ur^v^ dsL- 

7CPV0L0, &C. 

Note 5. In some instances the optative of verbs in vuv is 
formed by annexing rjv, 7/c, ?;, &c. preceded by an ^ ; as pres. 
davvvlTo^ TtriyvviTo, incorrectly daivvxo or dalwro, nr/yvvio or 
nriyvvTO' 2 aor. dvlr]v, (pvlrjv, incorrectly dvrjv, q)vi]v, from 
JTMI, fPTML — The verb cpdlo) has 2 aor. mid. optat. (fOi- 
fi7]v, cpdio, cpdlTo (that is cpdiLfx^v, cpduo, (fOuTo), as if from 



VERBS IN ^V. 119 

Note 6. The plural and dual of the optative act. often 
drops ^ ; in which case the ending VjCfav becomes ^v ; as 
laraTfisv, taralTe, laxaTsv^ for laTab](Jiev^ <fec. ; nOeTfisr, tiObIte^ 
TidsTsi^, for TiOsb]^6v, (fee. ; dvl^ev^ dvXze, dvTsv^ (incorrectly 
dvfiev, &c., § 117. Note 5) for dvii]fisv, dvbjje^ &lc. 

Note 7. The endings ob]v^ olr^g^ oirj^ &c. are sometimes 
changed into co?;^, coT/g, co?y, &c. ; as |^^q^^^, GLliLrjv^ dcor^v, for 
^wb]v, dXob]v, dob]v, from BISIMI, ''AAJ2MI, dldujfiv. 

5. The IMPERA.TIVE ACTIVE takes Oi^, tw, 6lc, (§ 88. 1); 
as 'icfTadi, TidsTi (for TiQeOv, ^ 14. Note 4), dtdoOv. The impe- 
rative PASSIVE and middle takes oo or o, cr^w, &c. as Ti(9ecro 
tLOeo contr. tIOov, nqiauo ngtao contr. ttqIoj. 

The 2pers. of the imperative act. sometimes drops the 6i 
and lengthens the radical vowel; as to-T?y, tt/^jt^?/, tt/^tt^?/, Je/^yv, 
for IdiaOv, Ttl/LmgaOcy (fee. 

6. The infinitive active annexes vat, (see ^ 89.) to the 
root ; as TtOe-vav, di^do-vav, Idja-vai. The infinitive pass. 
and MID. annexes cfdai ; as Tlde-uOav, dd-adai,, delzw-udat 

Note 8. The Homeric dialect sometimes lengthens the 
radical vowel before fievai^ ^bv (==^at), ^sdidovvav^Tidrifievat, 
(§89.), t^svyvv/Lisv (ibid.), cpilrifisvav from ^lAHMI = cpdita^ 
yori/usvao from r OHMI = yodo), (pogrivav from 0OPHMI = 

7. The root of the participle active is formed by an- 
nexing VT (§ 90.) to the root of the verb ; as laxd-vT Icndg 
(§ 36. 1), gen* laravTog- tvOb-vt TiOsig (ibid.), gen. -nOevTog- 
dvdo-vj didovg (ibid,,), gen. didovjog- dsi^vv-vx dsLxvvg (ibid.)^ 
gen. deiTivvvTog, The participle pass, and mid. attaches 
fievog, 7j, ov, to the root ; as Tid^-^svog. 

8. The second aorist active generally lengthens the 
radical vowel in the indicative^ i7n.perative, and infinitive : 
a and e become ^, and o becomes w. E. g. §i^w^i 2 aor. 
e^i-jv^ rjg, rj, i]fiev, tjts, i](Tav^ imperat. §^0i^ -iiTw, Tjie, TJTcooraj', 
infinit. ^r^vai- rNSlMI, 2 aor. eyi^odv^ cog, co, o)fisv, one, iocrar^ 
imperat. yv^bSi, dnoj, &c. infinit. yvcbvai.. It is observed that 
a is not changed into ^ when it is preceded by Q (§ 95.) ; as 
^PHMI, 2 aor. edqav, ag, a, d^ev^ are, aaav^ imperat. <Sgd6i^ 
^Tb)y &c. infinit. 8gavai. 



120 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

Note 9. Krelvco (KTHMI) and oidrdiut (OYTHMT) retain 
the sliort vowel in the 2 aorist; thus ixrCip, ug^ «, iiuEr, (fee. 
infin. ^T(xfaL' ovmv, a^, cc, &.c. — ^idoijui dml tlOijui lerjgtlien it 
only in the sing, of the indie, and imperat. and in the in- 
finitive. 

Note 10. The 2 person of the imperative of the 2 aor. 
a<!t. in a few instances takes g instead of 6c; as 6ig, Jo^, 
(T/k (from 2XHMI), c^glg (from 'I^PHMI). 

The imperatives cnrfii and (irfii> in composition often drop 
6t and change rj into a; as (ii^(i(7ra for (xpixajiiOt, yiaxdi^a for 
xaj&^r^Oi. ^117. 5. 

Note 11. The 2 aor. infin. dtivai, dovvai, and elvai (from 
tVi^^) are the only ones that lengthen e and o into sv and ov^ 
respectively. 

Note 12. nivb) [TIIMI) has 2 aor. imperat. m^*- tt^ww 
{^IIASIMI) 2 aor. part. ttAwc (in compos, inmlihg) gen. TiAajy- 
Tog. — The verh cpOiixi [fhOIMI) has 2 rtor. mzV. icpOlfirjv, to, no, 
&c. opt. qiOifjijv, q^Oio, cpOuo, <fec. (^ 117. NoTE 5) infin. 
(pOladat., part. cpOiuevog. 

Note 13. In a {ew instances the 2 aorist middle 
lengthens the radical vowel in the indie, imperat., infin., 
and part. ; as ^ulhx) (BAHMI) 2 aor. mid. i^^/ur^Vy imperat. 
^l^ao, infin. ^IriaOav, part. ^Irifiepog. Such forms belong to 
the old or Homeric language. 

Note 14. Accent. The accent of the subjunctive and 
optative pass, and mid, is generally thrown as far back as 
possible ; e. g. subj. duvot/uai^ divrj^ durr/Tut, xoiuoiiiaL, x^ijuri, 
xi^i(H7]Tat, optat. dvv(xi^i]v^ dvvuio^dvvavio^ xoe/LtuliLiTjv^ x^iuuLO, 
TiQB^aiTO — '^'larainaL has always sulj. loiOifJUL^ ?], ^ra^, <fec. 
optat. loTixl/urjv, iGTaio and iGiaTo, &c. Jldo/aui sometimes 
throws the accent back on the antepenult in the subj. and 
opt. ; as dldut/uav for didibfiav. 

See the paradigms. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



121 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



s. 


1 place 

V(JT1]flt 

2aTrjg 


I put 
TiOi]g 


I give 

dlSixJ/UV 

didujg 
didojCTv {p) 


I shoio 

deiupvfiv 

deiyivvg 


p. 


2aTaT6 

laTOCdL (v) 


rldsfisp 

TIOSTS 

TiOelcn (^) or 


didojusp 
dldoxe 

didovai (^v\ 01 
didoaai (^) 


deiupv^Ev 
delxpvxs 
• dempvui [p") or 
dsLKPvacn (j/) 


D. 


idjaiov 


tlQefjisv 
Tidexov 
Tldsxop 


dldofisp 
didoTOP 
didoiop 


dsi'APVfXSV 

deiy.pvxop 
SsIkpvxop 


S. 


l(JTi]g 

IdXll 


Imperfect. 

exiQi]p idldiop 
IxiQijg idldwg 
ixldrj ididix) 


idelKPvP 
idelTipvg 
idslxpv 


P. 


"iCf rax 6 


exiOsfisp 

ixlOexe 

exiOsaap 


idtdofiEP 

idldoxs 

edldoaap 


idstxpviusv 

edetxpvxs 

idelxpvuap 


D. 


LcrraTOv 


ixtdsfisp 
ixiOexop 
£Xi6ex7]p 


ididoiusp 
adidoxop 
ididoxrjp 


sdetxpy/uev 
edslxvvxop 

id£tHPVX7]P 






Second Aorist. 




S. 


£(TT7]V 

e(TTi]g 


Wi^p 

Mr. 


sdwp 
edujg 


aSvp 
Mvg 
Mi) 


P. 


£UT7]fl6V 
SaTTJTS 


WsfXBP 

%Qex6 
Wsfrap 


sdoiiisp 

h:dox6 

Idoaap 


edvjiisv 
6ic. from 


D. 


eGT7]jil6V 
E(TTr/TOV 
i(JT7\Tl]V 


ede^ep 
Wbxop 
lOixrjp 


edousp 
'sdoxop 
IddxTjv 


see§ 117. 8. 



11 



122 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



s. 


laiib 


TlO(b 


didib 


dEiKvica 




laxri 


TiOr^g 


didQg 


dELTivvTig 


p 


l(JT(bfieV 

laxriTS 




dldibjUEV 

didmE 


<kc. like 

TUTTTCO, 


D. 


iGTihfXSV 


TiOdiuev 


didibuEV 


see ^117. 3. 




loxriTOV 


TiOriTOV 

TidriTOV 


didmov 








Second Aorist. 






cTTo declin. 


0(b declin. 


db) declin 


dvb) from 




like the 


like the 


like the 


dvu), declin. 




pres. 


pres. 


pres. 


like the pres 






OPTATIVE MOOD. 








Present. 




S. 


larairiv 
iGTaifjg 
iGTaiTj 


7i6eh]g 


didoir^v 
dcdoli^g 
dcdoirj 


dELXVTuOllLl^ 

dELxt^voig 
dEtavvoi, 


P. 


iGTOLirifJLEV 

laialrjje 


Tl6elT/T6 


didolrjfJLEV 
SidotrjTE 


dElKVTL}Olfl€P 

&LC, like 




laxairiUOLV 


TiO£b]Gav 


didoirjGav 


Tvnxoifii^ 


D. 


iGTaLrj^ev 
lUTairjTOV 
iGTat^r^TtjV 


TiOebjTov 


didolijfiBv 

SldolTjTOV 

dcdoLrii7]v 


see ^ 117. 4, 

and Note 5- 






Or thus (§ 


117. Note 6) 




P. 


iGraLfiBv 
IgtuXts 


TldETflSV 
TldelTS 


dldollLlEV 






iGTotev 


TldelEV 


dtdolEv 




D. 


Igtoutov 


tiOeXtov 


didoiTOv 






iGTalxriv 


tlOeItj^v 


didolxriv 








Second Aorist. 






GTatr^v decl. 6£li]v decl. 
like the like the 


dolrjv decl. 
like the 


dvlrjv from 
JTMI, see 




pres. 


pres. 


pres. 


^ 117. N. 5. 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 



123 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



S. lara^v 


rl&ert 


dido&t. 


delKvv&c 


OViXTXrj 






or Sstxvv 


lai&TOii 


TV&iTCt) 


didorca 


deiTtvvTfj) 


P. to-rare 


TL&eTS 


dtdoTB 


delKvvxe 


IdTdzwuoiv 


Tc&eTO)iTav 


didoTOiuav 


deixvvTOJGav 


or loxavTbiv 


or Tt&evTcov 


or dt,d6vT(t)v 


or SeiTtvvvTO)!^ 


D, laiaTov 


Tld^STOP 


didoTOv 


deixvvTOV 


liTTUTOiV 


Tfci^^e'rwj' 


dvdoiMv 


deixvvTOJV 




Second Aorist. 




S, (JTr^d-V 


d^hv or ^£? 


doOc or dog 


dvd-c 


crrrjrw 


^s'tw 


^orw 


dvTca 


P. (TTTJre 


-^ere 


^6r€ 


dvTe 


OTi]m)(jav 


&eTb)(Tav 


doTwcroiv 


6ic, from 


or (TT(kpTiov 


or ^ivT(f3v 


or dovTCOv 


JTMI, 


D. GXriTOV 


^hov 


doTov 


§117. 8. 


OTilTCOV 


<6^£Ta>J/ 


doTOJV 






INFINITIVE MOOD, 




Pres. IdTuvav 


Tti9^£Va(r 


didovao 


deiKvvvav 


2 Aor. (TTTivao 


x^eXvac 


dovvav 


dvvai from ^ ')CMI 




PARTICIPLE. 




Pres. l(TTfig 


Tvd^etg 


didovg 


deixvig 


2 Aor. o-rd^ 


S^elg 


dovg 


dvg from dXMI 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE- 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



S, idrauat 


Tld-ejuoci^ 


dldouai 


deixvvfxdk 


tcTiauav 


Tid^eaav 


dldocfav 


deixvvua^ 


laraTav 


or Tid^ri 


didoTocc 


dsixvvjav 


P. lar&ued^a 


Tii^ifisd-a 


didoue&oc 


deixvvue&cc 


LCTTaa&s 


Tiitead^s 


dldoa&e 


delxpva&e 


lOTOiVTOiV 


Ti&etfmi' 


dldoj' T(XL 


deixpvpiai 


D, iGi&ue&oy 


JL&ilUS&OP 


didouF&ov 


d6ixvib\us&oy 


tazaa&ov 


Ti&ea&ov 


didoad^oy 


8slxyva&oy 


tcFTaad^oy 


ji&sad^ov 


didoai^oy 


delxyva&oy 



124 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 





Im 


perfect. 




S, IcrTd/iiTjv 


^Tl6ijUT]V 


idid6ur]v 


ide^xvvfiTjy 


idTuao 


ijlOecTo 


idldoao 


ideixpvuo 


or t(Jrw 


or bTlOov 


or idldov 




LaruTo 


iTldero 


idldoTO 


idelxvvTo 


P. IcTTixueda 


ixMusda 


ididoueOa 


idaixvvueOa 


2(JTixaOe 


ijldeude 


iSldociOe 


idelxyvude 


laxat^TO 


ixlOevTo 


ididoi'TO 


IdelxvvyTO 


J), laTdtuedop 


inOiueOoy 


idtdoueOoy 


IdeixvvueOov 


taraadoy 


hiOeaOop 


IdidoaOov 


idtlxpvfjSov 


lazdadtjy 


iuOiadriy 


ididoaOijy 


Ideixvvodfiv 




Second Aorist Middle. 




iCTTdjUJJV 


idijUTjv 


idojUTjV 


idvUTjy from 


declin. 


declin. 


declin. 


JTMI, decl 


like the 


like the 


like the 


like Ida^- 


imperf. 


imperf. 


imperf. 


xyv/UTjp. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



5. 



D. 







dtdibuab 


dsixvTucauai, 

deLXvvri 

deixvvTjToiv 


IcTTriorOe 

l(JT(bPTat> 




didihueda 

didihade 

didihvxav 


&-C. like 

TV7CJ0)UOil^ 

see ^117. 3, 


lGT(biLte6ov 

iGTriadov 

lair^udov 


rcdojuedoy 
liOriadov 


didb)uedov 

didibddov 

didibadov 






Second Aorist Middle. 




like the 


like the 


like the 


dvix)uav 
from dv(a 


present 


present 


present 





PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 



125 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



S, terra luTjv 


Ti6eiuT]v 


dcdo[u7]v 


dsiy.vvoUir^v 


luTuTo 


rideio 


didoTo 


dsiKvioio 


luialTO 


riOelTO 


didolTO 


deiKvvono 


P, iuTalueOa 


Tideiueda 


didolusdoc 


&c. like 


Icnaiuds 


TiOelaQs 


didolaOs 


TVTiToiarjv^ 


IGTUIPTO 


TiQelvTo 


dtdoXvTO 


see ^117. 4. 


D, laToclueOov 


TideiasOov 


didoiaedov 




iuTaXudov 


TideXcfdop 


dcdoiGdov 




laialdOr^v 


TtdeiaOjiV 


didoiaQriv 






Second Aorist Middle. 




(TTa[ur]v 


deiur^v 


doliur^y 


dvllX7]V 


like the 


like the 


like the 


from 


present 


present 


present 


JTMI 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




S, tdTado 


rWscfo 


didodo 


detxvvao 


or iCTTca 


or TiOov 


or dldov 




laTuaOoj 


iideGdu) 


di^docrdo} 


dsixvTuadij) 


P. ^araaOs 


rldsuds 


dldouOe 


deixvvuOe 


IdTaddviCTav 


TidecrOoicrap 


didocrdiocrav 


dsLTCvvaOojorav 


or l(na(jOb)v 


or TtdeaOix}v 


or didoadojv 


or deixpvaOoJv 


D, 2crraadov 


Tldsddov 


dldoadov 


delxvvcrdov 


iGidaOo^v 


TLdeaOojv 


dtdoadmiy 


dei>7ivvcrdix)v 




Second Aorist Middle. 




axduo 


6s (JO or Oov 


doao or ^ou 


dvao 


like the 


like the 


like the 


from 


present 


present 


present 


JTMI 




INFINITIVE MOOD. 




Pres. iffTotadoiL rideadvn 


didouduv 


SelxwaOav 


2Aor.M. (Tzdo'dui. 


OiaOav 


doadak 


dvaOav 




PARTICIPLE. 




Pres. laT(jcu6vo; jidsuero; 


didouej'og 


deixvvjiievog 


2 Aor.M. iJidtievo 


g diuevog 


dvnsi'og 


dviueyo; 



126 



INFLECTION OF WORDS, 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 

^ 118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are 
supposed to have, more than one present {^ 9().). 

2. All forms which omit the connecting vowel (§ 85. 1) 
are anomalous — except the perfect and aorist passive (^ 91. 
and ^ 92.). 

3. The following catalogue contains nearly all those verbs 
which generally perplex the learner. The words printed in 
capitals are either obsolete or imaginary forms. They are 
printed in capitals, "in order that the eye may not become 
accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude 
of unused and merely imaginary forms ; and thus rendered 
less capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight." See 
Buttmann's L. Gram. ^ 114. 2. 



M(a injure, 1 aor. act. ^acra 

contracted 5cr«, 1 aor. pass. 

Mijdi]v (§ 109. N. 2), 1 aor. 

mid. &(xGij.u7jv. 
(kya^ai [AFHIMT, JFAR) ad- 

mzre,imperf. 'ijuuyv, 1 aor. 

pass, ij'^crdrjy {j 109. N. 2), 

1 fut. mid, dyaorofiai. (^ 95. 
N. 1), 1 aor. mid. riyaaduTjy 
(not Attic). 

(xplQOi) (^ 96. 18) collect, perf. 

uyriysQKa, dyr^yeguat^ (^ 81. 

1), 2 aor. mid. r^yeoofiT^v 

(epic), infin. dysQaadai^ part. 

Ayqo^svog for d.yeq6(jievog 

(^26.1). 
^yvv^i {ArSl, § 96. 9) hrealcy 

2 perf. £«/« Ionic eriyci (^80. 
N. 2), 1 fut. a|w, 1 aor. 
I'a|a rarely -^s", subj. «|w, 
opt. as«t(tft, &c., 2 aor. 
pass. e&yi]v (^^ - or - - -), 
subj. «/w in compos, ^ara- 
yw, opt. aaxayeb^v, — Kavd^ 



^oLvg = 1 aor. opt. 2 pers. 

sing. yiuLTu^aig from J^wid- 

yvvf-u. 
^yo) lead, perf. '^/a and dyr^o- 

/a (originally (i/^Jy^o/a), 1 

fut. cfsoj, 1 aor. ^s«, 2 aor- 

riyoLyov J^^ 96. N. 1), perf. 

pass, '^iyf.mt., 1 aor. pass. 

7\xOi]v. — "jt^ETs for 1 aor. 

imperat. 2 pers. plur. ol^uts; 

see ^ 85. N. 2. 
^A^Sl see (xvduvo). 
deioo) see at'ioo>. 
clirjut' [AEfl) blow, in&n, ur^vat 

Hom. diuevai. (^ 117. N. 

8), part, (if/?, pass. ciTjfiai. 
aiveuj praise, see ^ 95. N. 2. 
ai^ew ^flA-e, 1 perf r^or^xa lonic 

&Qa[gr]y,a (^ 81. N.), 1 fut. 

algr^au), 2 aor. «r^ov (from 

'EASl, ^ 80. N. l),^subj. 

Uco, <fcc. perf pass. fiQr^jLiai 

Ionic dcgccigr]uat^, 1 aor. pass. 

rj^e^/^i^ (§ 95. N. 2), 2 aor. 

mid. elio^ur^v Alexandrian 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



127 



eadfiTiv (§ 85. N. 2). The 
2fut. ^^« is not common. — 
rhxo he seized = 2 aor. 
mid. 3 pers. sing. eXero, 
Uto (^ 92. N.), with the 
digan:5«T»a Felro, and finally 
yevTO (like rivOov for ^X(9oj/). 

al'^w uncontracted de/^w («5> 96. 
18) raise i perf. i^^^^a, 2 fut. 
d^w, 1 aor. riQa^ subj. %w, 
&c. perf. pass, i^^.aow^, aor. 
pass. %(9?/^, 1 aor. mid. 
r^Qa^i]v, 2 aor. mid. rjQofirjv, 
'-^'Aix)^To = pi 11 perf. pass. 
3 pers. sing, ^e^ro or riQTo 
(^ 96. 19). 

alGedvo{iai[AI2QSl,^ 96. 7) 
perceive^ perf. mid. i5fa<9?/- 
fioiv (^ 96. 10), fut. \iiid. 
aladriaojuai, 2 aor. mid. 

dK«;^/^^w( ^ JC/2 , AKAXSl , § 96. 
N. 1) trouble^ fut. d;f«;/T]- 
aa> (^ 96.10), 1 aor. r^i^oixri 
<ja, 2 aor. TJ;ia/03^, pres. mid. 
ixxofiai or axvv^iai (^ 96. 9), 
perf. mid. dxrixe^ai and d;fd- 
;!f?/,t£a^ (from «^et», whence 
part. d/£a»/; for the aug- 
ment see ^ 81. N.).— '^jcv;- 
;jf£jaTa(.= perf. mid. 3 pers. 
plur. «^d/?/j^T«^ordjf^;/£j^Tat. 

duax^Bvog sharpened, point- 
ed^ pres. pass. part, from 
AKft (^81. N.). 

d;xoi;w (^AKOJl, whence d^foij) 
Aectr, 2 perf. dxriTcoa, (^ 81.) 
1 perf. rixovxa (Doric axov- 
xa), aor. rixouaa, fut. (i^^ou- 
aofxat, perf. pass. iiKov(Ti.iav 
(^ 107. N. 1), aor. pass. 
TjxovaOriv. 

dXuofxat. wander , rove^ perf. 



pass. dXd^T/^a^ (^ 81. N.) 
synonym, with the pre- 
sent. 

dcldi\(jxa) {AAJEJl, AAJSl, 
6 96. 10 and 8) grow, fut. 
dldridco. 

m^o) {AAEKSl, § 96. 15) ward 
ojf, fut. dl6^r](Ta) (^ 96. 10), 
2 aor. 'r]A«A;{02/ (from AAA- 
AEKSl syncop. AAAAKSl, 
§ 96. N. 1), aor. mid. r^le- 

dleofiai' and dXeiofiav shun, 
avoid, 1 aor. mid. riXsdfiTjv 
(^ 104. N. 1) and iilevdfirjv. 

(klelg see ei'^^w. 

dliaxofiav i^AASl^ dXoaa, ^ 96. 
8 and 10) am captured, 
perf. 7]Awxa and MAw;fa 
(^ 80. N. 2), 2 aor. (from 
"AASIMI) r^lix)v and MAwa/, 
subj. dXc5, opt. dAo/?/y and 
dUriv (^ 117. N. 7), infin. 
dXibvai^ part. dAoiig. 

(iX^Ta/i/o) {AAITSl, ^ 96. 7) 5271 
. against^ fut. dXtxTJTw (»^ 96. 
10), 2 aor. TJAtroj^. 

allo^av (^ 96. 6) Zeap, 2 fut. 
dkov/iiaL, 1 aor. r^d^urjv^ aXw- 
fioLi, (fee. 2 aor. '^Xdjur^y. — 
Forms without the con- 
necting vowel are 2 aor. 2 
and 3 pers. sing. dXcro, dlro, 
part, aljusvog, =r^lov^ t^AetoJ 
dUuBvoQ ; see ^ 92. N. 

dXoo> see dllaxo/uai and dya- 
Xlcrxto. 

dUaxM (^ 96. 14) 5Ai/72, fut. 
dlvtu)^ aor. T]Aj;<Ja. 

dlcpixb'tx) and dXgpd^tjo i^AA^Sl, 
^ 96. 7) procure, 2 aor. 
iikffov, opt. dlqiotin, &:c. 

d/m^Tuyw (AMAPTJl, ^ 96. 



128 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



7) err^ siiu miss, 1 perf. 
'flluuoTi]X(x (^ 9G. 10), 1 aor. 

rill/UOTt/TU, 2 aor. l^UOLOTOV 

(Homer has -^uHoojovy ^ 9(3. 
19, and ^ 26. N.) perf. pass. 
^tAuoirifjui, aor. pass. ^</'«o- 
H^&Tjv, fut. mid. uua()T)\ao- 

fJlOLi. 

du^llaxof miscarry, fut. (///- 
(^X(j)Cfui from uuHUmx). 

d.fj.7ii'/ixt {d.ucf}l e/uj, ^ \4.3)wrap 
around, imperf. uuneT/ov, 
2 aor. riuTTKr/ov (^ S2. N. 1), 
pres. pass. (xuTri/ouuc and 

^/unhxyloxot and (\u^hixluxo) 
{AMUAAKSl, § 90.h) ///f.95, 
fut. (i//7rAaX);orw (§ 9(3- 10), 
2 aor. 7^u7ihtyiov and ij^TAot- 
xoj', inlin. diTiluxelv^ \vi th- 
ou t the //. 

d.tA(fUvvvUi((jLUCfi bi'vvui) clothe, 

1 fut. duq)i£aLo and diuqtib 
(§ 102. N. 1), 1 aor. r,(v(f/f. 
o-« (§ 82. N. 1), perf. pass. 
ilfjcplea^uav (§ 107. N. 1). . 

dvallaxix) (^y^ dllcfxu)) and 
&yal6u) (^ura uloo)) expend, 
imperf. ^vr^ll(Txov and (xvu- 
h)vv (§ 80. N. 4). 1 perf. 
dv(jclix)xa and (JCPr^lu)xa, later 
-^j/dtAtjxa or r^^r]i^>»a ("^ 82. 
N. 1), fut. dvalwcrcx)^ aor. 
ttyd^ora and dj^rJP.ajaa, later 
i^vdlijJGa or 7]pr^^^oj(ja. 

^vd6ivm (AJJ2, § 96. 7) Je- 
light, please, imperf. V- 
doLPOv and eai^c^aj^oi^ and trjj/- 
^a^oi/ (§ 80. N. 2 and 3), 

2 perf. £aJ« Doric ea^of 
(with the smooth breath- 
ing), h^i, (i^rjcro) (§ 96. 10), 
2 aor. 2a^o>' and oidop and 



^t^^Joi/ (§ 80. N. 4 and 
2). 

ANEC-jn, 2 perf. di'r;ro<9f/ 
(§81., and § 90. 19) spring 
forth, 

uvi'/ot [uru. I'/o)) hold vp, mid. 
^pi/o'iui^ imperf. V'^'/A'"/^ 
(§82. N. I), 2 aor. mid. 
'i^k'sa/^i^itiv (ihid.). 

uvdr/oj command, order, im- 
perf. "Tlivuiyov, 2 perf. ^potya 
(§ 91. N. 2), fut. dpiii^i^, 
aor. v^^"?"- 'Apojyiio gives 
imperf. (xpo'ryeop. 

UTtUVl/xitl (u7j6 UVQfJXx), AYPSl^ 

§ 96. 10) take away, im- 
perf. dLnr,iQ(xtv^ 1 aor. mid. 
(xTit^vouuijv, 1 aor. act. part. 
c'lnOiOijcg (for (i7r«iOttg), mid. 
dcnovouuspo;. 

i!cnuqioxo't (A^IkQ, § 96. 8 and 
IS. 1) deceive, fut. dTraqfnjao* 
(§ 96. 10), 2 aor. ^Tra^oy. 

ooroAwiw (diTTo Xuvot) enjoy ^ im- 
perf. (iTT/j/.ai/oj/ and unblavop 
(§ 78. N. 1), 6lc. 

d.noiQag see (i7r«u^oj. 

u^uofiaipray, invoke, regular. 
The Hom. infin. dLQr^fjievcxv 
= a^jLv comes from APH. 
MI{^ 117. N. 8). 

docxgldxuj [A PP., § 96. 8 and 
IV. 1)/^ 2 perf. cxQaoa Ion. 
cigriouy part. fern, dtoagvia 
(§ 81. N.), fut. cHqgoj 1 aor. 
-^oaa (§ 102. N. 2, and 
§ 104. N. 4), 2 aor. r^oaQor^ 
perf. pass, dor;oft/«^ (§ 96. 
10). ''AQUEvog==2'di)r. mid. 
part. dLQouEvog, (§ 92. N.). 

do£o-;fw [APSl, § 96. 10 and 8) 
please, fut. (^geaoj, perL 
pass. Tr'igecruaL. 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



129 



cigvvfiav {a]:gM, APSl, § 96. 9) 

procure^ acquire, earn, 

imperf. r^vvixriv, 
dgndc^cj (§ 96. N. 3) seize, perf. 

r^QTcaxa^ fut. dondcrio or dg^ 

7rd|w, aor. rignacra^ 1 aor. 

pass. riQndadi]v^ 2 aor. pass, 

r^gTtdy7]v. 
AFfL, seedgaglaxci) and dgicrKO), 
oi^Jwand ai'ia^'u>(v4rr/2, ^96. 

15 and 7) increase, fut. 

av^ouai, aor. r^v^rjcra, perf. 

pass. r^vh],uai, aor. pass. 

^i)|rj/9r/z/ ; § 96. 10. 
^ TP/2 see dnavgdoj and ^Ttav- 

gtaxouac. 
dq)eo)pT(XL see Irj^v. 
dLcpvuaio draw forth liquids, 

fut. dypv^ix), aor. r^cfvaa^ ^ 96. 

N. 3. 
'^A0fl see dTTacciaHoj. 
^X^ouai am offended, vexed, 

indignant, fut. mid. ^i;K^£- 

uojuav. aor. pass i]xOiaOriv, 

§ 96. 10. 
&/vvuai see dxa^ltco. 
ciio blow, inn perf. aoj/, = df?;^t, 

which see. 
^0) I sleep, 1 aor. dcra and 

aecra (§ 96. 10). 
^w satiate, infin. aen/ Horn. 

&U6v(xv, fut. cf(7w, aor. aca, 

pres. pass. 3 pers. sing, 

aTav and (xaxai^. 
^ajgro see «rou>. 



^a/vw and ^daxo) (^BASl, § 96. 
5 and 8) s^o, 1 perf ^eSijxa, 
2 perf. |^^>cc« (§ 91. N. 2), 
fut. ^r^d^ shall cause to go, 

1 aor. e^r/Ga I caused to ^o, 

2 aor. (from ^^^fO^i) '^^n^, 



subj. i^co, opt. §(xlriv, impe- 
rat. ^rfiim composition §oL 
(§ 117. N. 10), infin. (^^i^at, 
part. §dg, 1 fut. raid. i^TJao- 
/uat, 1 aor. mid. sBrjddiuTjy 
and l§i](j6}xriv (§ 85. N. 2.). 
In compos, perf pass. §1" 
^a,uat, aor. i^dOrjv. The 
Homeric ^eouav or ^eiofjiab 
= 2 aor. mid. subj. ^(bfiai, 
(§ 117. N. 4). 
l^dA;.oi [BAAn, § 96. 6) ^/iro-u?, 
2 fut. i^ttPwco, 2 aor. e^aXov, 
1 fut. i^aUrlaoi (§ 96. JO), 1 
perf. (from BAASl, § 96. 
17) ^i^h/yot, perf. pass, 
^i^lri^ai, aor. pass. I8lrfiriv^ 
1 fut. mid. §Xr^(Tonaf.. From 
BAHMI we obtain 2 aor, 
£/^^?yj^, 2 aor. mid. i^lriUTjv, 
Tjcro, TjTO, &r. subj. ^IrieTao 
for |^A^r«^ (§ 117. N. 4), 
optat. ^Xel/urjv^ ^IsXo, ^IsZto^ 
&c. like Oelfzrjv, infin. ^^^- 

^daxM see ^alvco. 

^aaTd^oj (§ 96. N. 3) carry, 
fut. ^acTTdaci), aor. eSdaraaa^ 
perf. pass. ^e^dcrTay^uav, aor, 
pass. i^acrTdxOi]v. 

BASl see ^alvoj. 

^iofxai or ^eiouai see ^alvco. 

^i^doi or i5/|?7/.a^ (5.^/2) part. 
^i^(bv, §i^dg^ = §(xlv(x), 

^i^gibcTxu) {BOPO, § 96. 17 
and 1 and 8), 1 perf. /^^. 
^gwxa, 2 perf part, ^e^gihg^ 
fut. ^gihaoj^ 2 aor. (from 
BPnMI) e^gojp, 1 aor. pass. 
i^gfhdrjv. 

^i6co live, i^iix)(Ta, §e^[u)t.iai, 
^i(h(jouat>. From BIfLMI 
comes 2 aor. i^/wy, |?*w, 



130 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



/?«(!)> (§ 117. N. ?), |?toO., 

^vdjaxouui vivify, borrows its 
parts from the preceding. 

^la(jii!iv(xt[BAJ2TSl, § 96. 7) 
bud^ sprout, fut. (^htojif^ob) 
(§ 96. 10), 2aor. maujov, 
1 aor. i^^luGTi^cru^ pert'. (^£- 
fiXuGTr^xu and i,-i)*tc(Jii^xix 
(§76. iN.2). 

BAAJl or BAESl see |?c(Uo). 

^kibuxoi (MOAJl, § 96. 17, and 
§ 26. N.) ^o, come, 1 perf. 
f.u^i^)Axtxu, 2 aor. luoXoy, 2 
fut. niid. i^olovfjui. 

^odut cry out, regular. From 
BOSl come 1 aor. ^^ojgu 
1 aor. pass, i^ihadi^p, fut. 
mid. ^^(Touav. 

BOAJl see (ioilouoLv. 

BOPJl see ^iS()(l)(Txut. 

§6axui) pasture, fut. ^oaxr^uo) 
(§96. 10), aor. ^f^oorxr/croe. 

^ovXouav will, perf ^eSoiXriuav 
(§96. 10), aor. iSovUfit^v 
and r^,^ouAr;(9vi/ (§ 7H. N. 1), 
fut. ^ovXr^aoinai, 2 perf |^£- 
^ouAa in composition tt^o- 
^i^ovXa (in Homer). From 
the simple BOAfl (Latin 
volo), ^okojuav, plur. §6leade. 

BOSl see |^o(iw. 

BPAXSl rattle, crash, 2 aor. 

BPOSl see ^v^gdyaxco. 

^qv/ao^ai (BPTXJl, § 96. 10) 
roar, ^gv/r^aouat^ l^ovxriaa- 
fir]v, 2 perf. ^t^qv/ot. 

r. 

ya/z^w [rAMSl, § 96. 10) mar- 
ry, 2 fut. yotfiEoj yauo), perf. 
YSY(kfiT]xa, 1 aor. (§ 96. 18) 



tyrjua^ perf. pnss.'/fy^i.ujyMat, 
aor. pass, iyttuiffirif (see 
§ 95. N. 2), fut. mid. (in 
Homer) yuueaaofiat (§ 102. 
N. 3). 

JTASl see ylyvouai. 

yByil)vut and yeyutriot [r II Nil, 
§96. Hand W) call aloud, 
2 perf yiyun'u as present. 

)'^rTo see ct/^^ui and ylyvofiai. 

rENIl see ylyyouui. 

ynOiui (rneji, § 96. 10) re- 
joicc, 2 perf yeyi/Ja as pre- 
sent, fut. yifii\u^), aor. ^/ v 

-/T^o^iaxcij or 7^^>^i:u> ^roi^? oW, 
yeyrjoaxw, yi/fjuauf, 2 aor. 
(from rHPHMI) iyi]g(2y 
(§ 117. 8), infin. yr^guyui, 
part. )^/0^s (epic). 

ylyvouiti later ylfouui [FENH^ 
§ 96. 1) become, 2 perf. 
)'fc-/o^tf, perf. pass, yeyivri' 
f^vii (§ 96. 10), aor. pass. 
iyevrfitiv^ fut. mid. /cvrjao- 
|t/«^, 2 aor. mid. iyevourjv. 
From FAft comes 2 perf. 
ytyaa, plural yiyufiev (§91. 
N. 2), yf/ciaTe, pydaa^, in- 
fin. (Homeric) yeydiUBv for 
ye'/cirat, part, yeyuiag contr. 
yeyd);. From the 1 perf. 
yiyr^xot Doric yeyaxa (not 
used) comes yeyajfw whence 
infin. y£/a;<£iy = yf yo^eVa^. 
— rivTo or cyej'To for ^yi~ 
VETO (^ 92. N.) must not be 
confounded with yeVro (see 
ctiq^M) for e'iXero. 

yiyv(b(jxb) later yivibuxoy 
{rJVOn, § 96. 1 and 8) 
know, perf eyvtoxa (§ 76. N. 
2), 2 aor. (from rNRMI) 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



131 



yvdivav, yvovg, perf. pass. 
^eyv(x)u^ai^ a or. pass, lyvih- 
odriv(§ 107.N. 1,§109.N. 
2). The compound ava^ 
yiyv(I)(j%oi has 1 aor. ^v^- 
yvwaa. 

yodoj beioaiU imperf. also 
'eyoov from yoto. From yorj^ 
lilt' comes the Horn, infin. 
yoiaevat. (§ 117. N. 8). 

T SIN ft see ysyojpfjj. 

J. 
daivv^v and ^a/w entertain^ 

fut. Salcroj, aor. edaicra, mid. 

dalpvfiat^, opt. 3 pers. sing. 

daivvjo (see § 117. N. 5), 

aor, idav(j(xiiii]v, aor. pass. 

idalaOi]p, 
Saioi} divide, perf. pass, ^e- 

daiGfiat., flit. mid. (from 

^ASl) d(k(TOfiav aor. Maa(i;- 

daiio {J A SI, § 96. 18) Si^rn, 
2 perf. dsdrja, 2 aor. mid. 
idao/Lir^v^ siibj. ddiofiai^^ t^, 

^dxj/oi {JAKn, JHKSl, § 96. 
5 and 18), 627e, perf didijxcc, 
2 aor. £^a>{oy, perf pass. 
dedi]yfiav, aor. pass. edrixOriv^ 
fut. mid. ^TJ^o^at. 

dafidat [JAMJl) subdue, dafid- 
Uix), iddjLtaaa^ perf deduijxa 
{sLshomJMASl, §96.17), 
perf. pass. dedfirjiLiai^, aor. 
idfir^Sjjv, 2 aor. eddiLii]v. 

da^Odpix) (JAPQSl, § 96. 7) 
sleep, 1 perf. ded&odr^yia 
(§ 96. 10), 2 aor. £(J«^(9o)/ by 
metathesis edoaOov (poetic), 
fut. mid. dix^Oi\(jo(xai^ 1 aor. 



pass. l56LQdriv (tor eddgcdi^v^ 

§11.). , 

daTBo^av divide, share, 1 aor. 

mid. edaTeduTjv (§ 104. N. 

1), infin. dajmaQai. 
JASl cause to learn, teach^ 

1 perf ded(jci]ica (as if from 
J A ESI, § 96. 10), 2 perf. 
^fc^ntoc Aaz;^ learnt, 2 aor. 
e^ttoj^, perf. pass. deddrjjLiai^^ 

2 aor. pass, e^a??^, 1 fut. 
mid, dariaofiat.. From ^^- 
-^^/2 (§ 96. 11) comes 
pass, deddo/uat^. 

dedlaxofxai, or dsdtaaof^ai (dl(a\ 
frighten, scare. 

deldco see JETSl. 

SelKvvfii. (JEIKn, § 96. 9) 
show, detBo), edet^^a, dideiy^ 
fioLi, bdeixOr}v. The lonians 
say di^ix)^ sde^a, <fec. 

JEISl, and ^e/(5«i and ^/w(§ 96. 
18), /ear, 1 perf. dedo^xa 
(§ 98. N. 2), 2 perf. ^e'- 
dt,a (§ 91 . N. 2), aor. adsiaa 
(Hom. MJg.(7«, § 79. N.), 
fut. mid. deiaofiai,. 

difLux) build, perf (as from 
J ME SI) dedfiTjjta, 1 aor. 
edetfia. 

diofnai^ see dioj, 

digaofiai see, 2 perf. dsdogxot, 
as present, 2 aor. sdgaxotf 
(by metathesis), 1 aor. 
pass. edsQ/drjv, 2 aor. pass. 
idQdx7]v (by metathesis). 

de/o/jai receive, regular. — 
Forms without the con- 
necting vowel are 2 aor. 
mid. (§ 92. N.) id^y/urjv, 
edsxTo, infin. ds/dat^ part. 
deyfist^og as present. 



132 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



dico hind, see § 95. N. 2. 

dioj am wanting, want, 3 
pers. sing, del it behooves, 
one must, decet, oportet, 
1 flit, dey^at^ (§ 96. 10), aor. 
iderjaa (Homer has dricrev 
for aderjaev), mid. Sio/iav 
need, pray, 1 aor. pass. 
^derfiip, fut. mid. dar^aofjLav. 

^HKSl see du^iPM, 

driix) [J J SI) as future, / shall 
find, 

diddayco) (§ 96. 14) teach, dedl^ 
da/a didu^uf^ i^dida^a, dedi- 
dayiuai, ediduxdr^v. Fut. also 
didixuxr^uui} (^ 96. 10). 

didgdidTiixi (JFAJl, § 91. I and 
8) run away, perf. dedgaxa, 
fut. Sq(x(Hx)^ 1 aor. sdoacra, 2 
aor. (from JPHMI) adoav, 
dgoi), dgab]v^ dgudc, dgavai, 
SQ(kg, see § 1 17. 8. 

dldixifii (J on, § 96. 1, and 
§ 117.) give, perf dsdix}}ta, 
iut.ddjaw, 1 aor. edafxa{^^ 104. 
N. 2), 2 aor. edujv, perf. 
pass. didofiaL, aor. pass. 
idodrjv, 2 aor. mid. ido/ui^v. 

^/£w and JIZHMT seek, pon- 
der, mid. diOj}xav^ fut. <J^^^- 

J IKSl fiin g,cast,2aiOY. edvxop, 

dlM see ^£'//2. 

z/M£'J2 and JMAfl see %cw 
and da/uiko). 

doajat or deaiai it seems, 1 
aor. mid. (^odao-aro, subj. 
dodaaenxi (Horn.). 

doyJi.) (J OIUl, § 96. 10) seem, 
think, fut. 86t,o)^ aor, edo^a, 
perf. pass, dtdoy^ai. The 
forms (5o;f7Jo-w, edoHiirra, ds- 
doicrjfiat, are not common. 



dovniu) {JOTnsi,) resound^ 
sound heavily, 2 perf. ^^- 
dovna^ 1 aor. idovTtrjda and 
iydovnrjaa (as if from 

rjorriEj?,). 

JPAMJl see to^/w. 

dCi^a^ui {J YNAJl, J TNHMI) 
am able, perf. dedvvi^juat., 
aor. idvvrfiriv and r^dwrfiriv 
(§ 78. N. I) and idvi^dcrOrjv 
(§ 109. N. 2), fut. ^u*/r;ao. 
/W(^^, aor. mid. idvpr^adcfii^v 
(Hom.). 

^i-w and ^0^0) enter, cause to 
enter, perf. (JtcJvxa, fut. 
^i)(7w, 1 aor. edvaa, 2 aor. 
(from ^ r^;/) advt^, d6w (- -), 
dvir^v, dvOi, dvvui, dug, aor. 
pass. idud7]v (^^^-), fut. mid. 
dvGo/LtocL, 1 aor. mid. edvcrd- 
fxi]v. For the epic idvao^ 
^r^f see § 85. N. 2. 

£". 

h(jLq)drjv was fastened, 1 aor. 
pass, from '^0/2. For the 
augment see § 80. N. 2. 

^p/^w (§ 96. 18) wake, 1 perf. 
ayr^yegya, 2 perf. £y^?]yo^a 
(§81. N.), fut. lysQib, 1 aor. 
TiyeiQa, aor. pass, rf^eqdtjv^ 
2 aor. mid. r^yoofxrip (for 
r^y8Q6fii]v, § 26. 1), opt. 
eygoljLir^v, imperat. (Hom.) 
£^050, in fin. iygiaOccLy part. 
aygo/uepog. — ' EygijyogOaav = 
iygr/yogacrc. The imperative 
eygriyogda = aygrjyogaTa, and 
the infinitive aygr/yogOai =^ 
aygvyogsvuL, take the termi- 
nations of the passive, o^Oe^ 
aOav, 

ado) see kadio). 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



133 



Si;ofiaL (EJSl, § 96. 4), in 
compos. zadet^ojuaL sit, seat 
myself, imperf. licad8l:;^6fiT]v 
(§ 82. N. 1), aor. pass. 
ixads(TOi]v (later), 2 fut mid, 
xaOedovjuao (§ 1 14. N. 2). 

iOehx) and 6':lu) will, perf. rfii- 
^^a (§ 96. 10), fut. OsXi'iaco, 
aor. rfiiXi]Ga. 

sOoj, 2 perf. el'ijjda Ionic acoda 
(§ 80. N. 2, and § 96. 19) 
am accustomed, 

EIJ/l and IJSl, 2 aor. sWov 
rarely i'dov I sau\ t^w, "idov- 
fit, Ids and I'ds, IdsXp, idwp, 
pres. pass, etdoiiav seem, 
videoT, 1 aor. mid. sladifirjv. 
—The 2 perf. olda means, 
/ know, novi : 

Indie. S. oida^ olada, olds, 

P.l'or^ej/, i(jT£, i'aaui^ D. i'cnov. 

8ubj, S. £id(b, sidf^g, eidrij 

P. sldwfier, eidriiE, eidcbat, 

J), sidriTov. 

Opt. S. €ldsir]v, eldslrjg, 
sldsli^^ P. si8sli]fX6v, eidsirjTS, 
eldelijaav, 

Imperat. S. YuOl, t'orw, 
i'orT£, P. taiojaat^, D. i'aiop^ 

In fin. Bid hat. 

Part. £ld(bg, siSvTa, eidog. 
The 2 pluperfect f^detv I 
knew : S. fidsiv and ]i'^?y, 
-Tj^etg and r^devada and 'jj'cJ?/- 
o-^«, rj'Jgf and rfirj and f^Setv, 
P. rfisv^Bv and '^]a//£?^, 7j[^e^- 
T6 and '»5oTff, Tideaav and 
^cr«j/. See §91.'N.2. The 
future is eXao^at (rarely 
eidiiCTixi from EIJEJl) I shall 
know. — Horn. XdiAsvat for 
Bl8ipat.-ThQ regular forms 
12 



oldag, oi'da/Lisv^ &,c. belong 
to the later Greek. 

fl'jfw (not to be confounded 
with si'xix) yield), 2 perf. 
'iotxa (§ 80. N. 2) some- 
times etiioc Ionic oha seem 
infin. ioiHsvat, part, loivtihg 
and olHihg and et;tcog, 2 plu- 
perf ^iljxELv (§ 80. N. 3).— 
^'H'ixTO or axTO= ^to>f£e< fol- 
lows the analogy of the 
passive.— £^^^0-^= ioUdat. 
See also §91. N. 2. 

sMw or ei'lco [EASl, § 96. 18 
and 6) roll up, drive to- 
gether, 1 aor. infin. elcjat 
and leUat (§ 104. N. 4), 
part, eluag^ perf. pass. bbI- 
fioct, 2 aor. edhjv, infin. o:^rj- 
^««^ Hom. dA^wfj/at, part. 
dlelg. From eUeo) (§ 96. 
10), fut. Bilriaco, aor. ei'h^aa, 
perf. pass, ei'^juat. — " Eolrj^ 
TO (§96. 19, and 80. N. 2) 
= pluperf. pass. 3 pers. 
sing. si'hjTo. 

s't/uaQ/uat see ME IP ft. 

Bijul (ESI) am, imperf. -^p, fut. 
BQo^at : 

Pres. Indie. S. bIj-U, Big 
or b'!, IutL (v), p. ia/uev, i- 
are, bIgL (v), D. ^otov. 
^ Subj. S^ h r^g, ^^, P. 
(bjWf j^, riiB, (bat (j^), D. '^Toy. 

Opt. 8. Bhiv, Bi'ijg, Birj^ P. 
Bh]iuBp^ BYrjTB^ Bi'ijaap or bIbv, 
D. bI'j]TOP, Bir\Tr}v. 

Imperat. S. Ta/^t and f'ao, 
f'arw, P. IVre, iaiMaav or 
f'aroii/, D. ecTToi', sgtwv. 
Infin. f^i'Oft ^0 6e. 
Part, lop^ ovaa, op, gen. 
hpwg. 



134 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Imperf. S. riv and '^, r/g 
and '^(jda, ri and -^j^, P. rnusi^, 
i^re and i^crre, i^aav^ D. '^Toy 
and '^cfTOj^, r]T?y?^ and riaTrjv. 

Fut. Indie. S. eao/uai^^eari^ 
^sasTav commonly eorra^, P. 
tdOfjiBda^ ecrsGOs, eaovzat^ D. 
ido^eOov^ eaeadov. 

In fin. saeuOaL. 

Part. sad/j^Bvog, ?/, ov. 
The imperfect mid. riiu7]v is 
not very rare. — Dia^lects. 
Indie. Doric e/u/ul for Bi/ui. 
Homeric icrcrl for eJg. Do- 
ric ^^t/ for t(TTi and f^o"/. 
Hom. and Ion. et{j,ev, Doric 
eifiig. Dor. and Ion. saav 
(like Tideaat^) for £tO"^. Subj. 
uncontracted £w and sI'm, 
srig and el'j^g, &c. (§ 117. N. 
4). Opt. iW^S £0*^, <fcc. 

like (piUoi^i. Infin. Hom. 
^fifisvai and s/uevai^ and 6/^- 
^j^ and ^'/^ey, Doric ^/^ej^ 
and ^/weg. Part, uneontract- 
ed t(hv, eovcra^ lov^ &e. used 
by the old writers. — Im- 
perf. old forms 1 pers. 
sing, ea and ^a and bov and 
^daxov, 2 pers. sing, sag and 
sr](j6Gc, 3 pers. sing. e<//^ and 
n^Tjv and lye^ and ^(^^cs and 
Doric '»^^, 3 pers. plur. ecrav 
and eaaav — 'Ht(o= 3 pers. 
sing, imperat. sgto). 
eif^v (t'(^ and si'(x), § 96. 18) ^o, 
shall go, imperf. f^sLv ; fut. 
(Horn,) ei'aofiaL, aor. e^ffcc- 
^r]v : 

Pres. Indie. S. eF/zt, £?g 
or e^, £^0"^ (^), P, i;<*«J^, i're, I'a- 
at (^), D. ^'t^o?'. 



Opt. ^'ot^^ or iolr]v {^ 87. 

N. 2), (fee. 

Imperat. S. i'^t (in com- 
position £l), i'TOt), P. he, i'TW- 

Oroc)^ or ^(^^TWJ^, D. i'TOV^ i'jtjJV. 

Infin. ieVftfc (as if from 
i'j]iuv^ whence mid. I'efiav). 
Hom. i'fiBv and i'fievat^. 

Part. i(ov, iovcra, lov^ gen. 
lovTog. 

Imperf. S. r^^i^v and '^jia 
and ]}«, rfet^ and fieiada, 
jjst^ and ]i/'£^>^, P. rlei^ev and 
Tifiev^ r^eiTS and r^^e, rjeaav, 
— Hom. 1 sing, ri'iov, 3 sing, 
r^ie and f^s and i'e, 1 plur. 
jio/uev, 3 plur. ^iaaj' and 
r^aav and i'craj^, 3 dual i'T7]v. 
EIllJl or £"7^2 say, used only 
in 2 aor. einov^ etnoj, eXnoi'iit^ 
sln^, "eineXv, Bln(bv^ 1 aor. 
sina (^5> 104. N. 1), imperat. 
£?7roy, infin. elnai^ part. £t- 
inrag. From 'PER comes 
1 perf. sYqijKa (§ 76. N. 1), 
perf. pass. eYgri^av^ aor. 
pass. tQQrfirjv and e^giOijv, 
also elQrfiriv and slqbOtjv^ 3 
fut. slqriaofjiav. From ei'^oj 
(E-PJZ, § 96. 18) comes 2 
fut. ^^£w ^^co — From eWw 
(§ 96. 14) comes imperat. 
(poet-) ^(J7i€Ts — 'Epvircco or 
avin&i (bv snw^ belongs to 
the Homeric language. A\' 
so sviGTiM (ev vanuj, § 96. 14 
and 16), 2 aor. svtajtov, 
ivlancx), infin. evicrnelv^ fut. 
evlipM (as from eviitoS) and 
kv^unriGii) (§ 96. 10). 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



135 



e^yi^vfii or etoyo) old e^/o) and 
Uoyif} inclose^ aor. ei(^^a and 
£^|«, fut. el^^o), perf. pass. 
^BSQy^ai and eqy^av, 3 plur. 
ee^jaTOf^and %;^6cTat(Hom.). 

ei'^G^ see Einsi. 

sVcod-a sec ^'<^ti>. 

ilavvcx) rarely eXaw drive, 1 
perf. fXTJAajia, 1 fut. eldcro) 
and £/lw (§ 102. N. 1), aor. 
IjA^o-a, perf. pass, elrikafxav 
later or^«^ aor- pass, ^^(i- 
•^^/J' later crS-tjv. — 'Eh]ldda- 
10 (as from eMdi^^ = p]u- 
perf. pass. 3 pers. plur. elri- 
lavTO. 

EAETQR and EATS SI see 

sItvoj cause to hope, slTto^av I 
hope, 2 perf. eolna as pre- 
sent, / hope, 2 'pluperf. 
i^lnsiv as imperfect, I 
hoped. For the augment 
see § 80. N. 2. 

^EAIl and -E-^i^ see af^ew and 

ENErKSl see (p^^w. 

ENEQSl or ENOQR, 2 perf. 
£i^?^?/oi9-a (§ SI.) floated, lay, 
sat. 

ivslKoj and EJVEKSl see ^^^w. 

ivivto) see Einsi. 

ivlTtra) and ividGO) [ENITIR.) 
chide, 2 aor. IvBvXnov (as 
from ^i^ei^/TTw, § 96. N. 1) 
and rjvlnaTtov (as from i^^- 
TrdTTw). 

ivlcTTta) and lvvbtccx) sec Elllft. 

yvv^L (ESI, § 96. 9) 7??/^ 07?, 
clothe, 1 fut. fW and eaaw 
(§102.N.3), laor.eWand 
lora«, perf. pass. f^(/«t and 



?(7^at, pluperf. pass, fa^^yj' 
and esa/nrji^, 1 aor. pass. £- 
od^Tjv, 1 aor. mid. keaa(x.^i]v. 
It is used only by the po- 
ets. In prose only CcficpUv' 
vv^iv, which see. 

i6h]To see el'lla). 

inavgLCTKOfxao (^anl ATPSl) and 
eTtuvQsix) enjoy, 2 aor- (epic) 
inavgov, IrtavqM, in fin. inaV' 
Qslv, fut. mid. enccvqriaouav, 
2 aor. mid. ^7i^vo6jU?yj/, infin. 
inavQscrd'at and inavgaad-ao 
(§ 85. N. 2). 

eniuTafxai (^nl tara^ai ?) i^Tl- 
der stand, imperf. riJiiaTd- 
/tiTjv, aor. pass. TjniaTrid'rjv 
and enLOfTTid-r^v, fut. 67r^crT?]- 

£"77/2 see EinSl. 

ano) am occupied with, sata- 
go, imperf. elnov, 2 aor. 
(from ^EnSl; compare fe 
CFvg, 8 Lat. se, -^nd sub, -^niQ 
super, SEQUOR eno^at) e- 
anov (for eusnov), an^b^dTtslv, 
07i(x)i^. Mid. BTio^av follow, 
imperf. eln6^i]v, fut. eipo^uai., 
2 aor. i(T7i6ia]v, imperat. 
(Hom.) crneo aitsTo for cr7ro£f; 
the forms 2 aor. mid. subj. 
eanco/LKxv, opt. sanolinrjv, k- 
anea&aL, kijnofxsvog, are re- 
ferred to § 96. 14. 

^g6L(x) poetic egauai (like tara- 
/t<a^) Hove, am in love, aor. 
ijg&a&rjp poet. rigoLG&i-iriv fell 
in love. Pass, igdo/nav am 
loved. 

EPrSl and egd(x) see (>^Jco. 

egelnto demolish, throw down, 
igelipoj^ irigei^ipa, 2 perf. igi\gi' 



136 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



TToc, 2 aor. rioinov, pluperf. 

pass, egeoimo (§ 81- N-), 

aor. mid. riQsupd/LiTjv. 
iQLdatrcj {EFIJIly § 96. 7) 

quarrel, aor. mid. infin. 

BQidriaaa&ai (^ 96. 10). 
EPOMAI ask, 2 aor. mid. 

riQOfirjv, sQm^ai, e^olfiTjv^ igovj 

fiav (§ 96. 10). 

^g^M {EPR, § 96. 6) go, go to 
destruction, fut. , e^^TJaw 
(§ 96. 10), aor. eoQTjcra — 
""Egas (in composition dno- 
egas caused to go, hurried 
away, Horn.) is 3 sing. 1 
aor. act. (§ 104. N. 4). 

egvyydvM and tqevyo^ai i^EPT- 
rsi, § 96. 18 and 7) eruc- 
tate, 2 aor. ^^gvyov, 

igv&ait^o) {EPTQIl, ibid.) 
make red, fut. igvd-riao) 
(§ 96. 10), perf. 7igvd-i]xa, 
From egsv&oj come egsvao), 
TiQsvaa. 

tgvKoj impede, 2 aor. igvxaxov 
(as if from igvadxtx)), infin. 
Hom. sgvxaicesiv, 

igico or siguoj draw, fut. igvcrco 
(short v), perf. pass, ei'gv- 
fjiai, aor. mid. egv(j6L^i]v. 
From sXgv^i (not used) 
comes the epic infinitive 
slg{)fxevai for elgvvai (like 
devKvvvai)^ pass- infin. egv- 
(T&a(^ or 8igv(T&ai, imperf. 3 
pers. sing, egvro or sl'gvTo. 

eg/o/uai go, come, imperf. '^^- 
X6^u7]v, 2 perf. (from EAT. 
011) ilr^lv&a Hom. eilijloV' 
S^a, 2 aor. rilv&ov syncop. 

^Id-Biv, il&^v, fut. mid. 



(from EAST en) iXe^ao^ 
luccv. — The Homeric sllri- 
lovd-^ev = siXTjXoMafiep or 
ariUd-a^Bv (§ 91. N. 2). 

l(Tx}i]tievog'dr\i[ r^ud-tj^hog cloth- 
ed, a perf. pass. part, as if 
from E2QER. 

ia&lM poetic sa&M and edtiteat, 
perf. idr\doxa (§ 98. N. 2), 
2 perf. edrjda, pass, edofiai, 
as future active, I shall eat, 
perf. pass. Idr^dsafiav Hom, 
adrido/uav, aor. pass. r:ds- 
aS-Tjv, 2 aor. (from fPAPJl) 
ecpayov. — Hom. infin- with- 
out the connecting vowel 
ed/usvaL = adsiv. 

Unix) see EinSl. 

svotds see di^d&voj, 

evdvJiu compos. yMSsvdcx) sleep, 
imperf. Tia&T^vdov and ?««- 
S-evdov and ixddsvdov (<^ 82. 
N. 1), fut. evdriaoj and iicc- 
S-evdi^iao) (§ 96. 10). 

s^gtaxoj (ETPJl, § 96. S)find, 
perf. £%3^a (§ 96. 10), fut. 
£i3^7]cra>, 2 aor. f^^oj^, perf. 
pass. £vgi]uai, aor- pass. £i5- 
^e^Ty^ (§ 95. N. 2), 2 aor. 
mid. evgoiirjv Alexandrian 
Bvg(ip]v (§ 85. N. 2). 

£/«9^oj hate, pass, t'/xfccvoiiav \\\ 
compos, anexd^avofxai (^ 96- 
7), perf. pass, unrixd-ri^avy 
fut. d^ns'/O^riGo^aL^ 2 aor- 
mid. uni]x^^M'^, ^x^^^^V'^' 

£/w Aaye, 1 fut. £|w (with the 
rough breathing, ^ 14. N. 
5), 2 aor. (from -S-E-Xii ; 
compare eVrw) sa/op^ subj. 
o-;^c5, opt. or;^o/??^ (§ 87. N- 
2), irnperat. (from 2XH. 
MI, § 117. N. 10) axk,\Vi' 



ANOMALOUS VERBS- 



137 



fin- o'/etJ', part. o-;^coj^, 2 aor. pliiperf. ixctd-riUTjv or >««- 

mid. e(Tx6iiir]v^ o^;^o)a«^, crxoU i^-t],*/?/^ (<§ 82. N. 1), £;«(ii^?yoro, 

ftr]v, crx^v, (jyjud'av^ ayofxe- ixd&r^TO or x«i^7](7to, &,c. 

yog, "/or/fei (^ 96. 14 and 16) ecovrav see t?//^^. 

take hold of, has perf. ^ 

i'a^>/.« (§ 96. 10), fut. az^. .^ ^. c„„,;3,ted ^s ^^ 

<r<«, perf. pass. ; W«S aor. ^^ ^^ j jg ^^ ^^ j'^. 

pass. -^^*jj 95. N. 2). '^^^ ^, ^^^ ,. ^, ^^_ 

^oj, § 96. 19) come the ^, '^^^ >, j!^^^ 

Homeric o^a,.« (§ 81. N.), ^ j^ , 

and pluperr pass. 3 pers. ^^^ ^^ ^^^, ^^ j,,/^^ 
pl„r. a,;r«to (o)/.To) in com- ^^, ; ^zEYr.'l, ZYrA, 
position, .^a,;r«ro were bolt- <^ qq. , ^ ^nd 9) yo/te, fut. 

feulw, aor. e'Qev^a^ perf. 
pass. e'Qevyixav, 1 aor. pass- 
hX^Bvx^i]v^ 2 aor. pass, fijv- 

^coi^j/ij^ut (ZO/2, § 96. 9) gird, 
e'QojKa, ^w(7w, s'Qwaa, perf. 
pass. et,(x)(T^ai (§ 107- N- !)• 

77. 



ecZ. 



6J//ft) (eTTw, ^ 96. 15) cook, boil, 
fut. (from eipsio) hipr^uo), aor. 

ESI am, see etit^/. 
'jE*/! send, see t^/.t^^. 
'£'i2 pwi on, see ewv^iv. 
^ESl, I place, set, cause to sit, 
1 aor. sTua^ fut. mid- elao^av^ 



aor. mid. 6l(j(^.ui]v. Perf. ^,w«t see 'J?/2 / place- 
mid- r/f^oct as present, / si7, ^1^1= cprjal, imperf. 'r\v ri^ in 
pluperf. mid. ^^rjv as im- the formulas riv d' tyco ^af^i 
perfect, / sat : I, -^ d' og said he- 

Indie. S. rjuat^, Tjo-at, rJTaf- rijuvo) bend down, fut. rjiuvo-o]^ 

or Ijcrroet, p. v^usd-a^ fior&s, aor. 7]/if(ja. — Homer has 



Imperat. S. V^, ^(t^co, 
p. TjOTuZ-e, i\(jd-o)(Tav^ D. ^- 

In fin. r^ad-av. 
Part. T],a6j^o?. 
Phiperf. V'y^i '^1^^? ^^^^> 

Tl/US&a, r^(T&6, ^I'TO, (fee. 

The compound J«^t>?;//ai(;«a- 
rd fjattfc) has subj. xd&ojuai^, 
ri, 7]Tai^ &c. opt. xad-oliin]v, 
OLO, ovTo, &/C. imperat. J«(i- 
^^0-0 (later xdii^ou), infin. 
Ttad'riad'aVy part. 3ca&T\fzepo;, 

12* 



perf. V7T6UVriUl}X6 (^710 £,(/J^7J- 

|Wij;<£) for t-Trrj^wvxe (^ 81. N-). 

e. 

GANSl see ^^^j;^w. 

dtjio/uai. admire, 1 aor. mid. 
iOijadiji^v, \nfin. Or^^aaaOao 
Dor. duaaaOai. From ^^yeo- 
^/a^ (§ 96. 18 and 10), im- 
perf. iOiisdfiiTjv, aor. mid. 
ldrp](jijLU)p'^ fut. 6i]i^&0!.mb. 

6dnTUi(0A(I^n, § 96. 2), OdipoK, 
Waipa, perf pass- TsdajUfxad^ 
2 aor. pass. ^i(ig)^^. 



138 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



OA0SI, 2 perf. TeOrjna (con- 
trary to ^ 14. 3) as present, 
/ am astonished, 2 aor. 

SAJl suckle, suck, pres. mid. 
infin. Qr^aOai for Oaudai, 1 
aor. mid. i0r]Gdiii7]v, dr^cra^ 
udav, 

Oslo) see edeXo), 

deqo^ai warm myself, fut. 
6^Quo{Aav (^ 102. N. 2), 2 
aor. pass. iOegrjy, subj. 
Horn. Oegm, 

6e(A) run, 1 fut. mid. (from 
0ETS1) devdo/uai Doric Osv- 
Cfov^av (^ 114. N. 1). 

QESl put, see Ti6i]fii^. 

drjeo^oiL see Odofxai. 

Or^javvj ( 0/ri?., ^ 96. 7) ^02^cA, 
tango, fut. Oi^o^av^ 2 aor. 

^y7Jor;<a>(0^iV^/2, QNAR, ^ 96. 
17 and 8) tZi'e, 1 perf. teOvt]^ 
Jfa, 2 perf. redvaa (^ 91. N. 
2), 2 aor. e&avov, 2 fut. mid. 
davov^ai. From TEQNH- 
KSl (^96. 11), fut. T£^^^|w, 

GOPSl see dgcDaxa), 
SPEflifL see Tgecpoj. 
GPEXn see t^£;^w. 
^^TtTu) (0Pr^i2) crumble, 2 

aor. pass. iTQvcprjv, 
6g(haxu) {QOPfl, ^ 96. 17 and 

8) Zeap, spring, 2 aor. 

sOoQov, 2 fut. mid. dogio^a^ 

dogov/Liai^. 
QT^Jl see TTucpco, 
Ovo) (- -) sacrifice, dvcroj (- -), 

TeOvKa^ eOvaa, 1 aor. pass. 

fTj^^j/ (---)j see § 95. N. 

2, and ^ 14. N. 3. 



J. 

iJ^uw locate, Idgvaw, ^dgv/ua^^ 
1 aor. pass. IdgvOrjv and 
(from 'I^PTNSl, § 96. 5) 
ldgvvOi]v, 

IJIl see £'/^/2. 

t'C^^ compound icaOll^M seat, sit^ 
fut. ;<«(9to)(^102.N. l),aor. 
ixdOcaa (^ 82. N. 1), fut. 
mid. TUxdi'QriCO/uai^ (^ 96. 10). 

2rjfit. and ^e'o) (ESI, \ 96. 1) 
send, imperf. ^p and ^ovi/ 
(Homer has leiv), 1 perf. 
^Fxa, 1 fut. riaa) (Homer has 
also eW, in composition 
div£(fu))^ 1 aor. r^xa (^ 104. 
N. 2) Horn. ev^« (§ 80. N. 
3) and fW (in compos. 
aveaa), 2 aor. ^y, %, ^, 
£,wej^ or el/usv, tts or cFtp, 
e'ora?/ or elaav, subj. w, opt. 
e'irjv, imperat. tg (^ 117. N. 
10), infin. er^/oc*, part, ft?, 
perf. pass. eF^at, 1 aor. 
pass. e6i]v and eWrjv, 2 aor. 
mid. 6/^7/1^, ^t/«^, e^/UTiv eao, 
or ou, tadav, efxevog, — ^' Ev)V' 
lav compound dccpeojvTav = 
perf. pass. 3 plur. bIvtuv^ 
see ^96. 19, and ^80. N. 3. 
Ixveofiav and tyc^cvoj and t^w 
(^ 96. 5 and 10 and 7) come^ 
perf. mid. f/iua^, fut. l^ofiav, 
2 aor. U6fn]v. — For the 1 
aor. act. l^ov see ^ 85. N. 2. 
iXauTio^ai rare lloLo^av (^ 96. 
8) propitiate, fut. llaao^m, 
aor. UoiadiLLrjv, From Udw, 
E?/^^, come, imperat. t^^^^ 
and t'Aa^t ^e gracious, pres, 
mid. Ua^av, 1 perf. subj. 
Ui^;«w, opt. tl7]icoLfiv, 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



139 



?7rra,a«^ [nTAfi, § 96. 1), 2 
aor. (from 'inTHMI) en^ 
irjv, fut. nTriao/Liav, 2 aor. 
mid. ImijL^riv* synonymous 
"with neTO^av, 

2(jTi]fii [ZTJfl, § 96. 1) place, 
1 perf. eW?/xa stand, 1 plu- 
perf. harr^^ievv or e^oTTJxetv 
a£?a5 standing, 2 perf. £- 
azaa (^ 91. N. 2), fut. o-ttjo-w, 
1 aor. eaciicra, 2 aor. e(jTi]Vy 
perf. pass, aatafnav, 1 aor. 
pass. 6o-T(^^^^ (^ 95. N. 2). 

ia/v80jLiat see '^Jtca/vbOfiai, 
I'ax^ see e;^w. 
<''w see ^tAf' g-o. 

KA^Sl see aaiwiiav, 
icaOit^ofjao see e'Qoficcv, 
xaOsvdix} see et't^ta. 
x(jc6f]^uai^ see '£'i2 i place. 
y.aOi'Qo) see ttw. 

^alvufiav surpass, perf. pass, 
(from KAJfl^ zeKadfiai^dLud 

iiotlo) and jcaw (- -) Ji^r^z, fut. 
(from KATSl) Tcavacx), aor. 
fjfauaoc old fJ^T/ot and e^Bia 
and £>«^« (§ 104. N. l),perf. 
pass, icexavfiai., 1 aor. pass. 
izavdi]v^ 2 aor. pass, e^cci?/^' 

mxUc^ [KAASl, § 96. 10) call, 
perf. (from J^^-4i2, ^ 98. 
17) ^exh]xa, fut. ;faA£0"w, 
xaAo), aor. ^^^dAeaa, perf. 
pass. iiii<lr]iuaL, Opt. ;<£;«A7J- 
/«?;>' (§ 91. 2), aor. pass. 

xdc^pio [KAMSl, § 96. 5) labor, 
am weary, perf. (from 



KMASl, § 96. 17), y^eicfi7]xcc^ 
2 aor. ena^ov, 2 fut mid. 

^fftuccsM^g see uyvv^i. 

TcsiiLiat^ (xeioj or ^ew, ^ 96. 18 
and § 117.) Ionic y>io^aif 
lie, recline, fut. y^eiaofiuv : 

Indie. S. xeliuai^, xeXuav^ 
-aeXTav^ P, xetfAsOa, xeXcrOs^ 
xslvrat, D. Tisi^eOov^ yel- 
gOov, 

Subj. yi(x)^ai^ vAy]^ xe7]Toci^^ 
&c. 

Opt. XSOljLtTjV, X80L0, <fec. 

Infin. y^sTcrdai, 
Part. Ttslfievog, ?/, ov, 
I m perf. eyei^u^jv, eyeiuo, 
eyeiTo^ &lc, 

Kblo^av command, fut. yelriao^ 
fiaL (^ 96. 10), 1 aor. ey^s- 
Xi]a(!cfirjv, 2 aor. Horn, ^^s- 
y,l6fxi]v (for iyexelourji^, §78. 
N. 2, and § 26. 1). 

KevTSix) prick, regular. From 
KENTn. comes 1 aor. in- 
fin. yevaai = xevir^aat,. 

aeq^vvv^i and ^£Q(^oi (§ 96. 9) 
mix, perf. yeyqaxa (by syn- 
cope), fut. yegacroj, aor. 
ixegaaa, perf. pass, xexga- 
fiai also xexsgaa/uac, aor. 
pass, ixgadrjv and exe^d- 
(7^;yj/ — I] om. ;<^rjo-o(t = aor. 
infin. xeguauL. 

xsgdali'ix) gain, fut. ysgdavib 
and (from KEPJAJl) xsg^ 
dijcTix), perf. xexlgd)]xa and 
«;<«, aor. £>« f 4^(5 //ora and t'jfe'^- 
^r/j^oe, infin. xegdavav. 

ysof see xtluuv. 

xi\di.) (KAJJl, §96. 18) frow- 
6/t% iT.r, 2 perf. xfx;^Ju, am 
troubled, anxious, lul. 



140 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



(from KEKJJESl) xBxadi^. 

Qo^av, 1 aor. mid. imperat. 

(from KHJEJl) xridsGai. 
7tiKlri(j7C(x) i^KAASl, ^ 96. 1 and 

17 and 8)= xaleu). 
KigvrjfiL and xlqv&m [xeQ6.cx}^ 

§ 96. 16 and 6) = ^eq6.V' 

xi^X^voj and xL/ico [KIXSl, ^ 96. 
7 and 10) reach,, find, fut. 
xvxricTOi), 2 aor. sjcixov, 1 aor. 
mid. e7a/i]a(jciii7]v. From xU 
XTj^v (§ 117.), subj. TivxEiia 
(§ 117. N. 4), opt. xixeiixi]v, 
infin. Hom. xixri^svccv, 2 
aor. sxi/r]v, pres. mid. part. 

xlxgyfii {XQ(^M, § 96. 1) lend, 
the rest from XQ^^^- 

xloj go, imperf. exiov. 

ftXaQco (KAArsi, § 96. 3) 
clang,2 ^or.exlayov. From 
KAArrSl (§ 96. 6), 2 perf. 
Tisxlayya, fut. 7i'k6Lyt,b), aor. 
Ulayia. From KAHrSl 
(§ 96. 18), 2 perf. ;^£;^V/«- 
From xeMiyo) (^ 96. 11), 
part, xexlr^jaiv. 

xlalo) and >^^(iw (- -), aor. (from 
KAAYSl)sxlavaa, fut. mid. 
xlavao/Liav or xXavaovfiao 
(§ 114. N. 1). Fut. also 
xlairiuo) or >(^a7Jo-a> (^ 96. 
10). 

xloLM break, xldaoj, xexlau^ai, 
ixl(x(j6?]v. From KAHMI, 
2 aor. part, xldg in compo- 
sit. dnoxldg. 

xlvoj hear, 2 aor. (from KAT- 
MI) imperat. xXvOi' and 
xixlvdi^ 2 aor. mid, part, xlv^ 
fisvog famous, celebrated, 

KM A SI see xdf^vo). 



xogivvvjut. {KOPESl, § 96. 9) 
satiate, perf. xexogrixa, fut. 
;co^^orw Hom. «o^^w (§ 102. 
N. 1), perf. pass. Ion. xsxd- 
gi]iuav Attic xexogecTfxav^ \ 
aor. pass. ixogicrOr^y (<5^ 109. 
N. 2). 

;(od^w {KPArSl, § 96. 3) cry, 
2 perf. xixgaya, fut. xod|w, 
2 aor. sxgayov. For xexga^ 
xOi &c. see § 91. N. 2. 

xgs/udvvviUL (^xgs/iidoi), <^ 96. 9) 
hang, suspend, fut. J«^e- 
^ao-w, ;f^£,aw (§ 102. N. 1), 
aor. ixgs/uaaa, ixgs/udadrjv, 

1 fut. mid. xge^ur^aofiav. 
From KPEMHMI, pres. 
mid. xg^^a^av, subj. xgi/uto- 
fiai, opt. xgsfiaifjirjv and J^^e- 
lbLoiu7]v. Kgrifivrj fit gives pass. 
xgrifivrif/aLy imperf. Ixgrj^ivd- 

IIT]V, 

xxdofiai possess, perf. xixTJ]- 
ficxi^, subj. xixTojfiai^, opt. 
xexxriuTjv (§91. 2 and N. 1). 

XTsivo) {KTElVfl, KTANn, 
§ 96. 18 and 19) MZ, 1 
perf. £;«Taxa (§ 98. N. 1), 

2 perf. exTova, 2 fut. J^rei^w 
(Homer has xravio)), 1 aor. 
exTSiva, 2 aor. sxravov. 
From KTHMI,2 aor. exxav 

(§ 117. N. 9), 3«T©, XTall]V, 

Hom. infin. xTd^ievav, part. 

J^rdg, 2 aor. mid. exjdfirjv, 

KTONESl (§ 96. 13.), 1 

perf. £XT6p7]xa, 
xiifievog built, 2 aor. mid* 

part, from KTIMI=^ Jfr/w. 
;«Ti;7r£w {KTTnSl, § 96. 10) 

make noise, ixTvnrixa, &c. 

2 aor. sxTvnov, 
xvvm {KTSl, ^ 96. 5 and 10) 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



141 



kiss, fut xvaoj (v. -), aor. 
^xvcra. Ugoaxvveo) is gene- 
rally regular. 
>fuft» or xveto or y^vicrxa) (^ 96. 
8) conceive', be pregnant, 
xvr^ao), exvjjaa, 1 aor. mid. 
ixvi](Tdu7]v and (poetic) ixv^ 

U(jCfJ,7]V. 

A. 

AABR see la^^avoo. 

lay'/<^vo) [AAXSl, § 96. 7) oh- 
tain, receive by lot, perf. 
€i'h]Z^ and (from AEFXJl 
or AOrXSl, § 96. 19) U- 
^o//a, 2 aor. e>ift;/ov, fut. 
mid. (from AHXn, § 96. 

18) lrfioiJ.ai Ionic Id^Ofiai. 

AAKfl see ^ao-^^w. 

la/^i^dvoj [AABn, AHBR, 
^ 96. 7 and 18) receive, 
perf. sl'h]q)a, 2 aor. ela^ov^ 
perf. pass, el'lrj^^av^ aor. 
pass, ilricpdrjv, 1 fut. mid. 
Irn/jofioiL. The lonians have 
perf, pass. Ulaiiixai^ and 
(from AAMBP) fut. Uai/^o- 
/W(u, aor. ilu(i(pdi]v ; also 
perf. act. leldSiy/.a (^ 96. 
10). 

lavddvo) {AAOn, lifiix), ibid.) 
tr^ /iz(^, 2 perf. UhiOa, fut. 
Xrjaw, 2 aor. eladov, perf. 
mid. UhjUi^iai Horn. AtAa- 
o-,t/at, fut. mid. h\(Joimi. 

lduKbi{AAK<l, § 96. 14) o-flJ- 
5/6, 2 |)erf. Ulaxa Ion. ^^- 
A?/xa, 2 aor. elaxov, 1 aor. 
(§ 96. 10) ildxi](Ta, fut. mid. 

AAXfl see lay/avcx). 

AEFXJl see A«^//d:j/w. 

^e^^ 5Gy, perf. pass. Uleyi^im, 



aor. eUxOrjv. Aiyo), I col- 
lect, perf. Biloxoi^ Sileyiuat,, 
2 aor. iUyr]v. — Hom. 2 aor. 
mid. eUyiui]v, Uxto (^ 92. 
N.). 

AHBSl see la/u^uvoj. 

Xrfia) see luvOdpo). 

hjKeo) Ionic =A(/o-;fw. 

AHXJl see A«^^;^c<;/^w. 

lotto wash, bathe, XoiaM^ eXovcra: 
Pres. Aouw, Aouetc, ^oi;£f, 

P. )yOV<il6V, lovTS, lovUt^, 

Imperf. ^^low^elovg^lXov, 
iXovuev, ilovie, 

Pres. mid. lov^ai^^ 'lo^ur^, 
XovTai, P. lovueOa^ Xovade, 
lovvjai. 

Imperf. mid. llovfxrjv, 
ilovTO, P. tlovixeOa, elovaOs, 
ilovvTO. 

Infin. mid. XovaOai, 
From I6(x) comes imperf. 
eIoov (Horn.). From Aoe'w, 
aor. infin, loeuciav, part. 
Xoiaaag. 
Xtuco loose, XvGCx)^ slvaa, XeXvxoc^ 
Xslv/iiai^ elv6i]v (short v)» 
See § 95. N. 2, and § 91. 
2. From ATMI, 2 aor. 
eU^uT]v, IvTo, as passive. 

M. 

MAQSl see /aapOdvo). 

/LfaLudu) = fido). 

(.latvn) madden, 2 perf. /usfir^va, 
aor. efii^va, pres. mid. /uai- 
voiiai am mad, 2 aor. pass. 
iijdt'ijr, 2 fut. imd.lttocrovuai. 

/iialouixi ((ida))feel, touch, han- 
dle, fut. udaouaL, aor. iuaa- 
aduTjif (Horn.). 

MAKR see /nrjxdouai. 

^(xrOdpu) (MAOJl, § 96. 7) 



142 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



learn, perf. fisfidOr^xa (^ 96. 
10), 2 aor. sfzaOop, fut. mid. 
fxaQr^ao^ai. — For /uaOev/Liav 
see § 114. N. 2. 
fiaQva/buxL fight, like IdTafiav : 
opt. }ia^voi^rjp for luagvixC* 

fidoTTTix) take hold of, seize, 
fidgipM, s^uagipa, 2 aor. Horn. 
fie/uagrcov and sfianov, 2 perf. 
ILte/LiaQTta. 

fiaxofiat combat, fight ; from 
fiaxBO^ai, (utliiccxricro/iiac and 
^axs(Joij.ai and fxaxov^av 
(§ 114. N. 2), aor. e.uaxsadc- 
l^^]^, perf. /us/ud/i^iuai. 

/wdw, 2 perf. iWe^acfoc as present, 
jfi^eZ (X strong impulse, 
plur. /uijua/Lisv^ fis/uaTB, fis- 
fidacrv, dual fAs^cnov^ plu- 
perf. plur. /UE/uaaav, part. 
fieiuacbg: see § 91. N. 2. 
Mid. fK^ofiai ^(hy.ai, desire, 
imperat. /wcoeo (as if from 
/^(ow, § 116. N. 4), infin. 

fzsdvGTcoj (^/Lisdvo) am intoxica- 
ted, § 96. 8) intoxicate, 
make drunk, aor. efxedvcra. 

^BlQo^av [MEIPfL, MEPSl, 
MOPSl, § 96. 18 and 19) 
share, receive a share, 2 
perf. sfifzoga (§ 79. N.), 2 
aor. B^^oQov, perf. pass. 
el^aqxau (§ 76. N. 1) it is 
fated, part. sl/Liag^uevog. 

fihllM am about to, fut. ^eXATJaw 
(§ 96. 10), aor. e^aelhjaa. 

fiiilix) am a concern to any one, 
^elriao), ijLislT^aa, 2 perf. 
(Horn.) fAi^i]la, perf. pass. 
fi^a^lsTav (§ 26. N.) for^ae- 



^weVw remain, 2 fut. //f j^w, aor. 
efxsvva, perf (§ 96. 10) /tie- 
lusvTjyca. — Mi/uova = fxi^aa 
from />ta:o>, which see. 

fn]x6co,uaL {MAKSl, MHK/1, 
§ 96. 18 and 10) bleat, 2 
perf. iii^iui]xa, 2 aor. sinajcov. 
From fxsiiriy.o) (§ 96. 11) 
comes imperf. ifii/u7]xov, 

^lyvv^i and filcryijj (MIFSl, 
(§ 96. 9 and 14) mixyfit^M, 
s/UL^u^ /ueuiy/uai, ifilxdi]v^ 2 
aor. pass, i/tilyr^v. 

fivixvi^axM {MNAn, § 96. 1 and 
8) remind, ^vriOM, s^vrjcra^ 
mid, fii'ILtpr\(T}coiuaL, perf. mid. 
^eixvrj^av as present, / re- 
member, recollect, subj. 
/u^invcoiiiat, opt. fie/uvri/Liriv 
(§ 91. 2 and N. 1), aor. 
pass. siLLvri(jdr]V, 3 fut. fi6- 

MO All see /^Acoctjcw. 
fivxdo^uai. (MTKSl, § 96. 10) 

belloio, 2 perf. /ua^uvxcc, 2 

aor. efuvKov. 

TV. 

y«/a> (7V:z//2, § 96. 18) (Zw^eZZ, 
aor. £V«o-a caused to dwell, 
fut. vacTOfxai, aor. tvdiadi^v, 
evaudifirjv^ perf. vevad^ai. 

rdaauj (§ 96. N. 3) p^ic^A: close- 
ly, stuff, va^M, spa^ci, perf. 
pass, vevao^ai, 

ys/iiw distribute, 2 fut. ^f,«(5 
and vsfiricrtx) (96. 10), 1 aor. 
spsfyfia^ perf. vspeiurjxa, vs- 
vi^Tj^av, aor. pass. sps/nriOrjP 
and £^7^1/ (§ 95. N. 2). 

j^^o^ swim, aor. (from iVJ?'^/2) 
BPevaa, perf. vipevxa, fut. 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



143 



vBvcrofiai^ and vevaov^av 

(§!14.N. 1). 
vLto) = vlmco. 
vom thinks regular. From 

the simple NOJl^ Ionic ^w- 

crw, spixjcra, verojxa. 
vvcTT&tm (§ 96. N. 3) feel 

sleepy, vvuxu^ix) and o-w, 

ivvdja^oL and o^a. 

0. 

6'?w (Oz/i2, § 96. 4) emit an 
odor, smell, 2 perf. od(x)da 
as present, fiit. oc^orw Ionic 
OL^iaa) (§ 96. 10), aor. w^z/aa. 

oXyvvfti or oty&> (^ 96. 9) open, 
imperf. %oj/ (§ 80. N. 3), 

1 perf. f'w^? 2 perf. fo)/*^ as 
present, stand open, fut. 
ot'?w, aor. £q)|a, in fin. olla^. 
The compound OLvoiyixi has 
aor. rivoi^a^ 2 aor, pass. 
rivoiyi]v, both later. 

olc^a see £'/^/2. 

oidalvcx) and otJdj^w = oldeco^ 

ol'ofiav and o?|a(x^ suppose, 
think, imperf. (^o^tjv and 
(i'^jyj^, aor. pass, ihrfiiiv (^01- 
ESI, § 96. 10), fut. mid. 
oiriao^ai. The epic poets 
have oXix) and oto^ (---), oto- 
jWa*, aor. ojil(jOi]v, (hiad/ui^v. 

ol'xo^dv am gone, 1 perf. (from 
OIXESl, § 96. 10 and 19) 
ot'Xi^xa Hom. cu/7/xa, perf. 
pass. 0)xi].uaL, fut. oixr^dof-iav. 

Old) see ovo^av. 

OISl bring, see (joeow. 

blvaddivix) and alvuj (OAI^Qfl, 
§ 96. 7) sZzp, s/zffe, perf. 
(§ 96. 10) (hXladrjxa, fut. 
dliaOijcruj, [ aor. ioUudriaoi^ 

2 aor. &h(fdov. 



hllv^v {OAfl, § 96. 10) (Ze- 
stroy, 2 perf oAojAa, 2 fut. 
6^0), 1 perf. oldjlsica, 1 aor. 
(hleaa, 2 fut. mid. olovinaL, 
2 aor. mid. ^lofji-qv. 

o^vvfjii ( O.Mi2, ^ 96. 9) swear, 
perf. 6i^coao>fa( from OMOfl, 
§ 96, 10), aor. o)^oa«, perf. 
pass. oiLKhfioafiat and /wat', 
aor. pass. ^,u6dt^v, 2 fut mid. 

djuogyvvfXL {OMOPrSl, ibid.) 
ii?i;)e o/, fut. 6/m6^?w, aor. 
mid. ^uoq^aiAi]v, 

dvlv7]fiL (ONASl, § 96. N. 1) 
benefit, ovr^aco, lhvi](Ta, 2 aor. 
mid. (from ONHMI) w^^rj- 
p/?^ and d^WT^j/, opt. oval^riv^ 
infin. ovaadat^. 

ONSIMI [ONOSl), pass, oj/o- 
<wat insult, aor. wj^ocj^t^*' and 
^voaufiriv, fut. oroGOjuaL, 1 
aor. mid. (from Oi\^J2) 

077/2 see the following. 

ogdo) see, imperf. eioQwv (^ 80. 
N. 3) Ionic &Q(x)y, perf. ecd- 
^a;fa, IcbQa/uaL. From EI^fL 
(which see), 2 aor. ddovy 
sidofiijp. From 077w, 2 perf. 
(epic) oTTWTTa, perf. pass. 
^^uoLi^ aor. pass, wcpdr^v, fut. 
mid. bipofjui shall see, aor. 
mid. dipu(u]v (little used). 

o^j/v^wt ( OPu>, ^ 96. 9) rouse, 
excite, 2 perf. o^^a, 1 fut. 
oocrai, 1 aor. (b^aa. Mid. 
oQvvt^mv sometimes o^ftiac 
rarely oQeoiiixL arise, move 
myself, 2 aor. d)^6,</;;i', 3 
sing. iOQSTO and 0)oro ^ 92. 
N.), iniperat.o^croand ooaeo, 
infin. o^^at, part, o^uerog. 



144 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



dacpgaivofiav ( OHfTjPb)^ ^ 96. 7) 

smell, fut. OCT cpQriuofAai (^ 96. 

10), 2 aor. mid. ^crcpoo^riv 

rarely (acrcpoaiirjv (^ 85. N. 

2), 1 aor. mid. (later) d)- 

acpgrjadiin^v. 
OTugioi) mingo, imperf. hvgovv 

(^ 80. N. 2), ovQTiaoiiiai, 
odrdoi) wovnd, regular. From 

OTTHMr, 2 aor. oliav 

(^ 117. N. 9), infin. Horn. 

OTuTdc/iievai^, 2 aor. mid. part. 

OTuzdiLisvog as passive. 
ocpBllif) owe money, fut. dq)ev- 

^rjcrw (^ 96. 10), aor. ^Qpsi- 

Xiqaa^ 2 aor. (ocpelov always 

expresses a wish, utinam, 

O that. 
dq)^i^crx(kv(jt) (^00 Aw) incur, 

perf. (b(ph]7(a (^96. 10), fut. 

dcp^cro), 2 aor. ^(p^ov^^fplslv, 

n. 

nAQco see Trda/w. 

nal(x) strike, regular. Fut. 
also Ttav/iaco. 

Ttda/w {nASia, § 96. 14) suf- 
fer, 2 perf. (from HENQo), 
§ 96. 19), TiinovOa, 2 aor. 
^Tcadov, fut. mid. neiao^av 
(§ 12. 4). From nHQw 
(^ 96. 18), 2 perf. ^re'Tr^^^a, 
fut. TTTJcrw, aor. enrjaa, not 
common. — ninoaOs = yre- 
7r6i'(9aTe(§ 91. N. 2). 

nariofiat eat, perf. mid. Tci- 
naufxai, aor. inaadfiijv^ from 

UAix)^ perf. mid. nina^av pos- 
sess,acquire,^0YJriaa6c/ur/v, 

TteiOb) persuade, 2 perf nmoi- 
6a^ i aor. enevaa, 2 aor. 
ImQop (poetic), perf. pass. 



TCBTtBiuficti^ aor. pass, ^ttc/- 
^<9^^, fut. mid. nelaofiav, 
niGEu) gives TTt^TJorw, ^tt/- 
^V^of obeyed, Fut. also 
nsmdr^crix) ' EubniOfiev = 

2 pi u perf. 1 plur. ^nenoU 
Obl^ubv (^91. N. 2). 

tcbX6hx) see nilvrj^v, 

nilto or nilo/uaL am, imperf. 

3 sing. stiIb, sttIbto, for 
£7reAe, ^nilsTO (^ 26. 1), 2 
pers. eVrAeo contr.eTi^eu thou 
art, part. nBginXo/uBvog, int^- 
nlofxBvog, revolving^ ap- 
proaching, 

nJEJVQw see Tidaj^w. 

Tre'^Jw ^ecZo, 2 perf. nsTtogda^ 
2 aor. enaqdov^ fut. Tia^Ji^- 
cro^aa^ (6 96. 10). 

TtigOix) sack, niqaw, enBgaa, 2 
aor. engaOov (by metathe- 
sis). — IJigOai == 2 aor. mid. 
infin. (^92. N.). 

TtBrdrvv/ui. {HETAoj, ^ 96. 9) 
expand, fut. nBjdao,) and 
7r£Tc5 (^ 102. N. 1), aor. 
inhaaoiy perf. pass, nenroi' 
ficii^ (by syncope), aor. ^yra- 

nho^av fly, 2 aor. mid. (syn- 
cop.) ^nT6fxi]v,7iTib^ai,mol' 
f^rjv, TiTiaduL, TCTo^Bvog, fut. 
(^ 96. 10) nBTr^(jo(ioii. See 
also tTTTa^a^. 

IlETo) see ninru). 

TiBvOo^av see nvvddvofKxt^, 

TXBcpvov see ^PENm, 

nriyvv^v later Trrjoro-w (^IJHro), 
nArco, ^ 96. 9 and 18)/:r, 
2 perf. 7T6ni]ya, fut. 7ri]l«, 
aor. £3T?/|a, perf. pass, ttb- 
7ti]y^(xi, 1 aor. ini^zOjjv^ 2 
aor. iTKjcyrjv, 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



145 



nHQR see 7rd:cr;^ft>. 

TilXvriixv and ml^pdio) (neXacx), 
§ 96. 16, 6) cause to ap- 
proach, neli^au), iTrelaaa, 
mid. nilvd^ai approach, 
aor. pass, inlad-i/v, 2 aor. 
mid. (from UAHMI) hnl^^ 

nl^Tikr^Hi later munk^.^ 
{HAAn, § 9(5. 1) fill, fut. 
TT^rjorw, aor. enhjaa, perf. 
pass. Tzenhjafiat, aor. e7rA?j- 
o-ii^y/i/, 2 aor. mid. inlrnm^v , 
opt. nleiixvv (like xfslfii]^), 
imperat. nlriao, part, tt^i]- 
fisvog. — ikT before ?rX is drop- 
ped when in composition 
BjW comes to stand before tt^, 
as taninhj^i not iftnlanhjjuc, 

7tl(jL7iQi](jiv later Tn/HTigda) 
(nPAIl, ibid.) ^wr/i, fut. 
TT^/jo-w, aor. ejigijcra (Hesiod 
has engsae), perf. pass. 
7itnQi]Gfmv^ aor. inQri(7d-i]p, 
— In composition a^-ninqrj' 
fii: compare the preceding. 

nivi^ {nni, § 96. 5) drink, 

2 aor. eniov, ttIoi), imperat. 
nis and (from /i/MJ, ^ 117. 

N. 12) Tlld^L, TtlElV^ TVKOV, 

perf. (from nOJl) nsTiwxa, 
pres. pass, niofiai as future, 
/ shall drink, perf. pass. 
nino^av^ aor. tn6d-rjv^ 2 fut. 
mid. movfxoLi (^ 114. N. 2). 

m7r/(7;<«i (/7//2, ^96. 1, 8) 
cause to drink, nlaai, eniua, 

TimgdcFKix) (nsgdix), ^ 9(). 1, 8, 
and ^ 2(). 1 ) sell, perf ninQa- 
xa, ninoa/nai^^ aor. ^nQditijv, 

3 fut. nsTiQikaoiiiaL shall be 
sold ; all syncopatir^d. 

ni7XTio{nETJi, ^96. I) fall, 2 



aor. eneaov Doric en stop 
(§96. 15), 1 aor. eneaa, perf. 
(from77TOi2, § 96. Hand 
19) TtsTTTOjxa, 2 perf. part. 
TtenTsdjg and ?/c6^ and nemiog, 
2 fut. mid. neoio^av ovfxai 
(§114. N. 2). 

IlAASl see ni^nlrifjiv, 

nUix) sail, perf. (from 
IlAEYJl) ninlevTia^ aor. 
£7TAei;(T«, fut. mid. nlevaO' 
jnoci. Doric nlevaovfiat, perf. 
pass. TTenleva^av^ aor. pass. 
inlsvd&i^v. From ttAoW 
{nAJlMI), 2 aor. fViAoj^, 
part. TiAojg (§ H^- N. 12). 

yrXtjacrw rarely 7rAr]j/i'i)//t {^UAA- 

rsi, UAUrsi, § 96. 3), 2 

perf. ninhiya^ fut. 7rAr]|u;, 
1 aor. enlrit,a, 2 aor. Hom. 
TiBnhjyov, perf. pass, ninlj]' 
y^mi^, 2 aor. pass, inlr^yriv^ 
in compos. mMyrjv. 

nvio) blow, perf. (from 
UNEYfl^ nenvevxa, aor. 
envevija^ ^7TvevGd-i]v^ fut. 
TtvEvGO/uaL Doric aov^ai,. 
From TT^ijw, perf. pass, tt^- 
TiPv/LinL am prudent (in- 
spired), 1 aor. pass. Hom. 
di^-7Tvvvd^r]v\ 2 aor. mid. (as 
from HNYMI) Invviiiiv. 

nOPn, nPOJl, 2 aor. ^Vro^oy 
gave, perf. pass, nenqixnav 
it has been decreed byfate^ 
part. 7T67TQotiti6Pog destined. 

IIP A SI see ni^UTiqi^f^v, 

IIP lA MA I buy, 2 aor. mid. 

iTTQl&Urjl', 7lQiUiif.iOii^ 7Tgial(i/ljV, 

TTQltxao or Tight (§ 117. 5), 
Tigiaalfai^ ngi(kuei>og, 
IlTAJl, see t/TTtt^a^ and 
TTTTJ craw. 



13 



146 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



nrriaao) crouch^ ttttjIoj, enrrj^a, 
'sTTTTj/a. From U TAJl, perf. 
part. 7ie7n7]b)g (^ 100. N.), 
2aor. (as from IJTHMI) 
3 dual }(aTa-nTriTi]v. 

IlTOSl ^eeninTOj. 

Ttwddvo/Liai (nresi, § 96. 7) 

poetic nevdofxai. inquire, 
perf. ninvafiat^, fut. nsvao- 
/uat, 2 aor. mid. env66iiii]v. 



^aivco sprinlcle, re guldir. From 
'PAJR, 1 aor. imperat. Q^^a- 
aars (Homer.), perf. pass. 
3 plur. e^(KxdaTai.. 

ge'Qoj and %<5w and EPFSl do, 
2 perf. eogya, 2 pluperf. 
icbQyecv (§ 80. N. 2 and 3), 
fut. ^e|w, aor. eg()e^a, 

g^oDJlow, aor. (from 'PETfl) 
eQQ8vaa^ fut. mid. qsvao^av, 
2 aor. pass, (from 'PT/2) 
eQQ{)t]v^ Qvrivat^, Qvslg, perf. 
(from 'PTESl) s^gvTjua. 

'PESl see ^//7/2. 

^t/^i5;a* (PHFJl, § 96. 9 and 
18) tea?\ 2 perf. sg^ojya 
(§ 96. 19), fut. ^'^Iw, aor. 
sggi]^a^ 2 aor. pass, t^^d- 

Qlyaoj (PirSl) shudder, 2 
perf. eggxya as present. 

^Prj2 see gea). 

^(dvvvfiv (POSl, § 96. 9) 
strengthen, g^hao), sggwaa, 
perf. pass. eggix)}iai, impe- 
rat. eggixmo vale, farewell, 
2 aor. pass. sggdiudTjv. 

2. 
(jalnCCix) [^AAJlirSl) sound a 
trumpet, fut. (from 2AA- 



nirrSl, § 96. 6) Galniy^ta, 
aor. l(j(xkniy^(x. Later oraX- 
nlGMy iuulmaa. 

aaoix) see acj^w. 

G^hvv^L (i:BEn, § 96. 9) 
extinguish, fut. a^eaoD, aor- 
ea^eua, perf. pass- ea/^^- 
o-|a«t, aor. lij^badi]v. From 
2BHMI, 2 aor. e'a^??*', 
u^8b]v^ arrival/. 

GB<jo)[:srii, § 96. 18) .9Aate, 
move, agitate, aor. eaasva 
(§ 104. N. 1), perf. pass. 
eaavfiai.^ aor. pass, iavdrjv 
and lo(ji:6i]v, 2 aor. mid. 
(from 2'Tikr/) (jvfjirjv, GTuro. 
For the augment see § 79. 
N. — Mid. ^ev/uac, aevjav, 
imperat. aevao, all without 
the connecting vowel. 

axsddvwiLiL [i:KEJAJ2) scat- 
ter, fut. ay(8d(jcau} and GxeSib, 
aor. taKiduua, pp. taxeda^ 
a fiat. 

GxsUiJj [2KEASI, UK A AH, 
§ 96. 18, 6) c?ry 2/;?, wither, 
fut. Gxel^, perf. (from 
2KAASI) EGiili]ita^ 1 aor. 
6Gxr^la, fut. mid. GulriGOfiat^, 
From 2KAHMI, 2 aor. 
eG}ch]v, Gxlair]v^ Gxlrivat^. 

Govfiav = GBvfiai^ imperat. 
GovGo, 2 aor. pass. Laconic 
sGGOva {Iggovo. ?\. 

GOO) see cto^w. 

G7isg6o(l see tVrw. 

UTAH see 'iGTrjfXi, 

aiE^eojand GT6giGX(jj(^UTEPJ2) 
deprive, GregriGOj, eGxigrjGa, 
iGTegi]/uai, 2 aor. pass, ecrrg- 
^?/?^, GTsgeig. 

Gjogivvvixi^ GT.6gvvfjiv, GTgcopiwjtio 
{U TOP SI, UTPOJl, UTO- 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



147 



PESl) strew ^ spread, oro- 
Qioi and or^coaw, taTOQeaa 
and ecTTQwaa, euTq{x)^ai and 
iarogiiuaL^ iaTooiadTjv and 

i(TTQ(hdf]V. 

arvyiM {l:Trril) fear, hate, 
regular ; 2 aor. earvyov, 1 
aor. IVri/la cause to fear, 
terrify. 

(TXsXv see 6/&?. 

O"(o;oi save, (T(h(TO), eaojaa, gb- 
(fcj(jfbtai^ and (TsoMuav^ 1 aor. 
pass, (from the epic <jow) 
ia(i)Oi]v. The epie a«6o> is 
regular, oaihuM^ &,c. From 
2AS1MI we obtain imperf. 
(fffdwj/) 3 sing, icrdw Horn. 
o^«w. The present o-aw is 
rare : it may be changed 
into (xco&i (§ 116. N. 4). 

T, 
TAFJl see T.4i2. 
TAAAn. by syncope 7^^^/2, 

1 perf. TSjlriKa^ 2 perf. xe- 
rAaa (§ 91. N. 2), 1 aor. 
ijiUaaa, 2 aor. (from TAH- 
MI) sjh^v^ Tl(b^ jlairjv^ tA?]- 

TAJl imperat. ttj ^a^e f/zow, 

2 aor. (from TAFJl) part. 

TEKIl see t/;ctw. 

TBuvif) rarely T^,aw Ionic Tduvoj 
cut, 2 aor. sTs/uot^ and exa- 
^0)/, 2 fut. Teac5 Ionic ra^weoi, 
1 perf. (from TMAJl) re- 
TfiTjxa, Thi.u]^ai, \ aor. pass. 

TETfxop, liET^ov 1 met with, 

found, a 2 aor. Horn. 
rev/o) see Tvy/ikru). 
Ti] see TAJl. 



TIEJl, perf. pass. reTirj^av am 

sorroxoful, affiicied, 2 perf. 

part. TeTt7;c6; (§ 10(). N.). 
tUto) {TEKJl, §96. 16) Z)r27/g' 

forth, 2 perf. Tsroxa, fut. 

Te'loi, 2 aor. eTExor, 1 aor. 

erela (rare), perf. pass, t^- 

reyiuai. (later), aor. pass. 

iTexOi]v (later), fut. mid. 

Ts^ofuav, 2 fut. mid. (poetic) 

TETiOVliUi (§ 114. N. 2). 
Tidrj^i sometimes Ti6b(x) (^Oeco, 

§ 96. 1) put, perf. TsdEiy^a 

(observe the penult), fut. 

Or^aoj, 1 aor. e6i]y^a (§ 104. 

N. 2), 2 aor. €^?/J^, perf. 

pass. TeOsiuaL, aor. pass- 

iT£'<9./x' (§ 14. N. 3), 1 fut. 

pass. TEdr^uo^av. 
tIvvv/jo^ TtVoi, =tloj. 
xvTQao) i^TPASl) hare, Targj^'/.a, 

jgriaoj, Targrjuac, 
TiTg^azo) ( TOPfl, TP OJl^ 

\ 98. 17 and I and 8) 

wound, Tg(i)(TO}, sigojaa, re- 

xgojfjaL, eTg(j}di]v, 
TtTvaxofxaL {TTXJl, TTKJl, 

§ 96. I and 14) prepare, 

take aim, 2 aor. Horn, ts- 

TVKOr, T£TVic6ui]V. 

TAAn see TAAAJl. 

TMAJl see reuvoj. 

Togiu) ( TOPn, § 96. 1 0) pierce, 

Togr^oix), &,c. 2 aor. eiogov. 
Toacroci, Toaaag, t= tv/elv, tv- 

jgicfuj {QPEfVn, § 14. 3) 
nourish, feed, support, 2 
perf. TfT^ogpa, fut. Ogaipw, 2 
aor. aTgacf:oi' (Hom.), pp. 
Tadga/ii^uuL, 1 aor. pass. 
iOgicpdijv, 2 aor. hgt^icfiji'. 

To^/w {QPEXJl, § 14. 3) n//z, 



148 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



1 aor. edQS^a, fut. dqi^o^ai, 

2 aor. (from JPAMJl) sdga- 
/uov, 2 fut. mid. dqa^io^av 
contr. ov/Lioii^ 1 perf. (§ 96. 
10) d6dQ(k/[ir]iia, 2 perf. (^ 96. 
19) didgofia (epic), perf. 
pass. d8dQ(k^i]^ciii. 

rqibyix) ( TPArSl, § 96. 19) eat, 
Tg(j)^ouai, 2 aor. eiqayov. 

Tvyyu^^ ( TYXn, § 96. 7) hap- 
pen, attain, 2 aor. erv/ov, 
perf. (§ 96. 10) tstvxi]X(x, 1 
aor. (epic) hv'/i]ua, fut. 
(§ 96. 18) Te,3|o,t/«t. 

rvTTTui) (^TTUSl), Tuipo) com- 
monly TVTiiriaix) (v^ 96. 10), 
^BTvipa^ TeTv/u^uao and TervnTi]- 

Ti5g)w(0r0i2, § 14. 3) smolce, 
burn, Ouipco, eOvipa^ 2 aor. 

pass. 6TVCpl]V, 



•bTtE^vrifJLvHS see rjiuvoj. 
'dTtva/veoiuav and -vniaxo^av 

(tutto i'ax^^) promise, perf. 

pass. {)T[6irxi]/uoa, aor. i57re- 

(T/edijv^ fut. iuTToa/r\aoiLiai, 2 

aor. '6n6(Ty6^ui]v. 

0ArSl see ea^/w. 

cpaor^iO) = cpi]aL 

0AfL see 9^,w/, and the fol- 
lowing. 

^E-iV^/Z A:z7Z, 2 aor. Horn. 
Tiscpvov and enEcpyov (for 
Ttecpevov). From fl^Aft, perf. 
pass, necparai, nbcpcavxai,^ 
TtscpfxaOaL, 3 fut. TTScpriao/LtaL. 

(pegix) bear, carry, fero. From 
ENEKSl, 1 perf. ^i^ii>^o/06 
(§81.and§98.N. 2), perf. 



pass, hv^vsyfiav^ \ aor. pass. 
iivi/drjv. From ENETKR 
(§ 96. 6), 1 aor. TJ>/ey;ta 
(§ 104. N. 1), 2 aor. ^^aj^- 
aov. From 0/J2, fut. oi'orw, 

1 aor. (5aa (rare), imperat. 
olae for oFotoj/ (§ 85. N. 2). 
The lonians have heiynx) 
(§ 96. 18), aor. '^veixa, 
Tjvel/Orjv, perf. Ivr^vei^yfjiav. 

(ps^yio (0rrJ2,§ 96. 18)/ce, 

2 perf. Tticpevya, 2 aor. 
Bcpvyov, fut. mid. cpsv^ofiai. 
Doric cpev^ovuccL, perf. pass. 
(Homer.) nacpvy/uat. have 
escaped. From flJTZSl 
(§ 96. 3), 2 perf. 7r^g)i/^a 
(Homer.), part. necpv'Qibg, 

cpi]^i [(PASl) say, fut. g)?](70j, 

1 aor. s(pi](ja, 2 aor. mid. 
^(p()c(ji]v, perf. pass, nicpa- 
a/uai, necpau^evog : 

Ind. (jD?/,^/, (jD7]c, g)7yo-^, P. 
cpa^BV^ cpaiB^ cpaat^ D. (paTOv. 

Imperf. ecprjv^ scpr/g and 
ecprjuda^ ECpi], P. ecpafisv^ 
scpajs^ scpaaav, D. ecparov, 

Subj. g)S, ^'^c, (jD^, &C. 

Opt. (pah^v, cpab]g, &c. 

Imperat. gpa^t, (jdutw, &c. 

Infin. q)(xvai, Part. <5P(i?. 

^j^di'w [00 All, § 96. 5) come 

before, anticipate, (pOdicru), 

ecpOaaa^ sqiOaxa, fut. mid. 

q)dr^(jo^uav. From 0QHMI, 

2 aor. BCpOrjv, cpOo), cpOair^v, 
cpdr^vai, cpddg, 2 aor. mid. 
part. cpOdfxsvog, 

(pdlvcx) and cpdioj consume, 
perish, cpdlaco, ecpdiuot, ecpdi^- 
f^(xi^, 2 aor. mid. (from 
0BIMI,^ 117. N. 12) icpdl^ 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



149 



^^y, subj. (fdlco^av, opt. cpOl' x^axco (^XASl) = ;^a/i^w, which 

fiyv^ 10, iTo, infin. cpOldOaj^, see. 

;^£'Sw {XEJSl) caco, 2 perf. 
H^Xoda, aor. e/eaa and <toj' 
(§ 85. N. 2), fut. x^uoixoLt, 
Doric xsGov^ai. 



part. <p6tfisvog. 
q)de(M love, regular. From 
0IAfL, 1 aor. mid. ^^rXd- 
/W^yj', imperat. (f>llai. 



^QQTjfii, in6!i. cpogrivai, = cpO' %s(x) pour, 1 fut. ;^^w (^ 102. 

N. 1), 1 aor. £>a (§ 104. 
N. 1). From XETJl, fut. 
;^£i»(ja;, aor. s/evcra and £;^£va 
(ibid.). From xr/2, perf. 
K£/v;f«, XE/vfiai^. From 
XTMI, 2 aor. mid. ^xvfn]v. 



ipgio) [cpigot), ^ 96. 17), regular. 
From "PPHMI, 2 aor. im- 
perat. <f)QBg in compos. 
siacpgeg (§ 117. N. 10). 

cT^rr/Zand fpTZJl see (joe^/w. 



^^w pi'oduce, Tiecpvxa, cpvaoj, XPAIUMJl help, 2 aor. 
acpvcra, 2 perf. necpva^ 2 aor. exgatafiov, fut. (§ 96. 10) 



Xgoctdfiriab)^ aor. ixQcc^crf^^'/O^oC' 
^g^ (from ;^o(iw) f^ i^ necessa- 
ry, subj. ;^^j^, optat. ;/^e/7 
(§ 117. N. 4), infin. ;r^^^as 
part. XQ^^^j imperf. ixQ^^ 
and ;t'^^^, fut. ;/m/o-e^.— The 
compound anoxgy it is 
enough, has imperf. dni- 
XQVj infin. dnoxgr^p. 
XQ(hvvv^i {XPOSl^ ^ 96. 9) 
color, xQ^^^y fjfe'^waa, «e- 

X(xax(a is preferable in the x^^^v^i^ {x^^-, ibid.) Aea/) ?/p, 

present. dam,x^^^) ejwora, jtextoajuat. 

^alqo) rejoice, fut. (§ 96. 10) ^ 



(from 0TMI) 8(f)vv, cpvco,^ 
(fvlTjv, cpvvQLi, <f)ig, 2 aor. 
pass, (later) £(pvr]v. 



jjfd^Q), ;^d^o,a«^, give way, yield, 
2 aor. (from KAJJ2) xixa- 
dov^xey.adoixrjv. YYom.KE- 
KAdEJl, fut. xsxadriao) be- 
reave, make give way. 

Xalvix) [XANSl, XHNn.) gape, 



^{)X^ cool, ipv^i^), 2 aor. (^'T- 



XcugriGo), perf. [XAPESl) 

HSXCcQTjxa^ asx^grj^iai^ 2 aor. 

pass. (XAPSl) ex^Lorjv. Po- 
\ etic, perf. pass. x6;/«^,uat, 1 

aor. mid. dxi]gdiurjv, 2 aor. d)i9-ew (/2 0i2, ^ 96, 10) pwsA, 

mid. (Horn.) xexccgoiuijv, 1 cb^ijcrto and waw^ perf. mxa 

fut. xejof^ijo-w. (^ 80. N. 2), aor. ewaoc^ perf. 

^avd&vM [XAIVJSl, XAJfl^ pass, eixiafxai^, aor. pass. 

^ 96. 7) contain, hold, re- iioa&ijv. 

ceive, 2 perf. ;<fc'/ai'(^a, 2 tJ^^eV^^^i'^/^P^^^^a^e, imperf. 

aor. f/«(^oi% fut. mid. (Xfi'TV- iix)vov(niiv , perf. pass. ^b)vi]fjiat 

Jftj ^ 96. 19) ;^€^(7o,«a^ (ibid.), fut. d)A'TJ(7o//a/, aor. 

(§ 12. 4). ^priadLuriv (not Attic). 

13* 



150 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



ADVERB. 

^119. 1. Many adverbs answering to the question 7r% ; 
hoio, in what manner? quomodo ? are formed from adjec- 
tives, pronouns, and participles, by changing the termination 
og into wg. E. g. aocpibg wisely, from (foq:6g wise; x^QiipiMg 
'gracefully, from x^9^^^9 gen. /oQierTog, graceful; (xhjd^^o)g 
contr. dLh]d^{bg truly, from ulrjxtrig gen. dh^d^iog, true; oviwg 
thus, from ovwg this ; ovTU)g indeed, from w^ gen. ovrog^ being. 

2. Some end in drjv or ad7]v. E. g. yQuSdrjv scratchingly^ 
from yQ&cp(x) 7 scratch ; avlkr^8d7]v collectively, from uvXlafi- 
^(jivM [AHBJl) take together ; §<xdi]v walking, slowly, from 
^aivix) (j5(iw) walk, go ; crTtooudrjv scatter edly, from ojieiiHx) (§ 9(i. 
18, 19) sow, scatter ; loyudijv selectedly, from Uyoi (^ 96. 19) 
select, collect. Such adverbs are derived from verbs. 

3. Some end in ^ov or ri^ov. E. g. d.yelrid6t^ in herds, 
from (xyiXrj herd ; ^ojgvddy in clusters, like grapes, from ^6- 
TQvg grape ; }ilayyi]d6p with a loud noise, from x^ttyyrj clang- 
or ; Ttltvd-Tjdov like brick-ioork, from nllvx^og brick ; ansiQi]^ 
dop spirally, from (rneXoa spiral line ; TSTQanodr^dov like a 
quadruped. Such adverbs are derived from nouns. 

4. Some end in ^ or e^ t* or rst, E. g. iS^elovrl volunta- 
rily, from hxttlojv gen. oviog, willing ; uvto^obL {avxog /^orj) at 
the first signal; ayeloLCTxi [a yeloux)) without laughing ^ ^a^- 
^aQiaxL (^aQ^aQltoj) like a barbarian; 'Ellrjv^aTi {^ElXi]vit.ci)) 
after the Greek fashion, in Greek ; JojqkttI (z/w^/^w) Dori- 
cally ; d/naxrjtBl or tI without fighting, 

5. Some end in I. E. g. ^valld^ (from iv dclMacro)) in 
turns, crosswise ; ^«s by kicking ; nv^ with the fist, in box- 
ing ; odd^ [odovg) with the teeth. 

6. A few end in wdrjv, E. g. nlovxivdriv {nlovxog) accord- 
ing to {his) wealth. 

§ 120. Adverbs answering to the question ^roo-ajftg; how 
often ? quoties ? end in axig. E. g. nolluyug {nolvg nollov) 
often, many times ; ohydyug [ollyog) a few times ; uv/vdxLg 
[av^i^og) frequently. For the numeral adverbs see ^ 62. 4. 
Such adverbs are derived from adjectives. 

§ 121. 1. Adverbs ansv^'ering to the question nov or no&i. ; 
where? in what place? ubi? end in d^i^ or o"^. E. g. "v- 



ADVERB. 151 

Tod-v (from ct^Tog) in that very spot ; allod-i (from allog) in 
another 'place ; oi)dafi6&L nowhere ; o&v (from &) where. 

The termination t^c^ [v) is chiefly appended to names of 
cities; as 'Ad-riviiuv at Athens^ Qri8i](n^ at Thebes, from'-^^^- 
2^ai^f Qri^ai. When the substantive ends in « pure or ^a, 
the adverb ends in olul- as Geamaai at Thespiae, IllaTuiacri^ 
at Plataeae, from Qeamai^ IllaTaial, 

Some end in ov or ;^ov. E. g. napjaxov every where, (i^- 
laxov elsewhere, nollaxov in many places, oi) and otiov where, 
avTov there. 

Some end in or. E. g. 'lad-fxoX at the Isthmus, MeyaooX at 
Megara, irdol within, i^ol without. OXaot, at home, takes 
the accent on the penult (§ 20. Note). 

Here belong the adverbs ev&a or evd-dds or hvTav&a here, 
there, 5)ds here, i^tst there, ev8op within, oiv(x) up, ^(^tm down, 
eaio in, e'sw out, iyyvg near, no^Qbd far, tTiug afar, ^y/ovnigh. 

Note 1. Those in ^y^t or ao-^ are, strictly speaking Ionic 
datives (§ 31. Note 3). The ending o^ is the old termina- 
tion of the dative of the second declension, and of nouns in 
w gen. oog, of the third declension (§ 42.) 

2. Those which answer to the question nod^ev whence ? 
FROM what PLACE ? uudc ? end in S^ev. E. g. ' Ad^r^vrjd^ev 

from Athens, ovgavod^sv from heaven, S-eo&sv from god, di' 
vinitus, ^lo&sv from Jupiter. The lonians and the poets 
may use ^e for S^er, as Ti]v(hd-B = txel&sy thence. 

3. Those which answer to noas or ndt whither ? to what 
PLACE? quo? end in ds or o-e. E. g. olKovds to the house, 
home, dlads to the sea, Maqad^^Ms to Marathon, 'Ad^v^va'c^e 
(for the Doric 'Ad-ifivaade) to Athens, Gr^^ats (= Qr^^auds) 
to Thebes, OlvfintaQs to Olympia, eTceXas thither. 

Note 2. In strictness, the ending -de is appended to the 
accusative sing, or plur. of the noun. — The adverbs oixads 
= oJy.dpds, and cpvyads to flight, imply nom. OIZ, fPTZ, gen. 
olxog, cpvyog. 

4. Those which answer to ni]; in what direction ? qua ? 
end in ^ or p^ E. g. aXlaxr] in another direction, rrayra^TJ 
in every direction, ovdauri In no ivay. 

The last vowel becomes y only when the nominative of 
the adjective, from which such adveibs are derived, is not 
obsolete ; as cc^^ another way, tt^ this way, from aUo:, o. 



152 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



^ 122. The following adverbs answer to the question 
ndiB ; when, in what time ? quando ? : vvv now,, ar\iierK)v to- 
day^ (xvQiop to-morroWy x^-ig and ^x^^9 yesterday, Tjooy&ig 
the day before yesterday, rriieg this year, nlovui [p) last year, 
of a late, noixii early, in the morning, ndilai formerly, reoiarL 
lately, nqibrjv formerly, recently, nqiv before , vGTeQOf after- 
2oards, vvxtujo nightly, noctu, ^^i always, ttuvtote at all times, 
bnst^ra after, and a few others. 

nrjviyia ; at what hour? is answered by npina or Tr^vl' 
y,&ds or Ti]vixavTa at this or that time, -^^vixu or onr^vlxa at 
which time, 

n%uog (poetic) when ? is answered by rr^uog ox TTj^^odB or 
rrjiiiovTog then, ^f^og or onr^t-iog when, 

^ 123. The folhiwing table exhibits the derivatives of 
(§ 73. 1) 1102, '01102, T02 (§ 63. N. 2), and os; (§ 69.); 



Interrogative 

nov or noOi^ ; 
where ? ubi ? 



Indefinite 
7io\) or nodi 
somewhere, 
alicubi, 

TtoOev ; whence ? noOh from 
unde ? 

Ttoi or TtoGB ; 
whither ? 
quo ? 

nr\ in what 
direction ? 
qua ? 

7i6ts ; when ? 
quando ? 

7i(bg ; how ? 
quomodo ? 



Demonstrative Relntive 



some place, 
alicunde. 

not some- 
whither, 
aliquo* 

nri in some 
direction, 
aliqud, 

TtoTs at some 
time, once\ 

7t(j)g some- 
how. 



loOi here, 
in this 
place, hie, 

ToOer thence, 
inde, 

wanting. 



ov or o^t 

iiTlOV or OTTOf 

6i where, 

oOev or OTTO- 
Oev whence K 

ol or oTTot' 
whither. 



T^ or TTids or 
ravTri in this 
direction, hdc. 

TOTS then, 
tunc, 

Tcoc or wc or 
^de or ouTOJc 
thus, so, sic. 



ri or 07T1] 

in which 
direction, 

OTS or oTtdTS 
when, 

cb^ or OTTcog 
as. 



The forms ttoOl, noOl, lodv, oOi, ot, toObv, T(bg, are poetic. 

Note. The letter I (long) is annexed to some demonstra- 
tive abverbs for the sake of emphasis (^ 73. Note 2); as 
vvvi at this very moment, from pvp now ; ovKoat, bvievdevi, 
from oviojg, wde, kvTsv&sv. 



^^B 



ADVERB. 153 

Some relative adverbs are strengthened by neq or olv 
(compare ibid, and § 69. Note 2) ; as SidnsQ^ (hanegovvy 
dnovovv wherever, ubicunque, onojaovv howsoever, in what 
manner soever, quomodocunque. 

§ 124. Some genitives, datives, and accusatives are used 
adverbially. E. g. rs^og finally, lastly, drj/uocricc (from ^r]fi6' 
(Jt'Og pablic) publicly, aoivr^ (from ycouvog common) in common. 

The accusative sing, or phi r. of the neuter of an adjective 
is often used adverbially ; as /uovov only, fitxgov little, ^oXkdc 
or nolv much. See also § 125. 

Note. In some instances an oblique case and the prepo- 
sition, which governs it, are used adverbially ; as naga/Qri^a 
(naqd. ZQ%^^) instantly, ngovgyov (ttoo sgyov) to the purpose, 
aadaneg [y.ad' aneg) as, B^aiq)vi]g (e? aXcpvrjg) suddenly, ey.nodihv 
(for ixjTodcbv = ta Tiodcbv) out of the ivay, 6finod(x)v (for if^noaC 
== iv TToal) in the way, impeding, emuxegib (^inl crx^Q^) suc- 
cessively, in order, 

COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

§ 125. The comparative of an adverb derived from an 
adjective is the same with the neuter sing, of the compara- 
tive; the superlative is the same with the neuter plur, of 
the superlative of that adjective. E. g. 

Ttcxgcbg bitterly, Ttiygoiegov more bitterly, nixgojaTa most 

bitterly, from mygog bitter ; § 57. 
UGcpibg wisely^ uocpmegov more wisely, (Tocp^Taia most wise- 
ly, from (jocpog wise ; ibid. 
r^de(x)g pleasantly, r\dTov more pleasantly, ^diuza most plea- 
santly, from 'Ti^vg pleasant ; § 58. 

Note 1. Some adverbs^ of the comparative degree end in 
ft>3 / as ;^ttA87rajT£^wg, uygiwTegojg, evixevEGT^gMg^ from j^aAeTicac, 
dy^/wc, £i\u6v(bg. Superlatives in w^ are very rare. 

Some comparatives and superlatives end in w; as eyyvTegb) 
nearer, iyyvrdio) nearest, from iyyvg near. This is always 
the case when the positive ends in w, as «*^w, comp. d^wn^^j, 
super. upbiTdiTLx}. 

Note 2. Observe the following comparisons : OLyx(^ near, 
aaaov (compare § 58. Note); ay/LdTa- kxag afar, exaaTego), 
ki(a(TT&T(x}* spdov within, evdoTegoj, evdoTdno)' /tidXai very, fnalXoy 
rather, more, f^aliGTa- vvxmig nightly, noctu, vvxTialregor^ 
vvxTiaiTara' niga further, beyond, TiegaiTegu)^ negaiJ&TUi}' Trgoig. 
yov (^ 124. Note) to the purpose^ ngovgyialTsgop, ngovgyialjaia. 



164 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



DERIVATION OF WORDS. 

^ 126. All words, which cannot be proved to be derivative, 
must be considered primitive. 

SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM OTHER SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 127. 1. Patr()7iymics, ihixi is, names of men and women 
derived from those of their parents or ancestors, end in 
idT]g, adijg, ladrj;, gen. ov mv gen. i^ivog rarely opog* fern. <;, 
a^, gen. i^^og, udo;- ipt], and lotvi], 

Patronyiiiics from nouns in ^g and «?, of the first declen- 
sion, end in ad/jg* as 'Innoiudrjg the son of Hippotes, from 
'iTTTTOTrjg- BoQBudi]g the SOU of Boreas, from Booiug, 

Those from nouns in og and log, of the second declension, 
end in t,di]g and ladijg, respectively ; as K^orldrjg the son of 
Kronos, from Kqovog' 'AcrxlrjnKxdrjg the son of Asclepios^ 
from 'Aayihjnvdg, — Those in ^wi^, as Koorlui)v= KQovidi^g, are 
poetic. 

Those from nouns of the third declension end in tdrjg or 
ladt^g. They are formed by dropping o,^ of the genitive and 
annexinor these endings. E. g. nelonidug the son of Pelops, 
from IJeloip gen. nilonog' niileidi]g contracted Jli^leidi^g the 
son of Peleus, from IlrjXevg gen. IlijUog, — The Homeric 
dialect annexes iadi]g^ as fJ)SQT]TL(xdr]g from fl^sgrjg fTjigi^Tog, TIi]- 
Iri'i&drjg from ni]levg gen. Ilijl'i^og (§ 44. Note 2). Sometimes 
it annexes lojv, as Urjleiiop = Ilrfkeidiig, 

Feminine patronymics in t^g and «g correspond to mascu- 
lines in i'di]g and ^ftj^/g, as Bqiarfcg the daughter of Briseus, 
from Boiaevg' 'Arlavrtg from 'Jijlag gen. "AilavTog, Those 
in cvT] and i^mptj correspond to masculines in i^ojv, as ' Ador^cFTivT] 
from "Adgi](TTog, 'Ay.Qiuiihvi] from 'A'Aotawg. — The Attics con- 
tract r/i into ri in the oblique cases ; as ]V^]gr^^i^)v for K7]gT]i:du)v 
from JVi]qiiig Nereid. 

Note. Some proper names have the form only of patro- 
nymics, without the signification ; as EvQLnidrjg Euripides, 
JsvKaU(x)p Deucalion, 

2. Diminutives of the neuter gender end in lov, idiov, 
aqiov, vlhop, vdgtov, vcpLOP. E. g. fxayaiQiov a little knife, 
from /Lid/aiQa' (xvd-Q{x)Tciov a little fellow, from dr&gtonog' og- 
vid-iov a little bird, from ogvig ogvid^og* olzidiov a little house. 



DERIVATION OF WORDS. 155 

from oJicog* dvd-gLOTrdgLov from avd-qomog* ^evvUuov or ^evvdqiov^ 
from ^evog stravgev Icovcpwp animalcule, from two^. — The 
first syllable of the ending i^i^ov is contracted with the pre- 
ceding vowel'; SLS ^oidtov for ^otdiov, from ^ovg ^oog- yr^diov 
for yi]tdLov, from yrj- ixxtvdiov (strictly l/d-vldiov) from i/^vg^ 
Ifiajidiov (for IfiaTudiov) from I^utlov le^eidiov from ^wt'l^? 
Afffw^. The ending e/^toj^ often becomes idcov. — Many di- 
minutives in lov have lost their diminutive signification ; as 
nedlop from nsdov plain. It must be confessed however 
that the primitive word is more dignified than the derivative 
in tov. 

Masculine diminutives end in lorjcog^ v)^g or vllog (Doric) ; 
as (TTscpavlcrxog a little crown' dvS^gixjnlaxog from avi^Q(xmog. 
Proper names in vlog are not diminutive in their significa- 
tion ; as AlG/vlog j^schylus^ 

Feminine diminutives end in tg gen. t8og^ and i^Gfy-rj (cor- 
responding to masc. lU'Aog) , as yriuig islets from i^^aoc island) 
ILtsigaxiaxTj a young girly lass, from f^elga^ gen. ^elqattog. 

3. National appellatives end in *og, Tt?/?, aiTjg^ rjTrjg, mrrig^ 
(^.vog, 7]vog, Xvog, evg, E. g. Kogiv^wg a Corinthian from 
KoQivd-og Corinth ; I^TayeiQlrr^g a StagiritCy from I^Tdyeigu 
Stagira ; Teye&TTjg a Tegean, from Teyia Tegea; Alyivr^" 
Trig from Ai'yiva' Hvde'kimrig from I^iKsUa' Haqdiayog a Sar- 
dian, from ^dgdsig' 'A^vd7]v6g from^'A^vdog' TccgaviTvog from 
TikqavTov UlaTaisvg from nlajaiaL When the name of the 
place ends in a, «t, or ?;, the ending wg generally becomes 
a^^oc:, as ^A&TjvaTog from ^Ad^y\vai, 

The feminines of this class end in «, vg^ ag ; as 'A&T]ra[ay 
Ilequig^ '^EliTtojvKjcg. 

4. Nouns denoting a place where there are many things 
of the same kind, end in wy ; as 6 dacpvihv laurel grove, from 
ddcpPT] laurel. Sometimes they end in wj^^a ; as godij^ynk rose- 
garden, from gddoy rose. 

5. Many appellatives end in rrjg ; as noXtTTjg citizen, from 
Ttdlig city ; onllTi]g an armed man, from onlov weapon , d)]^ 
uoTi^g member of a demos. — Those in t.T7]g have long *. 

6. Some end in evg ; as legevg priest, from legov temple; 
ygajufrnjevg scribe, from ygdfiitia letter ; InnEig horseman, from 
tnnog horse. 



156 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

7. Some feminine appellatives end in oua or Loaa ; as 
^acrihcraa queen, from ^uadevg king ; uvixaau from ai^al gen. 
avocKTog ; Qgarra a Thracian woman, from 0^«5 gen. G^xdg, 

8. Feminine appellatives in tg gen. i^dog come from mas- 
culines in 'i]g (§ 127. 5) and (xg (of the first declension) ; as 
nollTig from TToliirjg, deanoxig from deaTioirjg, (x^Tono}hg from 

dQT07T(bXT]g, 

9. Feminines in rgia, TQt,g, jeiqu, come from verbal nouns 
in Ti]g, T^o, TWO (^ 129. 2) ; as noiriTgiu poetess, from noiriTr^g 
poet ; avhjTQlg a female flute-player, from avkr^Tr^g ; doTecgu 
from dorriQ giver. 

SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. 

§ 128. 1. Many abstract nouns end in ^a ; as xaxla vice^ 
from xaxog bad, wicked; /uwgla folly, from /uotgdg foolish y 
dvdgia valor, from f^t^r^g gen. ^vdgog man. If this ending be 
preceded by e or o, a contraction takes place ; as dilr^d^Eia 
truth, from dchj&rjg gen. (xh]xt^og true; uvom amentia, from 
^voog amens. The ending eia however often becomes /« ; 
as dfidd^eia and d/ua&la ignorance, from ^fiud-rig, 

2. Many end in r^g gen. rr^Tog ; as noioirjg quality, from 
TtoTog ; of what quality ? quails ? o^vjrjg sharpness, from 
d^'6g sharp. They are generally paroxytones (§ 19. 2). 

3. Not unfrequently abstract nouns end in awr/; as dixato- 
avvt] justice, from dlxawg just ; oMcpgoavprj chastity, from ac6- 
q)go)v chaste. If the penult of the primitive be short, the 
ending ouvprj becomes o)(jvvtj (compare § 57. 1); as iegujuvvri 
priesthood, from Isgog. 

4. Sometimes the abstract noun is formed by changing 
the ending vg of the adjective into og gen. eog ; as ^(xdog depth, 
from ^advg deep ; jLtrixog length, from MHKY2 long ; aiaxog 
vgliness, from AIi:XT2 ugly^ 

5. Sometimes the abstract of adjectives in og does not 
differ from their feminine, except in the accent ; as exOga 
enmity, from exdgog inimical. Such nouns have the accent 
always on the penult. 

SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS. 

§ 129. 1. Many abstract nouns are formed by changing 
ca of the present into rj, a, og gen. ov, E. g. ^^(^^^ injury^ 



DERIVATION OF WORDS. 157 

from ^l(x7tra) (§ 96. 2) I injure ; (i^lxv battle^ from fi^/ofiaL I 
fight; x^^^ joy, from x^^Q^ (§ 96. 18) / rejoice; Tvnog an 
impress, from rvnTixi (^ 96. 2) ; ehy^og confutation, from 
iley/ix) I confute. When the vowel-sound vibrates between 
^y «) o (§ 96. 19), verbals of this class have o in the penult; 
^oyog sayU->g^ from Uyat I say ; (fOogd corruption, from 
cpdslQix) (<^ 96. 18, 19) I corrupt ; docdrisong, from ^eldoj I sing. 

Many annex og gen. eog to the root without any further 
change; as ngayog thing, from Trguuaix) (§ 96. 3) I do ; yevog 
race, from ylyvo/uat [rENSl) I become, 

Feminines in eta are derived from verbs in evo) ; zs ^ol' 
udela sovereignty, from facrds^jco I rule, 

2. Verbals denoting the subject of the verb end in Tr]g, 
TtjQ, t(x)g; as noirjTrig maker, from tioibm make ; -^^qtuTr^g one 
who insults, from -v^gt'Qtx) insult ; qvttiq one who draws, from 
"^PYSl 1 draw; qtitmq speaker, orator, from 'PEIl I say. 
Sometimes they are paroxytone {§ 19. 2) ; us ip(^^i:i]g harper. 
from ipScllixi. The penult of such nouns is generally like 
that of the perfect passive 2 pers. sing. (§ 107.). 

Some nouns of this class end in svg ; as ygacpsvg writer^ 
ivom yqacpbi I write ; (rnogevg sower, from o^Tieigoj (^ 96. 18, 19). 

Some compounds annex yg or otg gen. ov to the last con- 
sonant of the verb ; as ys{x)ixhgi]g geometer, one who measures 
land, from yeMfjLSTgm (yriv fiSTgrn) I measure land; cpvyado' 
di^gag hunter of fugitives, from (fvydg and drjgam, 

3. Nouns denoting the action of the verb end in (Jig or 
ova; as Oiaig position, from Ti6i]^i {(9eov) place, put; ogaaig 
vision, from ogdco I see; elxaala the act of likening, from 
eixd^oj; U^ig diction, from Uyijj say- The penult of such 
nouns is generally like that of the perfect passive 2 pers. 
sing. (§ 107.). It is observed that such nouns are equiva- 
lent to the infinitive active ; e. g. Uaig ^= to Ueiv, ddavaaia 
= TO eipai ^tlvol] dOdvaTOv. 

Some end in fjog ; -ds SiMy/ndg persecution, from Siojxu) J 
pursue ; ^(xg^agia/aog barbarism, from ^ag^agliiu. Their pe- 
nult is usually like that of the perfect passive I pers. sing. 

4. Nouns denoting the effect of the verb end in /hoc ; xd/n/ua 
that which is cut off, a piece, from xdmu) I cut ; ngay/ia that 
which is done, deed, from ng^Gaw I do. Their penult is 
generally like that of ihe perfect passive 1 pers. sing. We 
may observe that such words are nearly equivalent to the 

14 



158 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

neuter participle perf. pass.; e. g. d6yjLia=T6 ds^oyfiivovj 

5. Verbals in /ut] sometimes express the action, as iTncnr^^ri 
knowledge, =Td entaTcca&ixL ; anil sometimes the effectj as 
ygafifiri line (drawn). 

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM OTHER ADJECTIVES. 

§ 130. A few adjectives are derived from other adjectives 
by dropping the ending and annexing log ; as l^evd-igiog 
liberal, from ^lev&ego; free. A few annex criog, as ixovaiog 
voluntary, from ^j(co^ gen. i^opzog (^ 12. 4). 

Some end in yiog or«J«og; as xf^ijlvicdg (rom^riXvg, anovdsta' 
^6g from unovdeZog. 

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES. 

^ 131. 1. The endings *o^, aiog, eiog, ei^vog, oiog, i.xog, de- 
note belonging or relating to ; as aid-eqiog etherial, from 
al&riQ gen. ixld^igog ether ; 6rj8ulog Thehan, from Qr\^at. 
Thebes; (xv&Qb)ne tog human, (vom ciy&Qixmog man ; (xldologvene- 
Table, from aldibg respect ; natQ^og paternal, from narr^o gen. 
naiigog syncop. nixiQog^ father ; loyiie6g rational, from Idyog 
reason; noirjii^dg poetical, from noirjirig poet, 

2. The endings sog, Xvog generally denote the material 
of which any thing is made ; as /gvaeog contracted xgvaovg 
golden, from XQ^oog gold ; nhqivog of stone, from niiqa 
stone ; dqmvog oaken, from dovg oak. 

Here belongs the ending ewog^ as oqeivog movntainous^ 
from oQog mountain ; axoTSLvog dark, from axdrog darkness, 

3. The endings e^og, rjgog, denote quality; as T^vcpBQog 
luxurious, from TQvcp^ luxury ; alfiaTi]g6g bloody, from al^a 
gen. cu^aTog blood. 

Also the ending aleog^ r^Xog, wXog, as dagQaUog courageous^ 
from d&ggog courage; i)nv7ikbg sleepy from vnvog sleep; 
d/LiaQUDlog prone to sin, from d/uaQTla. 

4. Those in t^iuog express generally fitness ; as ^dcbd^fiog 
eatable, from idwdrifood ; ^cgritTLfuog useful, from x^cri'g use ; 
fi(k/Liiiog warlike, from f^d/r] battle- 

5. Adjectives in rjevg, i^i.g, oecg^ generally denote fulness ; 
as x^Q^^^^ grctceful, from x^^s gr&ce ; Ti^fn^e^g valuable, from 



DERIVATION OF WORDS. 159 

zifi-^ value; itvqoeig full of fire, from nvo fire; vi(f>osig full 
of snow ^ from Nm^ wcpog snow, 

6. Those in ojdr]; denote resemblance or fulness; as Ttv- 
g(odr]g like fire^ from nvg fire ; neiqihdri; full of stones, from 
nerga stone, 

7. Adjectives in ,tio)v are strictly derived from verbals in 
^j?or i^a (^ 129. 4, 5) ; as emcnr^aMP knowing, from inLdjri^rj 
knowledge ; vo^ab)v intelligent, from v6riixa thought. Such 
adjectives are almost equivalent to the active participle of 
the verb. For example, bTacjiv^uMv , nolvnqixy ^ixiv ^ do not differ 
much from aTtiajduevog, nolla Ti^dcTTojv. 

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS. 

§ 132. 1. Some verbal adjectives in rog are equivalent to 
the perf. pass, participle ; as noLrjTog = nenoiri^uivog made, 
factus. 

Some have an active signification, as aalvmog covering, 

In many instances the idea of capahleness lies at the basis; 
as SsaTog visible, visibilis, from d-e&oixav see ; xgrjarog utilis, 
from xq^o^av use ; S^avaaaTog admirable, from -d^avfxdi^b) ad- 
mire. 

2. Verbal adjectives in reog correspond to the Latin par- 
ticiples in dus; as Tcou]Teog faciendus, that must be done, from 
noiiio do ; noxeog bibendus, to be drank, from nivoj (^nOfl). — 
The penult of verbals in rog and rsog, is generally like that 
of the perfect passive 3 pers. sing. 

3. A few end in vog, log ; as detvdg terrible, dsdog timid, 
from JEIJl fear ; osfuvog venerable, from oe^o/Liat^ venerate- 

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM ADVERBS. 

§ 133. A few adjectives are derived from adverbs of time ; 
e. g. ui]UB()iv6g to-day^ s, hodiernus, from ar^ueqov to-day ; 
xd-eaifdg yesterday's, hesternus, from x^^^ yesterday ; ngibiog 
early, from ngujt. 

VERBS DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND 
OTHER VERBS. 

§ 134. 1. Many derivative verbs end in cco), eco, ow, svco, 
a^w, L^ix), aiv(x), vpu). lu nouns of th- first or second declen- 



160 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

sion these endings take the place of the endings of the nomi- 
native ; as Ti^iudti) I honor, from rt^wrj honor ; xocvcDvm par take ^ 
from ^ovvix)v6g 'partaker ; fiiad-oix) let, from (tiiad^dg wager ; 
(povev(x) I murder, from cpovog murder ; dixuc^M judge, from 
dUrj justice ; oQi'Q(x) I limit, from oQog limit. In nouns of the 
third declension they take the place of the termination og of 
the genitive ; as xQr]fiaTl'i;u) transact business, from x^r^f^^ 
Xq^^dTog : but when the nominative ends in a vowel, or in g 
preceded by a vowel, they take the place of the ending of the 
nominative ; as S^av^&i^b^) admire, from t^«v^« gen. d^ctvfiuTog, 
wonder ; Te^;^/Jw / v:all, from Tslxog gen. Tei/eog, wall 

2. Verbs in cclvm, wm, generally come from adjectives ; 
as fio)QalvQ) act in a foolish manner, from /uw^og foolish; 
^a&vvut deepen, from pad-vg deep- 
s' Some verbs are formed from nonns by changing the 
ending of the nominative into w and modifying the penult 
according to § 96. E. g. x^^^^^ injure, ;^aAe7r6^ injurious ; 
fialdcrcTLo soften, from fualajtog soft ; uyytllM announce, from 
(kyyelog messenger ; aad-al^ clean, from nad-aQdg clear. 

4. Desideratives are formed by annexing (tsko to the root 
of the primitive verb ; as dgaasioj I desire to do, from dgdto 
I do ; ;fe'eo-£/w cacaturio, from x^'Q^^ caco. 

Some end in ^«w or aa>, as oroarT/ytdw desire to become 
general, from argarr^yog general ; ^vi]ti6lo) desire to buy, from 
^vTjTrig buyer. 

COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 

§ 135. 1. When the first component part of a word is a 
noun, its ending is dropped and an o is substituted ; as x^^- 
QOTsxvr]g a mechanic, from x^^Q gen. x^'^Q^^ and Tex^rj- lego- 
TcgsTcrig holy, from Isgog and ngtno). 

The is often omitted when the last component part be- 
gins with a vowel ; as vschvrjwg newly bought, from viog and 
(bvTjTog, It is generally omitted also when the termination 
of the first part is preceded by t^, v, av, ov ; as noUnoo&og 
that destroys cities, from noli-g and nsgd-oj' noUxyiog very 
valuable, from noXvg and naTJ. The o is also sometimes 
omitted when the termination of the first part is preceded 
by V ; as jueldyitagnog producing black fruit, from fiilocg gen. 
fiiXav-og (§ 12. 2). 



COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 161 

In some instances the connecting vowel o is changed into 
^; as yeoyyqacpla geography, from yea yi] and yQ(xcp(x). 

2. When the first component part is a verb, the connect- 
ing syllable is e, av or ^; as /usv^/ua/og brave, from f^ivuj and 
^-i(x/T]' d6^ida)Qog that receives presents, from Sixo^uai. and ^w- 
gop^ dgxi^xigavpog thunder -ruling, from ocg/a) and iceguwo;. 

Sometimes the ^ is omitted before a vowel ; as giipaumg 
a coward, from qLtitm and udTxig, 

3. The primitive prepositions are the only ones with 
which other words are compounded. They generally lose 
their final vowel when the word, with which they are com- 
pounded, begins with a vowel ; as dcv&yb) lead up, from Civ6. 
and a^/w d.vexixi hold up, from ava and eyu. Ilsgt and '^go 
never lose their final vowel ; as negi-dyoj^ ngo-'ccrTri^L. In 
Tigo the is often contracted with the following vowel ; as 
ngovxoj for ngoi/co, cpgovdog for ngoodag (^ 14. Note 1). '^ficpL 
often retains the «^, as d/ugji-evvv^uL, d^Kpi-sTsg. Compare § 25. 

Note. The epic language in some instances drops the 
final vowel of the preposition even before a consonant; as 
dTTTre.UTTW for dnojib^anbi, y.a^^dg for y^ara^dg (^ 10. Note 2), 
xdllmov for aajeltnov (ibid.), nag&efispoi^ for Tcagad^i^evoi. 
Compare § 25. Note 2. 

4. The negative particle a- (called « privative) corres- 
ponds to the English inseparable particles i^/i-, -less; as 
a-xgi](Tiog useless, a-ncaiog faithless. Before a vowel it 
often becomes d^- ; as dp-d^iog unworthy, in-dignus. 

5. It has already (§ 13.) been remarked that g, at the be- 
ginning of a word, is doubled when, in the formation of a 
word, it happens to stand between two vowels.* 



* For more information on the subject of derivation and composition, 
the reader is referred to Buttmann's Larger Grammar, § 118— § 121, 



14* 



PART III. 
SYNTAX. 

SUBSTANTIVE. 

<§> 136. A substantive annexed to another substantive 
or to a pronoun, for the sake of explanation or emphasis, 
is put in the same case. E. g. 

'O^'Alvg noTa^og^ ' The river Halys ;' 
ABQ^ijg §a(nlevg^ < Xerxes the king;' 
'Efih TOP TrjQia, ' Me Tereus.' 

So "'IStjv licavsv, fATjTiQa S-riQihv, 'he came to Ida, the 
mother of beasts;' Tginog /gvaecog^ xlvju eqya TieqiQpqoyog 
'HcpocldToto, 'a golden tripod, a celebrated work of wise He- 
phaestus ; y e cpv (ja g 'Qevytfvujv inl tov noTajuov^ d id ^ a a i^ v toj 
cfTQccT(Oy 'laying bridges across the river for the passage of 
the army.' A substantive thus annexed to another substan- 
tive is said to be in apposition with it. 

Note 1. A substantive in apposition to two or more sub- 
stantives is commonly put in the plural ; as 'AfjLicjQrig^ r^d" 
'u4QTa(pQevi]g, Tcal Meya^d'Cjig^ rjc^ 'AaTd(jTi7]g, ray ol IJleQawp, 
'Amistres, Artaphrenes, Megabazes, and Astaspes, leaders 
of the Persians.' § 137. Note 4. 

Note 2. Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the 
sake of emphasis; as Aaod^oi] S^vydTriQ "AlTdo yiqovTog- 
^'Alrsa), og AeXiysacn cpvlonTole^oKJiv dLvdcraev^ ' Laothoe the 
daughter of old Altes, (of Altes) who rules over the warlike 
Leleges.' 

The repeated word is, in some instances, put in the nomi- 
native ; as ^AvdQOfi&xV-) '^yyd^VQ ^eyalr^Togog 'Hsrlcopog' 
'He T ill) V, og evaisv vnb Jlldxco vhjBaari^ 'Andromache the 
daughter of magnanimous Eetion, (Eetion) who dwelt at the 
foot of woody Placus.' 



§ 136— § 137. ADJECTIVE. 163 

Note 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of 
an adjective ; as ^(^vri ndliq ''Ella g, < Sane, a Grecian city,' 
where the substantive 'j&^^fi? ' Greece,' stands {ox 'EllrjviKri 
' Grecian ;' S^r^uua Tqdx.ne'Qa, « the fare of the working class,' 
where ^Tjo-aa ' a hired workwoman,' stands for SrjrrAri ' per- 
taining to a servant.' 

Here we may remark that personal or national appella- 
tions are often accompanied by the word avriQ ^ lu'du^ vir ;' 
as ^aailevq (jivriQ^ ' a king,' strictly, <a man who is a king;' 
civdQsg 'Ad-jpaXoL, 'Athenians, men of Athens:' Kdixscra^ 
Hvdgsacrcv dcvduaojv, ' ruling over the Cilicians.' — ^'Avd-Qixmog is 
sometimes annexed to a proper name, but it usually denotes 
contempt; in which case it should be translated hy fellow , 
or wight. 

Note 4. The abstract noun is often put for the concrete ; 
^^'SIk 8 av 6v 78^ -d-e^hv Y i V s a iv , « and Oceanus, the pa- 
rent of the gods,' where the abstract yheaiv ' production,' 
stands for the concrete ysvBTi]v 'producer.' So o-u^w^aj/a 
' alliance,' for av/u/naxoL ' allies ;' ngsa^sla ^ embassy,' for 
TToecr^ecg < ambassadors.' 

Note 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is in the 
genitive, sometimes stands in apposition with the limited 
noun ; as Tgelg rjiuegag odov ' three days journey ;' nsyjrixovToe, 
fivQvadag argarL&v, < an army of fifty myriads of men;' ^ena 
^vQu eiacpogd « a contribution of ten minse. 

ADJECTIVE. 

§ 137. An adjective, article, pronoun, or participle, 
agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case. 
E.g. 

'Avrig aocpog, * A wise man ;' 
"'Avdgsg aocpoL, ' Wise men ;' 
^Avdgbg nlovTovvrog^ < Of a rich man.' 

So cpvlaxri vvxTegLvr'i^ ' night-watch ;' S) xaxodaiuov ^ap&[a, 
' O unfortunate Xanthias;' o Bogeag 6 /uiyag, < the great Bo- 
reas;' (xt^dg(bi^ nagoi^TMif noli\ua&(bv xal detiCoi', ' learned and in- 
genious men being present;' egyoi^ ai'dgixmujoy, ^ a most 
manly deed;' Je^li^ixog o^Toa/, Mhis here Dexinicus ;' ti)p 
ifiriv cpuaiv, ' my nature ;' ipr\(poit^ duoli^^ ' by two votes.' 



164 SYNTAX. § 137. 

Note 1. A feminine substantive in the dual often takes 
a masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle ; as tw 
6d(x) for t(x dd(D, * the two ways ;' tw ywalxe for T(i yvvuTxe^ 
' the two women ;' tovto) tw Ti/pu for tuvtu tu T^;^j^a, ' these 
two arts ;' tovtow toXv zLvijaioLv for tuvtuvv tuXv xivrjaioLv, ' of 
these two motions.' 

Sometimes feminine substantives in the singular lake 
masculine adjectives ; as '^fivg avr/uri for -^idela diir^tj, < sweet 
odor ;' xkvrog 'Innodd/usia, < the celebrated Hippodamla,' 
where yclvTog stands for x^vtti. This remark applies only to 
adjectives of three endings (^ 48.). 

Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or parti- 
ciple has reference to the gender n7?7?Z/ed in the substantive ; 
as '^^x)^6 d' inl ipv/ri Q?j^atov TsiQSuluo, yQvGSOv axrinrgov 
%X^ ^-i 'then came the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holding 
a golden sceptre,' where the masculine ex^^v is used^on ac- 
count of Teioealao' nolioqxovfxepr] J^oloLf ' Soli being besieged,' 
where the feminine noliogxoviuivi] has reference to nolcg im- 
plied in ^olov eld- biv §ii] "Hgcxxh/b], « the might of Hercules 
having come,' where ^b]'HQaxhfci]^ * the Herculean might,' is 
equivalent to 'Hcjaxlrig * Hercules;' cpO^e zixpov^ ' dear child,' 
addressed to Hector, 

Note 3. In some instances the gender and number of the 
adjective or participle are determined by the noun governed 
by its substantive; as mr^vibv (jcyila^ fieyav cciyvTiwv 
inod 6 Laav T £ g, ' flocks of birds frightened by a great vul- 
ture,' where the masculine vTiodeiaavxeg refers to tcttjvqv, 
although it agrees in case with (i/e'^at- q)S-6y y o v oqvI'&ojv 
aaxi^ kX dt^ovTa g ol'(TTg(i>, « the sound of birds fiercely utter- 
ing loud shrieks,' where the masculine x}.(^'rovTctg agrees in 
case with cpMyyov, but in gender and number with ogvlS^wv. 

Note 4. If an adjective, pronoun, or participle refers to 
two or more substantives, it is generally put in the plural. 
If the substantives denote animate beings, the adjective is 
masculine when one of the substantives is masculine. E. g. 
7t axqb g xal fir^ r go g o^xen (jlov 'rojovjwv, ' my father and 
mother being no longer living.' If the substantives denote 
ivaniraate objects, ihe adjective is generally neuter; as 
xdlXo g xal i cr / v g deilo^ xal xaxw ^vvoi^xovvra, ' beauty 
and strength accompanying a timid and cowardly person ;' 
XiS-OL T6 xal nliV&OL xal ^vXa xal xsQa/uog dTdxiwg i g g i fi f^ e v a^ 
* Stones, clay, wood, and brick, lying scattered.' 



§ 137~§ 138. ADJECTIVE. 165 

The adjective often agrees with one of the substantives ; 
as o(i di nov ri/ueT6QaL t' (kXo x o v xal vrima rixva e2uj^ M ^e^^k-^ 
Qoi^av noTvdiy^Bvai,^ < our wives and little children stay 
at home expecting us.' 

The adjective or participle may be put in the dual if it 
refers to tvv^o substantives; as Kalliagje xal 'Alm^i^udrjg r^jce- 
%i]v ayovTs top IJgodLXov, < both Callias and Alcibiades came 
bringing Prodicus.' § 155. Note 2. 

Note 5. A collective noun in the singular often takes an 
adjective or participle in the plural; as Tgob^v tlovjeg 
drinox' '^qyslMv ctt 6lo g, » the army of the Greeks having at 
length taken Troja.' ^ 155. Note 3. 

Note 6. A substantive in the dual may take a participle 
in the plural; as ^co xccTa^dvreg, 'we both going down.' — 
In Homer, the dual oaas ' a pair of eyes,' and Sovqs 'two 
spears,' are accompanied by plural adjectives; as oacre ^jae*- 
vd, 'bright eyes;' cilxi^fia dovgs, 'two stout spears.' 

A substantive in the plural sometimes takes a participle in 
the dual ; in which case only two things are meant; as 
aiyvmol k16,1;ovt6 itidxovjai., ' two vultures uttering loud shrieks 
are fighting.' — -The duals Svo 'two,' and a/ucpoj 'both,' are 
frequently joined to plural substantives; as ^vo Tcgiovg for 
Svo y,gL(x), 'two rams;' ^vo ^vxo.g for dvo ipvx^, 'two souls;' 
dvoiv fii.acrfA(jcT(x)v^ ' of two stains.' § 155. Note 4. 

§ 138. 1. An adjective or adjective pronoun is often used 
substantively, the substantive, with which it agrees, being 
-understood. E.g. q)llog sc. dvrig, 'a friend;' ^x-^Q^? 'an 
enemy ;' o^^w^og ' namesake ;' ol &p7]toI ' mortals;' Tci i^nd 
' my things ;' to i'diov ' private property.' 

2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle is 
often equivalent to the abstract of that adjective or participle. 
In this case the article precedes the adjective or participle. 
E. g. TO xtsTov 'divine nature, divinity ;' to xaUr 'the beau- 
tiful, beauty;' ToyeXoTov 'the ridiculous ;' to upalad^jjToy 'in- 
sensibility, stupidity ;' to fuellov ' the future.' 

Note. Masculine or feminine adjectives often supply the 
place of adverbs ; as Zs-dg X'^ ''^^9 «i^V> ^ Zeus went yester- 
day,' where the adjective x^^l^9 *hesternns,' is equivalent to 
the adverb x^^9 * yesterday ;' x^soi ts xal (kt^egsg evdot^ n a ><- 
VTL) X t'O t., ' both gods and men slept all night.' So all adjec- 



166 SYNTAX. § 139. 

lives in ctTog answering to the question nocrTaTog ; ' on what 
day?' (§ 62. 3) as TQuaXog dccplxeio, 'he canne on the third 
day ;' nBfxmalov d' Aiyvnjov Ixouea&oi, * on the fifth day we 
arrived in Egypt.' 

It has already been remarked (§ 124.) that the neuter of 
an adjective is often used adverbially. 

ARTICLE. 

§ 139. 1. In its leading signification the Greek article 
corresponds to the English article the, E. g. o upr^Q * the 
man,' ol drdgeg 'the men,' -^ yvvri 'the woman,' ccl yvt^ulxeg 
*the women,' xd devdQa ' the trees.' 

The Greek has no word corresponding to the English an 
or a; e. g. (xvd-QMnog ' a man,' ^vo^v ' a dog,' Innog ' a horse,' 
^vg Tcal yalri, ' a mouse and a cat.' 

2. Proper names very often take the article; as 6" Olvii^ 
Ttog ' Olympus,' tov Jwg ' of Zeus,' ccl 'Ad-rivav ' Athens.' But 
the article is omitted when the proper name is accompanied 
by a substantive (§ 136.) with the article ; as ' ^i (tt r/ g 6 
*E;<6xgaTLdov via g tov Qeuaalibv 8aGdeo)g, ' Orestes the son 
of Echecratides the king of the Thessalians ;' nuTaxog 
6 MvTLh]valog, ' Pittacus of Mytilene ;' lov dgofiea ^Juvkloy, 
*Phayllus the racer.' 

Note 1. The article accompanies the leading character 
of a well known story or anecdote; as tw 2 e q t cp i (o Is- 
yovTv^ OTV ov ^t' a^Tov^ dAAd dia tt^v nokiv evdoxLjuol^ ' to a Seri- 
phian saying, that he (Themistocles) became famous not 
through himself, but through the city, he replied,' where 
the article tq) is used, because the remark of the Seriphian 
and the reply of Themistocles were well known in Athens; 
inl TOV zaXov leyMv na l d 6 g, 'in speaking of the beautiful 
boy' of the story. So in English, " Let us see," said the 
blind man. 

Note 2. The article sometimes accompanies the second 
accusative after verbs signifying to call ; as tni'/eiQovGv §6.1- 
"kevv TOV ^e^LTinov, dcvaaalovvTBg tov tt q o d 6t t] v, 'they at- 
tempted to strike Dexippus, saying that he was a traitor,' 
not simply ' calling him a traitor ; t ov ^opov ddojQodo^ii]- 
TOV dvofidl;ovTsg^ ' declaring that he was the only person that 
eould not be bribed.' 



§ 140. ARTICLE. 167 

§ 140. 1. The article is very often separated from its 
substantive by an adjective, possessive pronoun, participle, 
or by a genitive governed by the substantive. E. g. 6 xalhs^ 
Txrig '^yddwv, 'the elegant Agathon ;' toj^ efidv xal gov nolvda^ 
y.gvv"lTvv, ' my much lamented Itys and thine ;' tov Qeaaa- 
l(bv ^aadeu}c^ ' of the king of the Thessalians.' 

It is also separated by other words connected with the 
substantive ; as tov ;<«t' acnoa Zrjvdg, ' of Zeus who dwells in 
the stars;' 6 ^ex' oovid^^v ^log, 'the life passed among the 
birds ;' ilg yocQ ovxog ovnl (== 6 snl) ttj^ xgeiud&Qag uvr^q ; ' pray 
who is that man in the basket V In such cases a participle 
{commonly y8v6fi6vog 'having happened' or ' taken place,' or 
ihv ' being') may be supplied. 

Two or even three articles may stand together; as to ttJ 
Ttolsi. uvixcpbQov^ « that which is profitable to the city ;' rd t?]? 
Tibv nollibu ipvxrig o/iifiaTa, ' the eyes of the souls of the ma- 
jority of mankind.' 

Note 1. Sometimes the article is separated from its sub- 
stantive by the governing word; as Tovimv dij (uiTjt^ twv 
Tig(jTQaTL0)T6(x)v (hg evinqi^ue^ 'now as one of the soldiers 
set fire to one of these houses,' where twj/ ng crxgaTianicov 
stands for tcdv (nqazmTrnv Tig. This arrangement often 
occurs in Herodotus. 

Sometimes the article is separated from the word to 
which it belongs, by an incidental proposition ; as ^Lnonai}^ 
Gag TOV, onoTB ^ovIolvto skocgtoi, yvvalxa (iy 6 u S- a v, ' having 
stopped them from marrying whenever they wished,' for 
d,nonavGag tov yvvaXxa Hysa&ai, onoTe ^ovloivTO exaGTOt, 

2. The w^ords connected with the substantive may be 
placed after it; in which case the article is repeated. The 
first article however is often omitted. E. g. Klsiyevrjg o 
^tjf^og, ' little Ciigeiies ;' GibC^s noliv ty^v '^usTegav, save our 
city;' id? eixovg rag e/ndcg, 'my images;' eg rug togag rdc hi^ 
gocg, ' in the other seasims ;' al q^xGsig al twp nqayfj&ibiv, * the 
nature of things ;' ndlsv ttJ 'Jd-r^vaiMv^ ' the city of the Athe- 
nians.' This arrangement is more emphatic than that ex- 
hibited in § 140. 1. 

Note 2. In some instances this order is inverted ; e. g, 
ToXka Tvcycx&d (== id aXXcc id dycxitd) for T&ytxi^a Td>l>l«, * the 
other good things;' ^v tti tov Jwg rr^ ^syiGiri iooir^ for ij' 
T^ fisylGjri ko^T^ T^ TOV Ji6g, ' on the grand festival ol'Zeus ;' 



168 SYNTAX. § 140. 

TO ^v ''Aq^ndla t 6 rov diog tov Avxaiov leqov for t 6 tov dwg tov 
Avxixiov IsQov TO iv 'Agxadia, ' the temple of Zeus Lycaeus, in 
Arcadia.' 

Note 3. The participle preceded by the article is equi- 
valent to ijcsivog og ' is qui, he who,' and the finite verb; as 
T ov g Ttolefiriaavrag JoTg ^aQ^dooig ivexM/uUxcre, ' he prais- 
ed those who fought against the barbarians,' where Tovg 
noXsfiriaapTag is equivalent to ixelvovg o'H iTToU/tajauv. But 
nole^riuapxag xoXg ^(xQ^dQoig would mean * he praised them 
because they fought against the barbarians.' 8o ol naqdvieg, 

* those who are present,' but nagd^Teg, 'being present;' ol 
TTJg kavTU)v diavolag 61 v y m Q ov p t e g^ 'those who neglect 
their minds,' but ttj^ kavx^iiv diavoiug oliycjgovvTsg^ ' while 
they neglect their minds.' 

Hence, a participle preceded by the article is often equi- 
valent to a substantive; as ol g)LXoaocpovpT6g = ol cpiXoGoopot^ 

* the philosophers,' ol rvqavvsvovTeg = oi ivQavvoi ' the kings.' 
See also § 138. 2. 

Note 4. When the article stands between the adjective 
and the substantive, or before the substantive followed by 
the adjective, the substantive with the article involves the 
relative pronoun o^ ; as ov youg ^uvavaov x r^ v x e x ^ V ^ ixxi]- 
u6Lfii]v^ ' I do not possess a low art,' in other words, ' my 
profession is not illiberal,' equivalent toi^ t^^X^V^ ^^ Ikxtj- 
udfiyv, ov ^(xpavcrog eaxiv, ' the art which I possess is not low ;' 
r rj X^^ev TtoLyxixiDxegcc ra^ ngd^eig di]Xov<jL, 'they describe 
the deeds more poetically,' equivalent to ^ X^^i'g, f^ xag 
ngd^sig dijlovai^ nou^xiyajxega eoxip. 

3- When a noun, which has just preceded, is to be repeated, 
the article belonging to it generally stands alone. E. g. 
X V ^ I o V xbv x(bp IdiojTSvopxMP^ 7] X V x(bv xvgavpsvdpxMv^ 

* the life of private persons, or that of those who are rulers.' 

Note 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the 
article. The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly 
the following : vlog ' son,' as "Aygcx)v 6 Nivov, xov Bt^^ov, 

* Agron the son of Ninus, who (Ninus) w^as the son of 
Belus ;' 6 KIblpIov, 'the son of Clinias,' that is, Alcibiades : 
yri or x^ga 'land, country,' as sig ttip ewuTcoy, < to their own 
country ;' t] rnusxiga 'our country:' yp(x)ui] ' opinion,' as xax& 
ys xrjv ifzriv^ * in my opinion at least :' odog < way,' as Tr/y Ta- 
Xl(Txr]v, ' the quickest way, as quick as possible :' ngayfm^ as 
xd x^ig nolsojQy * the aflairs of the state.' 



\ 140—^ 14L ARTICLE. 169 

4. The demonstrative pronoun (§ 68.), and the adjective 
jrtag or dnag 'all,' are placed either before the snbstanlive 
and its article, or after the substantive. E. g. ot«j^ tl tov- 
% (X) V T(bv (T0(pva(ji6(.TMv i'dix), 'when I see any of these 
devises ;' tovtov tov oqpvv, ' this bird ;' to ^6Lqog tovto, ' this 
burden ;' anavrag Toi)g diQvd^^ovg^ ' all classes of men ;' xdg 
pavg dndaag, 'all the ships.' 

Nevertheless the article in this case is often omitted ; as 
dilV 0(5' dvriQ, ' bin this man ;' ndi^xeg avd^QMnov, 'all men' in 
general. — il^^g in the singular without the article often 
ixieans every ^ each, quisque, 

'^' Olog ' whole,' often imitates its kindred nag ; sls riiv vv^^d-^ 
o^v, ' the whole night, all night ;' tov axdq)ovg olov, ' of the 
whole ship.' Also exaaTog ' each, eveiy ;' as toj/ onllirjv 
Exaarov, * every heavy armed soldier ;' huafnrjg xr^g oialixg, ' of 
each house ;' yond, ttj// rnusQav kxdajrjv, ' every day.' 

Note 6. ToiovTog (^ 73. 1) ' su^h,' is sometimes preceded 
by the article ; as e^ laXg roiaiuTaig iTiifieXeiaig, ' in pursuits 
of this sort,' or ' in such pursuits.' 

The article is sometimes placed before the interrogative 
pronoun rig; 'who?' and the pronominal adjective noTog 
(§ 73. 1) ; as to t/; 'and what is it?' rdc noXa xavia ; ' such 
as what?'— It is placed also before the indefinite pronoun 
^ei%a (§ 71. 2) ; as tov detva Yiyvchcrxeig ; ' do you know such- 
a-one V tov deXva, tov tov deXva, « such-a-one, the son of 
what-do-ye-call-him.' 

^ 141. 1. An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent 
to an adjective. E. g. ol tots av^gomoL, ' the men of that 
time, the men who lived in those days;' ol naXaL GO(pol av^ 
dgeg, ' the wise men of yore ;' K&dfxov tov ndXai^ ' of ancient 
Cadmus.' 

The substantive, to which the article belongs, is some- 
times omitted (§ 140. Note 5) ; in which case the adverb 
has the force of a substantive ; as ^\ aijgiov sc. rnuiga, * the 
morrow ;' ToXg iyyvrdnx) tov yivovg ' to the nearest relatives.' 

Note I. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly af- 
fect the adverb before which it is placed ; as to ngiau) ' for- 
ward, ahead ;' to ndlat or Tondlai ' \u olden time, anciently ;' 
10 Tiqiv or TOTiqiv 'formerly;' toc vvv or Tavvv 'now, at the 
present time ; to nolv ' for the most part ;' to avilna ' iuime- 
diately.' 

15 



170 SYNTAX. § 141—^ 142. 

2. The neuter singular of the article often stands before 
an entire proposition. E. g. yM tovto yiyquLnxui, to ouolujg 
d/LKfolv uxfjouo&ai., ' this also is written, To hear both sides 
impartially;' to /uXxa y.ul aidi^ou deXk> ehui lu, tc//?/, * the 
saying, That the walls ought to be built of brass and iron;' 
nay-bv to tvIi^elv (= to nipsiv iuTl xux6f)y ' drinking is bad.' 

3. It is placed also before single words which are ex- 
plained or quoted; as t o d' vjuslg orav al'Tiuj, ir^u ndXiv XL- 
yw, 'and when I say YOU, I mean the state;' to) bIvolv 
Xq^o^ai^ xul T (D /wglg, xal jQ ulkojv, xul (uvolotg IjEqovg, 
' to use the words bJi'ul, /otolg, alloiv^ and a multitude of 
others ;' to k ar u ^ a tovto noD.ovg di) tkjli^v l^rinaii^xev, ' this 
TcaTu^u (down with him) has already deceived very many 
persons ;' to ov, < the word ov not.' 

Note 2. Sometimes the article is in the gender of the 
substantive which refers to the quotation ; as xah)t^ lifrj na- 
Qa i p E G V V elfOii T r^v xaddvva /lilv e qS e t v, 'he said 
that, To sacrifice to the gods according to thy power, was 
very good advice,' where the gender of the article before 
the expression of Hesiod is determined by the substantive 
TiaQaipsaiv. 

In grammatical language, every word regarded as an in- 
dependent object takes the gender of the name of the part 
of speech, to which it belongs ; as ri iyih sc. dvTbJwula, 'the 
pronoun ^/w I;' r) i57r6 sc. TTQo&saLg, ' the preposition ^n6 un- 
der ;' y<xQ sc. (TvvdsG^og^ ' the conjunction y<JiQ for.' Such 
expressions are found in the ancient native Greek gram- 
marians and scholiasts. 

§ 142. 1. In the Homeric, Ionic, and Doric dialect, the 
article is very often equivalent to ode^ ovTog, ixeXvog (^ 68.), 
or to ai)T6g in the oblique cases. E. g. ibv ovslqov =tovtov 
TOP opsLgov, 'this dream;' rrig de G^E^bv r^ld-' ' Evocrtxx^(*)v, 
'and the Shaker of the earth came near her,' where rr^g is 
equivalent to avrrig- ai d' tnefjiv^av 'AS^Tjvairj ts xal '^Hgrj^ 
'and they, namely, Athena and Hera, muttered.' 

The Attic dialect often uses the article in this sense, par- 
ticularly in the formula 6 /ubv — o de, 'the one' — 'the other, 
another;' as oTav 6 fxhv zeivri ^talcog, 6 d' enavaGTQecpeiv 
dvvi]Tav, ' when the one pulls violently one way, and the 
other is able to turn it back;' ToXg fiav nooaa/orTag tov 
vovv, T(bv d e Qiude Tr\v cpMvriv drs/oiuevovg, ' paying attention 
to some persons, but not tolerating even the voice of others.' 



^ 142— § 143. PRONOUN. 171 

Note 1. The article is equivalent to the demonstrative 
pronoun, when it stands immediately hefore the relative 
oV, oaoc, or oloQ' as oddevog t (b v o cr a alaxvpi]v lurl cpBQOvxa 
' none of those things which bring shame ;' y^cal t6 ye (5 to 
r^o^evov rideTac, ' and that with which the pleased is pleased ;' 
/tiiaelv T i) :; olog iteq olxog^ < to hate those who are like this 
man.' 

Note 2. The proper name is sometimes joined with 6 
liBv^ as 6 fiBv ovracr' 'Atv^viov o^bC dovgl, 'JtpTilo/og, ' the one 
(of the sons of Nestor), namely, Antilochus pierced Atym- 
nius with the sharp spear ;' a^A' 6 /uet^ ev Javliao Ti]Qevg q^tisv^ 
^ but he, to wit, Tereus, dwelt in Daulia. 

Note 3. 'O/nsv — ode are not always opposed to each 
other, but instead of one of them another word is often put ; 
as ysiogyog ^bp slg, 6 de oli^odd^og, ' the one a husbandman, the 
other a builder of houses.' 

Note 4. The second part, viz. 6 ds, of the formula gene- 
rally (not always) refers to a person or thing different from 
that to which the first part, viz. 6 ^eV, refers. 

2. In the same dialects, the article is often equivalent to 
the relative pronoun & (§69.). E. g. fIfalT]Keg, to I jt e q, == 
<Pab]K6g^ ol TCEQ, < the Phaeacians who ;' sarv ds aal allog oqvig 
Igog, T (3 (--= (5) ovvo^a cpoivi^ ' there is also another sacred 
bird, the name of which is phoenix.' 

The tragedians (iEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides) some- 
times use the article in this sense. 



PRONOUN. 

PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

§ 143. The personal pronouns ou, oF, e, &:c. (§ 64.), refer 
either to a person or thing different from the subject of the 
proposition, or to the subject of the proposition, in which 
they stand. E. g. (II. IV, 534-5) 01 h, ^leyap neg ioina aai 
Xq>di^iov xal dcyavov, waar and cr cpe itov, < who drove him away 
from their position, though he was great, valorous and re- 
nowned,' where k refers to Thoa.^, and (rcpslojv to the Thra- 
cians, the antecedent of or hejslleTd acpi., 'he commanded 
them.' 



172 SYNTAX. § 143— § 144. 

They often refer to the subject of the preceding proposi- 
tion, if the proposition, in which they stand, is closely con- 
nected with tfie precedirij^ ; as Ji/uoTcr^dfjg dk, deluug /ut^^ av 
(= ov) iyneiQi^To dagelog, ' but Democedes, suspecting that 
Darius was trying to entrap him,' where fi3 refers to d^iiiO' 
xr^df/g. 

Note 1. It is observed that in Homer and Herodotus 
these pronouns generally refer to a person or thing different 
from the subject of the proposition, in which they stand ; 
but in the Attic writers, they are generally reflexive, that is, 
they refer to the subject of the proposition, in which they 
stand, or of the preceding, if the second be closely connected 
with it. 

Note 2. ^cplaiv in II. X, 398, stands for v/uTv. Compare 
§ 145. Note 1, and § 146. Note 2. 

Note 3. The personal pronouns are sometimes repeated 
in the same proposition for the sake of perspicuity ; as 

^vvsrd fiov doxstg liyecv, 'to us, although we have not 
been brought up in the land of the Greeks, nevertheless thou 
seemest to speak intelligible things.' 

§ 144. 1. ytvidg, in the genitive, dative, and accusative, 
without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, ity 
them, E. g. ilsv&egovj^Tsg rag ndlscg rug "^ ElXrjviTiug, xal §orj^ 
S-ovPTsg a-uralg 'liberating the Grecian cities, and assisting 
them ;' 6 vofiog a-dr 6 v ovk ea, ' the law will not permit him^' 
^;^e^ ds tceqI avr ov riva yv{h^n]v ; ' what does she think of him ?^ 
^j^cb fA.Bv ai) To-ug ov xgivcb, ' for my part I will not judge them.' 

Note 1. Sometimes avzog is used in this sense when the 
noun, to which it refers, goes before in the same proposi- 
tion ; eyo) juev ovv /9 a o" t- 1 £ a, (j) nolXa ovJMg loxl xa av/ujuaxcc, 
etneq ngo&v/usiTaL rijudg anoliaac, ovx olda o T^ del avTov 
ofioaav, ' now, for my part, I do not see why the king, whose 
resources are so great, should swear to us, if he really in- 
tends to destroy us.' This happens when the noun is sepa- 
ted from the verb, upon which it depends, by intermediate 
clauses. The same may be said of f^ii^y viv^ =avT6v (<§ 64. 
Note 2). ^ 146. Note 2. 

Aviog is sometimes joined to the relative pronoun og for 
the sake of perspicuity ; as wj^ 6 fikv avicbv, ' one of whom;' 
ical idoTu o/log nolvg, ov dgc&firicraL av t b v ovdslg \dvPOLTO^ ' and 



^ 144. PRONOUN. 173 

behold, a great multitude, which no man could number.' 
Examples of this kind often occur in the New Testament. 
Compare ibid. 

2. AvTog, joined to a substantive, signifies self, very, E. g. 
i)7t^ a'vT 6 V (^J6/v(bg Tovgavov (= tov ovgavov) tov zvTTcxQoy, 
' really under the very vault of heaven ;' dia/unegeg ^an id og 
a-vT rig, ' through the shield itself;' avzop ere, 'thee thyself.' 
In this case, avrog is placed either before the substantive and 
its article, or after the substantive (§ 140. 4). The article 
however is often omitted. 

Note 2. The personal pronouns £/c5, av, ri^elg, {i/usTg, with 
which civTog is put in apposition, are very often omitted ; in 
which case avidg has the appearance of ^/w, av, &:c. ; avrol 
fLsv evdeeXg i a fi 6 v T(bv xad^^ rnueQav, ' we are in want of our 
daily bread ;' ad t o I (palvea^s jLtdllov jovjoig muTsvovTeg^ 
'you seem to place more confidence in these men.' 

Note 3. AvTog often signifies ^ovog 'alone;' as a^xol 
yd^ eafisv, xovnio (= xal ovtux)) ^evov naqsKTiv, ' for we are by 
ourselves, and strangers have not yet come.' 

Ai)T6g is used when a person or thing is to be opposed to 
any thing connected with it; as nollag d' Icpd^l^ovg ipv/^g 
^'A'idv Trgotaipev r^g^cov, av t oij g de hlihqia zev/s xvveaaiv, 
' and sent prematurely many brave souls of heroes to Hades, 
and made their bodies the prey of dogs,' where aiuTovg 'them,' 
that is ' the heroes,' or rather, ' their bodies,' is opposed to 
yjv/(ig. 

Ai}T6g denotes the principal person as distinguished from 
servants or disciples; as cpeqe, rig oi)Tog o^inl xgeud&gag d^r]^ ; 
MAQHTFL2. a-dxog. :ETPE^nAJHZ. xlg avxog; MA- 
QHTH2. 2(x)7io6LTi]g, ' Pray who is that man in the basket ? 
DISCIPLE. It is he. Strepsiades. What he ? disciple. 
Socrates. 

Note 4. Avxog is often appended to the subject of a pro- 
position containing the reflexive pronoun hamov^ for the sake 
of emphasis ; as nalavaxriv vvv nagaayceva'Qexai [Zevg] tn' ad- 
%b g a i; T (5, ' Zeus is preparing^ a combatant against himself;' 
slqog de, xr^ edgvidii] iaTl [rj Kaanb]^ av x ri s a)v x ri g, oxto) 
-riaeQBixiv, 'the maximum breadth of the Caspian sea is eight 
days' sailing.' We remark that in such cases adT6g is placed 
as near havxov as possible. 

15* 



174 SYNTAX. § 144— § 145. 

Note 5. Avj^g is often used with ordinal numbers (§ 61.), 
to show that one person with others, whose number is less 
by one than the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of; 
as fXBTa Tuvia r^^ithi] TTQsa^evTr^g ig Auxeduiuova avroxoarujo, 
d 8 X (X T g auTog, ' after these things he, with nine others, 
was appointed plenipotentiary to Lacedaemon,' where dtxa- 
Tog (xuTog is equivalent to luei' u).).un' ivyiu '- with nine others;' 
TtefiTTTog ixviog^ = uei' uU,o)v TeTruou)i^^ ' witli (bur others.' 

Note 0. In some instances uvrog is equivalent to the de- 
monstrative ovTog or iy.Hi'og * tiiat ;' as ^tiItuvg' avxr^v, 
7]Tt^g xtI., 'I despise her, who' &c. ; « i3 t rj, r^ iiloloiv Ithukx- 
fisO^a uo/eiv, ' that which teaches us how to manage vessels.' 

3. AvTog^ with the article immediately before (§ 65.), sig- 
nifies, the same, idem, E. <f. TjfQl T(hv uvTC)t^ jr^g uv- 
T rj g il^dqag ov juvtu yiyvdjGxoasp, 'we do not have the 
same opinion concerning the same things, on the same day;' 
xaxdc di) TO)/ avTov /^oa^oi^, « just about the same time.' 

REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 145. The reflexive pronouns (§ 66.) suavTov, aeavTov, 
kaviov, refer to the subject of tfie proposition in which they 
stand, or to the subject of the preceding, if the second be 
closely connected with it. E. g. rj nooxvr]^ sk^uivs, xal 
(TavTT^v bTXideixvv joTg ^hoig, ' Procne, come out, and 
show thyself to the strangers;' 'QrjTsXTS av^u^ovlovg Tovg 
dfieivop cpQovovPTug v/uibv avzCiv, 'you wish to have those 
for your advisers, who reason better than you;' ol fiev, 
orav I'dojcri TOvg ud-h/Tug e a v x (b v ti^exa novovPTug, < the (spec- 
tators) on the one hand (feel proud), when they see the 
athletes laboring for them' (the spectators). § 143. 

Note 1. The pronoun haviov sometimes stands for ti^av- 
Tov or ueavTov ; as ^^t r^uag aveoiod^av e a v t o v g, 'we must 
ask ourselves;' £t(5' In^Tvuuig fiooop top « i; ttj ? olat^u, xtI., * and 
if thou really knowest thy fate,' &:c., where ftijT?]^ stands for 
o-avTTjg. Compare § 146. Note 2, and § 143. Note 2. 

Note 2. Sometimes the third person plural and dual of 
this pronoun stands for the leciprocal uIItiIujp 'of one an- 
other ;' as xa&' a^Toiv for xax' allr^lovp, ' against each other.' 
§ 155. Note. 



^ 146— § 147. PRONOUN. 175 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 146. It has already been remarked that the possessive 
pronouns (§ 67.) are, in signification, equivalent to the geni- 
tive of the nersonal pronouns (§ 143.). E. g. ol'xcj tw aQ, = 
Tw Otto dov, ' in thy house ;' ^nl ttj^ s/urig ^a»^g ,== inl xr^g ^wrjg 
jtiov, ' during my life ;' nalda aov, = naldd aov, 'a son of thine;' 
i^ari xeq)alri^ = zecpal'^ fiov, ' by my head.' 

Note 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used oh- 
jectively ; as a/dd fis a 6 g ts TtoS-og, ad ts ^r^dea, a-q t' 
dyavocpgoavvi] /Lislu/dsa S^vf^ov dnijvQa, 'but my regret for thee? 
and the remembrance of thy wisdom and gentleness, de- 
prived me of sweet life,' where crdg 7i6&og does not mean, 
' the regret which thou hadst,' but, ' the regret which I had 
for thee.' 

Note 2. In some instances eog = og (§ 67. Note) is put 
for ifiog or aog- as cpgscrlv r^uiv (= aFc) for cpgsulv e^alg, ' in my 
soul or heart or mind.' Compare § 145. Note 1. 

Also hog ' his,' for crcpsrsgog ' their, and acpBTsgog for eog. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 147. 1. Otiog generally refers to that which immedi- 
ately precedes; o^s to that which imniediately follows. 
E. g. '^'/ovTi da ol TOvTov To^ Tioi^ov 718/inpao'a tj TofivoLg xij- 
gvxa slsye x d d s- ^ SI ^aadsv Mridix)i^, tctI., ' while he (Cyrus) 
was carrying on these operations (which I have just de- 
scribed), Tomyris sending a herald said lliese words t(W)im ; 
O king of the Medes,' &c. xavxa dxovaag 6 Kvgog (jwexd- 
lecFS IJegaeujv jovg ngmovg- avrayeigag deroiuTovg^ arl.^ 
'hearing this, Cyrus convoked the leading men of the Per- 
sians ; and bringing them together,' 6lc, 

Note 1. The demonstrative pronouns ovTog and ode are 
sometimes equivalent to the adverhs hiavd-a, (x)de 'here ;' as 
avTi] de GOV yr^g neglodog nda)]g. ^ Ogdg ; A t d e (.dv ' Ad^riifav^ 
'here thou seest a map of the whole earth. Seest thou? 
Here is Athens ;' dlV tj Aaxedvd^mn^ nov 'utli> ; MAOHTHI^. 
^ Onov 'aiiv ; ai3T?//', ' but where is Laceda3mon ? disciple. 
Where is it? here it is.' Compare § 13^. Note. 

2. 'EaeXvog regularly refers to a remote person or thing 
E. g. TOVTOV I yovp oW iyih, x d x e t> v o v i, '1 know this one, 



176 SYNTAX. § 147— § 148. 

and that one.' But it often refers to that which immediately 
precedes, in which case it corresponds to the English he; 
as t/ dr^ia Tovxi Te&OQv^Si]KE tov Aia'/v^ov ; AIAK02. 'E x e l» 
vog elxB rbv Tgaycod lxov d-Qovoi^^ ' vvhy does this trouble ^s- 
chylus? ^Eacus. He (iEschylus) had possession of the 
tragic throne.' 

Note 2. Sometimes the demonstrative refers to a noun 
which goes before in the same proposition, if that noun has 
been separated from the c^overning word by intervening 
clauses ; as ov yuo fiovvov rovg allovg^ d.llu aul t d v fnijc v z t^ v, 

o^ einero ttj gtqutit^ tuvtyi, Meyiaiiijv loj/ 'Axuot^ripu^ t ovtov 

TOV ei'navia ix T(bv Igoiv xd /uMopid ucpi ix^ulveiv^ (pixvegdg ioju 
Aeix)vidi]g dLno7ii^7io)v, 'it is evident that Leonidas tried 
to send away not only the others, but also the soothsayer 
Megistias the Acarnanian, who followed this army,. ...I 
mean the one who prophesied what would happen to them.' 
§ 144. Note 1. 

The demonstrative pronoun sometimes follows the rela- 
tive in the same proposition ; as 'Ivdov noTatiov, o^ xooxodeL- 
lovg devTsgog ovrog noraiuibv tkxvtujv Traoi/eTav^ 'the river 
Indus, which is the only river in the world, except one (the 
Nile), that produces crocodiles.' ibid. 

RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

<§) 148. 1. The relative pronoun {§ 69.) agrees with 
the nouiij to which it refers, in gender and number. Its 
case depends on the construction of the clause in which 
it stands. E. g. 

JVe oxls ISt] g, g icm xvcpUg, * Neoclides, who is blind ;' 
MiG(x) 71 I It i] V, (J T L g wcpslsTv naToav ^gadvg neapvxB, ' I 

hate that citizen, who is slow to aid his country.' 
To)/' d(x)dsxa fxv (bv, a ^ elu^eg, ' for the twelve minoe, which 

thou receivedst.' 

So sxsTvog, oi)7tsQ d^oi^Ajiov elUicpaTS, 'he, whose garment 
you have taken away ;' to ^dgog tovto, o av cpegeLg, ' this bur- 
den, which thou carriest ;' rocg allag nolstg, a g naga jovg og- 
xovg xaTedr\(pacn, < the other cities, which they have occupied 
in violation of the treaty ;' rriv dg/uoi^lav, riv ol naxegsg nage- 
dcoxav, * the style of music, which our forefathers have trans- 



§ 148. PRONOUN. 177 

mitted to us.' The word, to which the relative refers, is 
called the antecedent. 

This head includes also the relatives oaog, olog, &c. (§ 73.) ; 
as dlloi^ xe, (J t g juheari tov /grjaiov tqotcov^ 'and as many 
others, as possess a good character.' 

Note 1. In some instances a masculine relative pronoun 
in the dual refers to a feminine noun, likewise in the dual ; 
as 'Tificbp ev exdarcp dvo nvi icriov id i a ag/Oi^TS xal cHyovTe, olv 
knoinsS^a, « in each one of us there are two ideas governing 
and leading us, which we follow.' § 137. Note 1. 

Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the relative is deter- 
mined by the gender implied in the antecedent ; as ttqIv tj 
eloj T8 zal TCVQ(i}GO) rdi,' ^AS'r^vag^ o2 ye e^h xal notTsga tov 
ifiov vnrig^av adiTia noLSvvTsg, ' before I take and set fire to 
Athens, which city began first to injure me and "my father,' 
where ot refers to the inhabitants of Athens ; 2:6lov, ttiv 
(=r=i^j/) nkiTTTcp iiTjvl ellov oi JleQuav^ ' Soli, which the Persians 
took on the fifth month,' where ir^v refers to noUg implied 
in 26lov, § 137. Note 2. 

Note 3. The relative often agrees in gender with the 
noun which is joined to it by a verb signifying to call or 
name, to he, to believe ; as oi ^oiviTteg neqUnlo^ov t7\v (Xtc qtj v^ 
at KalevvTav KlriCdsg, ^ the Phoenicians sailed round the 
promontory, which is called Cleides ;' 6 cpo^og, riv aidih. 
TiolXocKtg 6v Tolg dvat loyoig bXjio^sv^ ' that kind of fear, which 
in our previous discourse we often called respect.' 

Note 4. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it is 
generally put in the plural. If the nouns denote animate 
beings, the relative is masculine when one of the nouns is 
masculine. E. g. Tsla^ihvog fuev Ai'ag xal T sv zgo g lyev^ 
vri&rj, Ilyleog d' 'A/tllsvg, o i' fxeyiUTOv y.al aacpeararop 
Usyxov edoaav ri^g a{)mv dcvdgelag, « Telamon begat Ajax and 
Teucer, and Peleiis begat Achilles, who (Ajax, Teucer, and 
Achilles) gave the greatest and clearest proof of their valor.' 
If the nouns denote inanimate objects the relative is gene- 
rally neuter ; as Tragi ts ttoIs^iov xal s lgi\ v rj g, a ueyiGiriv 
e^si duvafiip iv tco ^[(a to) tcov dpd^gihnwp, 'concerning war and 
peace, which things greatly affect hnman life.' § 137. Note 4. 

The relative often agrees in gender with one of the nouns 
to which it refers ; as unallaytrTsg noliatov xal -Kipdunoy xal 
X ag a X ri g^ eig r^v vvv ngbg aXh\lovg xuTedifjfiep^ ' being de- 



178 SYNTAX. § 148. 

livered from wars, dangers, and trouble, which we are now 
creating among ourselves.' Ibid. 

Note 5. The relative is often put in the plural, when 
it refers to a collective noun in the singular ; as leTne I a o v 
Tgu/ixop, ov g uixopiag oovxiri Tucpoog l^vxev, < he left the Tro- 
jan people, whom the ditch kept back contrary to their will;' 
Ttug ydiQ T t g ofivvcn, ol g ocpeilujv Tvy/avu), xiX., ' for every one, 
to whom 1 happen to owe money, swears,' &.c. § 137. 
Note 5. 

Also, when it refers to a whole class of persons or things 
implied in a singular antecedent; as urdo&log d^ (^^^iQ, « ^- 
TovQyog^ 0L7T6Q y,ul juoi'OL (jb)'^ovui yr^v, M^ut a manly per- 
son, belonging to the working class, which class are the 
bulwark of the land.' 

Note 6. On the other hand the relative in the singular 
often refers to an antecedent in the plural, when one of the 
persons or things contained in that antecedent is meant; as 
oli^6g ae jQibev /ueln^dr^g, 6'^ re xal all o v g ^lamev^ o g dp fj.iv 
^avdbv tlnj^ 'sweet wine affects you, which injures any one 
who takes it freely,' where og refers to any person contain- 
ed in ullovg. So Alveiuj yulenov as, xal i'cp&liLidv neg tovju^ 
7t d V T ix) V u V d-Qcbncov G^iucfav fiivog, o g yJ crsv dvia sld^ri, 
' jEneas, it is hard for thee, though thou art valorous, to ex- 
tinguish the might of every one, who may come against 
thee.' 

2. The proposition containing the relative is often placed 
before the proposition which contains the antecedent, when 
the leading idea of the whole period is contained in the 
former. E. g. ^/w f^sv, ovg uv zibv loyuw ^lyio kIvo)v, t ov ads 
Kal Tcodaasiv aivyo), ' I do not dare to do those things, which 
it gives me pain to hear;' y-ocl q' o v g fuev unsvdovTag i'doi', 
rov g (= TovTovg) fidla x^aoavvsuics, ' whom therefore he saw 
actively employed, them he much encouraged ;' yal fisl^ov' 
o O" T ^ ^ dvzl Trig a^Tou rcdrgag cpilop vo/uTCei^^ t ov to v ovda/uov 
Isyoj, 'and whoever has a greater friend than his own coun- 
try, him I call a contemptible man. This inversion often 
takes place also for the sake of emphasis. 

Note 7. This remark applies also to the relative abverbs 
(§ 123.); as ol d' ots dij g' ixapop, od-t axonov^'ExTOQog ey.Tav^ 
^8 V &' (=t6t£) ' Odvaaevg fxev eqv^s Q)y6ag tnnovg^ 'and when 
they came there where they had killed the spy of Hector, 



§ 149. PRONOUN. 179 

then Odysseus stopped the swift horses.' So of ocpga — T6g)^or, 
^fiog — TTifiogy ' when — then.' 

3. The antecedent is often wanting, when it is either a 
general word (as XQ^l^^ or ngayfia ' thing'), or one which can 
be easily supplied from the context. E. g. ol fih a ^ouleaSs 
leyovreg, ' the former saying what you like,' where a refers 
to nqayfiaTa governed by liyopTsg- to fiev ovv fiEye&og, vneg O) v 
crvvehjlv&aiuev, ti^Ilxovtop eaTiv, ' such is the magnitude of the 
business, for which we are assembled ;' dlV oW eyo)y\ d 
S^r^le' iaii, ' but I do know what a feminine noun is,' where 
a refers to Td ovo^ara governed by olda. So elulv ot leyovair^ 
'there are who say.' So in Latin, 'sunt quos curriculo 
pulverem Olympicum collegisse juvat.' 

Note 8. In some instances the antecedent is implied in a 
possessive pronoun; diS avavdglq xri rifis t eg a, olt l v a g us 
od dtecTibaa^&v, ' through the cowardice of us, who did not 
save you,' where rnxerega is equivalent to 'ri^^v (^ 146.), to 
which the relative ohiveg refers. 

<§> 149. 1. In general, Avhen the relative would regu- 
larly be put in the accusative, it is put in the genitive or 
dative, according as the antecedent is in the genitive or 
dative. This is called attraction. E. g. 

'Ea TGvTcov, ^v dv U^ri, 'From these things, which he 
may say,' where 6^ stands for the accusative & govern- 
ed by UBri, 

El xgr^i fis 71 a t. cr I V, otg ^'Agi]g eyeivaxo^ ^^XV^ uvvaipav, ' If 
I must come to close action with the children, whom 
Ares begat,' where olg stands for ovg governed by eyel' 

If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun {ovwg, exsZ^ 
rog), this pronoun is generally omitted (§ 148 3), and the 
relative takes its case; as 6g(baL yog 7\uag ov GT^gyopiag olg 
dv s/wfiev, ' for they see that we are not satisfied with what 
we have,' for (JTigyoviag ^Kslvoig, a (xv s/utuet" iiueTg ds 
%^L(xev ^^ ^v Tvyxavo^ev exovieg, ' but we go away from those 
possessions which we happen to have,' for i^ i x e I v (a)v, a 
Tvyx^po^iEv s/ovTsg- /g^ ds TOidg vovv s/ovTag negl fisp o) p I'craa^ 
(iiri ^ovlevsGxtav^ ' those who have sense should not be delibe- 
rating concerning things which they know,' for 'negl fiey 
hx 6 i p (jj v^ d Yaaaif. So ovdhp ydg dp ngd^aifi' dp, (o p ov aol 



180 SYNTAX. § 149. 

i^ilovy «I will do none of those things which thou dost not 
wish me to do,' equivalent to ovdei^ yuQ dv nqu^aLfx' (Iv l x e U 
y w v^ a [IB nqa^av oij aov cpilov IgtIv^ where IkbIvojv depends on 
oddiv^ and oi on nqa^ai. 

In case of attraction the noun joined to the relative pro- 
noun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to believe, also takes 
the case of the relative ; as ovx (ip fnov dox(b -vnd ye t ov r oj v^ 
^v ai)deiT7iovv{i)v xalBtg ycujlvead-aL, ' I do not think I shall 
be hindered at least by these mistresses, as thou callest 
them,' for rovTwv, dg ai) dsanolvag xakslg. ^ 148. Note 3. 

Note L In some instances the relative, even when it 
would be in the nominative, is attracted by the antecedent; 
as ovdiv xix) eiddieg x o) v r^v tcsqI SdiQdxg, ' as yet knowing no- 
thing of what happened in Sardes,' where tw^ (==6//) stands 
for l-xetvixiv d, * of those things which.' 

This is frequently the case with olog (<5> 73.) ; as ngog (5cV- 
^^ag rol/urj^ovg , oiovg xal'^i S^ tj v a to v g, 'to daring men, 
such as the Athenians are,' for olot^ xal 'yfd^rjvuTol eluiv 
yv6vT8g t oX g otoig rifil v xe xal -6 /uT v ^^alenrit^ noXvTslav 
Eivav drjfiioxQaTlav, ' knowing that a republican government 
is ill suited to such men as we and you are,' for rolg (= rotot^- 
'^otg, § 142. Note 1) oloi^ rjUFlg re xal -bfielg ia/usv. So xriv d* 
'hJEQav avTOv y v 6l d^ o v (no^xixtcrov , o2av ig ru jueiQoi) TtQuyfjLaxa^ 
'and sharpen his other jaw, so that he may be enabled to 
chew greater affairs,' where the full construction of the re- 
lative proposition is o2a dv eg rd ixei'C,o} nq^y [laxa ^quottov. — 
In some instances, the personal pronoun (e/w, ov) remains 
in the nominative, though olog has been attracted by its an- 
tecedent; as 6q(hv noXiOvg ai^dgag ev xaXg Tdc^eai, vBdviag de^ 
etovg crv^ diadedQaxoiag, ' seeing gray-headed men in order 
of battle, but young men like you decamping,' for o2ovg ui 
for olog (j-i) ei 

^HUxog sometimes imitates olog^ as tcu (= tLvi) y(xo elxbg a v- 
6 ga X v(p 6 V, ril I X V Qovxvdidrjv^ i^olea&at^ ; w[iat makes it 
right that a man of the age of Thucydides should be ruined V 
for r^lixog Qovxvdi8i]g eail- exeXvo dsivov t ol a v v r^X Lx o i (t b 
v(op, ' that is a hard thing to men of our age,' for toTuiv '^U- 
otoL vii) ia/iisv^ where the article is equivalent to TijUxovToig 
(§ 142. Note 1). 

Note 2. Relative adverbs (§ 123.) also are attracted by 
the word to which they refer; as ex ds y rig, o&e v ngoij'- 
xet^To, < and from the place where it lay,' where o&ev stands 



§ 149. PRONOUN. 181 

for od-if or oTtov, So diexoiul'C^ovTo ei'&vg, o & e v -^Tte^id-evro, 
Ttaldag^ * they straightway transported the children from 
where they had placed them,' where o&ev for onov refers to 
i.zsXS-sv understood. 

2. On the other hand, the antecedent is sometimes put in 
the case of its relative. E. g, MsUayQog da Tug fih rvfidtg 
ug elix^e (paveQai, ^ the honors which Meleager received are 
well known,' where tug n^aag stands for caI Tv/iiai' ova oJad^a 
^o iQa g ^ig tv/slv aviriv /QSihv ; ' knowest thou not the fate 
which she must meet?' Un fj^olq a v rig- (^p^oloyr^Ka^ev da ye, 
7T gdy fz a T g oh firixe Scddcntaloi fjir(ie ^a^r^xal elev^ tovto d^^ 
daKxbv ^'^ ehai, « we have admitted that the thing is not 
teachable, which has neither teachers nor learners.' 

Note 3. The same can be said of relative adverbs ; as 
TTO^^ajoi) fisv yag xal dlloas 6 it o v ucpi^iiq dyanr^aovcri ce, 
*they will love thee in many other places whither thou 
mayest go,' w^here alloae stands for allod^o or dXlaxov. 

3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent 
is put after its relative. E. g. ngbg &g6vovg dg (='^g) eyrj/ii' 
o To^oiag ndgig y v v a v z 6 g^ = ngog S-govovg yvvacxog, r^ v 
'iyrj^' 6 TQ^oTi^g Ildgvg, ' to the palace of the woman, whom the 
archer Paris married;' ytajauiievd'C^ovja i]g dg^oL / (h g a g^ =:i 
xaTaaH8vd(;ovTa Tr^p ;((bgav, tj g dg/ov, 'improving the coun- 
try, which he governed.' So o v ngmov o^olbv sla^ov ox' 
e7igid»Jii]v (TOL dfj.a^ Ida, = OT^ a7igid{xi]v gov dfia^tda tov no^orov 
6§ olov, OP ela^op, ' when I bought you a little car for the 
first obolus which I had received.' 

Frequently the leading words are attracted by, and placed 
after the relative; as dlV ol'/erav cpsvyMP, op riyeg fidg- 
Tvga,=ulV 6 ftdgzvg, op riyeg^ Oi/6Tai (psiuyup^ 'but 
the w^itness whom you brought has decamped ;' olnoLlavol 
i z sX p o I, 6) V opdjiiaTa fxeydla layeiai anl aocpia^ IJ lt t a x ov 
Ts xul B iapTog, ' those ancient persons, Pittacus and Bias, 
who are renowned for wisdom,' where w*/ attracts only the pro- 
per names ; toJcJ' o p liyeig top 'u4 g x d d a, = nZds tQ 'Jgxddi,, 
OP Uyecg, ' to this Arcadian, of whom thou art speaking,' 
where or affects 'u4g}cddc, but not the demonstrative pronoun, 
which is joined to it. 

The antecedent is placed after its relative even when ap- 
parently no attraction takes place ; as war' dnoqiiuyoig dp tJ y- 
T i J/' dp ^ovlri d Ix 1] p, 'so that you can gain any lawsuit you 
please ;' ixdvaaa^ai o v ex(t) ;^ t t w y o, 'to put off the tunic, 

16 



182 SYNTAX. § 150— § 151— § 153. 

which I have on,' for tbv xt'Tibva ov 'ix(a. But even here an 
attraction lies at the bottom. 

Note 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the 
antecedent is placed after the relative ; as l^yovg axovaovy 
ovg aovdvuTvxsXg ^xlx) (pioixtv, ' hear the melancholy news, 
which 1 have brought to thee,' for Uyovg axovaop dvarvxeXg^ 
ovg xtL 

§ 150. The relative pronoun og often stands for the de- 
monstrative pronoun, especially in the Homeric language. 
E. g. n6cTQoxlov xlaiw/usv' o yaq yigag itnl d^av6vTMv, < let us 
mourn Patroclus, for this (to mourn) is honor to the dead. 
In another place Homer says, t 6 ydio (= tovto yuo) yigag iaii 
yBQOPTAxiv, — So in the formula o? ^^v — og di, equivalent to d 
fikv — 6 di (§ 142. 1) — So in x«i og for ^(xl oviog, as xocl og, 
dfn^dicrag lueya, dcvadQibcrxet., ' and he, uttering a loud cry, jumps 
up^' — So in rid' og, ' said he,' used parenthetically. 

Note. Frequently the relative is apparevtly put for the 
demonstrative; as (II. X., 314 6l seq.) rjv di ng Iv Tq^Boov 
Alikbiv, EvfjLrideog vlog, xtA., o g Qa tots Tgoiaiv le xal '^Ekioqo 
fivd^ov eeinsv, ' there was among the Trojans a certain Dolon, 
son of Eumedes, &c., that man, I say, spake to the Trojans 
and Hector.' We say, apparently, because in such cases 
the relativeness of the pronoun was no doubt felt by the 
Greeks. 

<5> 151. The relative often stands for the interrogative Tig; 

* who ? what?' (§ 153.) but only in indirect interrogations. 
E. g. (pg^t^sL Tw vavxlrigcj o or t t g eari, * he declares to the 
captain of the vessel who he is.' " Gong is particularly used 
when the person, who is asked, repeats the question before 
he answers it ; 3s MAQHTH^. ''Avd^gome tL noislg ; 2TPE' 
WIAdHH, '^ T V 7toi(b ; it d' alio y' ?) dialemoloyovixav xil. 

* Disciple. Man, what are you doing there ? Strepsiades. 
What am I doing? I am not doing any thing; 1 only philo- 
sophize with' &.C. ^' Ovofxa dk TovTotg ToXg S^eolg roTg ^aq^digovg 

rl ioTiv ; Tt eoTip ; Tgi^alloi^ ' what is the name of 

these barbarian gods f . . . . what is their name ? Triballi 
is their name.' 

§ 152. Frequently the relative has the force of the con- 
junction Iva ' in order that, that.' E. g. ngsa^elav ds n^finevv, 
yiTigjavi' igeX, 'and to send ambassadors to say these things;' 
^IV (xye dri Tiva (x&vtlv Bgeiofiev, og ;f' ei'Ttoi^, ' but come let us 
ask some prophet to tell us.' 



§ 153— § 154. PRONOUN. 183 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 153. The interrogative pronoun t/^; who? is used both 
indirect and indirect questions. E. g. rig 'ead-' 6 xonTcov 
triv S-vgav ; tovtI t I riv ; < who is knocking at the door? what 
was it?' (i^Ad 01) rig el; < but who art thou ?' w^ nvd^oid^' o it dQWv, 
7] xi cpujvcbv, Trivde Qvualfxi]v n6liPy ' that he might ascertain by 
what doings or sayings I can save this city,' where tL is in- 
direct, and runs parallel with o tl (^ 151.) ; olds x I ^oilexav^ 
' He knows what it wants.' — It is observed that xlg does not 
always stand at the beginning of the interrogative clause. 

This head includes also the interrogatives noaog ; noXog ; 

&C. (§ 73.) ; as y^axa n o L a g n^lag sicrr^ldeg sig x6 Tsl/og ; 

ovH old a, fidi. di' , eycoys itaxd. n o la g Tiiikag^ ' through what gate 

did you come into the castle? by Zeus I don't know 

through what gate,' where the first noiag is direct, and the 
second, indirect ; to nolov ^r\; ' pray what is that?' 

Note. Tig is sometimes equivalent to noiog ; ^ of what 
quality ? qualis ?' as t / j^ a ai^Tov cpriuof-isv ehai ; ' what kind of 
person shall we call him V 

INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 

^ 154. Tig annexed to a substantive means, a certain, some^ 
or simply, cr, an, E. g. bgi^vOeg x w s g, ^ some birds ;' If^o- 
vvav X I V a^ 'a well-rope.' 

Without a substantive it means, some one^ somebody, a 
certain one ; as ' Avxiudevijv x l g xalsadKjj, « let some one call 
Antisthenes.' 

Note 1. It is often equivalent to axaaxog, as el /uh x i, g 
dogu drj^aadix), ' let every one sharpen his spear well.' 

Sometimes it refers to the person who speaks, or to the 
persons addressed ; as Trot xig cpvyoi ; 'where can one (I) 
go?' rixei TG) (= xivi) xaxov, ' you will have it, (misfortune 
is coming to some body)'. 

Note 2. It is often joined to adjectives of quantity or 
quality; as yvvTi (hgavoTdTrj x l g, « a most blooming woman;' 
(hg cptXonollg x i g sad' 6 dalinojv, ' how friendly to the city the 
god is!' ndaog xvg; 'how great?' So riiuigag k^dofjii\Kovi6L 
T i,v a g^ ' some seventy days,' or, ' about seventy days.' 

Note 3. Tig ' some body = a distinguished person, a man 
of consequence ;' as xriy^v (palpo{.iai x i g iji^fg, = xai iy(j) q)al- 



184 SYNTAX. § 155— § 156— § 157. 

vo^aL Tig elvai, ' I too seem to be some body,' that is, 'a man 
of consequence ;' xai (aoi to fitv 7X(jb)Tov ido^e t I slnsTv, ' at lirst 
I thought he said something great.' 

Note 4. Sometimes the poets double rlg^ as ean yuQ t t g 
ov noddio ^TKxgiTjg nolig t t g < there is a certain city not far 
from Sparta.' 

RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 

§ 155. The reciprocal pronoun u.lh\loiv (^ 72.) often re- 
fers to the subject of the proposition in which it stands, 
which subject is in the plural or dual. E. g- lomviu noog 
dUrikovg dydgevov, » thus they talked to one another.' 

Note. Sometimes (xlh\lo)p stands for ^«utwj/, as Stlqdeioar 
dXXrilovg, ' they destroyed themselves,' that is, ' each de- 
stroyed himself,' § 145. Note 2. 

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 

§ 156. The subject of a proposition is that of which any 
thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed 
of the subject. E. g. 'AlytiSiixdrig eJnev^ 'Alcibiades said,' 
where 'AlxL^L(ldj]g is the subject of the proposition, and 
einev, the predicate; ^/o) uToluog ei/ui, 'lam timid,' where 
iy(x) is the subject, and droluog sIixl, the predicate. 

^ 157. The SUBJECT of a finite verb is put in the 
nominative. A finite verb agrees with its subject-no- 
minative in number and person. E. g. 

'E y (J) d' h nri V ov V rov Oebv tkjlvv acpodqa^ ' And I praised 

the god very much ;' 
2 i) dk nibg k (o g a g ; ' But how did you see V 
Tl dri&' 6 0ol^og eXajcev; '' And what did Phoebus 

say?' 

So riju 6l g (iiBv, S) TTQBG^vra, a V (1 8 ovIbtu (JL e v^ < we ad- 
vise thee, old man ;' i n el v o g rolai xgriaioTav cp do v sX, 'he 
envies the good ;' £3< naTooMovg eQ/o/uaL, o g ova elov a a t' 
6? oTov nsQ eyivsTo, ' I am coming from the house of Patrocles, 
who never washed himself since he was born ;' i'd^i' crv ra^^cog^ 
' go thou quickly ;' Tlg^vcpQ&asie nov 'a t i Xoeiiilog fzoi 
(raqpwg ; ' who can inform me correctly where Chremylos is ?' 



^^ 157. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 185 

Note 1. The nominative of the neuter plural very 
often takes the verb in the singular. E. g. 

ndOev fiov T a x ot x a r a v t I nqodBTtscrBv; ' whence 

did these evils come upon me V 
ToL V T I Tivog Tcic cpogj C a cr t I ; ' whose goods are these?' 

Sometimes masculines and feminines plural or dual take 
the verb in the singular ; as ^avdal dh x 6 fiav x ax evrivo- 
6 Bv (h^ovg^ ' her auburn hair was flowing over her shoul- 
ders ;' "T^^iv 7^-^ ovx s a t ovts xdgv' ex cpoginidog d o v loj n ag ag- 
gi^TtTovvTE ToXg OsM^ivoig, ' we do not exhibit two slaves 
throwing nuts out of a basket to the spectators.' So in the 
phrase eutw o?, = slulv o% (§ 148. 3), ' there are those who.' 

Note 2. If the verb belongs to more than one subject, it 
is regularly put in the plural and in the chief person. The 
chief person is the first with respect to the second or third, 
and the second with respect to the third. E. g. ^\ totc ^ ly- 
T I ooiv T n G e V d dim V xal 'A it 6 llco v reX/og ^fjialdvpav^ 
'then Poseidon and Apollo resolved to demolish the wall.' 

Frequently the verb agrees in number with one of the 
substantives, and especially with that which stands nearest 
to it ; as 6 s o g d' svdmg rjcp d v l a s i^ mvTov, ot t' ocp e v g, 
' both the god and the serpents suddenly disappeared ;' ovv 
d' Eigdg le Nojog t' eTCsas^ Zecpvgog ts dvaarig^ xal Bogirjg, 
^ Eurus and Notus rushed together, the blustering Zephyrus 
and Boreas,' which Virgil translates, ' una Eurusque NotuS' 
que RuuNT,' &c. 

The verb is often put in the dual, if it belongs to two 
substantives ; as i^ Ivgononxri xal rj xvQagtGiix^ noXi) d v a cp ^ ge-^ 
%ov dXlr^loiv^ ' the art of making lyres, and the art of play- 
ing on the harp differ much from each other.' § 137. Note 4. 

When the substantives are connected by the conjunction 
^ ' or,' the verb is frequently put in the plural, and some- 
times in the singular;; as ei ds x'''Agrjg ag/coav (.i&x^jg^ '-q 
fpol^og 'Jnollixiv^ ' but if Ares commence the fight, or Phoebus 
Apollo;' ov X6V i^(b d,y6.y(»^ i] aklog 'jt)(ai{bv^ ' whom I or 
any other of the Achaeans may bring.' 

Note 3. A collective noun in the singular very often has 
the verb in the plural ; as 'A6i]vaiuiv to nlriOog ^InTiag/ov 
ol'ovTai i^qo' "^Agixodiov xal 'AgicrroyelTovog Tigavvov ovra dnO' 
davelv, ' the multitude of the Athenians think that Hippar- 
chus was put to death by Hj^rmodius and Aristogltun, be-* 

16* 



186 SYNTAX. § 157. 

cause he was a tyrant ;' S)g cpdcr av r^ nlrjO-ig, ^ thus spake 
the multiiude.' § 137. Note 5. 

The same can be said of the pronominals cjcaarog and 
allog (in the formula aXloOev aXlog). E. g. I^bIIov Xdife- 
adav oQxrjduv s x a a J o g dexa dga/iuixg^ 'each person was to 
have for his share ten drachmae ;' ricrn(!i'QovTo cHlXog alio- 
e V, ' they sahited each other.' In general however e^cc- 
(TTog (also its kindred ^lag) is put in apposition with the sub- 
ject of the proposition in which it stands. 

Note 4. A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb; 
as ^i'avTS, a gp a) fnev tb g a (h (t 6 t e ludv ' ^/vtiij^v^ ' O Ajaxes, 
you will save the people of the Achseans ;' (5 o tw ^s x v (9 t-- 
GT 1] T TiQs i d i V € vo V, ' two tumblcrs were turning around.' 
The learner must have observed by this lime that the 1 pers. 
dual act. is the same with the first person plural. 

On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in 
the dual, when only two persons or things are meant; as 
(II. Ill, 278-9) xo^l 2 -bnevsQdB Tiuaovjug dcv6o(x)novg t Lv v a 6 ov^ 
* and you who punish the dead below,' where o? refers to 
Pluto and Persei'hone ;' cog ^' ore yBi^agQOi n or a ft o I 
xar' oQBGcpv qeovTBg ig (Lii.ay(j.yxBi,ap a v fx ^ (xXX b t o v o^Qifxov 
vdojQ, ' as when two torrents descending from the rocks unite 
their mighty waters in a ravine.' <§ 137. Note 6. 

Note 5. The nominatives e/co, r^.uer?, rcj, are of the first 
person ; av, vjUBlg, ag)^, are of the second person ; all other 
nominatives are of the third person. The nominatives of 
the 1 and 2 person are expressed chiefly when emphasis or 
perspicuity is required. It has already been remarked (§ 64.) 
that the nominative t is obsolete. 

We may remark here that the terminations exhibited in 
§ 84. are fragments of personal pronouns. For example, fi^, 
fim, fii]p^ fisv and lUBg, fA>B&a, are derived from the oblique cases 
of e^'co. The termination en or Tt- of the 3 person singular is 
a modification of the obsolete pronoun ? or of rog. The 
terminations ^^t^, ^rat, vto, are compared with the Welsh 
pronoun hwyNT! 

Note 6. The verb which agrees with the relative pro- 
noun is in the first or second person, according as the an- 
tecedent is of the first or of the second person; as^ifiZv 
ox) duBTB, al T i V B g xrjQovfiBv '6/uag, ' you do not sacrifice 
to US, who preserve you;' d/niigijT' '^^^, og e/B^g t^v 



§ 157. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 187 

yriv fi€ji(xigov, ' O thou immeasurable air ! who holdest the 
earth suspended.' So when the antecedent is implied in a 
possessive pronoun (§ 148. Note 8). An exception to this 
remark occurs in II. XVII, 248-50. 

Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal 
pronoun (§ 157. Note 5) of the first person, may have the 
verb in tl^e first person ; as OefxcaTOKlrig t] ;« a> nagu ai, ' I 
Themistocles have come to you.' 

Note 7. Sometimes the verb agrees in number with the 
nominative in the predicate (§ 160. 1); asio-ro^ da dvo 
locpoj rj 'Ido/iisvT] luipTjld), = 7] 'IdofiivTj i cr T I dvo h'jcpo) vifjiilib, 'Ido- 
mene is two high hills.' This takes place chiefly when the 
nominative in the predicate precedes the verb. 

Note 8. (1). The third person is often found without a 
subject, when any thing general and indefinite is expressed ; 
as o-cdi y.ev svda reov ye fievog xal /eXgag o v o l t o sc. Tig, ' even 
here no one will find fault with your valor and strength ;' 
elalv o'ileyovaiv sc. Tvvhg or dvdgsg, ' there are those who 
say ;' Myovui or cpacri ' they say.' 

Frequently the word ngay/aa or itgay^aTa ' res,' is to be 
supplied ; as drilojdriaeTac ' the thing will show itself;' ovTCjg 
£/ei, 'it is so;' nollov del, Mt wants much, far from it;' 
del^sL dri idxcc, ' time will soon show it.' 

(2). When the verb indicates the employment of any per- 
son, the word denoting that person is generally omitted ; as 
s 7(- rigv ^ 6 TOig '^' Ellrjuv TcagacrxevdaaaOav^ sc. 6 JfrJ^i^l, ^ the 
herald proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves ;' 
Tov vofiov x\utv a-vTov a V a y V (0 a s T a L, sc- 6 yga^^cnTevg^ ' the 
secretary shall read to you the law itself.' 

(3). Frequently the verb is changed into the passive 3 
pers. sing., and its subject nomin. into the dative ; as roXg 
TTolsfiloig BvTvxrjjav for ol nolE/LtwL evTv/ijxixcri^ ' the enemy have 
succeeded ;' xalibg aoi dnexezgi^To for xulwg dnsKixgicFo, < thou 
hadst answered well.' 

(4). The subject of verbs denoting the state of the 
weather or the operations of nature is not expressed ; as 
iJeC' ' it rains,' vlcpev 'it snuws,' saeiae 'there was an earth- 
quake,' (JvaxoTuQei. ' it grows dark.' 

Note 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition is at- 
tracted by the verb of the preceding proposition ; as o? rbv 
odga V o V Xiyovxsg dvaneidovavv^ ^g e a i l nvtyevg, for o'i Ae'vo*'- 



188 SYNTAX. ^ 158. 

rsg dcvaTTsldovai, ihg 6 oiu Qav 6 g ^utv Ttviyeiig^ * who make 
people believe thai the heaven is an oven ;' cpiqe vvv uOorifni) 
Ttgmoi^ TO V TOP I, o ti dga * now let me see first what this 
here fellow is doing.' 

Note 10. The verb el^l < am,' is very often omitted, but 
chiefly when it is a copula (§ 160. 1) ; as tL t^ nqayfia tovtL; 
sc. ^(JtL, ' what is this thing V ^sol yuQ t/nsTg ; sc. l(ni, * you 
gods V tToi(jiog elneXvy ' I am ready to say.' So w^a dinUvaiy 
*it is time to go.' 

Other verbs also are omitted, but only when they can be 
supplied from the context. 

Note 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative ^ 
as a vtt; (tt), not nheo ; ' halloo there, whither art thou fly- 
ing;' ov ydcQ £t' E^neda yvXa, epilog, 'my friend, my limbs 
are no longer firm.' This remark holds true only when the 
vocative of the noun differs from the nominative in form. 

<5> 158. 1. The subject of the infinitive mood is put 
in the accusative. E. g. 

Ovio) di /US (JcpddQa ivojuc^ev di,d m sX a -d" a i, 'And he 
thought that I was so outrageously wronged^' where ^s 
is the subject of the infinitive ^dixsXad-at. 
'O/aoXoyeXg fie aocpov slvav, 'Thou confessest that I am 

wise.'' 
^ji Q X V Y ^ '^ ^ ^ ^ ^'^ ^^ '^^^ x(JfTW AlyvTtTioi Xiyovdv d r^ fititqa 
Ttal d LovvcTo V, ' The Egyptians say that Demeter and 
Dionysos govern the lower world-' 
So ocvdyTcrj a e n6cvTa enicTTacTd^cii^ ' thoa must know all 
things ;' ^v6iy}iri t ov g og&^g ^ovXsvofiivovg ^fisivov t^v 
dXltov TiQ&TTB vv, ' thosc who deliberate rightly necessarily 
prosper more than others;' nqlv tov ydfiov t e d^r^vai^ 
' before the law was enacted.' 

2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed when 

it is the same with that of the preceding proposition. E. g. 

Olfiav s{)Qrjyihai, ' I think I have found,'^ where the subject 

(i"e) of evQi]:iBv ai\^ not expressed because it refers to the 

subject [sy(j)) o( olfiav. 
Kal TV (p X dg y v ibv a t> doTtsX Toiyvo, ' Even a blind man 

seems to know this.' 
^E n V d^ V fiih G^iKQov ano fiBQfiTiQi (J a ly 'I wi&h to dozie 

a little.' 



1 



§ 158. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 189 

So 07i(x)g dv e Id rj totu; Ssovg dedovTtivai^ * that he may 
learn to fear the ^ods,' where the subject of dedorxevai. is the 
same as that of sldrj. So (re /uev dlzawg ei^u' ey (h x ol di'Qs iv^ 
'I have a right to punish you.' 

Note 1. Sometimes the accusative of the personal or re- 
flexive pronoun is expressed before the infinitive ; as ovdh 
ycjLQ ovd' £ fit e (pyuv "kelauidi^ov e jii /u e v a i^ (ilxr^g^ « I think that 
I too have not forgotten my valor ;' ort [KgoTaog] houtae 
a (x)v T V ei V a V dv&o(i}na)v utkjlvtmv ol^imuTOv, ' because 
[Kroisos] thought he was the happiest of all men.' Such 
exam.ples are not common in Greek. 

Note 2, The subject of the infinitive and the words 
agreeing with it are frequently by attraction put in the case 
of the subject of the preceding independent proposition ; 
provided both subjects refer to the same person or thing. 
E. g. 

'Allu V ojiL'C.s V g r^aag /Ltev apitead-al aov, av t 6 g de tv- 
ixxr^uBiv ; ' But do you imagine that we shall tolerate you, 
and ih^i you can strike V where avTog stands for avToy us. 

*E(U8 ds ot80''&' -d/Liiv eiuoicreiv, {) fi el g ds veinslcrd-ai. ; 'Do 
you think that /shall contribute, but that you will en- 
joy the contribution V where -6iu£Tg stands for -^uag on 
account of the subject of oi'sads. 

So scpT] u d- a Kqovlojvv o i' ?; Xoiybv a /iiv v a i, « you said that 
you alone averted destruction from the son of Kronos,' 
where ol'r^ stands for ol'av agreeing with ere understood ; sv- 
X s d' 'AnollojvL q a ^ s t v exaTdjuSTjv ol'xads voarriaag^ 
'and vow to Apollo to offer him a hecatomb, when you re- 
turn home,' where roarr^aag agrees with the subject {crv for 
ore) of ^i^ei^v, which is omitted because it is the same with 
that of ev/so (= ev/ovy Z i q S ^ g ovx eoprj ojuoTog eaea&ai, 
AaxedoLV^ovtoiGv x 6 i v o v g /usp yduo avy/tac rd tkxptcjv di'&g(x)' 
7T0)v rouLua, a v j 6 g de ravxa ov n o v i^ a e l v, ' Xerxes said he 
would not be like the Lacedaemonians ; for they have vio- 
lated the laws of nations, but he would not do this.' This 
kind of attraction takes place chiefly when emphasis is re- 
quired, or in cases of antithesis. 

In some instances it is so strong as to affect the subject 
of an infinitive even when it is diflerent from that of the 
preceding independent proposition; as xi^vdwevastg 
inidel^at^j a v fuev x^r^^iog a i v a i^ ixsZvogde qiavlog^ * it 



190 SYNTAX. § 159. 

seems that yon will prove that you are worthy, but he is 
worthless,' where lyelvoq follows the case of the subject of 
Hi^vdvvevaeig. See also § 161. 

Note 3. Frequently the subject of the infinitive is want- 
ing even when it is different from that of the preceding in- 
dependent proposition; as ni]fjLovaXut, yAfinToiKxt^ n d a / s i. v 
fiev (kly€ivaT(TLv, olxTQatdLv d' idelv, 'I am afflicted with 
sufTerings painful to endure and piteous to behold.' 

3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed also 
when it is the same with the object of the preceding 
proposition. E. g. 

^EdeiTo avT(bv ^ orjd- eX v iuot, * He prayed them to aid 
me ;' 

JJcLQriyyBilsv ^i^X v Ka&svdsiv, ' He commanded us to 
sleep ;' 

"-^ V d Q6 Stu 0) KeXsvo/iiev dcllriXiov TtetQij'O-rivav, « We re- 
quest two men to try each other's skill.' In such in- 
stances the object-accusative must not be mistaken for 
the subject of the infinitive. 

Note 4. A participle agreeing with the omitted subject of 
the infinitive is very often put in the accusative ; as ^yo) da 
{} fjL (b V dio^ai y. aTaiprjcpiaaax^^av OEOfivriaTov, i v S-v fnov^ 
fievovg, oTL o^k &v yivoiTo tovtov fieiCojv dycbv fiov^ ' and I 
beseech you to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider 
that I could not have had a severer trial than this ;' a Bvia 
T(a 'jiqyididv 7]x 6 vv Ttagriy/sds, I a ^ 6 v t a Tovg avdgag, ' he 
requested Xenias the Arcadian to take the men and come.' 
Such examples show that the subject-accusative was hover- 
ing about the mind of the speaker, when the proposition 
contained an infinitive. 

Sometimes the participle agrees in case with the express- 
ed subject. See Xenoph. Memor. I, 1,9, where both con- 
structions occur. 

§ 159. 1. Frequently the subject of a prpposition is an 
infinitive with the words connected with it. E. g. 

Zlgo/stgdv Icftvv Inaiviuai, Ty\v d^cTTJi^, ' It is easy to 

praise virtue,' where [t^z^(^] lnaivi(sai Ty\v d^eiTJy is the 

subject of the proposition. 
To ^qydi'Qsa&at (k^sivov, ' To work is better,' where t6 [r^yd] 

^gyd'Qead-at^ is the subject. 



§ 160* SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 191 

So Tcov ag/6vw)v eqyov earl rovg dcQ/ointPOvg ttoveXv B^dctifio^ 
ysarigovg^ ' it is the duty of rulers to make the ruled happy ;' 
9taxoiuQyov fihv ydg iarv, -HQtS-ivj^ den oS- av el v aTQaTJ]yov 
de, fua ^6 fie V V roXg nole(jiioig, ' it is proper that a malefac- 
tor should be condemned to death ; but that a general should 
die fighting against the enemy.' 

Such is 2:enerally the subject of the verbs 8eX, xqr^, nqinety 
Ttgoariicev, hoexsrav, and a few others ; as del yog ^ fi s liy e vv^ 
d TiqvTiTevv ri nageaicevaafisvog , ' for I must say what I was 
prepared to conceal,' where ifie Uyeiv^ a xQvmeLv ^ nags- 
(Txevadfiivog^ is the subject of del. These verbs are often 
called impersonal verbs. See also § 141. 2. 

2. The subject of an infinitive may be another infinitive ; 
as doxel fiov 71 g ^ TC e V V evrevd'ev n o i r^a a g & a v Triv agxr\Vy 
* it seems to me proper to begin here,' where evTev&ev [^^e] 
noiriGacr&ai r^^v dgxrii^ supplies the place of the subject-accu- 
sative (§ 158. 1) of ngenet^v, and the subject of ^o;f£? is ngeneiv 
tvrevd^ep notijaacr&at^ xr^v dcgx'^v r\v ^yXibdCfav^ odl fiev oij cpi](Jb 
Xgriv a I Tovg vsovg dca x el v, ' which tongue this man says 
youths ought not to exercise,' where ^^ Tovg veovg ucrxelv is 
the subject of /^^^a^. 

3. Any word or clause may be the subject of a proposi- 
tion ; as TO X a T & ^ a tovto nollovg dri ndvv e^T]n6cTri7C8v^ see 
§ 141. 3; 'I^IAO ^iv EUTvv dgx^ Toi5 xaxov, ' the word 0IAO 
is indeed the beginning of mischief;' (Aristoph. Vesp. 77.) 

§ 160. 1. The PREDICATE is either a verb alone, or a 
verb (commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called) and a 
substantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter 
case the verb is called a copula. 

2. A substantive in the predicate agrees with the sub- 
ject in case. E. g. 

'E y (b eijuv iJAoijTog, 'lam Plutus ;' § 1.36. 

'Hi^ Kavdavlrjg rvgavvog Sagdiixip, ' Candaules was 
king of Sardes.' ibid. 

So tb fjihp firi yc o g tov ogvyfioiTog k nr d a r a. d t o i elui^ ' the 
length of the excavation is seven stadia;' § 136. Note 5; 
TO 71 1' r\ x)^ g Icpdpi] t^dofji^xoPTa xal exardv /li v g i, a d e g^ ' the 
multitude was found to be one hundred and seventy my- 
riads ;' ibid. So y v v al x a d' eivoa ti gay fi' eq)7j vov^uart^ 
h6p, ' but woman, he said, is an intelligent thing.' So e y (a 
&eoue^i]g xal dlxat^og ihp d^^TJ^, ' I being a pivjus and just man.' 



192 SYNTAX. § 161. 

3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, 
pronoun, or participle, in the predicate, are determined 
by <^ 137. E. g. 

'E Y^ ^0 dcv aTd g el/ut, « I am immortal.' 
T o vT ov g yug ecprj t o v g a v Qion o v g noXi) ^elriovg 
yeysvriaOut, ' He said that those men were much better.' 

Note 1. When the subject is an infinitiv^e or any other 
word than a nominative (§ 159. 1 and 3), the adjective or 
pronoun in the predicate is of the neuter gender; as d i^ 
9ca v6v loTiv avxovo^ovg elv a v Tovg ' El>)yi]vng ' it is just that 
the Grecians should be independent ;' ov d I x a t. 6v 1<ttc jovg 
9cg£lTTovg Tibv riiT6t;(x)v agxe vv, ' it is not right that the stronger 
should rule the weaker.' 

Note 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate 
refers to a masculine or feminine noun ; in which case the 
word ngay/ua 'thing,' is to be supplied by the mind ; as xdcgzu 
q)t.lolxTL(jTov yvvri sc. idii^ * woman is a very tender- 
hearted thing.' 

^ 161. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex- 
pressed (§ 158. 2 and 3), the substantive or adjective in the 
predicate is by attraction put in the case in which the sub- 
ject has already been expressed. E. g. 

'J2 Xga sivai fioL d o tceI g, ' You seem to me to be pale,' 
where the adjective is put in the nominative on account 
of cru implied in doxsTg, ^ 158. 2. 

^'Exla &vTrigYeve(j&atx^vyaTg6g, ' He suffered himself to 
become the sacrifice!' of his own daughter ;' ibid. 

Kv go V idaovTo wg ngod' v /uox dr o v yevea&ai^, ' They be- 
sought Cyrus to be as eager as possible ;' § 158. 3. 

So od 6 ^6 Aiaxvlog'] noikiv anevaiv oi'Tcads, didi to a v v sxbg 
eivoLi, < he goes back home, because he is wise,' where aws- 
Tog is affected by ode. So nollol twv ngoanoirjua^evojv elvav 
u ocp I ax ibv, ' many of those who pretended to be sophists,' 
equivalent to nollol ixsivojv^ o«? ngoasnoLr^aavTO sivav cr o cp i- 
aT«/, § 140. Note 3. 

2. When a proposition is made the subject of another 
proposition (§ 159. 1), the adjective or participle in the pre- 
dicate or subject of the former proposition is often put in 
ihe case of the noun in the predicate of the latter. E. g. 



§ 162. OBJECT. 193 

^v d V -d'g (OTt t g riulv eyylyvsTai, oaco av exnleco ru diovra 
^X^^Gi, TocTo^TG) {)^Qi(TxoTiQoig sivat., ' the more abundantly 
the wants of some men are supplied, the more overbearing 
they are,' where the subject is oaco ^v . . . . v^QKjjoiiQoig ehat, 
and the predicate, iv dcvd^gibnoig jialv lyyiyvsTav' tcp' rifiTv 
%(jTat TO 8 n ie iH e G V xal q) avl o v g eivoci^ = to ri/Liag i n l e i,- 
ic sT g Hal rp fr v I ov g elvai sajav icp' tj fnX v^ 'to be respectable 
or worthless will depend upon us.' So i^ov de ToXg /uh^ 
^7t d ov (T vv 'ElevTjv^ d7TrjXuc;(d^ai jcbv nagovTOJv xavQv^ ' it be- 
ing in their power to give up Helen and be delivered from 
the impending danger,' where ihe attracted dnodovai. belongs 
to the subject (avTovg) of oc7Tr/ld/&aL, So in Latin, licet illis 
esse BEA^Tis. In such cases the predicate always precedes 
the subject. This attraction takes place only when the at- 
tracting word in the predicate is in the dative. 

This kind of attraction is generally confounded with that 
exhibited in § 161. 1, and § 158. Note 2 and 4. 

OBJECT. 

<5 162. 1. That on which an action is exerted, or to which 

it refers, is called the object. 

The object is put in the accusative, genitive, or dative, 
2. The participle and the verbal adjective in tsov {§ 132. 

2) are followed by the same case as the verb from which 

they are derived. 

Note 1. The verbal in rsov, either with or without iarl, 
represents ^et (§ 159. 1) and the infinitive active or middle 
of the verb from which it is derived; as ocHovaTsov = del 
ditovetv, * one must hear;' ^iiui]T8ov = dsZ (.nfxeXud^ai^ 'one 
must imitate.' In some instances it represents del and the 
infinitive passive; as rixTiptov =8ei riTida&at^, * one must be 
surpassed.' 

The nevter plural is very often used instead of the sin- 
gular ; as dcxovaisa for daovaTsov^ nagadoTia for naqixdoxeov = 
del Ttaqudovvai^ TL{Li(jjgi]Tia for Ti^wgriThi' = del tijlujqsTv, 'one 
must avenge.' 

Note 2. Any word or clause may be the object of a verb ; 
as KvQog d^ Ixelrco dCoga [f Ju>xf?], a vof.il'QeTat nagd ^aailavai Tl/ttia, 

Unnov /Qvaoxdlivov, tkxI aiqemov xQ^^^^^t ^«i r ii v x ^ 

gav fi ij K ET i dqndL,e a d^a t, * and Cyrus gave him such 
presents as are considered valuable by kings, namelv,a horse 

17 



194 SYNTAX. § 163— § 164. 

with a golden bridle, a golden necklace, and that the 

country should no longer be plundered,' where the proposi- 
tion TTji/ x^oav /Ltr/xhi dQnd'Qsa&at is one of the objects of ed^xe. 
So ip TolffL Tol/OLg sy{Jixq)6, 'A & 7} y al o v x a Xo i^ 'he wrote 
on the walls, 'the Athenians are noble.' 



ACCUSATIVE. 

<§> 163. 1. The immediate object of a transitive verb 
is put in the accusative. E. g. 

TavTd TTo^rjaw, ' I will do these things ;'' 
Tl Uysig av ; ' What do you say V 

So ov8iv as X (xiXv a e i a € a v to v ^fi^alsTv ig tb ^d- 
Qa&qov^ ' nothing will hinder you from casting yourself into 
the pit ;' Tavia notricrag^ ' doing these things ;' oiGjiot^ rdda^ 
= del [i]|Uag] cpe^et^v Tddsy ' we must bear these things,' § 162^. 
2 and JNote 1. 

2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are 
transitive in Greek- Such are dlnaivo) ' sin against,'' dnodv- 
dgdcrxix) 'run away from,' doQvq)OQiuj < am a body guard of,' inioQ- 
xibt ' swear falsely by,' o/llvv/lil ' swear by,' enitgoneico ' am 
superintendent,' lavOdvo) ' am concealed from.' E. g. dda- 
ydxovq dliTiaOav^ ' to sin against the immortals;' ^v jig dno- 
d Qd(T ri T(bv olx6T(bv ae, 'if any of thy domestics should run 
away from thee.' 

§ 164. The accusative of a substantive is often joined to 
the verb of which it denotes the abstract idea. In this case 
the accusative is generally accompanied by an adjective. 
E. g. dqdg dqaxai Ttaiulv dvoaicoTdxag^ 'he is heaping 
most awful curses upon his children;' nsasZv TtT^fiaz' 
oidx dt^acrxsid, ' to fall an insupportable fall ;' f^^av dqofir]- 
^a dsvvbv dUrjAotg em, ' they rushed furiously against each 
other.' So in English, to die the death of the righteous ; 
to RUN a RACE. This takes place generally with intransi- 
tive verbs. 

Note 1. A substantive is, in the poets, often joined to 
fili7t(x), diQxojLiav, Xeiuauio^ ogdco^ ' look,^ intransitive, to mark 
the expression of the look ; as q)6^ov ^Unmv^ ' looking ter- 
rible ;' 71 vQ dcp&alfioTat S €§ ogx (hg, ' looking fiery, emitting 
fire from his eyes;' '^ Bovk^ e^lsips vdnv, 'the Boule 



§ 165. ACCUSATIVE. 195 

looked sour,' literally, ' looked mustard.' Sometimes the 
substantive ^^gyfrn is to be supplied, as yMmov ^Unet, « he 
looks thievish ;' see ^sch. Sept. Theb. 81-2. 

Note 2. NiK6L0) 'conquer,' intransitive, is often followed 
by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or nature 
of the conquest; as veviKr^naTS vavfia'/iotg^ « you have gained 
naval battles ;' ^6lx^]i' v^xav, 'to gain a battle ;' ' Olvfima ve- 
viKri'dibg, ' having conquered in the Olympic games.' The 
same is observed of the verbs ^vaiqito or dvaigiofiai^f xgajioj^ 
and rirmofiai.. 

The words following viTcdox) are chiefly f^^xVi Ttoleiuog, vav- 
/*«//«, dy(i)v, y^^^l^Vi Qnd the names of the public games, 

Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person 
conquered is added, as MdTtddrjg 6 ttjv iv Maga&ibvL /lkx xv ^ 
Tovg ^ a Q^ dgov g v v xr^a ag^ ' Milliades who conquered 
the Persians at the battle of Marathon.' 

<§> 165. Yekbs signifying to ask, to teach j to take away, 
to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, and some others, are 
followed b}" two accusatives, the one of a person, and 
the other of a thing. E. g. 

Air eX V rbv drifiov (pvla x (k g rivag jov Gibjuaiog, ' To 

ask some body-guards of the people;' 
^'Htql fiev cr s Zevg ts noasiddcov re Innocfvvag i d I d a ^ a v^ 

'Indeed Zeus and Poseidon taught thee horsemanship;' 
Blcc Y V V al xa rrivde a' i^avgricrsTav, ' He will take 

away this woman from thee by force.' 

So rbv drifiov xlaTvav ri fi tt l cr x o v, 'I clothed the 
people with robes;' tL dgdcroiuev a^Triv ; 'what shall we do 
with her V nolldt fie l^elnag^ ' thou hast said many things 
about me ;' Td; fihy yvvuXxag nolV diy a d- u le y o) v, a ^ 
de nollu x a x d, ' saying many good things about women, but 
many bad things about you.' 

Verbs frequently followed by two accusatives : aireoj, 
dcTtavxeix), TrgdTTOuai, ixliyo), igcoTdoi}^ iQsa&ai., ^^erd^w, diddaxcOf 
Ttaids^xo^ dipaigiofiav, i^aLgeo/uaL, dcnodTegiix), avXdcj^ evdvvM^ (ifi- 
nix(^, ixdvpu)^ au(piBvvvfii^ dpadiu)^ aiecpardixt^ dvayxdi^(o^ TielO-u), 
egdojy ^gyd'Qofiai, dgdcx)^ noim, Uyoj, i^emelv, xgvTtTU), rtinlaxa). 

Note 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes 
the abstract of the verb (§ 164.) ; as o fpntxixog ndkefwg 



196 SYNTAX. § 165— § 166. 

delfivT](XTOv Ttai^delav aiu r oitg i n aid ev a e v, ^ the Pho- 
cic war* taught ihem a lasting lesson;' kiovidv Iw^utai 
I ih^Tjv avr^TieuTovy ' he injured himself most shockingly.' 

Note 2. Frequently verbs signifying to do, or to say, are 
followed by an accusative and the adverb £v * well,' or xuxibg 
' badly ;' as t>^a rovg cp il o v g ev no v (b (t t>, ' that they may 
do good to their friends,' where elnoiwat, (= evnoiiocrt^ as one 
word) is equivalent to (iya&dc noilbai. So^caxco^ X^yov- 
a i^v ol (jcyad-ol Tovg xa x ovg, ' the good do not speak well of 
the bad,' where xuxwg Xtyovcn is equivalent to xuxu Xiyovat, 

Note 3. Sometimes the word denoting the person is put 
in the dative ; as og noXlu x d x' uv^gdiTToicrtv i (hgy e i, 
' who did much evil to men ;' /nr^dtv dy u -d- ov no i. t^g a g ril 
TtdlsL, 'having done no good to the state;' o joXuiv 
(xcpe iksTo voGTi^uov rifiuQ, « hc deprived them of the day of 
return.' 

' AnouTBQ^M and, in the later writers, tigpat^eo/zat, are often 
folloiwed also by the accusative of the person and the geni- 
tive of the thing. § 182. 

Note 4. Verbs signifying to divide, take two accusatives ; 
diS'tbuTQdtTev^a xaTBvevfxB diode xa fi s qt]^ 'he divided 
the army into twelve parts.' The preposition eig is often 
found before the accusative denoting the number of parts, 
asagp^a^ a^iToifgigs^fiolQag d i^ elXo v, ' they divided 
themselves into six parts.' 

Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in 
the genitive and depends on the word denoting the par^; 
as dLsdofie&a rr^g € i S o) Xono l l x ri g eVd tj dvo, equivalent to 
dtedo/ued'a xriv a id (x) lono i t^xr^v [sig^ £ I'd j] dvo, 'vve divided 
the art of making images into two parts.' 

§ 166. Verbs signifying to name or call, to choose, to 
render or constitute, to esteem or consider, are followed by 
two accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g. 
'^ExTOQidrjv dyanrjTOv, t 6 v q' "Extojq xccXesaxs 2 x a fjiuv- 
Sq i^ov, ' the dear son of Hector, whom Hector called Sea- 
mandrios ;^ oTQaTrjyor ainbv dnidsi^ev, 'he appointed him 
general ;' tov v I 6 v I n n i a i d i d u^ ax o dya&op, ' he caus- 
ed his son to be brought up a good horseman.' In the 
passive such verbs become copulas (§ 160. 1), as o^ xaUerai, 
2!xa^(kydQt>og* GiQaxriybg dnedelx^ri' 6 vlbg edMx^^ Inneig, 



^ 167. ACCUSATIVE. 197 

Note. Frequently the infinitive sivav «to be,' is expressed 
before the second accusative; as ao (p la rriv ovoiadl^ovcn tov 
avdqa e 2^^ a ^, ' they call him a sophist,' or rather ' they 
say that he is a sophist ;' t/w ^oxlo^cn U^ei^v Tovrovg cp ilo^ 
H 6 gd ST g eiv a i, » for my part, I should say that they are 
lovers of gain.' So in the passive, dLnedex^rj (= dinedeix^rj) 
TTjc Innov el y a V iTinaQx^'^y 'he was appointed master of 
the horse.' 

^ 167. The accusative is very often used to limit a 
general assertion. E. g. 

Tbv d' aogv ttAtjI' a-^) x^v a^ ' He struck him in the neck 
with the sword,' or ' He struck his neck with the 
sword ;' 

X(xilbg d' hsQov n 6 d a, * Lame of one foot ;' 

0\}TOi jLisv TO y e V g eialv ev. Xiov, ' They are Chians by 
birth: 

So 11^ ax a Tial x e cp alriv i'xslog JU, * like unto Zeus in 
eyes and head ;^ (usia ds aviixa [layovaLv^ aihov xafiovra to-vg 
ocpS-a k fiov g Tvcpluod^rivai, ^ and immediately after, they say, 
his eyes being diseased, he became blind ;' ^oriv dya&og, 
* good in battle, a good warrior ;' dei^vug ei^ui. lavxriv iriv t i- 
X^ V ^i * I am skilled in this art^ 

So d7iQTfii]0evTeg rdcg x 6 cp a I u g BTslevTrjaav^ < being behead- 
ed they died,' literally, * being cut off in respect to their 
heads ;' ol discpdagibisvov -vnb rrjg x^^^^^ ^^ovg f)q)daXfioi)g^ 
/ those whose eyes were injured by the snow.' 

The accusatives t/, oi)d8v^ are often used in this way ;' as 
%L /^rjaeia^ jtot' tt^^ra ; 'for what will he ever use it?' or 
'what in the world is he going to do with it?' tL rau^', dt 
TtdvTsg Ydfxey^ (Liavdavoj ; . , . . o v d s v^ /udi ^tct^ ( why am 1 learn- 
ing what we all know ? .... by Zeus I don't see why.' 

Note 1. Here belong most of the accusatives which com- 
monly are said to be used adverbially (§ 124.). 

Note 2. Sometimes the preposition xaid or eig is used 
before the accusative ; as xaOagdv xal xard to a (o /h a xal x a- 
T d T^iv yj u X ^i ^y ' pure in body and in soul ;' alv(bg (x&ardjriat, 
dsfig eig 5) n a solxbv, « she astonishingly resembles the im- 
mortal goddesses in looks.' 

Note 3. Hither we may refer the parenthetical phrases, 
jb leyOfxevof, 'as the saying is;' t6 Jov'Ofii\gQv, = xaid ?6>« 

17* 



198 SYNTAX. ^ 168. 

'^Of^rjQov, < as Homer has it,' or ' according to Homer;' nay 
wi^t^avTiov^ ' on the contrary ;' 6lc. 

Note 4. The accusative is sometimes subjoined to a 
clause in order further to qualify the contents of it; as y-o^L 
fuis Oi]TB\)eiv ncKTriQ dvrjTia naq' dLvdql, Twrd^ dn o i v\ rjvijcyxaasv, 
' and the father compelled me to serve a mortal man as a 
recompense for these ;' tw nalde rcb cro) /uUXstop, roA^TJ^ax* 
ata/icFTa, fxovo^axeXv^ ' thy two s(»ns are about to fight a duel, 
a most disgraceful act,' where ToA^7J//aTa qualifies to) naXds tw 
(nb luillsTov fuopojua/slv iyo) d' dp, avzr^ OoifiuTWP dempvg Todl, 
TtQ 6(p a a V p, ecpacFTcop, 'and I, showing to her this here gar- 
ment as a pretext, would say.' The supposition that noielv 
* to do,' was supplied by the mind in the foregoing words 
seems to be unnecessary. 

<§> 168. 1. A noun denoting duration of time is put 
in the accusative. E. g. 

T ovTO V ^iBxa I^LTdlxovg enivop xbv ;^^6j/oj', 'During this 

time I was feasting with Hitalkes ;' 
Xqopov (nep ovx ocp riusp Ip Qgdxri tco'Ktov^ ' We should 

not have staid in Thrace a long time ;' 
Ti GTQbcpev T71V vvx^' olrjp ; ' Why do you turn yourself 

about the whole night V 

So ov8bti(j) 6 I' >t (J l V eTTj ysyov(i)g, ' being not yet twenty 
years old ;' ere a (hg d i x a xov yeyoroTa, 'being about ten 
years old.' 

When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal 
number (§ 61.), it denotes duration of time past ; as ^^^(5:- 
xrjv rifjteQav yeyafirj^hrip, 'who was married nine days 
ago,' or ' who has been married nine days.' Also when it 
is accompanied by cardinal numbers ; as og tbOptixb ravToc 
TQia sTT], 'who has been dead these three years.' 

2. Frequently the accusative answers to the question 
WHEN? E. g. ipTEtld^svog T T^p &Q7JV enayvpesLP acplai zd^ 
aiyag^ 'commanding him to bring the goats to them at the 
regular time-^ 

In this case also, when the substantive is accompanied by 
an ordinal number, it refers to time past ; as xocl /Osg de xal 
T Q i T 1] p ri fi eQ a P to avid tovto enquTTOP, \ both yesterday 
and three days ago I was doing this selfsame thing;' tqItov 
tJ TdjaQTOP eiog tout/, ' three or four years ago.' 



§ 169— § 170— § 171. ACCUSATIVE. 199 

Note 1. Hither we must refer all the accusatives ahso- 
lute, so called, particularly the neuter accusatives (not nomi- 
natives) eiQT]fjtBvov, i^op, rv/ov, ngoariv.ov , doxovv, do^uv (from 
doxico), dedoy/uevov, naq^v^ ov, naQi/ov, and some others ; as 
s ^ 6 V ydcg avzol'g l a (jl^ 6. v e vv yvvaijcag Tug ngonsvovcfug^ xxl.^ 
'for although (strictly 'when') it was in their power to 
marry the Mrst women,' &C. Such accusatives generally 
proceed from the construction stated in § 159. 1 ; thus the 
preceding comes from e^ s u x iv avToTg la (x^ uv s lv ywul^ 
xag Tag noMxevovGag. See also § 192. Note 2 and 3. 

Note 2. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a prepo- 
sition (chiefly tni) is placed before the accusative ; as ^ tt i 
6;cTcb Tial Sixoai e x s a riQ/ov ttj^ ' A<jb]g oi ^xvdai^ ' the Scythi- 
ans ruled Asia for eight and twenty years.' 

§ 169. The accusative is used to denote extent of 
SPACE. E.g. 

^EvxevOev i^ela{)V6c a x a 6 fioi) g dvo, na q a a dy y a g deKa, 

' From this place he marches two stations, equal to ten 

parasangs ;' 
2xadiovg dh nerxs teal xscrcragaTCovxa diaxofiiaavxeg dTiU 

Kovxo eg xo Iqov^ ' And carrying her forty-five stadia they 

arrived at the temple.' 

§ 170. Sometimes the accusative answers to the question 
whither ? E. g. OLiylrj na/ucpavoujda Sl^ aidegog oi) g a v b v 
hep, ' the bright effulgence went to heaven through etiier;* 
aylaag %§ag Qr^^ag, 'thou camest to illustrious Thebes.' 
Here we may refer the accusative ^^apdsiav, in II. X, 268. 

§ 171. The accusative follows the particles of protesta- 
tion jt^^ and pri' E. g. f^d triv ^Apanpo^p, fxdc x6 Xdog^ /tide xov 
*Aega, ovx sWop ovxwg apdg' aygomop ovdipa^ ' by Breath, by 
Chaos, by Air, I never saw a man so clownish ;' el'n' ijuol^ 
(fdelg i^ue ; — ptj xop Uoascdib, ' tell me, do you love me ? . . . . 
by Poseidon I do.' 

Note. It is observed that/</^ is used only in negative, and 
vri, in affiriiiHtive propositions. But when poet is placed be- 
fore /'^, the proposition is affirmative. 

Sometimes fid is omitted, as ov, x6 p d' ^' I v fiTi p, ' not, 
by this Heaven.' — Sometimes the name of the deity is omit- 
ted after fioc, prj^ as /tA« xdr^ iy(h fiep ovd' dp iniOoutjp, 'by 



200 SYNTAX. § 172. 

, I should not believe it.' In such cases the article be- 
longing to the omitted name is always expressed. 

<§) 172. The following prepositions are followed by 
the accusative. 

' u4iLtq)L ' ^iboui, around;' as ^tucpl deilrjv, * about evening;' 
d/iqp' avTdv^ ' around him.' So in connection with numerals, 
as (i^i Td kicjcaldexa eti] yevduevog^ < being about ten years 
old.' — This preposition is in general synonymous with nsqi. 

'AviJL ' in, through, throughout, during, on ;' as oivd xov 
Tcole^ov^ ' during the war, throughout the war ;' di^d or^a- 
rov^ * in the army ;' di^d fuvQlxrjv, ' on a tamarisk.' With nu- 
merals it means 'at the rate of, a-piece,' as ^vdt nhxe naga^ 
crdyyag t^; 'fi^ueoag, 'at the rate of five parasangs a day.' 

^^d ' on account of, through, in ;' as " vvp Ijcpeihx) dva ai, 
'which I now owe on your account;' (Jtd vvktu, 'in the 
night.' 

Eig ' to, into ;' as djro 'lojvlag elg Kdixlav, ^ from Ionia to 
Cilicia.' With numerals it generally means ' about,' as ^Ig 
rsTQaxLcrxdlovg, 'about four thousand men.' — Frequently eig 
is found before a genitive, the noun to which it properly 
belongs being omitted ; as elg naidoigt^ov sc. ohov^ ' to the 
house of the teacher.' 

*E7ii 'upon, against;' as iTtl Oqovov, 'upon a throne;' in' 
aiuxdv^ ' against him.' 

Kaid 'according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during;' 
as xaxct Tov ^'OfiTjgov, ' according to Homer ;' xazu t6v nolBfmv ^ 
' during the war.' 

MeT& ' after ;' as /wezd de ravra, ' and after these things.*^ 

iJof^d ' to, besides, along, contrary to, on account of;' as 
7t(XQ^ Ka/Li^vcrsa, ' to Cambyses;' nagaravia, 'besides these;' — 
After comparatives it means ' than ;' as ysvoiaj' ^v y.al n aga 
rriv mvTihv cpvGiv dcjusipoveg, ' they might become superior to 
their nature.' Herodot. VII, 103. 

Ilegi, see a/ncpt. 

ng6g ' to, in respect to, towards ;' as Ttgbg ndviag, < to all 
men ;' xaXog ngbg dg6fj,ov, ' a good racer.' 

'Ynd 'under, at;' ^no yriv, 'under the earth;' vno^'Ilvov, 
«to Ilion.' 

'Slg, synonymous with eig. It is always placed before 
nouns denoting intelligent objects. 



5 173— § 174. GENITIVE. aOl 



GENITIVE. 

^ 173. A SUBSTANTIVE wWch limits the meaning of 
another substantive, denoting a diiFerent person or thing, 
is put in the genitive. E. g. 

To TsjiiEvog Tov d-eov, * The temple of the god ;' 

Toy 'iTinaq'/ov d-avazov^ ' The death of Hipparchus ;' 

2itv&{hv ^acrdeXg, ' Kings of the Scythians.' 

This rule applies also to personal pronouns ; as rriv nokiv 

ri-um'^ ' our city ;' o legevg aviov, ' his priest ;' S^oi^^uutwv jiov^ 

' ray garn:ient.' 

Note 1. The genitive joined to a noun denotes various 
relations, the most common of which are those of posses- 
sion^ quality^ subject^ object^ material, source, a whole, 
component parts. 

Note 2. The genitive is called subjective, when it an- 
swers to the nominative (§ 157.). It is called objective, 
when it ansv/ers to the accusative (§ 163. 1). E. g. egyov 
'HcpaiaTov, (o "Hq^aiajng slgyrxcraTo^) ' the work of Vulcan ;' 
Jidg u7i6.Tr], [Zevg d.naT7]&6[g^) ' the deception of Zeus (Zeus 
was deceived);' -q aagoaaig rcbv XeyovTixjp, 'to hear the 
speakers.' 

Note 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two 
genitives denoting different relations ; as ti^v Ualonog /uei^ 
dTtdarjg 11 s k o n ov ricr o v TiaTaXeupvv, d av aov dh T7\g n 61 e cog 
Toyy 'Aqyelo)v^ Kdcd fiov da t? (9 c5 ^, ' the taking of the whole 
of Peloponesus by Pelops, of the city of the Argives by 
Danaus, and of Thebes by Cadmus;' tr^v tiiev Q v i err ov 
Jccria Tcca8elix)v a o 6 (b v ^vpr^xa, « the meal of boys' flesh, which 
(meal) was made by Thyestes, I know.' In such instances 
one of the genitives is very often objective (§ 173. Note 1). 

§ 174. Possessive pronouns and adjectives implying pos- 
session are frequently followed by a genitive. In this case 
the genitive is in apposition with the genitive implied in the 
possessive pronoun or adjective. E. g. to*' l^ibv /tiev a-u- 
TOV TOV TuXaLTTihgov a/sdov r^d?] voinl^(x)v ixTSTo^eva&ao 
§iov, 'believing that the life of me, a miserable man, had 
nearly been shot ofl^,' where ai^iov tov TulaiTubgov are in ap- 
position with ^iiov from which ^^6g is derived (§ 67.) ; v^'^^ 



202 SYNTAX. § 174— § 175. 

Trig ri^Bxeqaq cc^r (bv [7^;], ' for our own country,' where ai5- 
rwv stands in apposition with riuoiv implied in rifieiiqag (ihid.) 
So ^ri ixov roQyel7]v xecpulrip d a 1. v ol o neXioQovl^ ^'Aidog 
Tti^ipBisv dyavri IlEQaecpot^ELa, ' lest illustrious Persephone 
should send me from Hades the head of Gorgo, a tenible 
monster,' where roQyeh]v is equivalent to roqyovg with which 
nel(x)Qov is in apposition. So mtldeg i/iiol xul natgbg dra- 
cT'&dtlov, ' sons of me, and of an indiscreet father,' where Tta- 
TQog runs parallel with ^ ,ao I. 

Note. Under this head belong the adjectives I'diog (§ 73. 
3), lEQog, KOLvog, and oiycelog- as loTg a lu t (0 v I d i v g ngoai^ 
Xscv TOP vovp^ ' to attend to their private affairs ;' IsQog yoQ 
ovTog T (b V xara /S-ovbg & e (S)v, ' for he is consecrated to the 
infernal deities ;' e^yov x i v 6 r AaxedaciLioviojvTB xat 
'A'&TjvaiMv^ <a work performed by the Lacedaemonians 
and Athenians ;' oc i x e T a t (o v xalibg ^aaiXevdi^TQjv 
iait, ' which belong to those who rule well.' 

<§> 1 75. The genitive is put after el/Lii and yiyvo/uai, to 
denote the person or thing to which any thing in any 

way BELONGS. E. g. 

TovTo TO nedlov -q v fiev xors X q aa fi io) v, ' This plain 
once belonged to (or * was the property of) the Choras- 
mians ;' 
^Jl dao/Lidvis, (urirov liy v to g i'aS-L, * My dear sir, do 
not give yourself up to everybody who talks,' or 'do not 
believe what every body says.' 
So nollrig d,v la g ^^(ttI\ xotl to OrjQacfdai xsvd, ' it is cha- 
racteristic of great folly to be in pursuit of vain things.* 
So sivai^ BT(bv TQv&xovTa, ' to be thirty years old ;' e/o) ^e tov- 
Tov Tov Tqdnov ncog bY^' dsly 'I always am a man of this 
character.' 

Note 1. The genitive is often preceded by ngog, as to tb 
ydcQ i^atq)Pi]g (xyav ovTwg {fnBQnlovTBlv, to t' av dBdoixevai^, it Q b g 
dp d gb g ovSbp ^yisg e a t' Bigyaafispov^ ' for to become so sud- 
denly very rich, and at the same time to be apprehensive, 
indicates a man with whom all is not right;' Sb^i^ov ngbg 
dv d go g a a t i, 'it is the characteristic of a man of parts.' 

Note 2. Frequently the genitive after siinl, yiyvofiav, :(vgi(o, 
fticpvxa^ denotes the person or thing from which any thing 
proceeds ; ^s ^ age Lev xal Hagv a&T v8 g yiyvovxai, 



,§ 176— § 177. GENITIVE. 203 

Tcaideg dvo « of Dariiis and Parysatis two children were born,' 
or ' Darius and Parysatis had two sons ;' ^to? sivaL, « to be 
descended from Zens ;' i(jd-l(bv yeviud^ai^ « to be descended 
from illustrious ancestors ;' S^vrijov nicpvxag naz^dg, ' you are 
the offspring of a mortal father ;' tov (= rlpog) xai nor' si, 

* whose son in the world are you V 

Sometimes ihe genitive is preceded hy ^^, as naigd g ex 
ra^Tov ysyihg^ ' being born of the same father.' 

§ 176. The neuter of the article followed by a substantive 
in the genitive denotes any thing to which that substantive 
is related. E. g. ^sT g)6Q6tv t« t (a v & s q) v, 'we must bear 
what comes from the gods ;' Tvyx^^^^t^ y^ [aTQajTjydg 6 'Ad^tj- 
vttiojv^ (pgoviojv rd ^ aa clrio g, « for the general of the Athe- 
nians is on the king's side ;' to rov 'OfiriQov^ ' that which Ho- 
mer says,' simply, ' as Homer says.' 

Note. This idiom gives rise to phrases like the follow- 
ing : T(x Trig ogyrig, = ri ogyri ' anger, wrath ;' xd t^? ifineiglag, 
= 1] ifinscQla 'experience;' xd T(bv BsjTalibv , = ol Qenalot 

* the Thessalians;* to t^v ija&vfimp, = al ^TtL&v^iai, ' desires.' 
Compare § 138. 2. 

<§» 177. Adjectives, pronouns, and adverbs, denoting 
a part, are followed by a genitive denoting the whole. 
Kg. 

01 nlsiiTJoi Tmv dp&g(h7tMv, < The most men ;' 
'ExdaTt] Tcav nolecov^ ' Each of the states ;' 
Al riTTovg T(bv ndXeojt^^, ' The weaker of the states ;' 
Ovdelg j(bv fieiQocHiujv, ' No one of the young men ;' 
IJov yrig ; ' Where on earth ? Ubi terrarum V 

Adjectives frequently followed by the genitive : nolkoi, 
dllyoi, fudvog, noiSQog, onoTeQog, ixdreQog, ovdersQog, ixucriog, 
OTudelg, elg. Pronouns: iocelvog, og, oartg, Tig. Adverbs: al- 

dyjL Particularly all superlatives^ as avTlxa d' olIstov ^ksv^ 
i: eXeidtarov n€TE7^vb)v'he immediately sent an eagle, 
the most perfect of birds.' 

Note 1. A participle preceded by the article (§ 140. 
Note 3) is often followed by the genitive ; as ol xazixcpvydv^ 
Tsg avT(bv (=txeryot aiuT (b v oi^ xixTiq)vyov)^ ' such of them 
as escaped ;' incdel^eiev ^v Tig noiXo^g ^^iQovTag xul tCov id €- 
Q fiikTix) V x«i Twy i n IT Tj d 6 V jj,d toj V T ol g X'al t6 aibfia xai 



204 SYNTAX. ^ 177. 

TYiv ipv/rip ^ l(x7tT ov a t> V, ' one might show many who pre- 
fer that kind of food and those pursuits, which injure both 
the body and the soul.' 

Sometimes ex is used, as tx twj/ (xv&Q^ncop ToXg el ng*kTJovat^ 
^ to the prospering part of mankind.' 

Note 2. Frequently both the adjective denoting a part 
and the genitive denoting the whole are put in the singular. 
E.g. 

'0 riuicFvg Tov aQi&iLLov, ' Half the number ;' 

''AyMv xriv nleiaxi^v xr^g GTgaTiag, 'Leading the greatest part 

of the army ;' 
Trig ^aqllrig uv/vriv, < A good deal of coal dust.' 

It is evident that in such instances the plural cannot be 
used. 

Note 3. The adjectives Slog ' divine,' dai^oviog, raXa^, < un- 
fortunate,' (j^Miog, and a few others, are often followed by 
the genitive plural ; as dla ywaixibv, ' divine woman ;' xd- 
},atva nag&irujv, 'unfortunate virgin;' S) a/hkc^ dvd^ibv, *0 
unfortunate man.' It is supposed by many that the idea of 
superlativeness lies in these adjectives ; but we do not see 
the necessity of this supposition. With e^o^og < excelling,' 
the case is different. 

Note 4. Frequently the genitive denoting a whole de- 
pends on a neuter adjective, participle, or adjective pro- 
noun. E. g. 

MsGov riu^gag, < The middle part of the day ;' 

Trig GTgaTtrig dcnayojv i b n oil 6 v^ ' Bringing home 

the greater part of the army ;' 
To fxhif T ST qa ^ fi B V o V t O) v BaQ^dcQMv (pevyscv ei'wj/, 

' They let the defeated part of the Persians fly.' 

So ^vvinsGov eg TOV TO div &y x rj g, 'they came to this 
degree of necessity;' ol ^AOi]valov hnl fisya d v v 6, (ibod g 
iX(hQij(Tav, 'the Athenians arrived at a great degree of power ;' 
%l dYyeliag'^ 'what (of) tidings?' — In some instances the 
neuter plural is used, as am^/ua ^orig for aarjfxov ^orig^ or rather 
<kai]ixog ^otj^ ' indistinct noise.' 

Note 5. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun (§ 66,) 
often follows an adjective of the superlative degree; in 
which case the highest degree, to which a person or thing 



§ 177— § 178. GENITIVE. 205 

attains, is expressed ; as ore S e iv 6x a t og uavzov ravra 
^^dOa, 'when your skill in these matters was highest;' ttJ 
S'CQVT6i,Trj iail avxy] eojv r i] g, ' where it is widest,' in other 
words, 'its maximum breadth.' 

Note 6. The g^enitive is frequently put after ei/ui, yiyvo- 
(Ltav, the word slg or Tig being supplied by the mind ; as 
TOP 06.vaTov iiyovvTccc ndvreg ol alloo t (h v fi e y I a t ojv x a x (b v 
eivav, 'all other men consider death one of the greatest 
evils;' ^v 6 xaxodalfiojv UcxjxQdTi^g [^^ a t ij, 'one of whom is 
the unfortunate Socrates;' tovtwp yevov /uol^ 'do be- 
come one of them for my sake.' 

Sometimes ^Ig or rig is expressed ; sls S)v slg iyo) g)avri- 
aafiai y e y s v i] /it e v o g^ 'it will be shown that I have been 
one of them ;' drilov^ ot^ T(bv / q t] a t cb v Tig si, <itis plain 
that you are one of the good.' — Sometimes the preposition 
ix or dno is used before the genitive ; as s{)gricrsLg iv naavv 
^sgyocg TO\)g fiev sddoxifiovvrdcg ts xal davfial^ofisvovg i x j (o v 
fidhaja i 7T t^ a T a fi e V cx) V o j^ t a g, ' you will find that those 
who succeed in any trade and are admired are of the num- 
ber of the most knowing ones.' 

<§» 178. 1. The genitive may be put after any verb, 
when the action does not refer to the whole object, but 
to a PART only. E. g. 

AwsUyovTo TO}v llOojv, ' They gathered stones ;' 

T(bv xgs&v IxlsTtTov, ' I stole some pieces of the meat ;' 

Aa^dvTa xibv raLVLwv, ' Taking some of the fillets.' 

So cr(bp re (uol (Tv^nsiiii' 6nad(bv, ' send with me some of 
your attendants.' — 'Ex is sometimes used before the genitive, 
as KilUMv Xa|?(bi^ i X t (b v nsgl top pccop xgsfia/uiptxjp d a n U 
do)p, ' Cimon taking some (or one) of the shields that were 
hanging about the walls of the temple.' 

2. Particularly, the genitive is put after verbs signi- 
fying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit. E. g. 

MsTi/ix) dq&uEog, ' I partake of courage ;' 

^'ApSgsg ol ^vpaQ6Lf.iEPov rovds rov x t p d i p ov, ' The 

man who partook of this danger;' 
Trig dvvdt^sojg xolpojpov(jl, ' They partake of the powder.' 

So (jcnolavousp nckpuop tCop (jcyndCov, < we enjoy all o"ood 
things ;' ovTwg dpal^uijp rexpiDP, ' so mav I enjoy my children ;' 

18 



206 SYNTAX. § 178— § 179. 

OvrjTov acafiarog ^sTv/sg, ' you have a mortal body ;' rig 6 rr^g 
TovTov 71 o V T} Q LoL g TcXj^Qovofxelv ^ovh](j6jLi6vog, ' who is he 
who wouhl inherit the wickedness of this man V 

Verbs belonging here are /ueiixo), /usTaXuiu^dva), (xeTalaf^ 

Note 1. Sometimes fii^og ' part,' is found after fiBxix^ and 
fi6Talay/(kp(D, as fisdi^sip nxcpov fiiQog, « to partake of burial.' 
MeTe/ix) is also found with the accusative in which one par- 
ticipates ; as ov ydcQ lusiElxeg rdg I'aag nXrjy dg if^ol, ' you did 
not receive the same number of stripes with me.' — Jnolaiia 
with the accusative, as ^iSoixa illji anolavcrat rt (pXavgov, 
« I fear lest some evil befall me.' — Tvy/dvujis frequently fol- 
lowed by the accusative, as (^yxibva rv/djv ^iaov^ ' hitting the 
very elbow.' — Khjoovofim 'inherit,' in some instances takes 
the accusative of the thing inherited, as xlr/govofieTv ra xTr|^a- 
Ta, ' to inherit the possessions' The name of the person 
of whom one inherits is put in the genitive, and depends on 
the thing inherited. Later authors put even the name of 
the person in the accusative. 

Note 2. The genitive in connection with fiireajt. and 
ngoGT^xsL depends on the subject (expressed or understood, 
§ 157. Note 8) of these verbs ; as w y firjdev fiiqog roXg no- 
vi]Qoig jLiiT € a T t^, 'in which the wicked do not participate ;' 
ToTg eyyvrdra) tov ysvovg ^BxeXvai t (b v xQVf^^'^^'^i *' pro- 
perty should be divided among the nearest relations ;' o^k 
G)eTO 71 Qo a r^yi e I V oddsvl d ^ ;^ ^ g, oorrt^ fi'^i ^elTiu)v sli] twp 
dgxfiuipixjp, « he thought that no person ought to rule, who 
was not superior to the ruled.' 

§ 179. Verbs signifying to take hold of, to touch, to 
feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed by the geni- 
tive. E. g. 

AdfisaOs TovTovt, ' Take hold of this man here ;' 
Mri oLTzxecrdai aTurwp, ' Not to touch them ;' 
KXvdl fiisv, « Hear me ;' 

rsvaav Trig Ovgag, ' Knock at the door,' literally ' Taste of 
the door.' 

So ^iLt^sgdiog tov Kvgov dcaovcTTia eYrj tov Ioittov, d:X^' 
oi) Ka fi^ {) a so)^ 'for the future they must obey Smerdis 
the son of Cyrus, but not Cambyses.' § 162. Note 1. 



§ 179— § 180. GENITIVE. 20? 

Verbs belonging here : d^dizJoixoLi, laa^di^ouai and its com- 
pouncls, ^/oinao and compounds, amofiai^ xtcyy^vo), i/zaijw, 

fiai^y odcpqaivoixai^ o^w * emit an odor.' 

Note. Verbs' signifying to take hold of are frequently 
followed by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and 
the genitive ii the part by which it is taken ; as i)^(!c3ovTo r^g 
l(bvrjg Tov ' Oq6vti]v , * they took Orontes by the girdle;' ni* 
leiav dv^uev nodog, 'he bound the foot of the dove.' 

Giyydvixt and ipavoj are sometimes followed by the accusa- 
tive ; as & ur^"xtiysg, ' what you have not touched.' 

'Ahovm and its synonyms also frequently take the accusa- 
tive ; as tIvojv y dco v TJxovcra xal (TTsgvojv x t tuti o v, vsx^v 
Ted^qrivovg^ 'what mournings do I hear, and beating of 
breasts, and wailings for the dead,' where xjvnov and ^9-^- 
vovg run parallel with /ocoj/.-^They frequently take that 
which is heard in the accusative, and that from which the 
thing heard proceeds, in the genitive; as ibv civdga Ttvv- 
S-d^^v ov T(bv 6 d i^Tt ogoj V dndpTojv, ' inquire of all travellers 
about the man.' 

rsvix) ' I cause to taste,' is followed by the accusative of 
the person and the genitive of the thing, or by two accusa- 
tives ;' as Bohlei as y e v a co nofhTOv d/cqarov (n e S^ v ; 'do you 
wish me to give you pure wine to taste V 

§ 180, Verbs denoting to let go, to cease, to desist, to 
free, to miss, to separate, to escape, are followed by the 
genitive. E. g. 

TovTov jLtri (nsd-teaSav^ ' Not to let this man go ;' 

Ovd' 'Ayainifii'MP Ir^y' sQidog, 'Nor did Agamemnon leave 
off his wrath ;' 

Tqv ^hv daaqrdvev^ ' He missed him ;' 

^ IB (T X ov ullr^'kb)!' TQidxorTa (jiddia^ ' They were thirty 
stadia from each other.' 

Verbs belonging here : f^e&ieixai sometimes ^sd-irj^i^ dcpie- 
fiav, Xr^yix)^ dne/o^ai^ duaQidvo), (ued^laTauac^ naoa/ufgioj, sI'kco, 
avy/ojoiuj^ duTilaxlaxio^ HIsIttui}^ dnoleljioaai, ixq^.svycj ' escape,' 
dXvGXix)^ XiffQSUJ^ TibCpBvya^ ono/uJQsuj^ dnocnaTea), dii/ix). 

The verbs xa^^uw, t^/yrt-w, /u^^/'^u), diogl'C.ix), navcj^ dnalldTTCO, 
sl'qyo), Uix), elsvdsQoui, duvi^uj, are followed by the accusative of 
a person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. To\)g norjjgdg 
^niOvfiiag e x ovt a g t ov t (ov navujv, ' causing those who had 



308 SYNTAX. § 181- 

wicked desires to leave them off;' NeTlog 6 ttiv 'ylalrjv 
dvovQL'C,u)v Tri; Ai. ^vrjg, ' the Nile, which separates Asia 
from Libya ;' v 6cr ov rrivd' dnaXld^ujxOdva, *I will 
deliver this land from the scourge.' 

Note. The genitive in connection with verbs signifying 
to free, to cease, sometimes depends on the preposition iic 
or <jc7t6, as i^BvOsQiocrag jriv 'ElXdcda (XTtd Tibv Mr^dixiv, 'having 
delivered Greece from the Medes ;' navcrov i x xaxwv tfii, 
'deliver me from evil.' 

^ 181. VerbSj adjectives, and adverbs, implying 
fulness, emptiness, bereavement, are followed by the 
genitive. E. g. 

Ilsvlag xai noXi^ov ri ndXig sye^Bv, ' The city was full of 
poverty and war ;' 

Oi GTcavi'QovTBg ^lov, ' Those who are in want of the neces- 
saries of life ;' 

KBv(hi^ do^aajudTOJv nlriQeig, < Full of vain notions ;' 

T(bv T6&vrjx6Tcx)p ali.g, ' Enough of dead persons.' 

Verbs belonging here : /e^^, nlrfio), ^qIOu), deco, dio^ai^ 
aTtoQBix)^ anai'i'c^o), nevof-iav, /Qri'^M- Adjectives : nliwg, /usaTog, 
n'kr\Qrig^ nlovcrwg, d.q)VBi6g^ XBvog, eqrjaog, nivi^g, xadagog, ^Tii^erj^, 
ocTog, yv/Livdg. Adverbs : aX*^, adi]v. 

The verbs nlrjQooj^ nl^Ttkri^i^ xoQBvvvfii^ aTBgico, dcnoaTBgeco, 
^grj/iidoj^ xBvoix)^ voacpti^oj, juovooj, are followed by the accusative 
of a person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. ndgcv 
jd^oiCFv ToTg i^oXdi v o a cp i bX g ^ to Vy ' thou wilt deprive Pa- 
lais of life with my arrows.' 

Note. ^bI and /orj are followed by the accusative of a 
person and the genitive of a thing ; as £i' t^ ^ e ? ?) x ^ ^ Q ^ ? 
v ^ a ? TTjg £,arj^, 7] avf.ifidxQ)v, 'if you stand in need either 
of my hand, or of allies ;' avTov ydg a b d bX fl go fir] 6 ^co g^ 
' you yourself stand in need of a Prometheus (foreseer) ;' 
fivOriGBav^ TT 6 6 (= obTi^vog) a b z Q ^^ ' you will tell US what 
you want.' 

^bX sometimes takes the dative of the person and the geni- 
tive of the thing ; as o t o) (= (hri^vi.) de xal d bX cpagfidxcov 
7taib)vl(x)v^ 'and whoever stands in need of salutary medi- 
cines ;' dst^vibv da a L ^ ov I s v fidTO) p solxb d eX v ngbg ai)-* 
Tov, ' it seems that you must employ profound reasoning 
against him.' 



§ 182. GENITIVE. 209 

<§> 182. Verbs signifying to remember^ to forget^ to ad- 
mire^ to contefnn, to desire, to care for, to spare, to neg- 
lect, to consider, to understand, are followed by the 
genitive. E. .g. 

Jkf^Tjaof^ TtaiQog croTo, ' Remember thy father ;' 

Tov (V oi'ii indriiToiuaL, ' Him I shall never forget;' 

Tig yocQ ovx dv dyixoano twv ccpd^ibv ixelvoov t ri g (jcqs rr^g ; 

'\Vho could help admiring tlie virtue of those men?' 
Karayelag ^ou, drilog ei, ^I see you are laughing at me ;' 
Ts^j^SL Toivvv^ (a V Ifxeiqevg' ov ydcg jn s y dc I o) v i 7t l 6 v- 

(iistg,' You will then obtain what you desire ; for you 

do not Avish great things.' 

So cr 8 6 6 V d' syd) o^tc dlsyi'C^cx), ' I do not care for you ;' ol 
Trig e(xvT(bv d v a v o la g oliyoogovvrsg, ' those who neg- 
lect their minds ;' ^al ^bv ^ev ^ovIsmv^vvvov^ « and 
they considered my advice.' 

Verbs belonging here : lui/uptijuao, lavOavofiai^ Irfio^ui^ ini- 
lavO&vofiai^^ (iya^ai^ Oav/ndt^co, Tcajayeldo), -vneqoQao)^ xajacpQOvib)^ 
iTTLOvfieoj^ Ifxetoix), og^yo/uai^ yXi/oibiai, scpie^iai, igdoj, eqafAav^ diVTi- 
Tiovio^ai^ fpQQVTl'Qix}^ dlsyiQix), odo^ai^ dAe^w, cpsldofxav, ar^do^av^ 
iTtifielsofiai^, ^ilsiv^ hOvuio^iaVy sidivav, ovvb](xv, Inioxa^ai^^ 
yiypcLaxijj, 

Miuvfi(fK(x) ' I remind, cause to remember,' and its oppo- 
site h]6dvo) or ^0(x) ' I cause to forget,' are followed by the 
accusative of a person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. 
{)7T8fj.v7]G6v IS s nuTQog, ' aud reminded him of his father;' r ^ v 
vvv f^cv fii^riaaaa, ' reminding him of these things;' i^ ds 
(I 6 Ttdv Tojv 1 1] (k V 6 V, ^ and makes me forget all things.' 

Note 1. Most verbs of this class are followed also by the 
accusative ; as rovg q)QovTtL,ovTccg ru loiavxa^ ' those who care 
about such things ;' Tvdla d' oi3 ^^//^?/,wat, 'Tydeus I do not 
remember.' — flnlm, dyandu), CTtgya), are always followed by 
the accusative. 

Mi.uv/icniM and its compounds are also followed by two 
accusatives ; as ol ' EyeaTaloi ^v^uina/lav dvaf.(ij^n'7\u}iovTeg\40i]^ 
vaiovg, < the Egestians reminding the Athenians of their alli- 
ance.' 

Note 2. The genitive in connection with some of these 
verbs sometimes depends on a preposition ; qs tt (x i d 6 g ^dv 
niqi TOV hwv f-i^ fiVTjcrdriTe bti, < as to my son, make no more 

18* 



210 SYNTAX. § 183. 

mention of him ;' 7t bqI xihv h AlyvnTco xal iv SiTislla dvva- 
adccL cpQovTi'c,evv^ ' to be able to take care of the affairs of 
Egypt and Sicily.' 

<§^ 183. 1. Verbs signifying to accuse^ to prosecute^ to 
convict^ are followed by the accusative denoting the per- 
son accused and the genitive denoting the crime. E. g. 

Jiib^o^ai ue dediag^ ' I vvill prosecute you for cowardice ;' 
Klmva dihqixiv ilovTsg Tcal alonrig^ « Convicting Cleon of 
bribery and theft.' 

Verbs belonging here : dicaxM, aloio)^ xaXioftai^, alTLdo/uai', 
sladyoj, dix(kt,(x) — ^Levyoj 'am accused,' dlu)vai ' to be convict- 
ed,' and dcplsXv, are followed only by the genitive ; as das- 
^eiag (psvyovza, ' accused of impiety ;' ^uv zvg dAqi ^lonrig^ < if 
any one shall be convicted of theft.' 

2. Verbs of this class compounded with the preposi- 
tion ytaxijL are followed by the genitive of the person and 
the accusative denoting the crime or punishment. E. g. 

'EnsLdri gsujvtov xaTadixd'C^sig S^dvajov^ ' Since you condemn 

yourself to death ;' 
Mijdh xuxayvi^g T(hv dv-d-gihnwv TO(TavTi]v dvcrxv/lccv, ' Do not 

declare that mankind are so wretched ;' 

Verbs belonging here: yarr^yoQato, xaTadixuC^cx)^ xaTayiyvdjaxco, 
xaTaxQiVCx), xaTa/st^QOTOviw, xaraifirjcpt'c^ojuai, xajaipevdofiai, xarS' 
qelv. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs. 

Note 1. KaTrjyogso) is sometimes followed by the genitive; 
as si (xhv ovv Tt a Q av 6 ficx) V, ri n a g an q 8 a ^ e C a g rnueXlov 
aiuTov xaTTjyogstv ktI.^ ' were I to indict him for proposing 
a law in opposition to another in force, or for unfaithfully 
discharging his duties as ambassador,' &c. 

'Eyxaleco takes the person in the dative and the crime in 
the accusative. 

Note 2. The noun denoting the punishment is sometimes 
put in the genitive ; fxsS^o^^djov {)nayay(hv MdTiddsa edifice, 
' he accused Miltiades capitally.' In classical Greek how- 
ever only S^avdwv is found in connection with verbs of this 
sort. 

Note 3. "Evo/og, which generally is followed by the da- 
tive, sometimes takes the genitive. 



§ 184—^ 165. GENITIVE. 211 

<§> 184. Verbs signifying to begin, to rule, to surpass, 
to be surpassed, 3,ve followed by the genitive. E. g. 

'AW dQX€ /Lid/rjg, « But begin tbe fight ;' 

STC&qTTjg dcvda'aojv, ' Ruling Sparta ;' 

"H t' «^a ndvTwv dianQinevg dipvxicc, ^ You certainly sur- 
pass all men in heartlessness ;* 

^^Og dcQiCTTsvsaKB fid/ead'av Tgihcov, ' Who surpassed the Tro- 
jans in battle.' 

Here belong : ag/co and its compounds, dvdacrcx}, ^aadevco, 
GTjiLiali'OJ, y^oairo.), UTqaj.rjyeM^ riyeofiai, TiVQiSvM^ xoigaviu), innqO' 
TTSvix), TVQavvsuoj^ deano'C^o), ImcfTaTm}^ icgaTsa)^ dgtCFTSvix), zallo- 
(jxevo^av^ diaTtgeTTOj, negiyiyvo^ai^ negiei^v^ dtaqjegix) ' excel,' i$7r£^- 
^dllco, ngoexix), vnege/yj^ TjTjdo^uai^, vuKdo^av. 

Those derived from substantives or adjectives may be 
said to take the genitive in consequence of the noun implied 
in them; thus t^v xa&' savrovg dv d' g (hn m v dgiGTs{)» 
(J a V T s g IS equiv^alent toot! (i g v cft o (^ tojv xa&' eavTovg d v^ 
'&g(h7TCfjp riuav^ 'who surpassed the men of their times,' 
§ 177. 

Note. Some verbs of this class are sometimes followed 
by the dative or accusative ; Kdlxsaa' dpdgsuaiv dvdaacop^ 
' ruling over the Cilicians ;' rglg ydg di] filv cpuauv d v d ^ a- 
<j& a L y s V s' dvdgihv ' they say thai he has ruled over three 
generations of men.' 

The compounds of agx^a 'begin,' are sometimes followed 
by the accusative. 

'Avduoix) is, in Homer, sometimes followed by the prepo- 
ition i^Bjd with the dative ; as II. I, 252. 

<§i 185. Many verbal adjectives which have an ac- 
tive significationj are followed by a genitive. E. g. 

TovovTMv sgycov i^sTacTTcKog, ' Who examines such trades ;' 
'Ervy^avsv ydg ov t g i ^ a) v ^v in n v X7]g, ' For he hap- 
pened to be not skilled in horsemanship ;' 
'Agx^^^og di^&gihntop, ' Qualified to rule men.' 

Adjectives belonging here: s/ttTTstgog, ^nsigog * inexperi- 
enced,' dai\jii(x)v, ddarig, jgi^Mv ^ ^TCtUBh\g^ aidgig, t'(^^t», dnaldsvrog, 
^TtiUT^^LMv , ^7tlXr]&og^ OiTiog^ di]'kri^Kx)v ^ Xvaavlag, dyi'iog, drjTCTiigiog, 
^vvi\y.oog, vnonTogy inrj^olog, inixlonog. Particularly verbal 
adjectives in txo,, as Tioirjiixog, ngaxiiKog^ dg/Lx6g. 



212 SYNTAX. § 186. 

Note 1. Sometimes adjectives of this class are followed 
by the accusative, provided the verbs, from which they are 
derived, take the accusative ; as 6 TadT' tTnaTrnLiojv , « he who 
is skilled in these things;' crocpdg yun 'dvrig xul t q i ^ o) v zd 
TOidds, 'for the man is wise and skilled in such things.' 

Adjectives of this class, which are derived from verbs 
followed by the genitive, are often said to take the genitive 
in consequence of the verb implied in them ; thus divv^^ioog 
(from ci- and ukovo}) takes the genitive because, according to 
§ 179., uaovb) is followed by the genitive. 

Note 2. The participle sldiSig is, in the Homeric language, 
followed by the genitive because the verb eldhui (§ 182.) 
takes the genitive, as II. XII, 229. The same might be 
said of its kindred iniaT&^evog. 

Note 3. Sometimes the genitive or accusative in connec- 
tion with adjectives of this class, depends on the preposition 

TlSQi. 

^ 186. The genitive is put after adjectives and ad- 
VERBS of the comparative degree to denote that with 
which the comparison is made. E. g. 

Kq e [t T oj V Blval cpi^inv t o vt ov xr^v Te/vr^v, ' I say that I 

am superior to him in the art;' 
Ilvgdg &6Qiu6T6ga, ' Hotter than fire.' 

Note 1. When the substantive w^hich is compared and 
that with which it is compared, are the same word, the lat- 
ter is omitted, provided it be limited by a genitive (§ 17.3.). 
E. g. X^Qocv fjere ovdev t^tt o v r^ ^ll (b v s v t i (lc o v, for x^gav 
ex^TS ovdev 7]TT0v Trig ^(DQag r^^^v evTVfiov, 'you 
have a country not less valuable than ours ;' xqeiuGMv fitv 
Zsvg Jloxa^^hv^ x g e I a a o) v d' avis diog ysvsri 11 o t ex jli o I o 
rirvTCTai, ' Zeus is superior to the Rivers, and again the off- 
spring of Zeus is superior to that of the Rivers,' for y^gsla- 
aojp (5' avTS ^iog ysvsri y s v srig II ot a ^ ol o. The ambigu- 
ity which may arise from this construction can be removed 
only by carefully considering the nature of the statement. 

Note 2. Here belong the adjectives hsgog, allog, dXlotog, 
dXloigiog, didcpogog 'different,' dsvTsgog, nsgirxog^ r^uioliog, and 
adjectives in -nloog or -nlacrwg (§ 62. 2). E. g. hregovg rom 
vvv oi^Tw?/, ' Other than those who now are ;' noxsgov Iutw 
InioTriiii] rj doeTT|, ri dell ol ov fiTT^axTJ^?/^, ' whether virtue 



§ 186. GENITIVE. 213 

is knowledge, or something different from knowledge ;' Stcc- 
gt)o^6? Ti?/o^, < different from anything;' ovdevog devjegog, 'se- 
cond to no one.' So oqpcv TqinlaGvov Klewpvfxov 
7iaQBd-i]y,£v r^fXlv, 'he placed before us a bird thrice as large as 
Cleonymus ;' jQinluGLov KEHQa^oixatGov^ 'I will bawl out twice 
as loud as you.' — Jidcpogog and ulXdigi^og are sometimes fol- 
lowed by the dative. 

'EvavTlog, which commonly is followed by the dative, 
sometimes takes the genitive ; as to (xvoctlop jov ^tv 6 a i ov 
■TTa^Tog i V a V T io V, avxb da avTco ofioiov, ' the unholy is oppo- 
sed to the holy, but is like unto itself.' The following ex- 
ample shows that the idea of comparison lies in huvTiog- 
Toi) V a V T iov dqibv^ t) ngoar^x' avTG noieXv, * doing contrary 
to what he ought to do,' Aristnph. Plut. 14. — 'AvTiaTQocpog 
also with the genitive belongs here. 

Note 3. Ji^acpsQco ' differ,' seems to belong here ; e. g. 
doxel aov toutcj dvacpaqsiv dvrig T(bv cillo)p t (hb) v^ 'It seems 
to me that man differs from the other animals in this.' Also 
the adverb diacpsQovTojg ' differently.' 

Note 4. Sometimes this genitive depends on olvtL or ngo- 
as 5«tti ^si'Qov'' oGTig d.vTl ii\g a{)Tov n d t g a g cpiXov vojuii^et^^ 

* and whoever loves another more than his own country;' 
otcri^p rj TVQuvvlg ngb eXsvd'eqii]g riv danacnoTegov^ 

* to whom tyranny was more welcome than liberty.' 

Note 5. When the conjunction r\ ' than, quam,' is intro- 
duced, the word compared and the noun with which it is 
compared are put in the same case ; as f-dl-leig in' avdgag 
argaTSvsa&aL noXlov btv dfislvovag ?] ^jcw^a^, 'you are 
about to march against men much superior to the Scythians;' 
[rolg SoLcnXevut, tCov Aaycedai^oviojv^ ddmslv r\T x o v i^eaTip ?] 
ToTg id lihi a ig^ 'the kings of the Laceda3monians have less 
power to do harm than private individuals;' dQeioat>v 
71 in eg -6 f.tT v d v d gdcr t^ r (hfiilr^aay 'I associated with men 
superior to you.' 

Sometimes the nominative is used after ^j, the context de- 
termining its verb ; as Tolg da vsMiigoLg xal fxdllov dx^id'^ov- 
OLP 1^ i y Co [sc, dxjiid'Qio), nagaivli)^ 'and I advise the young, 
who are more vigorous than I am ;' i^.^wj^ da a fi e i>v o v, tJ 
ixslvov (sc. ngoog(bpTat), t6 /uiXkov ngooguj^uivojv, 'but we 
foreseeing the future better than they.' 



214 SYNTAX. § 187—188, 

<§> 187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote that 
on account o/ which any thing takes place. E. g. 

Zrilib as rr^g ev^ovXiag, ' I admire you for your wisdom ;' 
Kal T^ fi8P {//LiezsQCi noXev Tr^g y r^g jr^g i^tt' 'flQUimloJv dedo' 
(uivijg (pS^ovovdL, » They are jealous of your city, on 
account of the land given to you by the Oropians.' 

Note 1. The genitive is used in exclamations, with or 
without an interjection. E. g. S) lloaeidov^ tov /u(x7t()ovg, * Posei- 
don, what a length !' ^o^l rig side nibnoTe ^ovg zoi^avUag ; t (b v 
dlal^ix) V 6 V f-idj ojv, ' and who ever saw wliole oxen roasted 
in the oven 1 what tough stories !' i(o (jloi, tvx^^, ' wo is me t 
what fate !' 

Note 2. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreaty 
denotes the person or thing, /or the sake o/ which the person 
entreated is to grant the request ; -as f^rnue y o v v m v yowd'C^eo^ 
fiTjde TO 3f 7ja> J/, < do not entreat me by my knees, nor by my 
parents.' Frequently the prepositions ^^re^, drri, Ti^og, are 
placed before the genitive ; as II. XXII, 338. 

2. Sometimes the genitive, in connexion with a passive 
form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. nlr^yslg 
S^vy aTQog Trjg fc^rj; vnhq xdcga, < being struck in the head by 
my daughter.' 

3. Sometimes it denotes the instrument of an action ; as 
Ttqriuai de nvqb g drfioio S-vgerga, 'and to burn the gates with 
burning fire.' 

<§> 188. The genitive is often used to li^nit any word 
or expression. E. g. 

"AnaLg eguevog yovov, ' Childless in respect of male off- 
spring,' in other words, ' having no sons ;' 
^All6c vv Tovye S^sol ^Idmovui tc e I e v -O-ov, ' But the gods 

now injure him in respect to his way ;' 
'Eovcrav 7]di] d v d q b g (hgab]v, ' Being now of the right age 

to be married.' 
Here belong the adverbs iyyvg, i'xrag, Md-guy nklag^ 7tg6u(x)y 
Ttoggw, ngmi^ i&vg, txdg, and some others. E. g. ToTg eyyv- 
rdxo} TOV yivovg^ ' to those who are very near in respect of 
family.' 

Note I. Here belongs the genitive after ex^fi or ^«« qua- 
lified by an adverb ; as ^g: %« zdxovg exaaTog, ' as fast as 



^ 189— § 190. GENITIVE. 215 

each could run;' Kalcbg s/ovrag '6iLtiag oQeo) (xid^rig^ <I see 
that you are pretty drunk.' 

Note 2. Here we may refer the genitive after verbs de- 
noting to take aim at, to rush against, to throw at; as 
iGTox(^usTo Tov /iieiQaxlov, ' he was taking aim at the stripling;' 
i)iGT€v(jov M6vel(kov, ' shoot an arrow at Menelaus ;' (xtutoXo 
TLxvGXbTo, ' took aim at him.' 

<§> 189. The genitive is used after verbs and adjectives 
to denote the material of which any thing is made. 
E.g. 

Xalxov Tcodovxai dLy&l^aja, * Statues are made of brass ;' 
^Plvov noirjTTiv, < Made of ox-hide.' 

Note 1. The prepositions i^, ^no, are often used before 
the genitive ;' eliiaTa d.nh ^vloov nenovri^iva, ' garments made 
of cotton cloth.' 

Note 2. Examples like ex(ov aTecpavov avd^BMv, < having a 
crown of flowers,' S^ula^oi ^eawlo li&ot.o, « chambers of hewn 
stone,' are referred to § 173. 

<§> 190. The noun denoting the price of any thing is 
put ill the genitive. E. g. 

*4lveovTaL rdg yvvalKag nagdc rcav yopscov xQ7]iLidTMv 
fLieydlcov, 'They buy their wives of their parents for 
much money ;' 

T&v novmv noiXovGvv '^ijluv navxa rd^di^-' oi Ssoi, ' The 
gods sell to us every good thing for labor.' 

So TTJg (TTjg I ar Q s ia g t^v sfi-^v dvanqa^iav ovx dp d X Z d- 
^ a V ^' eyd), 'I would not exchange my misfortune for thy 
servitude.' 

Note 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive ; 
in which case the verb of the proposition does not signify 
to buy or to sell ; e, g. ard^ tI xQ^og e§a fie fieia Toy IloLcriav ; 
T Q6i g fival d LcpQ i cr X ov, ' then what debt came upon me 
after Pasias ? three minae, for which I bought a little car- 
ria2;e ;' (f^Q' t'<^<j>^ "^^ dq)e[l(x) ; dihdsxa uvag naala- Tov (= r/roc) 
dihdsxa fjivag Jlacria ; let me see, what do I owe ? twelve minae 
to Pasias ; for what, twelve minae to Pasias?' 

Note 2. The dative is sometimes used for the genitive ; 
as olvltpvTO, aklov (xhv ;^ a ^ x cu, dllot^ d' al'O^iorv a v d t'lQ u>, * they 



216 SYNTAX. ^191—^192. 

bought wine, some for brass, others for bright iron.' Such 
datives belong to § 198. 

Note 3. "J^wg ' worthy,' and its compounds are followed 
by the genitive ; as unovdrig &^ia^ ' deserving serious con- 
sideration ;' (x^iog x)-av&Tov^ ' worthy of death.' 

The verb dc^iduj 'I think worthy,^ is followed by the ac- 
cusative of a person and the genitive of a thing. 

'fLvYjidq (from ^viofxav) is followed by the genitive of price ; 
as XQVI^^^^^ ^vTjiri, ' that can be bought for money.' 

<§> 191. 1. The genitive often answers to the question 
WHEN? E. g. 

Toy aiuTov xemwvog, 'In the same winter ;' 
Trig vvv jexovcrrjg cp(hg toJ' ev cpq6 v rj g, 'On the night 
which gave birth to this light,' that is ' last night.' 

So 'Tiovg dri -tneQfievia Kgoricova oipeav oKIvvt' '^gyslcov 
axQaxdv, ' to-morrow you will see the mighty son of Kronos 
destroying the army of the Argeans.' 

2. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
LONG SINCE ? E. g. 

Iloiov X Q vo V ds xocl itendgd-riTai nokig ; ' How long since 

the city has been taken V 
Uollibv i T a)v evx^dde 01)71 inided'/iiLirjHev, ' He has not been 

here for many years.' 
So TtoXXov y^g a-vjovg ov/ s(x)gaxa xgdvov, 'it is a great 
while since I have seen them ;' s^ t t (b v alovwg, ' who has 
not washed for six years;' noXXcbv iribv ovd^ ideXv aizolg 
i^eyivsTo jriv eavT(bv, ' for many years it was not permitted to 
them even to see their country.' 

3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
SOON? E. g. TQcdxovTa riibi E g (b V dno TaiLiTTjg rr^g rnuigag^ 
^ within thirty days from this day.' — Sometimes the adverb 
ivTog accompanies this genitive ; as irrog ov ttoHov /govov^ 
'within a short time.' 

^ 193. A substantive and a participle are very often 
put in the genitivej to denote the time or cause of an 
action. E. g. 

TaW £7Tg6c/d^7], K 6 v co v g UTgaTrjyovvTog, ' These 
things were done when Conon was general ;' 



§ 192. GENITIVE. 217 

TeXevTriaavTog de 'Alvdrreco, i^ede'^aro rr^v ^acn- 

h]iriv KgoTaog, 'After the death of Alyattes, Kroisos 

received the kingdom ;' 
AvTTj {LLEv ovdev ylyvejav, env^QsdvTMV t ib v tc or a /u U) v^ 

TtXeicop, ' It (tjie sea) does not become larger, although the 

rivers run into it.' 

The genitive thus used is called genitive absolute. 
Strictly speaking the genitive absolute emanates from the 
genitive of time, § 191. 

Note 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle 
ojj^ (from eiul) is wanting; as w^ i5g)?/)'7/T(oj^, 'who being the 
leaders,' where ovtcov must be supplied. 

Note 2. Frequently w^, ^ansg, Sare, are, ' that, as if, in 
as much as, on the supposition,' stand before this genitive ; 
as (d ? 0)^' ^ Z 6 V TO),v T (b V d^ tnicTTaad^al as xqAi ' 7^^ must 
know that these things are so;' cog ovxog tov d,vTile- 
y 6VV TTOty Tovg loyovg, ^ you go on the supposition that con- 
tradiction has real existence ;' oi fiev "El^vsg odrw^ r^yapd- 
itTi]aap^ & a 7t € Q o li] g. xrig ^E lid d o g nETtOQ'd-i](xevrjg^ 
^ the Greeks felt very indignant, as if the whole of Greece 
were devastated.' 

Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in 
connection with these particles ; as dlV od/ v^qsi Xiyio Tdd\ 
dlV 6 X s T V V (h g rcaqovTa vcov, 'but I do not say these 
things out of wantonness, but because I believe that he is 
near us ;' (h g e ^ 6 v ^(^?/ tzo v si v a-vTolg, o n dv ^ovXolvto, ' in 
as much as they had the liberty to do what they pleased.' 
See § 168. Note 1. 

Note 3. When the subject of a proposition is not ex- 
pressed (§ 157. Note 8), the participle alone is put in the 
genitive absolute ; as vovrog noll(a, ' it raining heavily,' from 

The genitive is used also when the subject is a proposi- 
tion commencing with ort ' that ;' as oacpibg d i]l(x) d^ i v t o g^ 
oTf' Iv Tolg vavai tqov 'EIItii'mv htX., 'it being quite apparent, 
that in the ships of the Greeks &c.,' which comes from 
(Tacpfbg i d yjlidd- 7], oiv iv jaXg xil., the subject of which is 
oTt iv TaTg xtX. Sometimes the genitive plural is used ; as 
eiaayyel&^vTOJv, ort fT^oli'iaaav vr^eg irr' aviovg iTxinXeov^ 
' it being announced that Phoenician ships were sailing 

19 



218 SYNTAX. § 193^§ 194L 

against them,' where however the plural y^eg may be said 
to affect the participle. 

But when the subject of the proposition is an infinitive 
(^ 159. 1), the accusative absolute (so called) is used. For 
examples see § 168- Note 1. 

§ 193. Frequently the genitive answers to the question 
WHERE? E. g. ^ ovx ^'Agysog riev ; * or was he not in 
Argos ?' So (^schyl. Prom. Vine. 713) ^a^ag dh / s t- 
^ g ol uidi]QOTeHToveg oUovui XdXv^eg, ' on the left hand dwell 
the iron-working Chalybes.' 8o the Homeric loveu^av no- 
ja/uoTo, 'to bathe in the river;' dieTcgr^auov nsdioLo, 'they 
marched on the plain.' 

<§) 194. The following prepositions are followed by 
the genitive. 

'Aficpi, in general, synonymous with Ttegi. 

^'Avev ' without ;' as i^rcel ovda to elnero n6i.fX7tav, bktiIq(jeiv 
TtTolled^qov av 6 V a -d" s v, ovda avv wutw, ' since he never ex- 
pected to take the city without him, or with him. 

'AvtL ' instead of, for ;' as olvtI da tov Elvav vrjcTLibTag^ * and 
instead of being islanders ;' ^v&' l^axLov fih e/eiv gdcycog, ' to 
have a rag instead of a garment ;' (j^ptI noiag aiitag ; ' for what 
reason V — It is often used in comparisons with respect to 
value ; as yvvaiHog ag' dvrl jaiv^o, ' you are now equivalent 
to a woman.' See also ^ 186. Note 4. 

'And ' from ;' as ^no 'Hhovnohog, ' from Heliupolis ;' ^no 
Tjovg TTQog aanagav, ' from east to west.' In general this pre- 
position denotes motion from one place to another. 

"Atsq synonymous with avev. 

"AxQi^ or cc/QLg ' until ;' as oc/gi^ Tcvacpaog^ ' till evening.' 

dvd ' through, by means of, with the assistance of, in ;' 
as Tccxnevra (^rj^' ovtco aiconrj dcanaTSv d i a Tr^g n 6 I s a) g ttj^ 
dclloTQlag ; ' and then do you fly so silently through a foreign 
city V ^toi vvxTog, ' in (or ' during') the night.' 

'Ek or ^? ' out of, from, of;' ez Trig oixtag^ « from (or * out 
of) the house;' sii Ttv/udTOJv, 'from waves.' — In connection 
with passive forms it is equivalent to -dno 'by ;' asTd lex-d-av- 
TOf 6 i 'Ale^dLvdoov^ ' the words spoken by Alexander.' 

"Eveza 'on account of, for the sake of, in respect of, as 
to ;' as TOV anaivslud-av avey^a, ' for the sake of being praised ;' 
Ttaidd TS GOV dni\/LiOpa tov cpvXdacJOVTog s 2 r s x s v (= 
evE}(^a) Tcgoadoza tov dnovouTrioBiv ' so far as his guardian is con- 
cerned, expect your son to return safe.' 



'J* 194. GENITIVE. 219 

'EtiL 'on, upon, to, during;' iTxljiiw xecpalcbv, 'upon their 
heads ;' bttI ^d^dewv, ' to Sardes ;' 'Enl uq/ovto; E-vd^vitUovg, 
during the archonship of Euthycles,' or ' when Euthycles 
was archoii.' 

Kaid 'against^ down from, on, upon;' as ovd' airtav ovde- 
filav xar' euov [yeygacpev'^, 'nor has he hrought any charge 
against me ;' vSwq xaTo. /scQog, ' to pour water on the hands.' 

ilferd ' with, together with;' id-ilo) EvM/elad-ai fisTUTCov 
7xald(x)v Trig ts yvvaixog, ' I wish to feast with my children and 
wife.' 

Me/QL or ^^xgig ' until, as far as ;' as ^i'/ov tovtov ' until 
this time.' 

Ilaod ' from, of;' as y,ovulov naga aov la^tov, ' receiving 
gold from you.' 

negi ' concerning, about, iji respect to ;' as bIgI de [ol /grj- 
ajiiol^ TTsgl T V ; . , , Ilsgl 'A&t]v^v, negi Ilvlov, negi gov, nsgi 
efiov, Ttsgl anavTixiv Tibv ngayuocTojv, ' and what do the oracles 
relate to ? . . .They relate to Athens, to Pylus, to thee, to 
me, to all matters and things.' 

Ugo ' before, in preference to ;' as ngo -d-vgwv, ' before the 
gates ;' TT ^ 6 js tovtwv tw^ xax(bv '^^jJ-Ip ye xoacrtiov xal ortwy 
alio na&isLv io-il, ' it is better for us to suffer anything else 
than these evils ;' see § 186. Note 4. 

JTIgog 'of, on the side of;' as Ttgog nargog rvia^ojgvxog, 'a 
tomb breaker on his fathers side ;' ngdg jcbv b/oprMv, ' in be- 
half of the rich.' So in protestations, y-al ah ngog tov aov 
rixvov xcd Sswv Ixvovaai, ' I beseech thee for the sake of thy 
child and the gods.' — In connection \vith passive forms it is 
equivalent to vno ' by ;' as e&elLov fuad^esLv to noisviievov 
ngbgAaxedaifiovLbJv, ' wishing to know that which 
was done by the Lacedaemonians.' 

^Ttieq ' over, above, in behalf of, for the sake of;' as T^rre^ 
Ti^ihv Tcogevouei^og, ' passing over us ;' Td lega to. S^voiiera lu 7t e q 
Trig nolsixtg, ' the victims offered in behalf of the city ;' llaaojLt' 
{) 7t e g ^iv/rig xal yovvMv^ oihv ts Toxy\Mv, ' J beseech you for 
thy life and might, and for thy parents.' 

'Ttto 'by,' in connection with passive verbs; as ngo- 
Gxvvov^evog r^dij (hg (^uadevg -v tt o t Co v dcucp' avToy, ' being 
saluted as king by his attendants;' 'J/aiol v cp' "ExTogog 
cp 6 V y ov T 8 g, ' the Achaeans being pursued by Hector.' It 
means also ' under;' as vcp' aguaiog, ' under the car ;' avgly- 
y(A)i^ V710, ' to the sound of the pipe.' 



220 SYNTAX. § 195. 



DATIVE. 

<§) 195. The dative is used after adjectives, adverbs, 
and vERBSj implying resemblance^ iiniorij approach, E. g. 

"'Ixelog JU, ' Resembling Zeus ;' 
Oi(T&' S) iu(xXl(tt' eoixag ; ' Do you know what you look 

most like V 

M^d-rjv Tiul vTCvov 6 jii lo) g ^ v id QCi (fvlt^nTOfxav^ * I guard 
myself against drunkenness and sleep, as I do against 
an ambush ;' 
Aaxedaifiovioig dia^udc/ea&av, ' To fight with the Lacedaemo- 
nians.' 
Adjectives belonging here : o/uoiog, i'aog, i'xslog, dcTccXavTog, 
i/ucp8Qrig, ^vvcodog, nooacodogy GvvTQOcpog^ av/ucpMvog, 6^6yhx)GGog, 
nh](Tiog, (^dslcpog, dixoXovd-og, and many others. Verbs : dxo- 
Xovd'ioj^ eno/uat^, onrjdew, diadixo/LiaL, eoiTta^ o/uiXitOy diuXeyo^at^^ 
fiiyvvixai, iofrco^ ludcxo/Liav^ duayMvl'^oi^av^ nalalu), and many 
others. Adverbs : 6iuotLx)g, i'dMg, o/uov^ na^aTiXrjaiwg, ufua, (jjgixv- 
Ta;g, sixoTOjg, Also the adverbs iyyvg^ nilag, dy^ov, which 
govern also the genitive (§ 188.). 

Note 1. The adjectives o/uowg and d.delcp6g, and those 
compounded with crvv and 6,aoi5, are sometimes followed by 
the genitive. Kotv6g> ' common,' which usually takes the 
dative, is followed by the genitive, when it implies posses- 
sion. § 174. Note. 

Note 2. When the substantive, which depends on i'ao? or 
moiog, and that with which I'aog or o^oiog agrees, are the same 
word, the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it 
(§ 173.) is put in the dative. E. g. xo^ai XaQiTsacnv ofxdiai, 
= xo^av o^aoXai Tcug xo^aig twv XagiTojv, ' hair resembling that 
of the Graces.' So od ydcg /ueTslxsg rdcg i' a a g nXrjy^g e/uol, 
'you did not receive the same number of stripes with me ;' 
TvgavvsvaavTa i' a a ersa t(o dcdelcpcD K Xe d v d g co, 'having 
ruled as many years as his brother Oleander,' literally, 
'having ruled years equal to his brother Oleander.' Oom- 
pare §186. Note 1. 

This is particularly the case with 6 aihog ' the same' 
{§ 144. 3); as xccrdc dij Tova-vTov ^govov tov ngrjTr^gog r ij 
dQTtay rj ysyovog, ' having happened about the same time that 
the basin was taken away ;' [0?/o"£i)^] Ttaxd tov a-d to p /govov 



§ 196. DATIVE. 221 

'H Q a Ttl el ysvouevog xtL, ' Theseus living about the same 
time with Hercules ;' ovdev t o) v uvT(bv ixeivot^g nqdixrO' 
U6P, ' we do nothing like what they did.' 

Elg sometimes imitates 6 avTog, as og sf^ol ^lug lyivex' 
bK fxaTsQog, ' who proceeded from the same mother as I.' 

<§^ 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to which 
the quality of an adjective is directed. E. g. 

Uo&SLvdg ToTg (piloig, ' Dear to his friends ;' 

^H fio V KqsiTTovr^v Tj]0£iv I!y,i(j)vriv^ ' It were better for 

me to guard Scione ;' 
''E/d-tcTTog -d-soTg, ' Hateful to the gods.' 
Adjectives belonging here; aya&og, icalog, £v/Q^(TTog, no- 
SsLvog, qadiog^ /alenog, r^dvg, epilog, aia/gog, and many others. 

3. The dative is used after verbs, to denote the ob- 
ject to or for which any thing is, or is done. E. g. 

Bori&eXv rfi ndrgq, 'To aid the country;' 

To X g d- av ov u V nlovTog ovdev ^ cp slsX, ' Wealth in no 

way benefits the dead ;' 
Avuaivousv?] T(5 v£xg(D, ' Abusing the dead body ;' 
''Hi.uv ngoGTaTTovuLv, ' They command us.' 

Verbs belonging here : aU^oj, ^?^/7w, ^orj&eco, iTttnovgeai, 
kvcrnslia), ^cpeleoj, Ivjuatrouai^, Xoj^aojxav, neid^o^ai, -dTtaxoTucOj 
xarazovo)^ '67tOTiTr^aao), IccTgeicj, sl'xco, {tneUco, evoxHco, dgecrxco, 
Ttgsnco^ dguoTTOJ, TroooraTTW, nagocLvica, nageyyvoaa, -vTtojLd^e^av^ 
annelloaai, and many others. 

Many transitive verbs are followed by the accusative of 
the immediate and the dative of the remote object. E. g. ovd' 
dv d.TCO d It] V ovd' dv 6 ^ ol 6 v oi d 6 v i, ^\ would not give 
a single obolus to any one;' ovg ov nagadoTsu ToXg 
'Ad-rivaiovg eVr/, ' whom (we) must not give up to the 
Athenians ;' toDto (.wl ii^dficpov, ' you reproached me with 
this.' 

Note 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed 
by the accusative, instead of the dative. 

Note 2. (1). The dative is used after a verb signifying 
to be, to denote that to which any thing belongs. E. g. 
Ou^' r^v x(xgd 7t g Kle co v v fLico, ' Cleonymus had no 
kneading-trough,' literally, ' there* was no kneading- 
trough to Cleonymus ;' 
19* 



222 SYNTAX, § 197. 

T elicit naXdsg ri (x a v aaloi is xdcyad-oi, < Tellus had good 
and noble children.' 

(2). The substantive in the dative after ehai, ylyvea^av^ 
is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing^ un- 
willing^ expecting ; as ol Kqotojv lutolv eJnov, ovx ^i> u cp v g i 
^ ovlo (ji i V I g 6iv a I., ktI.^ ' the Crotonians said that they 
should not be be willing, &c. ;' <& i I o v x l x di fio I jovt' uv 
-^ y, « I should have liked it myself \' bI avT(^ y^ u ov ^ ovlo- 
fihd) iaTlvdcnoy. qivead-av^ 'if you wish to answer 
yourself.' The participles accompanying the substantive 
are, ^ovldfisvog, S-ilojv, axuov, y^do^evog^ nqoade/d^svog^ ilnO' 
(xevog. 

Verbs signifying to come, sometimes imitate elvai, as 
ytyvihcryM d' (hg a (p io i v ^eldo^ivouuvv i yc d v w, ^ I know 
that you longed for my arrival.' 

^ 197. 1. The dative is often used to denote that 
with regard to which any thing is affirmed. E. g. 

Mdhara anovdrig a^ia t f^ n 61 e v, 'Of the utmost consi- 
deration with regard to the state,' or ' Deserving the 
most serious attention of the state ;' 
2 cp(^ V (utv IvTolri Jiog e/sL relog JtJ, ' As far as concerns 

you the command of Zeus is now done ;' 
TL UOL nagua/oj ^Tjra tw TsS^vrjxoJv, ' What shall I nOW 

offer thee for the deceased V 
^0 OLub ^ ElecpavTlvrig nolvog avco 16vtv CKvavreg tUTv to ;^w- 
qlov, ' a person going up from the city Elephantine will find 
the country steep.' In such cases the participle alone is 
used. 

Note 1. The dative is often preceded by the particle cbg* 
as eneinsQ el yevvaXog ^ g id 6 v t i^ ^ since thou art of noble 
descent to one who sees thee,' or rather, ' as thy appear- 
ance indicates.' 

Hence the phrase ^g ^f^ol, or &g f efiol^ ' in my opinion ;' 
as Kqmv ^v '^i]la)Tbg, d) g e ^ol, ttots, ' Creon was once, ac- 
cording to my judgment, in an enviable condition.' 

Note 2. Here belong the apparently superfluous datives 
(,iw)/, aol, 6lc.) of the personal pronoun; e. g. elnB^evaL fi o v, 
Tjocoeg, ayavov ' Iliovrpg najql cpilco xal /urjTgl yor^fiBvai^ ' O Tro- 
jans, do tell the bieloved father and mother of illustrious 
Ilioneus to bewail,' where ^ov might have been omitted 



§ 197. DATIVE. 223 

without any essential injury to the sense ;' ciPJ.d a' Ig 'HU^ 
oiov Ttediov d.d^6.vajoi ni^xpovoiv^ ovvBi^'' e/eig ' Elivi]v^ y.ai a (p i v 
(^= crcpLdcp) ya^^Qog Jwg iacro, 'but the immortals will send 
thee to the Elysian fields, because thou hast Helen (for thy 
wife), and art son-in-lavv of Zeus,' or, ' they consider you 
son-in-law;' ri^e^r^yiBv rnn l v 6 ^ivog; 'has the stranger 
reall}^ gone f/om us?' So in the Latin, 'ad ilia mihi pro 
se quisque acriter intendat animum.' So in English, She 
leans me out of her mistress^ chamber window- Shaksp. 
The tyro cannot easily appreciate the elegance of such 
evanescent datives. 

2. The dative is often used to limit any word or ex- 
pression. Compare <§> 167. E. g. 

'laxvsiv ToXg udj^uacTLv, ' To be strong in (their) bodies ;' 
'Eyx^^ll exsy^cicr^o, ' He was eminent in the spear ;' 
^vvaiol ysvousvoi xal t oi g u ih ^ a a v y,al t al g yj v % aX g. 

' Becoming strong both in body and soul.' 
So ev de ad-hog d^gasv eyAarco ic agd Ir^, ' she roused might 
in every one's heart,' strictly, ' in every one, that is, in his 
heart ;' (jcIV ovy. ^Argsldri 'Ayafxeixvow \vdave S-vfio), ' but it 
did not please the heart of Agamemnon the son of Atreus,' 
literally, ' but it did not please Agamemnon in his heart.' 
Expressions like these may be compared with expressions 
like the following ; rov da 'AgidaXov yal allovg avunodlaavTsg, 
X 6i gd g T£ Kal n 6d a g xal x 6 (pal7\v^ sRxov, ' and bindino- 
the bands, feet, and head, of Aridaeus and of others, they 
dragged them.' 

Note 3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote 
the excess of one thing over another; as noli loy linco i] 
'Ellag yeyove d-crd-evecnegr], ' Greece has become weaker in 
respect to one distinguished city ;' Evgmldov tiIsXv (== nUov) 
1] aradicd laliarega, 'one stadium more loquacious than 
Euripides ;' tcoj^ 'Ellr^vMv shal us UysLv k y az 6v a t a d I o c- 
G i V agiaiov, ' to be a hundred stadia a-head of the Greeks 
in speaking.' 

Note 4. Particularly, the dative is often used to limit the 
meaning of a substantive (§ 173.). E. g. 

er'iSaiaii^ c(^«|, ' King of (to) Thebes ;' 

riollic o I ducpl yugfj aq^thx nksvgal unoTglifj overt, ^ alX o u e- 
voio, ' His sides will receive many benches flying about 



224 SYNTAX. § 198— § 199. 

the head of him struck by them,' where the participle 
^allofihoio joined to the dative o[, shows that ol stands 
for the genitive ol. See Odys. XVII, 231-2. 
JoGig divdo^hnoiuiv, ' A gift (given) to men,' where the da- 
tive is used objectively, 

^ 198. The dative is used to denote the cause^ man- 
ner^ means, and instrument. E. g. 

Tolg nBTXQixyixhoig uldyvpouevoi^ * Being ashamed of their 

past acts ;' 
TavTT^ yavovag, « You feel proud on account of this ;' 
OhTig fis xTeivEL ^ 6 X o), ov8k ^ Irj cp i^ ' Outis kills me by 

stratagem, and not by open force ;' 
JgofxcD i'evTo ig Tovg ^uo^uoovg^ 'They went running 

against the barbarians ;' 
2 ^ riTt T Q(jj ds /LisTdcpgevov nlri^sv, ' He struck the back 

with the sceptre ;' 
* Oq)6ulixoXcnv dgcb/uai, ' J see with my eyes.' 

Note 1. The dative after the verb xQ&oaai, 'avail myself 
of, use, utor,' is frequently referred to this head. 

Note 2. This dative sometimes depends on iv, ovv, -vno, 
as idovd' Iv o^ijiudiv, ' seeing with (or ' before') my eyes ;' 
tVof X ^ Q ^ ^^ ^^' ^Iv^i^o daush], ' that he might fall by the 
hands of jEneas.' Such examples frequently occur in 
Homer. 

§ 199. The dative is used to denote that by which any 
thincr is accompanied. E. g. i^orfiijaav jdlg ^mqi^evui^v hav- 
7(bv TB nevTaxouioig xal y^^^^^S ott 1 1 t a v g xai T(hv ^v/bifLKx/cov 
fzvgCotg, 'they assisted the Dorians with one thousand 
five hundred hoplitse of their own, and one myriad of their 
allies.' 

Datives belonging here : Tts'^oTg, Innsvav, oTillTaig^ yjclolg, 
TtelTaaTalg, UTQajvmavg^ aigaTio, crToAo), vavoL 

Note. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da- 
tive of avTog- as d^^^ a-d T Ol g ltitto i^ g xal aq (xaa i, v daaov 
iovTeg, ' but going near with the horses and cars ;' TQir^qeig 
a-dtolg nlrjg(])^a(ji diS(pQagi]aav, ' galleys were destroyed with 
every thing on board.' 

Sometimes the preposition cnuv is found before this dative ; 
as [s^syov avTov'^ ■67T07Tgi\aaL ndaag aiuTrj u v v noXl, 'they 
said that he burned them all together with the city.' 



§ 200- § 201— § 202. DATIVE. 225 

§ 200. 1. Frequently the dative, in connection with a 
passive form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. 

IlQouTioloig cpvMuasTav^ ' He is taken care of by the ser- 
vants ;' 

doLotav KacfvyvriTOiav dafievjs, ' Being slain by two 
brothers.' 

Note 1. The preposition -^no is often used before this 
dative ; as «g ^ tt o Tvdeidri nv^aval xloviovTO q)(xlayysg Tg(b' 
MP, ' thus were the ranks of the Trojans routed by Tydides.' 

2. The dative after verbal adjectives in reog and tog (§ 132. 
1 and 2) denotes the subject of the action. E. g. einsg tl- 
fiacrdav ^ovlsi, a)q)slj] T^a gov tj nolig eattv, ' if you wish 
to be honored you must benefit the state.' So when the 
neuter of the verbal in tsov is equivalent to ^£l with the in- 
finitive (§ 160. Note 1) ; as oij ywaix^v ovdenod' ead-^ rir t r]~ 
T i a v^iuv^ ' we must never be conquered by women,' where 
r^TT7]Tia riiuZVy = del rifiag rixTauQca. 

Note 2. When the verbal in tbov is equivalent to del with 
the infinitive, the accusative is often used instead of the da- 
tive ; as 0}!)T6 fi v cr 6 o (pog i] t io v ciXlo v g tj To^ug axgonEvO" 
fjivGvg^ ^ nor must others receive wages than those who serve 
in the army.' 

<§) 201. The dative often answers to the question at 

what time ? WHEN ? E. g. 

T aiu T ri iLisv oi)v t ij ti ^ s g a o^x s/LKx/eaaro Baailevg, < The 

King did not fight on that day;' 
T r^ -6 a T 6 g a la Kvgog anogevSTO iifielrjiiivog (LiaU.ov^ * On 

the next day Cyrus marched rather negligently.' 

Note 1. Sometimes this dative depends on iv, as tw J' iv 
riiLtaTv, ' on this day, to-day.' 

Note 2. Hither we may refer some of the datives ahso- 
lute (so called) ; diS 7i ovr^cr a v t v gv v L x^ dgaua MM(iov 
uXmgvv Jtal d I d 6.^ a V T V eg ddxgva ansae to dhjigor, * when 
Phrynichus wrote a play, entitled, The Capture of Miletus, 
and acted it, the spectators wept.' 

§ 202. The dative often answers to the question in what 
PLACE? WHERE? E. g. M a g a (b V V f.dv or' iiiusv, idi(axo^ 
^Bv^ ' when we were at Marathon, we pursued (the enemy) ;' 



226 SYNTAX. § 203— § 204. 

TioiTriQ dk ahg a-dTdOv fdixvsv (xyQ(^, * but thy father remains 
there in the country.' 

<§) 203. The following prepositions are followed by 
the dative. 

'Aficpl ' about, on, concerning ;' as di^cpi nXevgaXg^ < about 
the sides ;' ^/acpl tquttl'qulq^ ' on the tables ;' ^ucpl ywuiy.l, 
' about (for the sake of) a woman.' 

'Ep 'in, at ;' as ^p touto) tG tottw, « in this place ;' to^ Eu- 
(fbdryp norafiov h d b^hx e/ojv, « having the river Euphrates 
on (at) the right hand.' — In the formula eiv 'Aidao (= iv 
^Aidov)^ (■ in Hades,' the genitive depends on 86^0Lg under- 
stood. Compare elg. 

*£'7r/ ' upon, on^account of, on condition;' as Ini iCj (= 
tIvv) yelqg ; ' what dost thou laugh at V in I JoTcrde Tovg rroe- 
o^eig in' amaiov xalw, ' on this condition I invite the ambas- 
sadors to dinner.' 

MsTix ' among, with,' only in the poets ; as oqQ' £v eiJw, 
oaaop iyu) fierce nauvv d.jTiioT6cTTj S^eog eluv^ 'that I may 
know well, that I am the most unhonored goddess of 
(among) all.' 

riaqik ' at, by the side of, with ;' as Ttag' iixol^ ' with me, 
apud me ;' na^di aoi, ' with thee, at thy house.' 

Uegi ' about, on account of, for ;' as negl ^icpsi^, ' about (on) 
the sword ;' n e gl yug die n o vfi i v i, lu(bv, ' he feared for the 
shepherd of the people.' 

Hgog « with, in addition to ;' as ngdg ao[, ' with thee ;' 
ngbg tovtoiq^ ' in addition to this.' 

2!vv ' with ;' as crvv aol, dla -dsd, ' with thee (with thy as- 
sistance), holy goddess ;' (Jvv iiayaig^ ' by means of battles,' 
§ 198. Note 2. 

' YVro ' under, by ;' as vtio roXg dvvauivoidiv lov, ' being un- 
der the powerful ;' vno Tvdsidri, ' by Tydides,' § 200. Note 1. 

VOCATIVE. 

^ 204. The vocative forms no part of a proposition. 
It is used simply in addressing a person or thing. E. g. 

Tvdeldri dwfii]dsg, ifjL(D xe/agLafievs 'd-v/uco, ' Diomedes son of 
Tydeus, delight of my soul ;' 

Eixs, Jwg S-vyaTsg, Ttolsfnov zal drfioTriTog, ' Depart, daugh- 
ter of Zeus, from war and battle.' 



§205. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



227 



The interjections 6, id), are frequently placed before the 
vocative ;' as ^ 'Axdev, xikeai jus, JU (pile, xtI., ' O Achilles, 
friend of Jove, thou commandest me,' &c. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

§ 205. 1. Most transitive or active verbs belong to the 
active voice. E. g. y^onTO) ' I cut,' giTrro) ' I throw,' y^Tsivw 
* I kill,' cpeQfx) 'I bring.' 

2. Most intransitive ox neuter verbs belong to the active 
voice. E. g. S^w « I live,' S-vriaxco ' I die,' tqe/co ' I run,' 
yTjgdaTcco 'I grow old,' dclyeco 'I suffer pain.' 

Note 1. The object (generally a reflexive pronoun, § 66.) 
of a transitive verb is frequently omitted ; in which case 
the verb becomes intransitive ; e- g. alavvoj sc. e^avjov, ' I 
impel myself,' or ' I proceed, march.' Verbs of this de- 
scription are, c^yw, ^dXloj, didix)^v, sXavvcx), e/co, h]^i, and their 
compounds, and many others. See also § 163. 2, and § 164. 

Note 2. The perfect and pluperfect active of the follow- 
ing verbs borrow the signification of the passive or middle. 

'AAI^KH I capture, dllcnco' igstncx) 1 demolish, 2 perf. 
ficco I am captured, 1 perf. 
edlcoxa I have been cap- 
tured, 

BPTXSl, ^Qvyaoaai I roar, 2 
perfe §E^Qvxa I roar- 

riFNR 1 produce, yiyvo^av 

1 am produced, I become, 

2 perf. yiyova am, 
dalo) (transitive) I burn, dtxio- 

fxao (intransitive) / burn, 

2 perf. didi]a I burn. 
J AH teach, 2 perf. didaa I 

have learned. 
JEPICn, deQKo^av I see, 2 

perf. dedoQxa I see. 
iyslQOj I raise, lyeiqoaailraise 

myself, I rise, 2 perf. ^yg^- 

yoga am awake, 
ilrto} I cause to hope, elnoiiav 

I hope, 2 perf. lolna I hope- 



sgriQiTTa am demolished. 
loTii^i I cause to stand, to-ja- 

^(^1^1 cause my self to standi 

simply, 1 stand, 1 and 2 

perf. earrjTca and tcnaa I 

stand- 
Ttsyd-cj (transitive) / hide, 2 

perf. yexsyd-a (intransitive) 

/ hide, 
yr^dtx) I afflict, yr^doimv I care 

for, 2 perf. yiyr^da I care 

for. 
MAINH., I madden, fualvof-tat, 

I am mad, 2 perf. ine^irjya 

I am mad, I rave. 
MHKSl, pT]X(xofiaL I bleat, 2 

perf. (Jeiurjxa I bleat. 
MTKSl, ^vxdo{.iai belloio, 2 

perf. /td^uvya 1 bellow, 
ol'yio I open, oXyo^nxu become 



228 



SYNTAX, 



^205. 



open^ 2 perf. tV/a / stand 

open, 
oV.vfiL I destroy, ollvfjiav I 

perish, 2 perf. oUAa 1 have 

perished, 
bgvvui, I rouse, oowfxai, I rise, 

2 perf. o^woa I have arisen. 
Ttel&co I persuade, neid-oum 

I am persuaded, 2 perf. 

Tcinov&u I confide in, 
Ttriyvv^i I fix, nriyvvjuat. I am 

fixed, 2 perf. ninriya stand 

fast, 
QTiyvv^v 1 tear, Qr^ywuav I am 

torn, 2 perf. eoQojya, I am 

torn to pieces, 
a^evpvfiL I extinguish, u^ev- 

vv^iav I am extinguished, 

Sometimes the perfects 7t 
^ g)&oQa (from cpd-sloo)), take 



1 perf. 'dd^rjua I am extin- 
guished, 

orinu) (transitive) to rot, uy\nO' 
fjiui' (intransitive) to rot, 2 
perf. (Tiarinu to he rotten, 

GTiillo) I cause to wither, 
ay.bllo^av (intransitive) / 
wither, 1 perf. taxh^xa I 
am withered, 

ir^yioi (transitive) / melt, t't/.o- 
fKxv (intransitive) / 7nelt, 

2 perf. TeTi]xu I am melted. 
cpcxiPM I make appear, cpcxUo- 

fiocL I appear, 2 perf. nb- 
€pi]vu I have appeared, 
(fvio I produce, q^iouai, I am 
produced, 1 and 2 perf. 
necpvxa and necpva I am, 

a Tt Itj Y a (from nlr^aaco), and 
the signification of the passive. 



Note 3. It is observed that when the verb is both transi- 
tive and intransitive, the 1 perfect is transitive, and the 2 
perfect (if there be any), intransitive ; e. g. nguaao) (transi- 
tive) ' I do,' 1 perf. nenga/a < I have done ;' but nguaaca (in- 
transitive) 'I am' or ' I do/ 2 perf. ningaya. 

• 
Note 4. The second aorist active of the following verbs 
takes the signification of the passive or middle. Compare 
Note 2. 

"^AAIUKSl, dUanoftm, 2 aor. MTKSl, fivyAo/uat^, efivxov I 

hdloiv I was captured. bellowed, 

^EPKH, degxa/naLy adgaxov I a^evvv^i, u^ivvvfiav^ e(T^i]v I 

saw. VMS extinguished, 

igslKOJ (transitive) / break, 2 axilloj, axello^uai., eaxlr^v I 

aor. rigizov (intransitive) withered, 

I broke, 9^w, cpvo/uav, ecpvv I was pro- 



igsirtoj, egslTto/nat^, rigmov I fell 

down, 
'icTTrifXi, laiafiav^ 6CrT7]v I stood- 
MHKSl, fii]Jtdofiat^y e/naTtov 1 

bleated. 



duced, I am. But 1 aor.. 
Bcpvaa I produced- 



§ 206. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 229 

Note 5. Many causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying 
to cause to do any things belong to the active voice ; e. g. 
ysvM ' 1 cause to taste,' elnM ' I cause to hope,' fii^vr^uTib) < I 
remind, I cause to remember.' See also § 207. 3. 

PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 

§ 206. 1. The passive takes for its subject the immediate 
object of the active, which with this voice was in the accu- 
sative (§ 163. 1). The subject of the active becomes geni- 
tive in the passive, and depends on the preposition ^^6, 
TtQog^ or fcJC. E. g. -6 fi el g nqoTi^r^crsad'S {mb Kvgov, ' you will 
be preferred by Cyrus,' the active construction of which is 
Kvgog ttqoti^uijctsi. -6 /Lcag, ' Cyrus will prefer you.' See § 194, 
also § 187. 2. 

The dative without a preposition is very often used in- 
stead of the genitive with i57to (§ 200.), particularly in con- 
nection with the perf. or pluperf. passive ; as el'Qiiio javxa t5 
Ev&vdriacp, * these things had been said by Euthydemos,' 
equivalent to sigvxsi. ravza 6 Ev&vdi]fxog, 'Euthydemos had 
said these things.' 

2. When the active is followed by two cases, the passive 
retains the case of the remote object. E. g. yvchfxijv fus- 
y(jcl7]v ucprjosd-?], 'he was deprived of a great idea,' from acpai^- 
qelv Tiva yvib^rjv fisydh^v, (<^ 165.) si'Qysa&a^ t&v rofiifitov^ 'to 
be deprived of the privileges,' from si'gyei^v tlvCl tcdp rofii/uojv^ 
(§ 180.) 

Note 1. The object, which was in the genitive or dative, 
is frequently made the subject of the passive. E. g. ^oil 
BicsXvog /usp KaTsiprj(pl(j&i], 'and he indeed was con- 
demned,' from KaTaipi]cpLUaud-av iTCslvov, 'to condemn 
him' (§ 183. 2) ; JcgaTSiaxf^av vnb tov "Egtoiog, ' to be ruled by 
Eros,' from 6 "Egwg xgazsT rcvog, ' Eros rules any body' 
(§ 184.) ; ei7T(j)v ovv javra xazecpgovrid-qv T$7r' aviov, ' say- 
ing these things I was despised, by him,' from aajacfgovBlv 
Tivog, ' to despise any body' ('^ 182.). So ol Aay^edaii^ioviov 
d.ni(TTovvTai, -6716 ndvTojv IlelonovrjaiMv, ' the Lacedaemonians 
are mistrusted by all thePeloponesians' (^196.2); nahiui[di]g 
cpd-ovTjS-slg {jnb tov ' OdvcraeuDg, ' Palamedes being envied 
by Odysseus,' from ' Oducrasvg icp&otnjas nalain\d6c, (ibid.) 

Note 2. The aorlst passive frequently has the significa- 
tion of the middle. E. g. ixjtrjkldpji^ ' I delivered myself,' 

20 



230 SYNTAX. § 207. 

from dcnalldcracx) ' I deliver ;' lq)oSri&r]v ' I feared,' strictly, *I 
caused myself to fear,' from (po^ioj < I terrify, cause to fear.' 
In such verbs the aorist middle is either rare or obsolete. 

^ 207. 1. Some middle verbs are equivalent to the 
corresponding active verbs followed by the accusative oi^ 
the reflexive pronoun (^ 66.). E. g. 

vLmoaui ' I wash myself,' = vItttm l/uavrov' 
TCTEvi'^ouav^ 'I comb myself,' = y'TEviTu) tjbKxvTov- 
€iix)&(hg lov s (J & a L, ' being accustomed to bathe himself,' 
= eioj&(j)g XovSiv kuvjov. 

When the active is followed by two cases the middle re- 
tains the case of the remote object (compare § 206. 2). E. g. 
BTtel d' 8f.iell6 TOP xf (J) Q (X K a ^vdvEG'&ai^ ' and when he 
was about to put on the cuirass,' from IvdCsLv tlvu toj/ '^w- 
Qdcxa (§ 165.) ; didu^aa&ai to, ' to invent any thing,' strictly, 
' to teach one's self any thing' (ibid.). 

Note 1. The accusative in connection with cfo^slad^av, 
TCBQawva&av^ xelgscrd-aL, and some others, is properly referred 
to § 167. 

Note 2. Many middle verbs of this class have become 
intransitive. Such are fit^invridxofiaL ' I remember,' from 
(xi^vriGKM ' I cause to remember ;' cpo^io^av ' I fear,' from 
Cpo^io) ^ I terrify ;' nla'Qo^av ' I wander,' from nl6L'c,o} < I cause 
to wander;' elno^ai 'I hope,' from elnb) 'I cause to hope.' 
In such instances however the middle signification has by 
no means disappeared: thus (po^iofiai.= (po^iio l^avrov, 'I 
cause myself to fear ;' &lc, (fee. 

3. Many middle verbs are equivalent to the corres- 
ponding active verbs with the dative of the reflexive 
pronoun (compare <§)206. Note 1). Such middle verbs 
are transitive. E. g. 

JJoiela&ai ttjj/ elorivriv^ ' To make a peace for one's self,' 

but noielv TTiv elQrivi]v, < to make a peace for others ;' 
JJaQeuKSvacTfXBvov de uAvxa enleov sig ttiv ^Ekkdda, 
' And having provided themselves with every thing they 
sailed for Greece.' 
Hence the middle is used transitively to denote that the 
object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of 
the verb. E. g. 



§ 207. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 231 

' ydio rilOs doag ^nl vr^aq ' A^^aiiSiv Iv a 6 fie v o g 6 v y a t q a, 
' For he came to the swift ships of the Achseans in 
order to ransom his (own) daughter,' II. I, 12-13. But 
in V. 29, Agamemnon says, ttiv d' ijih ov kvaw, 'but 
her I shall not deliver up.' 

n Old a f.i' ioi^ofiu'QeTo 'He called me his son,' Soph. OEd. 
T. 102L 

Note 3. Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the ac- 
tive with the reciprocal pronoun (§ 72.). E. g. loidoqovfxsdcc 
* we are reviling each other,' = lotdogov/usv dllr^lovg. 

3. Some middle verbs express an action which takes 
place at the com/mand of the subject of the proposition. 
E.g. 

Eiicovag 7toii]uafievoi^ ' Causing statues to be made ;' 
'EdL8a^aai]v as, ' I caused thee to be taught, I have given 

thee an education ;' 
^aveii^oaai xor^f-iaja, ' I cause money to be lent to me,' 

simply, *1 borrow money;' but davet'c^o} /oTJwara, 'I 

lend money.' 

Note 4. Frequently the middle does not differ in sense 
from the corresponding active. Thus oqaaddi, IdeuOai^ in 
Homer, are equivalent to ogav, idsTv. 

Note 5. (1). The future mz(^(/Ze is very often equivalent 
to the future active. In this case the future active is either 
rare or obsolete. E. g. Oavfidto) 'I admire,' fut. mid. 6av- 
fidao^iai ^ I shall admire.' 

So fut. mid. dyvoy\uoiiai, duagrriijofiai^, dnavTr^aouai^ drtolaiLi- 
(TOfiav, dKovdOj^iav, qGOfiau from ftc^w, ^adiov{j.ai, ^r^(jo}.iai, ^uoao- 
(tiai, ^or^aoiiiaL, yelaaoaai, yi^oduofiav, yvihaouaL, dri^o/iiai', dagOrj- 
GOfiai, dsiuoiiiaL, dgafiovfiav from T^e/w, dgdaoj-iai from didgday.cj, 
iyzcofLiKxaofiai^, sl'aof-iai from olda, STraLvecrofjat,, iniogxritTouat', 
eaofxav from slat ' am,' OevaoiuaL from dm ' run,' di/gdaojuat^, 
6i]gevaofiai, Oi^ouav, Oavoviiav and TsOp^^offat, dogovuav from 
6g(i)ax(x), Ogt^ouuL from rgexM, xcxfioviiai, xlavaouai, xleipouai^. 
TioldaouaLf h^^ofiav, krupo/mxi, f.iad\\(JOuai', /uolovuaiy from ^^coaxM, 
vsvaofjav from via) 'swim,' oiu{ht.ouai^, duovuav, oipofictv from 
ogdoi), oigi\(TOuai, nal^ofiuL, TCiid)\GOi.iai, Tislcfouav from Tida/o) 
neGovf-tav from ttItitu), nXsvcrofiac, npevaouai, nvi^ofiOLi, gevcrouat. 
(TiyyicrofnaL, (n(x)7Ti\aofuxLj axihipouaL, orrovddaouaL, avgi^ouav, rnco- 



232 . SYNTAX. §208— §209. 

(2). Frequently the future middle has the signification of 
the future passive. E. g. ^cpelriuoixav for ^cpehjd7](jouui ' I 
shall be benefitted.' So ^Idipo^ai., S^q^ipo^ai, dLnulhx^o^av, 
CpvM^oiuac^ yv/uvdcao/uaL, (j.diK7\aotjiai^ nQOit^^r^uo^ai, 'Ci]iini)uo^ai. 

Note 6. The aorist middle is in a iew instances equiva- 
lent to the aorist passive. E. g. cr/ead^uL (and its com- 
pounds) 'to be held,' Imio&ai « to be left.' So the Horn. 
^Ir^ud^au = ^h/d^rivaL from ^uklu), Ivto= iXvS^r] from ^vo). 

DEPONENT VERBS. 

§ 208. Deponent verbs are those, which are used only 
in the passive or middle voice. They are called deponent 
passive or deponent middle^ according as their aorist is 
taken from the passive or middle. In respect to significa- 
tion, they are either transitive or intransitive. E. g. the 
following verbs are deponent middle, aiuduvoaai ' I perceive,' 
2 aor. mid. r^ddourjv- Igyd'^oiiaL ' I work,' eigyaGuurjv rfyio^av 
' I lead,' riy?](Tuui]V' /uLcxofiai. ' I fight,' i/uu/eauiuTjP' the follow- 
ing are deponent passive, iTZL/uslioiuaL 'I take care of,' ins- 
^slrfiriv ngodviuioiuai ' I am prompt,' nqovdviirfii^v. 

Note 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive 
and the aorist middle. E. g. dvva^at, ' am able,' aor. r^^v- 
vrfiiiv in Homer idvvi^adinrjv. 

Note 2. Some deponents have, in the perfect, also a 
passive signification ; as el'gyaa/uaL generally ' I have done,' 
sometimes 'I have been done,' as (Xenoph. Memor. HI, 
10, 9) inidel^aPTog aTuTov T(3 2Ja)}CQ(lT6L S-(x)gaxcxg ev e I q y a g fi d- 
vovg^ 'he showing to Socrates some well made cuirasses.' 

Sometimes the aorist passive of a deponent verb has a 
passive signification ; in which case the aorist middle fol- 
lows the present; as y^aTaiprjcpitoaai 'I condemn,' icaTsip?]-' 
q)o(Tdp]v ' I condemned,' zaT6yji]cpla6i]p ' I was condemned 



TENSES. 

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, FUTURE, PERFECT, AND PLU- 
PERFECT. 






§ 209. The present, future, perfect, and pluper- 
fect, correspond to the tenses of the same name in Eng- 
lish. E. ff. 



§ 209. TENSES. 233 

Present ygdcpco ' I write,' or, ' I am writing ;' 
Future ygdipM 'I shall' or 'will write ;' 
Perfect yeygacpa 'I have written ;' 
Pluperfect. ^^^/^(/(jpeij/ ' I had written.' 

The ficture and perfect retain the time of the indicative 
through all the moods and participle. 

The dependent moods (subjunctive, optative, imperative, 
and infmitive) and the participle in the present mark a con- 
tinned action. Their tim.e is determined by tlie context. 
E. g. "k B y 6 vv ds aiuTov i\z V a a negl tov nudeog Toiovds tlpu 
loyov^ 'I heard him give the following account of his mis- 
fortune,' where the time oiUyevv is past ; o:^^>l' r^y. ov a a fiev 
?)Xi IIsQixlrig Ttollag ^incjdug'l eTtlGTano^ otg e 7t a d u) v tt^ 
TTolev litotsi adTTiv cptlslp avxov^ ' but I heard that Peri- 
cles knew many enchantments, which singing to the city, 
he made it love him.' 

We may remark here once for all, that the peculiar sig- 
nification of the tenses is most conspicuous in the indicative 
and participle* 

Note 1. (1). The present is frequently used for the 
aorist in an animated narration, in which the past is repre- 
sented as present ; e. g. y^oil n a L e v yuTtc to gteqvov^ aal 
TvTQibuaei dta rod dcbgaxog, ' and he strikes (struck) him 
in the breast, and wounds (wounded) him through the cui- 
rass.' So in English (Parad. L. 1), Forthwith upright he 
REARS fr 0711 off the pool his mighty stature. So with nozi 
' once,' ^Lovvaog, bv x Lzt e v 7t6&' -q Kdd/uov Tcogrj Ssfxelrj, 
*• Dionysos, whom Semele the daughter of Cadmus once 
brought forth.' 

The present and the aorist are often found in the same 
sentence ; as /f«^ ol Svgazovcnov ala 6 u v o v t a i xal e n a ab' 
y ^ or cc 7^, ' and the Syracusians perceived (them) and sang 
poeans.' 

(2). The present V^ regularly means I have come ; the 
imperfect t\xov has the signification of the pluperfect, I had 
come, 

(3). Sometimes the present has the force of the future ; as 
71 Ildcgcxlog Ig Tug 'AO-Zirag tTtlsvasi^^ unayyillovcra lu. yeyo- 
voTa, ' the Paralos sailed to Athens, in order to announce 
what had taken place,' where the present part- anayyOlovaa 
stands for the future part. uTtayyelovGa. 

20* 



334 SYNTAX. §209— §210. 

The present slfiv regularly means / shall go. Sometimes 
it means 1 go or am going. 

Note 2. The future is often used to denote a prohahle 
occurrence ; as cp ri a e l g vo/uiceadui. gv nuidog tovto joZoyov 
sivui^ ' you will probably say that this is considered as the 
business of a child.' 

Note 3. (1). Frequently the perfect has the significa- 
tion of the present; as didoixa 'I fear, am afraid;' ^if^ivri^ 
fiav ' I remember ;' 7ciycT7]uai, < 1 possess.' So didrja, dij^^wya, 
didoQxa, yiyova^ ei'ijjO-a, yiyojpa, ^i[3nv/a, uvoiyu^ euTrjXu, toixu^ 
iy^riyooa, soXna, fuiuaix, jiisiurji^a, najioiifu, so^ojya, tdya, fUhjuriKa, 
fiBfivxa^ xtxluyyu, Tcex^dyu, leldzu^ TtioTya, fni/LLijla, oJdix^ ttc- 
q)VKu, 6(jou)ij.av ' valeo.' In this case the pluperfect has the 
signification of the imperfect ; as idedoixeLv ' 1 was afraid.' 

(2). It is used also for the present to express a customary 
action ; as ovdev ^cnv Tcsgdalsdnegov jov vixav 6 yuo xqutwp uillu 
7t(j.pja a V V riQTT a 7c 6, 'nothing is more profitable than to 
conquer ; for the victor takes possession of every thing.' 

(3). The perfect is sometimes used for the future to ex- 
press the rapidity or certainty of an action; e. g. olcuXag^ 
eX ae lavT' lQi\(To^ai nuhv, ' you will certainly perish, if I ask 
you again the same question.' 

(4). The second person of the perfect imperative is used 
chiefly in verbs, of which the perfect has the signification of 
the present (§ 209. Note 3. (1)) ; as zid^vad^u ' lie dead, die ;' 
isd-v^Tix) ' let him lie dead ;' luefivrjuo ' remember ;' yJxga^^d^o 
(from xqoc^m) ' cry out ;' t'cji^-t (from oida) ' know thou.' 

The 3 person of the perf, imperat. pass, of any verb may 
be used to denote the complete termination of an action;' 
as TaiJrcc fiev ovv n £ tc a I a d oj -viXiv^ ' you have had sport 
enough, let there be no more joking about this.' 

Note 4. In Homer and Herodotus, the pluperfect 
sometimes has the signification of the aorist ; as II. V, 66 
and some other places, ^s^Itiksl for e^uls ' struck.' In some 
instances the pluperfect seems to have the force of the im- 
perfect ; as II. IX, 671, deidexajo ' they welcomed.' 

§ 210. The imperfect expresses a continued past ac- 
tion. E. g. 

eyqacpov ' I was writing,' not simply, ' I wrote.' 



<5 211. TENSES. 235 

Note. (1). Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt 
not brought to a successful conclusion ; as (Herod. I, 68) 
ifiiaOovw Tijv a^lriv, ' he tried to hire the court yard.' 

(2). It frequently denotes a customary action ; as (Isoc. 
de Pac. p. 168, Cor.) rovg da nolijag ^ed-' onlwv i ^ en e fi tt o v, 
' ihey were accustomed to send out the citizens armed.' 

(3). The imperfect is frequently used for the aorist, espe- 
cially in Homer and Herodotus; as tots drj 6 Qe(xiuToyMrig 
aeXvov 16 xcxl jovg KoQcvxtiovg Tiolld re zal xay.u slsy 5, 'Then 
Themistocles said many and bad things both about him and 
the Corinthians.' 

(4). The imperfect riv (from sl/^H 'am,') often stands for 
icFTi 'is ;' as Kvngig ovk ag' ri v S-eog, ' Cypris then is not a 
goddess (as we thought) ;' ovy,ovv yal to ovoiuA'C^aiv nga^lg rig 
icTTLv, ei'nsQ Tcal to leysiv nga^lg rig rj v tceqI tu rcQ&y^ara^ ' then 
word-making is a kind of operation, since speaking (as we 
have just said) is a kind of operation on things.' 

THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 

§211. The third future passive (called also pauIo-post 
future, from the Greek Mst' bliyov Milh)v) marks a com- 
pleted action, the consequences of which will be permanent 
in future time. In other words it transports that which 
is already completed to a future time. E. g. eyyeygdipofiaL 
(from eyygdcpa}) ' I shall remain enrolled,' implying that / 
have already been enrolled. 

Note 1. The third future is the natural future of verbs, 
whose perfect has the signification of the present (§ 209. 
Note 3. (1)); e. g. Ksxiriaoiuai ' 1 shall possess,' from J«eJ<T?y- 
fiai. ' I possess ;' ^e^vr^doixav ' I shall remember,' from fiif^ivi]- 
liioci «I remember.' 

Note 2. In many instances the third future does not 
differ from the common future passive; e. g. d8di[(jo([t(xv 'I 
shall be bound,' from dm ' I bind ;' 7ie7nd'O0}.iai ' I shall 
cease,' from navM ' I cause to cease ;' ne'nguuo^ai ' I shall be 
sold,' from innodGuo} ' I sell.' 

Note 3. The third future in some instances expresses 
the rapidity or certainty of a future action ; e. g. nengd^sTai, 
« it shall be done ;' Ted-dipsTav (from S^dmo)) « he shall be 
buried in spite of you.' Compare §209. Note 3. (3). 



336 SYNTAX. § 212. 



AORIST. 



§ 212. 1. The aorist in the indicative and participle ex- 
presses a transient past action, without any reference to an- 
other action. It simply narrates that which took place. 
E. g. 

aygaipa 'I wrote,' not 'I was writing ;' 

6 yodipag 'he who wrote,' not 'he wiio was WTiting.' 

2. The subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, 
in the aorist express a momentary action. Their time is 
determined by the context. E. g. tieqI nleiovog ino vria u- 
TO s vo Qy. £i V, ^yaqicraG'd'av tw <)^I«a) nuou rd dlxuiov^ 
he thought more of being just (continued state), than of 
pleasing (momentary gratification) the multitude at the ex- 
pense of justice. Klluaxu la^(hv e ^ s I & 6, xal u^uirvr^v 
(p i Q (X) V, TcansiT^ ^nava^ug sttI to q:QOvTiGTr^oiov^ to Jtyog 
7caT(x(jKa7tT\6i (pilelg tov deanorr/v^ mg dv uvzolg i ju ^ dlri g 
T^v olxlav, ' taking a ladder come out, and carrying an ax, 
and getting up to the top of the school, keep demolishing 
the roof, if you love your master, until you bring down the 
house upon them.' 

We see then that the dependent moods in the present 
(§ 209.) mark a continued action ; in the aorist they mark 
a momentary action ; and this is all the difference between 
them. 

Note 1. The Greeks use the aorist indie, and part, where, 
properly speaking, the perfect or plwperfect should be 
used ; as (Aristoph. Nub. 238-9) xaTu^i/S-' (hg eue, 2pa fi' 
iycdLdutr^g, (dv tceq ovpsx^ tlr^Xvx^a ... r^Xd- e g ds xutu tL ; 
^ come down to me, to teach me those things for which I 
have come . . . what have you come for V where rf^d^eg runs 
parallel with llr^vd^a. It must not be inferred however from 
this that the aorist may express the time marked by the 
perfect or pluperfect. 

Note 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the pre- 
sent to express a customary action. E. g. «^^' ^n' Ix^oihv 
drira nolla fiavd-avovuiv ol Goq)ol . . . TJaoa /uev ovv cpiXov ov ^jA- 
S-Oig av Tov&^ 6 d' sx-d-Qog svd-vg b ^ i] v ay k a g s v, 'but the 
wise learn many things from their enemies . . . Now from a 
friend you might not learn this ; but the enemy (as a com° 
mon thing) compels you to learn it.' 



§ 213. MOODS. , 237 

Note 3. The aorist also (§ 209. Note 3. (3)) is used for 
the future to denote the rapidity or certainty of an action; 
as a 71 cj 16 u e a 0' ug\ el y.axbv ngoaolaousv veov TtulaiQ, ' then 
we are undone, if we add a new evil to an old evil.' 

Note 4. The aorists r^aOrjv (from r^dof^ai)^ ^nr^vsGu, dTre- 
TtTvaa, and a few others, are, in conversation, often used fof 
the presents in order to express a decided feeling of admi- 
ration, contempt, &c. ; as (Aristoph. Eq. 696) ^crditt^ uneu 
^atg, 'it amuses me to hear your threats;' (Eurip. Iph. 
Aul. 511) dnemvaa Toiavds Gvyyiveiav, '\ do despise 
such relationship.' 

MOODS. 

INDICATIVE. 

§ 213. 1. The Greek indicative, like the English is used 
in independent propositions. E. g, o dgdxojv but I (xu-aoov, 
' the dragon is a long thing.' 

It is used also in interrogations both direct and indirect. 
E. g. Ti TTOieTg ; 'what art thou doing?' olds jiva igonov ol 
vioi diacfOeigovTui, 'he knows how the youth are 
corrupted.'^ 

2. It is used also in conditional propositions. E. g. dsi^ 
va Tc e i G 6 a s <j 6 a, el a i y r[a o /it £ v, ' If we shall keep 
silence, we shall suffer terrible things,' where si crcyr^ao^usv is 
the condition, and dsLvccTrsLudtisada, the consequence. — It is 
remarked here that in a sentence containing a condition and 
consequence or conclusion^ the former is called protasis 
{ngoTuGi; from ngoTsli^w), and the latter apodosis (^unodoaig 
from unodldo)^Ly 

When the condition and the consequence are both past 
actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the 
apodosis. In this case the protasis begins with the con- 
junction el IF, and the apodosis contains the particle av (= 
Homeric y-Bp). E. g. 

OvTOv si Tj (7 a V aj'dgsg ayocdol, ovx a v ttots Tavia s tt a- 
cr/or, ' If they had been good men, they would never 
have suffered these things.' 

Kal vv 7c 6 cr-ZixaaOev 'xaTa^'Iliop, i]vt6 agveg^ e I jui] ^g* 
d^v V orja s nair^g dcydg(by re Oe^v tf, ' And now they had 



238 SYNTAX. § 213. 

been shut up in Ilion, like lambs, had not the father of 
men and orods quickly perceived^* 

So ovTi d V TTQoeleysp, si (xrilTtLuxevaev ah^devGsiv^ 
' did he believe that he would prove a false prophet, he 
would not be predicting,' where the protasis contains an 
aorist, and the apodosis, an imperfect. It is not necessary 
that the apodosis should refer to the same time as the pro- 
tasis. 

Note 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis; 
as >f«i vv X6V evd' <xn 6X VT uva^ (jLpd(Jiov ^ii^elug, e i fir^ ao' 
o^v V 1] a e Jibg dvyunjo 'AcfQodixrj^ ' and now ^neas, king of 
men, had perished, had not Aphrodite, daughter of Zeus, 
quickly perceived.' Examples of this description frequent- 
ly occur in Homer. 

Note 2. Sometimes ^v is omitted in the apodosis; as ei 
yaq rj v unadv nqodrjXa rd fi^Xlovra yevr^crecr^ai^ ovd^ ovTMg (xno- 
uiaTiov ttJ nolsi tovtcov ri v, ' for if those things, which were to 
happen had been manifest to all, the city ought not even 
then to have given those things up.' 

Note 3. The particle uv may accompany all the tenses 
of the indicative, without any protasis expressed ; e. g. 
d ^ o V I 6 /UT] V (jiBv a V 0V71 loiC^ELv 8pd^(xde, ' I could have wish- 
ed not to be contending here ;' ov yug dv t] ^ a t' uvt^v, < he 
could not have touched them;' (Scrre r^g sigrivjjg iHv dirj- 
(LtaQxriTcei., 'so that he would have missed the peace.' So 
^g uy.riipiv d v d.y^v oliog oiuti scrd^^exaL, ' for this contest 
cannot possibly admit of any evasion ;' o2 -a i v /ulv, d-ebv wg, 
TLfiriaovai^, ' who will honor him as a god.' 

Note 4. ^'-OTtcog 'how, in order that,' is frequently found 
in connection with the future indicative; as (Herod. H. 
121, 2) Vs^^syov avTOv^ zsXsvsvv rr^v T.uyi(jTi]v tadvvTu unoT^Mvevv 
a-vTOv Triv 7csq)alriv, o x o) g (= OTiojg'j juri TTQOcraTtolicrsi. xal 
BZBii^ov^ 'they said that he (the caught) requested him (the 
one outside) to get in as quick as possible and cut off his 
(the thief's) head, in order that he (the thief) might not 
bring destruction upon him (the one outside) also.' — Fre- 
quently oTTcog with the fut. indie, supplies th^ place of an 
emphatic imperative ; as xccL aoi cpQ&aoj Tigayfi' o av /naS^Qv 
d.vr\q eGBi^. ^' 710} g dh tovto ^^i d id 6l^ e v g firjdsva, ' and I 
will tell you something which learning you will be a man. 



§214. MOODS. 239 

But see that you don't communicate it to any body.' 
^' Ottcx) g de y gvll v ^ sXt e [= yovlli^eTs) y.al y, o t^ e t 6, ^ and 
be sure to grunt and squeal.' In such cases it is custom- 
ary to supply the verb o^a ' see,' or oxonsv ' consider.' 

"Oq)ga^ and pj ' lest,' are sometimes followed by the fu- 
fure indicative instead of the subjunctive (§ 214.). 

The future indicative with ov fiy] supplies the place of an 
imperative; as ov juri h]Qr\a6Lg, 'thou shalt not talk nonsense,' 
Aristoph. Nub. 505. 

The historical tenses of the indicative are often put after 
iva, (hg (sometimes onojg), firi, in which case the leading pro- 
position also contains a historical tense ; as Tvgiov oidfxa 
lunova' e^av (= £^?/i/), 2 v' -6710 dsioacfi riagvaaov a a t e v dc- 
uS-r^v, ' leaving the Tyrian surge I came in order to dwell 
under the summits of Parnasus.' 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 

§214. The SUBJUNCTIVE is put after the particles ira, 
OTtojg * in order that,' wg, bcpga, firi ' lest,' ensidav (sometimes 
ineidri)^ ^jtdv or enriv (rarely insl)^ orav (sometimes ore, OTTore), 
Ttqiv, eujg, eocv contracted av or riv (sometimes ei). Also after 
relative and interrogative pronouns (§ 69.), pronominals 
(§ 73. 1), and adverbs (§ 123.). The verb of the proposi- 
tion, with which the subjunctive stands in connection, regu- 
larly expresses time present or future. E. g. 

"Av vy 6 T71V vh]v Iv' e ^ US' to, « Open the forest that I 
may come out ;' 

Aiv el t\ ocp qa xaxidTa t s I s v t ri a co T(xd' sgya, « Con- 
cur, that I may complete this work as quick as pos- 
sible.' ^ 

^ T a V ovv Tig d,7tocfTo^aTit,r^ otlovv, 0^ ygditiuaTa U7t o- 
aTofiaTil;sv;'' Now when one says any thing what- 
ever by heart, does he not repeat letters V 

E i cr 6 fi e Sa d' avilxa, dy tt o vt^ (T w fie v xpocpov^ 'We 
shall immediately find out, if we make noise ;' 

^E X ^ L ^ a (TO V a-vT^v^ Iv a xal v(^ SBaGibfisSa t^(v dcr]d6' 
va, ' Bring her out, that we too may see the nightin- 
gale ;' 

J e d I K a a', d) iroeG^lvTa, (.i 1) nhjy^bv J^t^, < I am afraid, 
old man, you will need stripes.' 



240 SYNTAX. § 214. 

The relative pronouns, pronominals, and adverbs, in con- 
nection with the subjunctive, are generally accompanied by 
the particle (iv (different from uv ' if). E. g. 

Z(ba ov Tocvra xaXsXg, a ^v ipv/riv e / 7^ ; * Do you not 
call animals those which have life V 

^ n 6t s q' ^v din o a q i V i]t a V to fiSLQi^xioi^, l^ e X e y^ 
xd^ricfSTav^ 'Whatever answer the young man may 
jxive, he will be confuted ;' 

^An 6 HQ i V a i vvv a t t' (= uiLva) dv % qm fx a i^, ' An- 
swer now what I ask you.' 

Also the particles tVa, onug^ Jk, ocpoa^ ttqIv, ewg, are often 
accompanied by the particle dv (different from a j^ 'if'), par- 
ticularly onotg^ Tcqiv^ and tMg. E. g. ^sl noLovixep t(xv&^ 
kx(!((TTO&\ oTav Tvvd yvibfjiev Ttovrjoihv oj^t' iguaTiip noay^u- 
T(x)v^ e CO g Cc V auroi^ i/u^dcXujinev eig xaxuv, o not g dv 
eid^ Tovg Ssovg dedomivai, 'we always do these things, 
when we find out that a person is a lover of evil deeds, 
until we place him in a dreadful situation, that he may learn 
to fear the gods ;' ovk unoxQwovfj^ai^ n qIv dv nv&oj- 
/^a^, 'I will not answer before I learn.' 

Note 1. The subjunctive very often depends on a verb 
expressing time past ; in other words it stands for the op- 
tative (§ 216.). This substitution generally takes place when 
perspicuity or emphasis is required ; or when the verb after 
the particle denotes an action which is continued to the 
time of the speaker. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 26-27) y-ul y^javibv 
eg oidfi^ dlog iisx^r^Xt '''^' «^t^o^ /Qvadv tv do^ovg £ x 'Hi ' and 
killing me, he threw me into the surge, in order that he 
might (may) keep the gold in his house.' So iTtoies ds 
d^cpojeqa lavia^ cb ^ o ts noTafiog ^gadvTe^og sl'rjy Ttal ol tzIooo 
£ (b a L ghoIloI eg ttiv BaSvlibva, ' she did these things, both 
in order that the river might be slower, and that the naviga- 
tion up to Babylon might be crooked,' where eh] and ^wo-e- 
are in the same situation. So y^al ey^^i cpo^r/S-slg firi loido- 
gta y 6 V 7] T a i, ndXiv xaTsngdvvov tov Kjr^a ltitiov ^ ' and I fear- 
ing lest abusive words should be used, again appeased 
Ctesippos.' 

Note 2. Mri « lest,' is sometimes accompanied by orciag, 
as dedoi/^ ono) g ^ov firi llav (p a v r^ g uocpri^ 'I fear lest you 
prove to be very artful.' — Instead of ^ri with the subjunc- 
tive, oTVy OTTwg, or (hg, with the indicative is often used. — 



§ 215. MOODS. 241 

Sometimes the verb, upon which /f*^ depends, is omitted ; as 
II. XXII, 123. 

§ 215. 1. The I person plural of the subjunctive is used 
in exhortations. E. g. '^^eig olv rdv MevsXecjv fiifuhfjie'&a^ 
%al juri a(p t (x)/ii 6 &a toXv dcvdgoXv, ' let US now imitate Mene- 
laus, and not let these two men go.' 

The 1 person plural preceded by g^^g^, or ^ys, is often 
used in this sense ; e.g. cp eg e, tov dogawg deeps lnv a oj (ll ai^ 
ToijlvTgov, ' let me pull the spear out of the sheath ;' inel fie 
dvayKaQsi^g deanoTsa tov ifiov Kzeivevv ovtc tx^^eXovja^ q) e g s 
dye Gv (Xfjj, Tsco xal Tgonco tctI.^ ' since you compel me contrary 
to my vi^ill to kill my master, let me hear how in the world 
&c.' — Nevertheless, Homer uses the 1 person singular 
without any (pigs, ays, or any other auxiliary word ; e. g, 
(11. XXII, 450) devTS, c^iiu> iLioi anea&op, I'd cofi' o tvv'' egya t£Ti;- 
axav, <• come, two of you follow me ; let me see (I wish to 
see) what deeds have been done.' 

2. The 1 person of the subjunctive is used in questions 
of doubt ^ when a person asks himself or another what he is 
to do. E. g. ^^g cp(b inlaTaorS-ai ; 'how can I say that I 
know ?^ s]!7zo) TO T(x)v eiojd^oTOJv ; 'shall I say some of the 
customary things V — Frequently the question begins with 
^ovlsv ; ' wilt thou V e. g, ^ o v I s v ovv dvo eldi] & oi) /n e v nsv- 
S-ovg : 'wilt thou that we suppose two kinds of persuasion?' 
— Sometimes ^ovlsv comes after the subjunctive. — Some- 
times the interrogation disappears, as si'is ti ^ oi)'ks t, nqo^ 
oS^r^g 7] dcpelrig^ ' vi^hether thou wishest to add or take 
away anything.' 

It is used also in questions ex\)Ye^s\x\g indignation ; e. g. 
JI0NT20I!. AlcTXv'^e^ nagauv^ gol aiwnai^. AIUXTAOi:. 
' Ey(}) a t, (o It (b ; ' DioNYSos. jEschylus, I advise thee to be 
silent. JEscHYLus. Am /to be silent?^ 

Note 1. The subjunctive is often used after o\) /uri for the 
future indicative ; as ovts ylyvsTao, ovts yeyorsr, otu d s oi)v /Lt ii 
y i V 1] T a i, ' it is not, it was not, it will never be ;' o-v /n t/ 
7tiOi]TaL' ngog ^lav d' o^tc ^v l6.(iovg^ ' he will not be persuaded ; 
and you could not take him by force.' 

In prohibitions the 2 person of the aorist subjunctive is 
used after |W^ and its compounds; as fnjdev (po^riOr^g^ 'fear 
nothing;' ^)^ dgp^re, 'do not let go.' The 3 person subj. 
is rarely found after ^^^. See also § 218. Note 1. 

21 



242^ SYNTAX. § 216. 

Note 2. In Homer the subjunctive is sometimes equiva* 
lent to the future indicative ; e. g. (11. VII, 197) ov yuQ rig 
fie ^iri d iTjT a L, ' for no one will lerrity me by force ;' (Odys. 
XII, 382-3) ^i <5e ^o^ ov Ttcrovai (ioibv inLELxa' diUOiBriv^ 8 v u o (jlu v 
€ig 'Aiduo, xal h vexveaaL q) a e i p o), * and if they do not pay 
me a suitable price for the oxen, I shall go into Hades and 
shine to the dead.' Sometimes the subjunctive is accom- 
panied by av Homer, xi or ^civ, as el di xe ^ri dm)avv, ^/w dt 
a 6v aiuTog elojfiaL, ' and if they do not give it, I will take 
it myself.' 

<5) 216. 1. The OPTATIVE is put after the particles ^i^oc, 
07ro>^ ' in order that,' (hg, ort * that,' ocfoa, /uVi * lest,' iTxeLdr] 
(sometimes iTisiddp^j iTisl, ore (sometimes otmj/, otiotuv), Tictlv, 
Scog^ ei (sometimes tuv Homeric 6i' tcsv). Also after relative 
and interrogative pro?iou7is, pronojiiinals, and adverbs. 
The verb of the proposition with which the optative stands 
in connection regularly expresses time past. E. g. 

'HX a'QovBveO' 2 v a cpo87]dsi7]v ^yco, ' He was tell- 
ing big stories that I might fear,' or, ' in order to scare 
me ;' 

"^Emaxoaiovg loyudag tCov onliTibv i^ i x q vv a v^ o n w g 
sI't] a av cpvluxsg^ ' They selected seven hundred chosen 
soldiers, in order that they (the soldiers) might be 
guards ;' 

^ G T i g da Tgwv xoilrig enl v7]V(tI cp b qo lt o uvv tivqI y.rj- 
letcp, Tov Ai'ag ovTaaze, 'And whoever of the Tro- 
jans proceeded towards the hollow ships with fire, him 
Ajax pierced through ;' 

^H Q (x)T a dri eneiTu^ Tig si'?], xal n 6 6 v elS- o v, ' Then 
he asked who he was, and whence he came.' 

Note 1. Sometimes the particle <^v (different from av == 
i:(^v) accompanies these particles and pronouns. Thus the 
optative is sometimes found after 2va av (Homeric ^Va xbv)^ 
OTtijjg dv, ocpga ap, (j>g dp, /ari dp ' lest,' w^ dv, Saog dp, &C. 

Note 2. The optative very often depends on a proposi- 
tion which contains a verb expressing present or future 
time. In this case the optative generally denotes uncer- 
tainty or probability. E. g. ?< die a op rgocpop Evovxleiap, ocpq^ 
enog sI'tzo ifj. i, ' call nurse Eurycleia, that I may say a word 
to her ;' Xoyog fih i a t' d^;/arop, w g odn a v aiwp' i x ^u o t. 



§ 216. MOODS. 243 

§QOTiov nqlv ^v 6 & v o v xvg^ ' it is an old saying that one can- 
not (possibly) know human life before he dies.' 

When the present is used for the aorist(§209. Note 1.(1)), 
it is regularly followed by the optative. E. g. nolvv dh avy 
i/Liol XQvabv i z n-e fin s v^ loc&ga naTrig, ? j^', e i nox^ ' iXlov teI^^tj 
71 i a i, ToTg 'C^cbcnv s I'l] navul ,arj (jnavig ^iov^ 'and my father 
sent secretly much gold with me, in order that the sur- 
viving children might not be in want of the necessaries 
of life, in case the walls of Troja should fall.' This is no 
exception to the rule that the optative depends on a verb 
denoting time past (§216.). 

2. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that 
has been said or thought by another is quoted ; but not in 
the words of the speaker. The action marked by the opta- 
tive may refer to present, past, or future time. E. g. 

^A 7t s a Q t V ar 0, o t v uavd&vovsv oi fiavOdvovreg^ a 

ovx ETtiuTavvTo, ' Hc answcrcd that those, who learn, 

learn what they do not know ;' 
* Einovy QTv daviuacTTwg CFTtovd&'QoLiiBv^ 'I said that 

we were w^onderfully in earnest ;' 
^Tn s vjt V cr 7] g, oTt Big sanigav 7\^ovfjiv, 'Intimating 

that I should come in the evening ;' 
^H i d 1] yag^ o t i s^ a-vj^v xalov Tvd.vaK^ipoiTO Txbp igcj' 

Ti/luuToji', ' For I knew that something good would come 

out of these questions.' 

Note 3. Sometimes oji^ or w^ is omitted ; as (iEsch. 
Agam. 604—6) t«7)t' andyysi^lov nocrei . . . yvval-na TtLCjjriv 
i)'' h do^ioig e v go t., ' announce these things to my husband ; 
. . . and that he will find his wife faithful in the house.' 
^On is also omitted when it has already been expressed ; as 
TtgwTOv fiev Ttgog Ilagiavovg Tivag slsysv, o t t Mr^^oxog juhv 
d.vo) si'rj dihdsxa niaegcov and Oix}A(TGi]g odov- ^svdf]g da cHg/coy 
aaoixo, 'and first he said to some Parians, that Medokos 
was up twelve days' journey from the sea; and (that) Seu- 
thes would be the leader.' 

Note 4. Instead of the optative after el^ art,, wc, the iiidi- 
cative is very often used. E. g. alXojg xe xul n go e ltio v- 
T CO V, ox I X7\v ^Elldda ilevdsgovat', ' especially because 
they proclaimed that they liberated Greece,' where i^^evOe- 
^oXev might have been used ; el e y a v ox v hlsvdegdg i ax i, 
xal xb yerog e 1 1] Mili\aLog, n e fcip s l s d^ aijxdv Uaaiooy, * he said 



244 SYNTAX. § 217. 

that he was a freeman, and a Milesian by birth, and that 
Pasion had sent him,' where iari, eXrj^ and n^fixpeie^ are pa- 
rallel to each other. 

§ 217. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a 
WISH (hence its name "Eyxhorig EviCTi7(i\). E. g. 

2!ol dk Oeol Tdcra d oX s v, ocra cpoeal ai\Gv ^svovvag, < And may 

the gods give thee as many things as thou longest for;' 

^'Avdga ts xal olxov xul ofjLocpQOGvvrfv otkx a e l av, 'May they 

grant unto thee a husband, a home, and concord.' 
Frequently the particles el, el ycio, el'de, wg, are placed be- 
fore this optative ; as £ i y ^q ly(i^v ^i^og ncugalytoxoio a i'l] v, 
* O that I were a son of aegis-bearing Zeus !' — Homer some- 
times adds ic^p [=ap) to these particles. 

Note 1. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist of the 
indicative is used ; as si'O e a' -bn' 'Illco rivags dal/ucov, ' O 
that fate had put an end to thy life under the walls of Ilion !' 
eW i^6H67T7]v, 'O that I had been cut off!' 

Frequently the aor. Ihcpslov, eg, e, with an infinitive^ fol- 
lows the particles si'Oe^ si ydg, cog- as si' 6' Id cp e X i v fioi -^i^ds' 
fiihv iq ^vyyevrig sivaL Tig^ iarvg dr^ joiavT^ ^povdiTev, ' O that I 
had a guardian or kinsman to give me such advice.' — Some- 
times (hcpslov and the infin. are not accompanied by any 
particle ; as w (jd e X ^ yug /uijdelg dllog 'JlgiaToyelTovt, X ol tg s v v^ 
' O that no other man had delighted in Aristogeiton !' — In 
later Greek ibcpslov, wcpels, are equivalent to ei'de. 

2. The optative (generally with the particle civ Homeric 
X8 or iciv), in an independent proposition, very often implies 
uncertainty, doubt, possibility, or inclination. E. g. 

Otutcovv av ridrj Tcbv OeocTibv Tig l e y o v, *> Now some one of 

the spectators might (perhaps) say;' 
^AlV ovic dvf^axeaaLTo, « But she would (hardly) 

fight;' 
TovTo de ii a V (= :ial dv^ TtaXg y v o I?], ' Even a child might 

know this ;' 
r e V vT d^ d V ndv ev t(5 ^aTtgQ XQ^^^j ^ Every thing 

may take place in time ;' 
^'Iacx)g ovv si'Tz I 6v dv,' They might perhaps say ;' 
^Hdi^g d V ovv a-vxibv 7t v d o I fi -)] v, ' Fain would I ask them.' 

So when both the protasis and the apodosis have the op- 
tative? ei'Tfrg e go t, TO fis, tL vofilt^o) fieyvaTov slvat^ T(bp Edot- 



§217— §218. MOODS. 245 

yoga nengayu^pojv, elg nollriv dnoQlav d. v x ar a a t a Itj v, 

* should any one ask me, which of the deeds of Euagoras I 
consider greatest, I should find myself in great perplexity.' 

Note. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis^ 
and the optative in the apodosis ; as e ^ yoco fxrjde tcxvtu old a, 
xal Tibv aydgcTTodojv cpavloTsgog d v e I't] v, < I should be more 
worthless than the slaves, if I did not know this,' — Also 
the optative is used in the protasis and the indicative in the 
apodosis ; as ol alloi Qrjdcdoi, ovg a d e v Tijg vvy.zdg naguysvi' 
(jdav napajgaiia^ s I' zt, aga ^arj ngo/iogoi^] ToTg icrelylvdoat^^ 

* the other Thebans, who were to come in the night with 
the entire army, in case success should not attend those who 
had entered, came to their assistance.' See § 216. 1. 

Also the subjunctive with idv or civ or rir is used in the 
protasis and the optative in the apodosis ; as ^ j^ y^g nage- 
XOOCTL ToXg deo^evoig ol y,vacprig ylaivag, nlevglzLg rifx^bv ovdev^ d v 
l6(.§ov noTB, ' for if the fullers furnish the needy with gowns, 
pleurisy will never afflict any of us.' 

3. Very often however the optative with ocv^ m an inde- 
pendent proposition, supplies the place of the indicative. 
E.g. 

Oi)K 'jiv ^6 6 e i (xrjv rod dgovov, « I will not give lip the 
throne,' where ^sOstixriv is equivalent to fusdr^aouaL. 

AvTog lusvTOt^ e ip /u a I rot, xal ovx d v I e l q) e Itj v, <I 
will however follow thee, and I will not be left behind,' 
where lsiq)Q6b]v evidently follows eijjo^ai. 

Frequently it stands for the imperative ; in which case 
dv is frequently omitted ; as el de fi^, Xeigiuocpog fihv '^y oXt o, 
Twv dk rclevgihv sxaTegojv dvo Tibv nge a 3 vt&tojv ffrgaTr/y^ in v u s- 
XoLadi]v, 'and if not, let Cheirisophos take the lead, and 
let two of the oldest generals take charge of both wings,' 
where r^yeiada), eTiufsleiuOwv, would be less polite. So Uyoig 
dvy ' you may speak,' softer than ^sye ' speak thou.' 

IMPERATIVE. 

§ 218. The Greek imperative, like the English, is used 
to express a command, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g. 

06vy6 « begone !' q:svysTco < let him depart,' cpsvysTs ' depart 
ye,' cpsvyinxJcrcKy ' let them depart.' 
21* 



246 SYNTAX. § 218— § 219. 

Note 1. In prohibitions the present imperative is used 
nfter H 'not;' as f^r] Uys Tavra, 'say not these things;* 
firix s TLg oi)P Or^leia Oeog, ^a tj t £ T^g aqmjv n 8 lq(xt m dcaKigaav 
ifidv enog^ 'let neither a goddess nor a god attempt to frus- 
trate my designs.' — It has already been remarked (§ 215. 
Note 1) that the aorist subjunctive is regularly used after /t«TJ. 

Sometimes /Wtj is followed by the aorist irapcrative, par- 
ticularly by the 3 person ; as firj Tt q Loj, Ttal, duda, ' boy, do 
not buy a torch ;' J<at vvp euaov, fj.r] d i gov fieli} u (xt m, ' and 
now let go, and care not.' 

Note 2. The 2 person of the imperative is sometimes 
used for the 3 person ; as x^Q^ ^ devoo nag -bnTj^ixrig- x 6- 
^ev e nag xvg, ' let every servant come hither ; shoot, quick.' 
This takes place when the speaker is in great hurry. 

Note 3. The imperative in connection with a relative 
pronoun or adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent pro- 
position after oiaOa (from olda 'I know'); as oiaO' oi)v 8 
dgaaov; « knowest thou what thou must now do ?' oiaO' 
(h g n ir] cro V ; ' dost thou know what thou must do V So 
in the 3 person, olaOa vvv a juov ysviado)-^ 'do you know 
what I desire to be done to me ?' 

INFINITIVE. 

<§» 219. The infinitive depends on a verb or adjec- 
tive. E. g. 

* YfisTg ds ^ oiuX 6 a s yevicrdai a-^xov aoq)6v ; ' Do you 

wish him to become wise?' 
*Er(j) oi)V fjiov d oy (b nal avxbg naXiv v (prjy r^cf a g 6 a v, 'It 

seems to me that I have again to lead the way myself;' 
' Adi]vaiovg n6(,vTag fxexa xov dslov v o fi fQe v g 8vvr^ueuQaL 

n o vriu a V neideadal gov ; ' Do you think that you 

will be able to make the Athenians together with your 

uncle follow your advice?' 
Qvecrx' 'Aya^^jivovi I sin 6 cp oqi^v a v, ' Thyestes left it 

to Agamemnon to carry it ;' 
'AvdyKi] G6 ndvxa tn iu x aa 6 at, sc b(jxI ' You must of 

necessity know all things ;' 
J s vv 6g vo^i'Qo^svog elvai ley svv^ ' Being considered an 

eloquent speaker ;' 
niPBcrdaL X6 Tidvaxog iaxvy < And it is very pleasant to drink.' 



§ 319. MOODS. 247 

For the subject of the infinitive, see § 158. See also 
§ 161. 

Verbs upon which the infinitive may depend ; ^ovlo^m, 

i&eloj, eTCLTQenM, xslsvoj, Inv/eiQto), nsiQuojiav^ to\u.um^ c;/aj ' I am 
able? I can,' i^^tlla), nage/a}^ ngoacoEo^uai, ^avdaPM, voui'C,o)^ deo- 
fiai^ liacroficci^ Ikstsiuco, 6qu(x(x), nagaLvio), ne^no)^ TTagayyMo), 
7too(T7iOieo^av^ 71Qogt6.tto)^ fjcnayoQBvQ), diTceinelv, tnngijw)^ oXofxav 
or oluai, ofjoloyeoiimt^, crvu^ovlsvM, ^t'pj, "keyo^ai^ ayytllo^ai^ 
(prjul^ TcaTsgyd'Qoiuav^ Ttgoudoxea), necpvxa and scpvv (from cpvoj), 
TtagaaTisvuCoiiiai^, and several others. Adjectives : uduvuTog^ 
SvvaTog^ deivog^ ridvg, ixavog, tniTr^deiog, Os^c, y.ay.og^ 7rii9~«j>og, 
^ddcog, xalenog^ d^iog, dizatog, and several others. 

Note 1. Mello) I intend, I am about to, followed by the 
infinitive (present, aorist, or future) of a verb forms a peri- 
phrastic future; as fieUei. Tv&hai^ 'he is about to place;' 
fisllsi yevBG^av^ 'he is about to become;' sfj^elXov cxgct 
Ttavasiv noS^' -djudg tov itod^, ' at length I succeeded in put- 
ting a stop to your croaking.' The infinitive is frequently 
omitted, when it can be easily supplied from the context ; as 
(Aristoph. Plut. 1100-1102) sI'tt' ijuol, gv tt^i> S-vgav ey.OTiTeg 
o^twgI (Tcpodga ; . , , fxd Ji\ all' e^sllov sc. ^OTuevv^ 'tell 
me, was it you that knocked at the door so furiously ? . . . 
not I, by Jove, I was going to though.' 

Note 2- The pronominal adjectives nolog ; rotoads, olog or 
olog re, and Ti]l[zog, are sometimes followed by the infinitive ; 
in which case they imply capableness ; as dlV ovx olog z' 
£t'^' d7to(Jo8ricraL tov yeltov, ' but I cannot drive away my 
laughter ;' Z^i^^'*^ t o lovd' dvdgog d fit 6 v s t. v vi]leeg r^uag, 
* through the want of a husband able to keep ofi' the cruel 
day.' 

Note 3. It has already been remarked (§ 158. Note 3) 
that the omitted subject of the infinitive is frequently differ- 
ent from that of the proposition on which it depends. We 
remark now that this takes place chiefly after adjectives- 
E. g. 7ta(ii(pa7]g aorrjo id sX v,' s. star all bright to behold,' 
where the subject of idelv would be ii^ru, ' any one ;' ywai. 
xog icdllog ov cp a t o v I i y 6 t^v, 'a woman's beauty not pos- 
sible to describe ;' 6 Tiov /alsTtcoTarMv s -6 g si v deouE^ 
vog, )) 6 TOtc g da T V g ivTvy/dveLv dguovvTMg /o(6//f roc ; 
' he who is in want of things most difficult to find, or he 



248 SYNTAX, § 219. 

who is easily satisfied with things very easy to obtain?' 
dcXyidrr] da/udaaad-aL, ' extremely difficult to tame.' It is re- 
marked that the infinitive thus used corresponds to the ac- 
cusative of limitation (§ 167.), Ii is observed also that in 
this case the passive infinitive can be used ; thus in II. 
XXIII, 655, we find uXylaTi] da/udcaaad^a^, but in 11. X, 492-3, 
dleysLvol da/LtriJUSvai ( = Jtt^^ ?]>/««'). 

Note 4. In narration the infinitive very often seems to 
take the place of the indicative ; in which case some part 
of q)i]i^t or ^^/w ' I say,' may be supplied. E. g. (Herod. I, 
86) T dv ^Iv dri Tto V B e Lv javia, ' now he was doing these 
things,' equivalent to 6 /uev drj inolee ravTa- (id. lU 121, 2) 
TT lo V J o V da TOvTCO T(5 ^auileX yevead^av diQyvQov fiiyav ' this 
king had amassed vast quantities of silver,' equivalent to 
Tt'ko V T g dh TOvTCo to) ^(xailel iy ^ v € to dgyv^ov (u^yag. So 
(id. Ill, 55) Tiuav da e cprj 2^(xjuiovg, d td t l t a q) t^v a C ol to v 
Ttdnnov 8i]^o(Tir^ -^no ^a/uiajv sv, ' and he said he honored 
the Samians, because his grandfather was honorably buried 
by the Samians at the public expense,' equivalent to Tifiav 
da ecpT] ^a/ulovg, d t 6t c i t a q) j] ol 6 n dn no g driuouin] -bno 
JSafiiojp ei). So (id. Ill, 108) nuaa d v r^ yri i^nifxnlcfTO T(bv 
6cpiix)v TOvTOJp, £ i /UTj y i V 6 a & a I, kut^ avxovg^ oiov tv y.axd ly^U 
drag riTndTd/iirjv ytvea&ai., < the whole earth would be fiilled with 
these serpents, if the same thing did not happen to them, 
which, as I understood, happens to vipers,' where inifinlaTo 
is in the apodosis, and yirsaO^ac in the protasis. 

Note 5. The infinitive of verbs signifying to go, is in 
some instances omitted ; as (Aristoph. Ran. 1279) eyo) fiav 
ohv ag to ^alavsTov §ovlo^ai sc. Ihau^ ' for my part I wish to 
go to the bath;' (id. Av. 1) ogS-riv xslevscg ; 'do you com- 
mand us to go straight a-head V (II. XIII, 135) ol d' i&vg gpod- 
yeov, ' and they were resolved to go forward.' 

Note 6. The infinitive frequently stands for the 2 person 
of the imperative ; in which case the subject, when ex- 
pressed, is put in the nominative. E. g. (Odys. XI, 441) 
7(0 firiTcoTs (TV yvpavxl rinvog si vat, 'therefore, you must 
never be indulgent to your wife ;' (Soph. ^\, 9) cp d g tc s lv 
Mvxrivag rdg nolv/gvcrovg ogqv, « believe that you see rich My- 
cenae.' In such instances the imperative eSsXs or S^ils (ex- 
pressed in II. I, 277, and II, 247) is usually supplied. 



§ 220. MOODS. 249 

The infinitive stands also for the 3 person of the impera- 
tive } as tev^ea uvlTiuag cp e q e x o) xollag enl vr^ag, acbfia dk 
ol'Kad' ifiov d 6 /ii 6 V a I., ' taking my arms let him carry them 
to the holh)w ships, and let him give my body back to be 
carried home.' - So (II. Ill, 284-5) ei dt tc' "AU^uvdfjov tcteC- 
t^Ti Mevtlaog, Tq (bag sneid'^ ^EMvriv xal XTrnuara tkxvt^ dcTto- 
dovvav, ' bvt if Menelaus kills Alexander, then the Tro- 
jans must restore Helen and all the properly ;' (Hes. Oper. 
392) yvf^ivbv a TT 6 I Qs I. V, yvfivov ds ^ o (ot el v, ' one must sow 
and plough naked,' Latinized (Virg. Geor. I, 299) nudus 
ARA, SERE nudus. In this case, the subject, if ex|)ressed, 
is put in the accusative. — The infinitive is thus used espe- 
cially in commands and proclamations ; as (Aristoph. Av. 
447) (JCX0V6T8 Aeco, TOvg 6 Tt I It a g vvv^evl aveXo^evovg Olonla 
/= rd onla^ din l b v a i tcuXiv oi'y.ads^ ' attention ! the heavy- 
armed soldiers must for the present take up their arms and 
go back home.' So id. Achar. 999. 

Sometimes the infinitive is put for the 1 person plural of 
the subjunctive (§ 215. 1) ; as vvv (xhv ev ttJ ^Elladv tc ar a- 
^eivavTag r^mv re a^Tstov B7Tiiiteli]6rivaL^ ' for the pre- 
sent remaining in Greece let us take care of ourselves,' &c., 
equivalent to KaTccasivavTsg . . . i7iLfish]6(bfisp. In such cases 
del is commonly supplied. 

Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish; as Zev ndTsg, 
^ AVav ra laxslv,ri Tvdsog vlov, ' Father Zeus, grant that 
the lot may fall upon Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus.' 
In such cases it is customary to supply dog (expressed in 
iEsch. Choeph, 16). 

<§> 220. The infinitive is frequently put after the par- 
ticles (hg or &GTS ^so that, so as;' especially when its 
connection with the preceding clause is not very obvi- 
ous. E. g. 

^AXV a'drdx^igsg [cu^o56^?ycray], iocr ts 6 u v (.h'x. 1^ s i v t fi^, 

' But they built it with their own hands ; which made 

me vvonder ;' 
ICi)TTQig yao yfieV & cr t s ylyvEudav t u d s^ * For Cypris 

(Venus) wished that these things should take place ;' 
Oi yuQ ensidE TO'ug Xtovg, & a t £ ewvno d o v p a v veag, < He 

could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels.' 

Also after ^<p ^t^ or ^9' c3 « on condition that,' oVo^' or 0(79 



250 SYNTAX. §220— §221. 

UqIv or TtQlv t) ' before, before that,' Lat. prius, prius- 
quam, often stands before the infinitive; as x«l tiqIv a e 
MOTvlag i 3C7T (^ el V ol'vov dixa, 6 nXoviog^ S) dbGnoiv\ (xveaT^ixet 
§Unix)v^ « and before you could drink ten glasses of wine, 
Plutus, O mistress, rose with his sight restored.' 

Note 1. Here belong the parenthetical phrases, ^g tnog 
sItt el V, ^ so to speak;' o) g iv tiHow I6y(^ (J ?/ P. w a « ^, 'to 
explain more fully ;' oj^ BiyidojuL^ ' as one might suppose ;' 
^g de uvvelovTu Binelv sc. ^(^7^), * to be brief, to express it 
briefly.' — " Ocrov or ocra or o rt (from oWt^) is also used for 
(^g- as or o i^ y' ^fi' eid 6 p at., ' ns far as my knowledge ex- 
tends ;' o T f' xuLi'' € id e V a i, 'for aught I know.' 

Frequently w? is omitted, in which case the infinitive ap- 
parently stands absolutely ; e. g. oiu TroHtu l6y(D slnelv, 'to 
be brief, not to use many words ;' ^cccl ig to ^xgi^eg eln bX v^ 
^ strictly speaking.' So doxBXv ifiol, 'as it seems to me;' 
dXiyov d Bi V, ' almost ;' /uLy^oov d bXv, ' nearly, almost ;' nol- 
XovdBXv, 'far from it.' — ^bXv is sometimes omitted, espe- 
cially with dllyov, as o (Jrj ol i y o v nuuuv at tibqI to aw/^a r^do' 
vul exovGiv, ' which almost all the bodily pleasures have.' 

Note 2. The infinitive is frequently accompanied by the 
particle a^, in which case it has the force of the indicative^, 
subjuiictive, or optative with av (§213.2, §214., §217.) 
E. g. >ioil ToXg /uev ^doxBXv'^ dcsl y.ivBXah'av za ndvxa^ xolg dk oidkr 
&v TtoTB 7ivvi]d'rivai, 'some think that all things are al- 
ways moving ; others, that nothing could ever be moved ;' 
Inl Tcollibv /uev a v iig id bX v SoubX [jlov tt|^ nuQa i(bv S-Bihv eiJ- 
voiav (pavBQGcv yBvofXBvi]v rrj tioIbv, ' it seems to me that one 
MIGHT SEE on many occasions the good will of the gods 
manifested towards our city.' But ovdev \doxBXv'\ ttotb hi^vtj" 
S^rivaL- iiTtl Ttollibv fiiv ng idsXv doxBX fioi, would mean, they 
think that nothing was ever moved ; it seems to me that he 
SAW on many occasions. Compare § 222. Note 6. 

<§> 221. Frequently the infinitive has the force of a 
neuter substantive ; in which case the neuter oi the ar- 
ticle (^ 141. 2) commonly precedes it. E. g. 

KqbXttov haxv x b crcocpQOVBXv xov TtolvTToay^uovsXv, 
' To act discreetly is better than to meddle with other 
men's business ;' 



,§ 221— § 222, MOODS. 251 

2 £, TtatQog ovT(A) daoov e^evojuivov^ r d jiiri Ttv^ia-d^at^ nov 
'(jTiv, aia/vi^r/v (pi^ei^, ' Not to know where thy father is, 
who has so long been absent from home, brings dis- 
grace to you,' where to gs 7tv&ea&ai> is the subject of 

SefXj^vvofie&a inl x ^ ^elriov ^B^iovivav jfbv allojv, ' We 

pride ourselves upon being of nobler descent than 

others ;' 
^td T 6 ^evog eiv a v ovk dv ol'ev ddiXj^S^rivat. ; « Do yOU 

suppose that you will not be wronged, because you are 

a foreigner V 

See also § 159. 1. 

Note 1. Frequently the preposition spsxa is to be sup- 
plied ; as l^iri fi6 -uTioXd^Tig ov n^bg to TiQayiia q)iXovBi7iovTa Mysiv^ 
'I ov KaTacpavhg yBveu^ai, ' lest you suppose that I do not 
argue in order that the thing may become evident.' Such 
genitives however should be referred to § 187. 1. 

Note 2. The infinitive with or without the article to 
(nominative?) is sometimes used in exclamations of surprise 
or indignation ; e.g. (Aristoph. Nub. 268) rode fir^ xvyerjv 
ol'ico&sv sl&Siv ifie top xaxodal^Liov^ s/optu, * I, a wretch, 
have been foolish enough to come from home without a hel- 
met,' literally, ' that I miserable should come from home 
without a helmet.' In such instances fiamdv, r^Xi&iov, apojpor, 
£vf]d-6g £o•T^, may be supplied. Compare Yirg. Mn. I, 37-38, 
Mene incepto desistere victam, nee posse Italia Teucro- 
rum avertere regem. 

Note 3. The infinitive ehav (from el^l « I am') seems to 
be superfluous in some instances, particularly in connection 
with the adjective £Jfc6j/ 'willing;' e. g. (Herodot. VII, 104) 
^X(bv TS eivai odd' av lAOVvo^ax^oi^v^ 'I should not fight 
even against a single man, if I had my way about it.' So 
the phrases to Ti\a6Q0P sTvav^ 'to-day;' to vvv elvai, 'now;' 
t6 crv^unav slvai, ' generally, on the whole.' 

PARTICIPLE. 

§ 222. 1. In general, the participle is equivalent to the 
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, preceded by a relative 
pronoun, or by a particle signifying //, when, after, in or- 
der that, because, that. 



252 SYNTAX. § 222. 

It has already been remarked (§ 140. Note 3) tluit the 
participle preceded by the article is equivalent to the finite 
verb and ly^eXvog o^, he who, 

2. Particularly the participle after verbs signifying to 
know, to hear, to see, to ^perceive, to show, to relate, to re- 
member, to forget^ to he ashamed, to rejoice, and a few 
others, is equivalent to the indicative or optative preceded 
by the conjunction oT ^. E.g. 

r V oi) g (^aTtTit.ofjiBvovTo fisLQdcTtwv, ' Perceiving that 

the stripling was totally confounded ;' 
TovTo ^ifiviifxuv acpin inayye'kXo^ivo)^ 'I remember 

that you both profess this.' 

Verbs belonging here : aicrddvojuav, alG'/vvoixai, dxoL&j and 
compounds, Ytyvihayix) and compounds, deUvvin, and com- 
pounds, dijlouj (also dr^log elfxi)^ dcu/iivijiuovsvo), diuuixcpiCM, dia- 
(f^QSLP, ti^d^v^io^av^ inilav&tJCPOiuaL, ^nidTu^av^ evglaxu), ideXv and 
compounds, TcaTijyoQiot) (== (palvco), xlvco^ fiav^dcvw, (li^i^rjiiav, 
V060), oida and compounds, 6o(/w and compounds, nwxfuvofxm^ 
€paivM and compounds, x^K^^ and compounds. 

Note 1. The participle after avvovda followed by the da- 
tive of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in the dative, or 
in the case with which uvvoida agrees; as fcV<^^^^ Iv^tJ- 
d s vv ovdhv bit V (Tx a ^B V (jj, 'I was conscious to myself that 
I knew nothing;' ticoc ovv i/uavjcL tovt' iyo) ^vvelaoiuai^, 
€pB<}yovT' d,TC olvd a g avdga ; « how shall I endure the thought 
that I let a defendent escape?' The same is observed of 
uvyyt'pcbaxco, as uvyyvv^bcfno^ev ai) t oX a v r^^X v ov 
no i riaaa dgdu)g, 'we are conscious of not having done 
right.' 

3. Verbs signifying to endure, not to endure, to overlook, 
to he contented with, to he satisfied, to cease, are followed 
by the participle. E. g. 

To dvvauOai d v ip (b v t a divex^f^Oav,^ To be able to en- 
dure thirst ;' 
Ilavcfav cplvuQibv^ ' Stop talking nonsense ;' 
n e Q i qa g ovtco ^a' tjtt' dvdglbv ^ag^ocgcop /eiQOvfJievov; 
' Do you suffer me to be so roughly handled by barba- 
rians?' 
Verbs belonging here : d^ejo//at, icagTsgeco, vnofi^po), rlr^vai, 
Tidfivoo, dd7]v exBiv, b^rclnlaaQao and synonyms, dyand(a ' am 



§ 222. MOODS. 253 

contented,' naiM and navouai, ^'^I/w, laleiTio)^ uTtalluaaouai.^ 
%/« ' I begin,' and its compounds. 

Note 2. The participle is often put after the verbs ^^a- 
'^lyvo^iai^ duxyoj^ diajelko, lavduva), Tvy/(xvo), cpQuvo)- in which 
case the leading idea is contained in the participle. E. g. 
ovdhp alio TtQ i (b V dvay6yivi]Tav^ 'he has been doing no- 
thing else \''dL6i,yov(Tv ^uavddvovTsg dixaioavn/v^ ^ they 
pass their time in learning justice ;' diajelovai dLxdcL^ovisg^ 
'they are continually deciding cases;' I Hi] 6 a tfAuvrov 
uocpbg «j^, 'I did not know that I was wise;' Tvy x^^vo- 
fi s v B TC lOv ^ov V T e q ^g ^Htlgtov a-vTov yeviaQai, ' we are 
desirous that he should become as good as possible ;' cp 6 u- 
V e V a V a ^ a g xara to EvqvijIov^ rcqlv lovg Hvoaxovaiovg naoa- 
ysvsaOat., ^ he went up to Euryelon before the Syracusians 
had arrived.' The same is observed of the verbs dianqrijub) 
(Horn.), diavvoj, 6atXiC,(x), 

Note 3. ^'E/o) is frequently followed by a participle ; in 
which case the verb from which the participle comes would 
have been sufficient ; e. g. xgvipacr' e/eig, = sxgvipag ' thou 
didst conceal ;' £ix^ xaTacFigsipdiuEvog^ = xaTScnqeipaTo ' he 
subjugated.' 

The same is observed of ol'/oinat., as ^/sto q}evyojv, 'he es- 
caped.' So the Homeric (5rj (= f^^?/) ; as /^ ^ cpsvyMv enl 
TtovTov, ^ he fled to the sea.' 

Note 4. The future participle is regularly put after 
verbs oi motion, to express the object of the action of those 
verbs ; as '^ ^ ^ ^ ngbg top ^Ayrjuilaov danaaousvog, «he 
came to Agesilaus to bid him farewell ;' xai ae ye d cd a ^ cov 
SiQ ^riiia i, 'I am going to show you.' 

The present participle is used when the time of the ac- 
tion marked by it is the same as that of the verb ; as 
TtefXTtSL ^B GOV (f B Q o V T u jdcrd' BTiiGTolag, < he sent me in 
order to bring these directions to thee.' 

Note 5. The adverbs aviixa ' as soon as,' l^aicpvr^g^ evdvg, 
' as soon as,' fisTa^v ' whilst,' aua (with the dative), are fre- 
, quently followed by the participle. E. g. ihstu^v Ovmv, 'while 
he was sacrificing ;' x(xi a iti a xaralixSovrsg ttqogsxIuto 
GCfi, ' and as soon as they had overtaken them they pressed 
upon them;' df.ia tw iiQie-uOvg (^q / o fi b v (o, 'as soon as 
the spring commenced.' 

22 



254 SYNTAX. § 223— § 224. 

Note 6. The participle with the particle ^v has the force 
of the indicativey subjunctive, or optative (as the case may 
be) with dv (§ 213. 2, § 214., § 217.). E. g. ^ycb de n^dg 
anavxa fiev t u di^xalvjg dv q i] ^ v x a xard Trjg nd^^eoog, ovt^ dv 
dvvai/Lirjv dcvTeinslv, ovr' dv i7Tt.;{6iQr^aaLfii, tovto noiBlv^ * for my 
part I neither could refute every charge that might justly 
he brought against the state, nor should attempt to do it,' 
where xd dtxaicog Up QrjOhxa is equivalent to ixelvu a dixaiojg 
dv QrjOsirj. But rd dixalojg ()i]OipTa, < those things which were 
justly said. So dHd ^adlwg dv d cp e 6 e I g {jnd xiov d i-mxGTihv ^ 
el xal /uergiojg xt, xovxojv inob^ae, xxX., ' but although he anight 
have easily been acquitted by the judges, if he had done 
even a small part of those things,' &lc. Compare § 220. 
Note 2. 

ADVERB. 

<§) 223. Ad\rerbs limit the meaning of verbs, parti- 
ciples, ADJECTIVES, and of other adverbs. E. g. 

Jv}iaLo)g dv ^nsx i ^dx o^ 'He would justly be cen- 
sured ;' 
Kalibg noLibv, « Doing well ;' 
^ Envxridevog ndvv^ « Very convenient;' 
ndvv xalibg, 'Very well.' 

§ 224. 1. The Greek has two simple negative particles, 
0^ (before a vowel ovk or ov/, ^ 15. 2 ; ov/ often becomes 
ov/l) no, not, Lat. non, and f-itj not, Lat. ne. Their com- 
pounds are ovdslg, ovde, ovts, ovxig^ ovda^og^ ovdinoxs^ ovdsxsQogy 
4&C. Iin]d6ig, (XTjde, ^r^xe^ f^^Ti^g, jurjdafzog, fj^ridinoxs, firjdixeQog^ &€. 

2. 0^ expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g. 
dXV ov X otog t' sifil, ' but I am not able;' dlV oij as x^ipco, 
' but I will not conceal it from thee ;' o^jc olda, ' I do not 
know;' xLvog al ^oeg ; ii Qa 0dwvda ; . . . Odx^ dlV Ai'yojvog, 
' whose cows are these ? are they Philondas's ? . . . No, 
they belong to JEgon.' So in direct interrogations, as od 
Ttaga/Ltsvetg ; 'wilt thou 710^ wait ?' odz Tiydgevov ; ' did no^ I 
say?' The same is observed of its compounds. 

3. Mri regularly expresses a dependent negation. Conse- 
quently it is put after the particles iva, oncag, &ax6, (hg, ocpga, 
Idv, 6ij kndvy BTtsidixv, and after all relative words, when they 



I 



^224. ADVERB. ' 255 

do not refer to definite antecedents. E. g. o-()z^v ngoeleys, 
€l fir] enlGTSvcrev d.lriOev(jevv, ' did he not believe that he 
would prove true, he would not be predicting ;' iuv di rtg 
i^elavvri jovg ccoxovmg, nal (uri di/r^Tai,, ' if any one shall drive 
away the magistrates, and if he shall not receive them.' 

4. Mr^ is u«2d also in propositions containing a wish, an 
entreaty, or a prohibition. E. g. navaavirig de zriQvyiuu noiri^ 
(jaaevoQ , liii^ d e V a unjefidai rr^g li]b]g, 'and Pausanias pro- 
claiming that no one should touch the booty ;' fi^ %' cinoXig 
yevoluav^ « may I not become an outcast,' § 217. 

It has already been remarked (§218. Note 1) that in 
prohibitions the present imperative, or the aorist subjunc- 
tive is used with /W^. 

5. M'^ lest, after verbs implying fear, anxiety. It is fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive (§ 214.), optative (§ 216.), and 
sometimes by the future indicative (§ 213. Note 4). 

6. M^ has also the force of an interrogative particle; as 
^i^ Ttr^ doxovinev gov o^x avayxala hacna dielrilvQhai ; ' do you 
not suppose that we have gone through every thing neces- 
sary T Here the person asked is commonly expected to 
say no. But ov tttj doxov/nsv aoo ; expects or presupposes the 
answer yes. 

Note. The negative particles very often correspond to 
each other. The following are the negative formulas : 

o^^Ts — ovTs^ neither — nor- 

oijde — ovds, neither — nor. 

00 — 0VT6, not — nor, 

ovTov — ovde, ovTov — oijTs, neither — nor. 

Old — ovde — 0VT6, not — nor — nor, 

0VT6 — ov, neither — nor. 

ovTs — ovde, neither — nor even. 

ovTs — oi) — ovde, neither — nor — nor, 

oijre — Te ov, the same as ovxe — ovie. 

^rjxe — (WTjTE, neither — nor, in prohibitions. 

The formulas oi) — re, ovts — re (also th ov — re), are 
equivalent to ovxe — ovis, when both clauses have the same 
verb; as (II. I, 603-4) ov fjsp cpogiiuyyog TisgixalUog, tji' f/' 



256 SYNTAX. ^ 225. 

'An6ll{x)v^ Movadcoy a>', «? cHeidov, ' neither of the harp of sur- 
passing beauty, which ApoHo had, nor of the Muses who 
were singing.' But if tlie verb of the second clause is dif- 
ferent fron:i that of the first, the second member ri of the 
formula has an affirmative meaning; (xlV oijxe tiootboov 
rnuelg ri^^a^uev noli^ov nqbg lu/Liag' vvv t' iOilofiev anovddcg noieX- 
uOai, ' we never began the w^ar against you ; we are very 
willing now to make a treaty,' where the verb of the first 
clause is rio^afiev^ and that of the second Idilouev, — Instead 
of 0VT6 — re, 0VT6 — Tcai or ovie — di is found. 

The first negative particle of the formula is sometimes 
omitted ; as 7\ujug ovd' 'Ellr/vlg for ovie Toujug ovO' 'Elh/vig, 
'neither a Trojan nor a Grecian woman.' 

§ 225. Two or more negatives, in Greek, strengthen the 
negation. E. g. OTav /uri qjrire aalbv elvai (xtjdkv^ (jr^xe dcya- 
Obv nqay^a^ firixs Xevxbt^, (u i] d' alio tUjv towvjwv /ai^d i v, ' when 
you say that nothing is either beautiful, or good, or white, 
or any thing of the kind.' 

The double negative ov /uri is put either with the future 
indicative (§ 213. Note 4), or with the subjunctive (§ 215. 
Note 1). 

The double negative /ari ov is commonly put with the in- 
finitive ; as ovx evavTKhdo/uao to (jlti ov yeywvelvy ' I shall not 
object to saying.' 

Note 1. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula 

ovdslg oaring ov, ^ no one who does not ;^ as ovdev o tl ovh r^^ca- 
Toc, 'nothing which he did not ask;' o-ddelg oaitg ov T(bv 
7taQ6vTCx)v -tneQejir^vBGs xbv loyov, ' there was no one of those 
who were present who did not much praise the discourse.' 
In this case both negatives belong to the same clause. 

The case is different w^hen the two negatives belong to 
two different verbs, as ^ivO' o v x av ^oitovxa i'dovg 'Aya/us- 
fivova, -d d^ ovx i el ov x a fid/eadai, ' here you could not 
have seen Agamemnon sleeping, nor not willing to fight,' 
where ovd' belongs to I'doLg, and the second ovx to idilovxa : 
or when /W'^j lest^ stands before ov. 

Note 2. Verbs and expressions, which contain a nega- 
tion, are often followed by the particle /^rj with the infinitive. 
Such verbs are (jcnavdaoj prohibit, forbid ; artayooevo) forbid ; 
(xQvsofiav deny, and its compounds; ene/w restrain ; eHoyco 
prevent j' ^vofuao defend, deliver ; nai^o) cause to stop ; ^'^li- 



§ 226. PREPOSITION. 257 

y^ofAao abstain ; (xnccrTeoj not believe, E. g. t6v re vouov Id so* 
xvvTi]v avTco y.ul Tolg vioig art e vn i i rj v fi ii dialiyeaOac^ ^ they 
showed him the law, and told him not to hold any conver- 
sation with the youth ;' i ^ e g v a d /iirjv ^gowvg tov /h ri dtag- 
QcajQevTag eig "Aidov fuolslv, ' I delivered the mortal race 
from being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades.' So 
e ^agv 6 g iaiL ll i] d' idslv fis TiomoTs, ' he denies that he has 
ever even seen me.' 

PREPOSITION. 

^ 226. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called 
the primitive prepositions : ^/fcfl, ccvu, uvzi, dno (poetic dirut)^ 
dia (old dial), e\g or ec, h (Horn, hi, slv, elvl), U before a 
vowel €s, £^^, y.aTd (in some poetic compounds y>aiat, as ^a- 
jai^uTi^g), /uej(jc^ nagd (poetic nagai), negt, ngo, ngog (old and Do- 
ric ngoTl,7TOTl), (Jvv and <?t'^, i'rceg (poetic 'vneig^^vTio (poetic t'Ttai). 
It has already been remarked (§ 135. 3) that the primitive 
prepositions are the only ones with which other words are 
compounded. 

Note 1. (1). The prepositions dno, ivl, ani, xard, ftiSTd, 
Tiagd, Txegi, vnig, vno, throw the accent on the penult, when 
they are placed after the nouns which they govern ; as 
vewv ano^ = UTto vexov, 'from the ships;' ^id'/ri epc, = ivl 
(LLcc/ri, 'in battle;' e)>og xdra, == y.ad-' alog, 'in the meadow;' 
sx&gibv vTcsg, = vrrtg e/Ogwr^ ' for the enemies.' This is called 
anastrophe [uvaargocpi] from dracFTg8q:oj), 

(2). Some of these throw the accent on the penult also 
when they stand for eitU compounded with themselves ; 
e. g. Bvt=ei'e(JTv &c., 67Tv= aTreazL <Scc., ndga = TiugeaTL &c. 
In this case the Attic dialect uses the Homeric ei'L. 

Note 2. In the early w^riters the preposition is often 
separated from the verb, with which it is compounded, by 
other words ; as dnd uh a & a v s 6 aTgaTt^yog, 'the general 
died.' This is called tmesis (r^arjcrfg from Tturo)), 

Sometimes it is put after its verb ; as (has d' utto gipoy, == 
ixnwcTs da giv6p, 'pushed olf the shield.' 

When the same compound word is to be repeated several 
times, after the first time the preposition alone is often used ; 
as y-^l yc a T u (.dv al. e v a a v uvtov Ti\i> yvralya, yc aT u da tcc 
Tixvcc, 'and they stoned his wife and children,' for xaxe- 
)» e V a (X V f^ibP aviov Tr\v yvyaXyca^ y, aTal^evaav da tu raxycK, 

S3* 



258 SYNTAX. § 227— § 228. 






2. The particles cJivsv, (xtbq^ ^xqI'Q or «/9^, evexa or tVexev 
(Ionic e'lvBTia or SivsKev), fiixQ'^^ or /m^/^s w^ (= elg), particu- 
larly civev^ evsxa, and (o?, very often have the force of pre- 
positions. 

<§) 227. 1. The prepositions uvsv, ^ptI, ^no, Svsxa^ Ix, 
TfQo, are followed by the genitive {§ 194.). :Svv, and ir, 
by the dative (^ 203.). 'Avd, eig, (hg, by the accusative. 
(^ 172.). 

The prepositions did, xaTd, -tn^o^ are followed by the 
genitive or accusative, 

'JfAcpi^ inl, fLtsTu, Ttagd, neqi^ i^Qog^ {)n6, are followed by the 
genitive J dative, or accusative. 

Note 1. A preposition without a case has the force of an 
adverb, E. g. (Eurip. Phoen. 619) xocl xaraxjevib ye nqog^ 
* and in addition to this I will kill thee.' — In the old writers 
a preposition is often repeated, as (Herodot. II, 176) Iv ^e 
xal ^ V Mi/Licpl [dcvs&rjxs'^ tov vmiov xeif-isvov y.oloandv, ' and in 
Memphis he consecrated the colossus which lies on the back.' 
Also the preposition with which the verb is compounded is 
often repeated ;' as u v (== (xvu) d' ' Odvaevg nolTu^urjTi^g ^v I- 
or T Of TO, 'sagacious Odysseus also rose.' 

2. A preposition in comj)osition is often followed by the 
same case, as when it stands by itself. E. g. -vn eq e v b y- 
y 6v T e g Tdcg vavg t b v 'I a S- fi 6 v, ' carrying the ships across 
the Isthmus ;' eariX&e /us ' it came into my mind.' 

CONJUNCTIONS AND OTHER PARTICLES. 

§ 228. ^i' (Doric) == si if. It is used also by the epic 
writers, but only in «l' xev, al' yao, al'Ss (== el'd-e). 

Aixa (Doric) compounded of «l' and xa (== xi), = i(^v if, 

*All<jc but, Lat. sed ; as 'Aqyelog d.juad-rig^ dclV "iBQiavvfiog 
aocpog, ' Argeios is ignorant, but Hieronymos is wise.' 

''Av, a particle implying uncertainty and indefiniteness. 
It may accompany all the moods. See § 213 — § 222. Some- 
times this particle is doubled ; as (Eupol. apud Athen.) ovg 
d' ovx d V s'cXBcrd''' ouJ' d v olvoiiTag nod tov, ' whom formerly 
you would not have appointed even inspectors of wine.' 

'Av (not to be confounded with the preceding) = iav if. 
Aga therefore, consequently, Lat. ergd. 



§ 228. CONJtjNCTIONS AND OTHER PARTICLES. 259 

"^Aqa (circumflexed), an interrogative particle ; as 5 ^ a to 

oaiov ecnv ; ' is holiness loved by the gods, because it is holi- 
ness, or is it holiness because it is loved V 

^'Atb (a tb) in as much as, Lat. quippe, utpote ; as u t' ihv 
avrog Ttavov^yog, ' in as much as he {quippe qui) himself is a 
rogue.' 

v4i;t($:^ [ai)T6 dga) and ^Tt^ but. It is very often equivalent 
to dlhx or ds. 

ra (Doric) = y^ 

r&q for, Lat. enim^ never stands at the beginning of a 
proposition. 

rL a particle of limitation. It is frequently rendered at 
least. 

rovv (yh olv) partakes of the nature of yt' and olv, 

^oti synonymous with ^^. 

^B and ; hut ; for ; as anayyeld-evTog da avjoTg tovtov, 'and 
when this was announced to them;' i^v da xqLvo) ; 'but if 
I judge VbIB''' y' ^ AnokX^xiv ^ iargSg y' (hv, idca&co- fxiad^ocpooel d ^, 
' then let Apollo, since he is a physician, cure them ; for he 
is used to laboring for wages.' See also (.dv. 

d}\ now, indeed, in truth, prithee, Lat. tandem. Its com- 
pounds are drinov (Jij ttou), dr^novd^av (dri noil) 'O^bvV drid^av (^rj 
S-Bv), drira, 

'Eav (ai av) if. It is followed by the subjunctive (§ 214.) 
and sometimes by the optative (§ 216. 1). 

El if whether, Lat. si : followed by the indicative (§ 213.), 
optative (§ 216. 1), and sometimes by the subjunctive 
(§214.). 

'E7t(kv or in't\v {insl av) when, after, as soon as : with the 
subjunctive (§ 214.). 

'Ercsdv (Ionic) = indv. 

'EitBl since, in as much as, after: with the indicative or 
optative (§ 216.), rarely with subjunctive (§ 214.). 

"EitBiddiv (litBLdi] av) == ln6,v : follow^ed by the subjunctive, 
and sometimes by the optative. 

'ETtBidri {inal Jrj) = anai. 

'Enai^ (poetic), = the preceding. 

'Etc/iv see anAv. 

'H truly, certainly. It is also an interrogative particle; 
as '^ Ttov Kal u\) avKocpdvTQKx n'la&a : ' was you too an informer ?' 
It is often followed by H*"? ^^^^'j ^^^ 7^?^ ^^- 



260 SYNTAX. § 228. 

"// or, otherwise^ or else, Lat. aut, vel ; as dyanqiv 7) (jtubXv, 
« to love or hate.' Formulas, ^ • • • ^, either - ^ ^ or ; noTtfjov 
or noTsqa . . . ^, whether • . . or. 

"H than, Lat. qvdm, after comparatives ; see § 180. A 
comparison between two qualities of the same object is ex- 
pressed by means of two compar. adjectives or adverbs ex- 
pressive of those qualities, with the conjunction ^ between 
them ; as ^aviTibneoou ?) drdQeioTegoi., ' more rash than brave ;' 
iiTtoirjda T a / V T € Q a ?] cr cp d)T 6 ga, 'I acted more quickly 
than wisely.' 

*H8 (Horn, and Ionic) = t] or. 

^'Hv = b(xv if, 

'H^uBv , . . Tjdi (also idi) both . . . and, as well . . . as, com- 
pounded of Tj or, and futp, ^t. Used by the epic poets. 

"Hroi (?] or, and Toi=(joi), commonly in the formula 
riroi . . . 7], or 1] . . . riTOL, either . . . or. — In Homer riiov sup- 
plies the place of /uiv, as r^TOi of wg aljuhv, = /tier Ihg bItiwv, 
^ he thus saying.' Sometimes i^iv follows r^TOL, as II. I, 140. 

GriP, a particle of confirmation. 

^'Iva that, in order that, Lat. ut : followed by the sub- 
jvnctive or optative ; also by the historical tenses of the 
indicative (§213. Note 8). "Ii'a li ; wherefore? why? — 
As an adverb IVa = ttov ; where? or ottou where. 

Ka (Doric) = ^e or atv. 

Keel and, Lat. et- Formula, y^al . . . y.al, both . . . and, as 
well . . . as, Lat. et . . . et. — After adjectives and adverbs im- 
plying resemblance, union, approach (§ 195.), it may be 
rendered as; e. g. oi/ o^oiMg nBnoir^y.aav xal ^OfJi]gog, 
'they have not acted in the same way as Homer,' or ' they 
and Homer have not acted in the same way.' — Sometimes 
it means even, also ; e. g. j^ « ^ d' ^A'/ilevg tovtcj ye fjifji'/t] svv 
xvdcavsiQri soQiy' ^vtl^ olriau v, ' even AchiUes is unwilling to 
meet him in men-ennobling battle.' 

Ks or y-ev (Homeric) == av (different from av if), 

Mbv is regularly followed by ^£- as ^vil fz ev aoiojv fialu/r/g 
TTTogd-ovg, d.vTl d e ^(iC^r^g qjvlXel' ia/riov qacpavl^oiv, ' branches 
of mallow^s instead of bread, and poor leaves of radishes in- 
stead of barley cakes.' In general the formula f^ev . . , di 
means indeed . . . but, on the one hand . . . on the other, 

Mriv, a strengthening particle. hi 

M(bv [^ri ovv)^ an interrogative particle ; as eujiv zig 'Ayd-^ 
S^ajv , . . ^u(bv 6 fiilag ; ' there is an Agathon ... do you 



228 — § 229. INTERJECTIONS. 261 

mean that black fellow V Sometimes it is followed by f^i 
or olv. 

m or vvv (short v) is a weak vvv now, Nv is found only 

in Homer. 
^ Om)g yet, still, Lat. tamen, 

^'Onoyg in order that: with the subjunctive, optative, and 
future indicative^ (§ 213. Note 4). Not to be confounded 
with the adverb oTrwg as. 

''Qjav (ore ai;) when : followed by the subjunctive, and 
sometimes by the optative. 

"Qtv (o and tI) that, because, Lat. quod: followed by the 
indicative or optative.— "Otv strengthens superlative adjec- 
tives or adverbs ; asort uIbIgtov /got^ov, ' as much time 
as possible.' — "Otv stands also before words quoted without 
chano-e ; as o^Uo (abv ovdev tcpilocpoovr^uajo ai^Tw, eJtts d' d t e- 
sig TiaiQov ri^eig, 'he said no other word of salutation to him 
than this, You have come at the right season.' 

Olv therefore, now. ^, 

Ovve}ta [oh spsxa) as a conjunction, since, because, = ot^. 

"Oq)Qa (poetic) that, as long as, till. 

Ilag very, quite, although. 

"P6l (Hom.) synonymous with aqa. 

Ts (enchtic) and, Lat. que. Formulas rs — re,^ both. . . 
and ; ts uat (not separated) ; ^al ts, or 3f«i . . . tb, is a little 
stronger than ^dt- 

Tot (Doric for (Jol 1 compare § 197. Note 2) you see, you 
know ; as to ^vyysvsg to l dsovov, ' consanguinity, you know, 
is a strong thing.' 

"Slg that, in order that: with the indicative, subjunctive, 
ov optative. With the infinitive \l means so thai, so as, 
^ 220,— It strengthens superlatives ; as wg idixiuja, 'as quick- 
ly as possible.' 

"n.aT6 (wg re) so that, with the indicative and infinitive 

(§ 220.). 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 229. Interjections are particles used in exclamations, 
and expressing some emotion of the mind. Here follows a 
list of Greek interjections. 



262 



SYNTAX. 



§230. 



^A ah ! of sorrow, and com- 
passion. 

'''A^d,ha! ha! of laughter. 

^AnnanaL or dnanaly of appro- 
bation. 

*^TTa^aTT«TG(:, of joy. 

*ATTanaTTaT(jc, of sorrow. 

^AxTaToi or UTaxai and UTTa- 
Taid^^ of sorrow and dis- 
gust. 

Ba^al and ^a^ai^d^, of aston- 
ishment : followed by the 
genitive (§ 187. Note 1). 

^E sometimes s, ah ! of grief. 

JSi'a on ! courage my lads ! 
Lat. eja: written also tea. 

^laTTOiTai and iaTTUTaid^^ of 
sorrow. 

^lav ho ! in answer to a call. 
It is also == iov or 1(0. 

^lavol = lav. 

*Iri, of exultation and joy. 

*Iov, of sorrow : followed by 
the genitive (§ 187. Note 

. }^- . 

*/c6, of joy or grief: followed 
by the vocative (§ 204.). 



Ml) or fiv, of pain ; made by 

breathing strongly through 

the nostrils. 
' 0(x wo ! alas I 
Oval wo ! Lat. vcB ! followed 

by the dative. Not used 

by the classic writers. 
Tlanai and nanaiui^ of pain, 

sorrow, astonishment, joy. 
TToTTtt? = the following. 
ndnoL and d) TtOTioi., O gods I 

of complaint. 
Uvna^ or nvTcnaS, of wonder, 

and admiration. 
"^ -v, expresses the sound 

made by a person smelling 

of any thing. 
fl^ev alas ! followed by the 

genitive (§ 187. Note 1). 
iIjv = the preceding. 
"SI (with the acute accent), 

O / of wonder, surprise, 

grief : followed by the 

nominative^ genitive^ or 

dative. 
^fi- (circumflexed) O / with 

the vocative (^204.). 



IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 

§ 230. 1. Frequently a nominative stands without a verb. 
E. g. (Xen. Hier. VI, 6) &(Jn8g ol dS^lTjT at od/, oiav idiQ)' 
Tibv yevMVTav TcgsiTTOvg, tovto adrovg eicpqalvev^ u}^%\ ozav Tcoy itV' 
Tayo}vi(jT{hv ririovg, tovt' avwvg ^via, literally, ' as the athletes, 
when they become superior to inexperienced men, — this 
does not gladden them ; but when they prove inferior to 
their opponents, — this grieves them,' where one might ex- 
pect ol d.MT]T(xl . . . TouTO) svfpQaivovTav . . . TovTco dviibvTai. Some- 
times the nominative seems to stand for the genitive abso- 
lute (§ 192.) ; as (Soph. Ant. 260) Uyov d' iv m.^loiaiv 
iggod-ovv zaKol, cpvla^ ^ li y x oi v cpvlaxa^ 'hard words 
passed among them — watchman reproached watchman.' 



'^ 230 § 231. IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 263 

2. If in the formula 6 fxh ... 6 ^e a whole is expressed, it 
is put either in the genitive (§ 177.), or in the same case as 
6 fAhv ,.,d dL E. g. (II. XVI, 317-22) JVeax ogld a i. d\ 
6 fi e V oviacr' 'Axvfivwv o?et dovgl, 'AvTiXo)^og... rov d^ 6.v- 
tid'sog Ogaavfjiridr^g ecp&i] oge^duevog, nglv oiindaav, * the 
sons of JNestor, one, that is, Antihichos pierced Atymnios 
with the sharp spear . . . but godlike Thrasymedes directed 
his spear against him before he struck.' So (Soph. Ant. 
21—22) ov ydcg rdcpov vc^v to) a a a t' y v tit u) Kgiajv, to v /a e v 
TtgoTlaag, top (T dii^iLKxaag ex^v ; 'has not Creon given one of 
our brothers an honorable burial, and left the other un- 
buried V 

Note. In Herodot. II, 116, tug de crTrilag rd^ toria, 
stands foraldsaTrilac xdg (= ag) terra. See § 149. 2. 

3. Instead of the nominative the accusative is sometimes 
found. E. g. (Odys. I, 275) (Jii]TBQa d' , sV ol S^v^ubg icpog-^ 
(xaxat ya^dead'ai, dip I'lbj eg fueyagoy nargog, ' as to thy mother, 
if she very much desires to be married, let her go back to 
her father's house ;' (Herod. V, 103) ^cxl ydg t riv K av v or, 
Tcgoxegov oi) ^ovXoiievrjv av^^axBeiv, cog evingi](Tav Tug I^dgdlg, 
TOTS G(pv Tcal a vT 1] TtgodeyavsTo, ' even Kaunos, which before 
would not join them, was added to them, as soon as they 
burned Sardes.' 

4. Instead of the infinitive, sometimes the indicative with 
si, (hg or otc is used ; in which case the subject-accusative 
stands alone. E. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) deivov ys tov 
zrigvxa, tov nagd TOvg ^goxovg olxofxsvov^ s I fAridenoTS v o a t ij" 
asL ndhv, ' it is a terrible thing, that the herald who was 
despatched to the mortals should not return ;' (ibid. 650-2) 
ihg iv Aiuihnov hoyoug egtI leyoiisvov dr^ Ti, Triv d l (h n s x\ (h g 
g)lavgujg ezoLv(hvTjasv derco ttots, 'that in the fables of 
jEsop something is said about the fox, that she was once 
scurvily treated by her partner the eagle.' 

§231. Sometimes with two or more substantives only 
one verb is put which belongs only to one of them. E. g. 
(^schyl. Prom. Vine. 21-22) tV ovts qico v i) v^ avis tov ttt og- 
cpri V ^goTibv ip s i, ' where thou wilt neither hear the voice, 
nor see the form of any mortal,' where cpuviliv is properly 
speaking governed by dyiovdei. This irregularity of con- 
struction is called zeugma {t^svy^a). 



264 SYNTAX. § 232. 

§ 232. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred 
words as closely as possible. This often occasions a con- 
fused arrangement of words. E. g. (iEschyl. Ag. 836) 
ToXg t' ai)T6g a{)Tov nri^aav ^aovvBTai^ 'he is oppressed 
by his own misfortunes,' So Odys. V, 155. 



PART IV. 
VERSIFICATION- 



FEET, 



<§) 233. 1. Every Greek verse is divided into smaller 
portions called feet Feet are either simple or comr 
pound. A simple foot consists of two or three syllables ; 
a compound foot, of four. 

Simple feet of two syllables. 

Spondee {(TTtovdsXog)^... two long; as ^(hXov. 

Pyrrhic {7tv^Qix('0g),.„ two short ; as fiovog. 

Trochee or Choree {rgoxotlog or xogsiog),,.. a long and a short ; 

as firiKog, 
Iambus {la/n^og),... a short and a long; as f^ivco. 

Simple feet of three syllables. 

Dactyl [ddKTvXog),... a long and two short; as nTvoixev. 
AnapcBst (Ixv&TtaicjTog),... two short and *a long ; as voegwv. 
Tribrach (Tgl^Qa/vg),.,. three short ; as S-slo/usv, 
Molossus ((noloaaog),... three long ; as civx/^not^. 
Amphibrach [d.^cpl^Qaxvg)y a short, a long, and a short ; as 

voriTog. 
Amphimacer or Cretic [dc^cpi^ayiQog or Kgi^rcxdg),... a long, a 

short, and a long; as KgrjiXxibv. 
Bacchius {^dx/ewg),... a short and two long ; as ideinve^g. 
Antibacchius {nocXcfi^dxxswg),... two long and a short ; as 

av&gojTCE. 

Compound feet. 
Dispondee [diundrdewg),.., a double spondee; as djUTtia/povV' 

23 



266 VERSIFICATION. § 233. 

Proceleusmatic [nQoytslsvafiaTi^Tidg),... a double pyrrhic ; as 
Xsydfievog. 

Ditrochce (dLTgo/acog),.., a double trochee ; as avXla^dvTsg, 

Diiambus [dUcc/u^og),... a double iambus; as aocpthTuioL. 

Greater Ionic (I^vixbg d.nb iiei'Qovog)^.., a spondee and a pyr- 
rhic ; as noii]TBov. 

Smaller Ionic (Tu)vix6g drr' i^^uaaovog),,.. a pyrrhic and a 
spondee; as anolojX^g. 

Choriambus [x^Qia^^og),... a choree and an iambus; as olo- 

Antispast {(kvTianaaTog),... an iambus and a trochee; as 
Epitritus I (IniTQiTog d),... an iambus and a spondee ; as 

Epitritus II [IniTQiTog |5'),... a trochee and a spondee; as 

svloyricrav. 
Epitritus III [enijQVTog /)... a spondee and an iambus; as 

'^yovfiivcov. 
Epitritus IV [inlTgiTog (5'),... a spondee and a trochee ; as 

PcBon I {naiojv d:),... a trochee and a pyrrhic ; as Avrd^eveg. 
PcBon II (nalojv i^'),.-- an iambus and a pyrrhic ; as axovo^ev. 
PcBon III (naiojv /),... a pyrrhic and a trochee ; as zBTvcpa&i. 
PcBon IV (nalojv d'),... a pyrrhic and an iambus ; as dXdUycov. 

2. Arsis is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus, 
beat) of the voice falls. The rest of a foot is called thesis. 
The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For example 
the arsis of an iambus or anapaest is on the last syllable; 
the arsis of a trochee or dactyl on the first. 

Note. The arsis of a spondee ( — ) is determined by the 
nature of the verse in which this foot is found : thus in tro- 
chaic or dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable, 
thus (-' -) ; in iambic or anapsestic, on the last, thus (- -'). 

The tribrach (- - -) has the arsis on the first syllable, when 
it is found in trochaic verse, thus (- ^ -) ; on the second 
syllable, when it stands for an iambus, thus (- ^' -). 

The dactyl (- - -) in anapaestic or iambic verse has the 
arsis on the second syllable, thus (- ^' ^). 

The anapaest (- - -) in trochaic verse has the arsis on the 
first syllable, thus (-' - -). 



§ 234— § 235. FEET. 267 

§ 234. 1. Verses are very often denominated from the 
foot which predominates in them. For example, the verse 
is called dactylic^ when the dactyl ( ) predominates in it. 

2. A complete verse is called acatalectic {^xaTuXrjxrixdg). 
A verse, of which the last foot is deficient, is called catalec- 
tic (^xaraXr^KTiKogy 

Particularly, a trochaic, iambic, or anapcEstic verse is 
called catalectic, when it has an odd number of feet and a 
syllable : hypercatalectic ({inegxaTdlrjxTo;), when it has an 
even number of feet and a syllable : hrachycatalectic {^gocx^- 
xard^xTog)^ when it has only an odd number of feet. For 
examples see below. 

3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapcestic verses, are mea- 
sured by dipodies (dinodia from dig and novg^, that is, by 
pairs of feet. Thus an iambic verse of four feet is called 
iambic dimeter; of six, iambic trimeter ; of eight, iambic 
tetrameter, 

§ 235. C.ESURA is the separation, by the ending of a word, 
of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. There 
are three kinds of caesura : 

1. CcBsura of the foot ; 

2. CcBsura of the rhythm ; 

3. CcBSura of the verse. 

1. The C(ESura of the foot occurs when a word ends be- 
fore a foot is completed. E. g. r^QOj' I Tr/GSv I ngcoia /uev | «);- 
Tovg, I TtoTsgot' | Taig vav- | gX xqarov- | gvv^ where the last syl- 
lable of the word vavaX begins a foot. So ' Ihov | i^ala- | 
Tta^s 7to- I Icp^ XV' j Q^^^ ^' «- I yyi^oig, where e^alana^s^ xi]g(x)ae 
terminate in the middle of the foot. 

2. The ccBSura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls 
upon the last syllable of a word ; by which means the arsis 
is separated from the thesis. This can take place only in 
feet which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. '^gsg^ 
'A- 1 Qsg ^QOTo- I loiye, jiX- \ atcpovs, \ Tsix^crt" \ nlrjra, where the 
arsis {^eg) of the second foot falls upon the last syllable of 
*AQ6g. This caesura allows a short syllable to stand instead 
of a long one (§ 18. 2) ; as Tgwsg | (usp xXay- | yri t' ivo- | ttt^ 
t' Xaav I ogpi- \ d^eg (hg where the last syllable (x^ec) of dgvl&eg 
is made long by arsis. 



VERSIFICATION. § 236 — § 239. 

3. The ccBSura of the verse is a pause in verse, so intro- 
duced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more 
melodious. It divides the verse into two parts. 

In the dactylic pentameter j and in the trochaic, iambic, 
and anapcEStic tetrameter its place is fixed. See below. 

Other kinds of verse (as the dactylic hexameter) have 
more than one place for this caesura. 

§ 236. The last syllable of every verse is common, that 
is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of 
the foot. 

TROCHAIC VERSE. 

^ 237. The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is 
the trochee (- -). The tribrach (- - -) can stand in every 
place instead of the trochee. The spondee (- -) and the 
anapaest (- - -) can stand in the even places (2, 4, 6, 8). 

In proper names, the dactyl (- -v.) can stand in all the 
places, except the 4th and the 7th. 

§ 238. The trochaic monometer consists of two feet. 
It is generally found among trochaic dimeters. E. g. (Aris- 
toph. Pac. 580) 

Tipde I vvvX. 

§ 239. 1. The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of 
four feet, or two dipodies. E. g. (Aristoph. Pac. 571-74) 

TTjg dt- I avTr}g- [ Trjg yra- | laiag^ 

T(x)v Te I naXacjX' | cu^ i- | TiBuvoiv. 

First with trembling hollow motion, 
Like a scarce awakened ocean, 
Then with stronger shock and louder, 
Till the rocks are crushed to powder. 

2. The TROCHAIC dimeter catalectic consists of three 
feet and a syllable. It is found among trochaic dimeters 
acatalectic. E. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1477-79) 

TovTo I fisv ys I riqog I aiev 
^XaffToi- I vsi^ Hat, | avxo- j cpavrst^' 
Tov ds I ;^et^w- j vog na I IXv. 



§ 240— § 243. IAMBIC VERSE. 269 

Could the stoutest overcome 
Death's assault and baffle doom, 
Hercules had both withstood, 
Undiseased by Nessus' blood. 

§ 240. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura occurs at the 
end of the fourth foot. This caesura is often neglected by 
the comedians, but very seldom by the tragedians. E. g. 
(^schyl. Agam. 1650-51) 

£la I dtj (pX- I lov lo- I ;^rTa^, |( ro^gyov I o^/ k- I xccg to- I ds* 
£ia di] |t- j q)og nqo- | xwnov || nag T^g | svTge- I Ttt^e- | tw. 

Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee 3 
Ye who, in a three-pieced obol, || father, mother, brother see. 

IAMBIC VERSE. 

<§) 241. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is 
the iambus (- -). The tribrach (- - -) can stand in every 
place instead of the iambus. The spondee (- -) or the 
dactyl (- - -) can stand in the odd places (1, 3, 5, 7). 

The anapa3St (---) can stand in all the places except 
the last. The tragedians admit an anapaest in an even 
place only when it is contained in a proper name, 

§ 242. The iambic monometer consists of two feet. It 
is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters. E. g. (Aris- 
toph. Eq. 455) 

aoLL TOig I icolocg. 

§ 243. 1. The iambic dimeter acalectic consists of four 
feet. E. ge (Aristoph. Ach. 266-70) 

h^iTi^ I 0-' ^TBv I TigoGSi- \ 7T0V, sg 
Tov di]' I jLiov il' I S^ojv d- I a/usrog, 
unovdag I TzoLrj- I aaj^Bvog | i/uav— 
TO), TTQCi' I y/uarwp | re, xac | /naxcov, 
aai Aa^ I /Lta/wv I anal' | "kayevg. 

Trust not for freedom to the Franks, 
They have a king who buys and sells ; 
In native swords and native ranks. 
The only hope of courage dwells. 

2. The IAMBIC dimeter catalectic consists of three {eei 
and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acata- 
lectic. E. g. (ibid. 1036-42) 

23* 



270 VERSIFICATION. ^^ 244 — § 245, 

diVT^Q I dLVBV' I QTjy.Bv I TV Taig 
anovdai' I aiv r] I dv- aovx I iov— 

X8V ov- 1 dsi^v fie- I Tadoj' | crew, 
7taTa/6L I Gv jrjg | xoQdi]g | to ^e^^' 

rag a?;- I mag | aTa&ev- | £• 
'^;<ov- I (Tag 6^- I S^ca- | u^aioyv ; 

dnra- I re rd^- I /eleL- [ a. 

That Sylvia is excelling, 
Upon this dull earth dwelling. 

§ 244. 1. The iambic trimeter acatalectic consists of 
six feet. It never has a tribrach (- - -) in the last place. Its 
verse-caesura occurs after the second foot : sometimes after 
the third foot. Sometimes the verse-caesura is entirely 
neglected. E. g. (iEschyl. Prom. Vine. 1-6) 

X^ovog I (tiev ig I Tr/lov- I qov \\ rj- I xo/usv | nedor, 
27iv&r}p I eg oi- I fuop, || d^a- I top eig I igrj- | /uiav. 
"HcpoiL- I ore, || gov I ds /grj I fieleiv I Inv- \ ajoXag, 
dg GOV I TtaxrjQ | tcpei- | to, || tov- | ^8 yr^g [ nsTQaig 



i)\pri- I Xoxgrj- I /uvoLg || toj' I Xtoj^- 
d-dafiaV' j tXpcop I dsG^mv I ^i^ do. 



Qi]KTovg I Tcedavg. 



2. The scazon or choliambus {axdl^cov or /ojUafi^og, that 
is, Zame iambic) is the iambic trimeter acatalectic with a 
spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g. (jEschrion apud 
Athen. VIII) 

^y(b fpilavvlg, II 1^ ^Ttl^wTog (kpS-Qibnovg, 
ipTav&a yrigcc \\ to juaxgco xexol/LirifiaL, 



lloXv^QdTTjg ds, II Ti]^/ yovriv ^ Ad^-qvaXog^ 
X6yOi)v TV navndlrjiLioi, \\ xal xaxri ylwaaoc. 

§ 245. The iambic tetrameter catalectic consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura is at the end of 
the fourth foot : but this caesura is often neglected by the 
comedians. E. g. (Aristoph. PI. 261-63) 

oifxovv I nalav j dr]nov [ Isyco ; || av d' a-d- j Tog odx j dcxov- [ evg^ 



6 ds- I GTcoTTjg I yao cprj- | aw ?;- 
yjvxgov I ^vov I zav dv- j gkoIov 



iWag 71 I (Jew^ I dnaV' | xa^ 
'Qrjasvv I d7r«A- j Aayey I Tag, 



A captain bold of Halifax, || who lived in country quarters. 



§246 §249. DACTYLIC VERSE. 271 



DACTYLIC VERSE. 

^ 246. The fundamental foot of the dactyHc verse is 
the dactyl (- - -). The spondee (- -) may stand for the 
dactyl. 

§ 247. 1. The dactylic dimeter acatalectic consists of 
two dactyls. It is found among tetrameters. E. g. (Aris- 
toph. Nub. 303) 

(uvdTodo' j y^og dofiog. 

2. The dactylic dimeter catalectic on two syllahtes 
consists of a dactyl and a spondee or trochee. E. g. 
(^schyi. Agam. 46, 74) 

fiifivoiLisv I Icrxvv. 

^ 248. 1. The dactylic trimeter catalectic on one 
syllable consists of two feet and a syllable. E. g. (jEschyL 
Supp. 841) 

dljUTj. I svTa no- I qov, 

deanoav' I g) ^vv lu- I ^gsi^. 

2. The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables 
consists of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee 
or trochee. E. g. (^schyl. Agam. 107, 118) 

alxav I av^cpvTog I alo)v, 
naanqS' I niot^g iv k- I dqaiui, 

§ 249. 1. The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic con- 
sists of four feet, the last of which is a dactyl, or (on ac- 
count of the last syllable being common) a cretic (- ^ -). E. g. 
(Aristoph. Av. 1746-7) 

d) f^ieya [ /Qvasov I darsgo- I nr]g cpocogy 
d) idwg I uju^gojov I ey/^g I nvgcpogov. 

2. The tetrameter catalectic on one syllable consists 
of three feet and a syllable. E. g. (^schyl. Suppl. 541) 

nolla ^Qo- I Tcov dia- I (.tBi^oixe- I va, 

3. The tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists 
of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee, 
E. g. (id. Agam. 112, 62,69) 



273 VERSIFICATION. § 250 — § 251. 

S-ovQwg I dgvtg I Tevngcd^ in^ I aiav. 
Zsvg^ Ttolv- I uvoQog | (x/uq)!^ yv- I j'atxog. 

^250. 1. The dactylic pentameter acatalectic con- 
sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyl. E. g. 
(Aristoph. Av. 1748) 

(b x^ovL- I ««- ^aoV' I a/ee^ | du^gocpo- I ^t '^' d^a. 
Such verses are very rare. 

2. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER catahctic 071 0716 Syllable 
consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g. (Soph. Aj. 224) 

T(x)v ^eya- I Awj/ ^ava- I o)v -vno- I xlr^'^o^e- I j^a?/. 

3. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER catalectlc on two sylla- 
lies consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g. (iEschyl. 
Agam. 123, 121) 

^Atqbv- I dag fJi^X^' I f^ovg^ tda- I r] layo- I danag. 
allvvov I (xllivov I sine, Tod' I £i) vT- I tcutoj. 

4. The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER cousists of two trimctcrs 
catalectic on one syllable (§ 248. 1). The first hemistich 
almost always ends in a long syllable. The verse-caesura 
occurs after the second foot. This kind of verse is cus- 
tomarily subjoined to the heroic hexameter. E. g. (Theogn. 
147-8, 151-2) 

^o{)Ibo ^' e-JuGs^iojv oXlyoig avv ^Qr^^aavvolTis Xv, 

71 nlov- I T6LV, ddv- I itojg || /or^fiaxa \ nacrafiS' I vog- 

Xqri^aTa /iisv docl/uoov xal nayvAxc^ dcvdgl didMCfiv 

r^d^ doe- I Ti] oil- I yoig || drdgaat,, | Kvgv,^ hne- | lav, 

§ 251. 1. The DACTYLIC hexameter acatalectic consists 
of six feet, the last of which is a dactyl. E. g. (Soph. 
Electr. 134) 

dXk^ d) I TtavTOV' I cf^ cpilo- I rr^rog dc- [ fiei^ofiS' [ vavxaqiv. 
It is used by the tragedians in systems of tetrameters. 

2. The DACTYLIC hexameter (or heroic hexameter) 
catalectic on two syllables^ consists of six feet, the last of 
which is a spondee or trochee. The //ifA foot is commonly 
a dactyl. E. g. (Odys. 1-5) 



§ 252 — § 254. ANAPJESTIC VERSE. 273 



Ttolla 
Ttegcrev 



uvdQctfiov [ ivvsne^ | fiovcra^ || no- I XvrgoTtov, | 6g ^aXa 
nlayx^Vf ^- I ^^'' Tqai- I ^g || le- I ^o^ mole- I e&qov ^- 
rroXAwj/ I ^' dcvd-gcx)' I ttw?/ 11 ^^ej/ I dorrew, I xoc^ i^ooi' | iyvto 
TtoXla ^' 6^' I iv Tiov- I TO) II Tia'&ev | (iA^ea | oj^ xajot j '&vfiov^ 
dgw/Lie- I j/o^ I]!' I'Te ^'v- j ^rjv || ;ca^ j voaxov e- I TaiqOi)v. 

The predominant verse-ccBsura is that in the middle of 
the third foot ; either directly after the arsis, as 

nMyx^Vt ^^^^ Tgol7]g \\ leqbv tttoIIs&qov eTtegaev 

or in the middle of the thesis of a dactyl, as 

A7]Tovg Hal ^wg vlbg- || 6 yctq ^aailriC xohad^elg. 

Sometimes the verse-ccBsura occurs immediately after the 
arsis of the fourth foot, E. g. 

&gvTL)fi6vog riv re ipv^iiv, \\ xal vdarov kratgcov. 

The verse-caesura which occurs between the fourth and 
sixth feet is called the bucolic ccesura. E. g. (Theocrit. 
- 12) 

Irjg tcotI rav vv^cpav^ Xr^c, (xln6le^ || ttJJc xa&l^ag, 
(hg TO xdzapTEg lovxo yeihikocfov^ || q.TS ^vgXaav. 

ANAP^STIC VERSE. 

<§> 252. The fundamental foot of the anapaestic verse 
is the anapaest (---). The spondee (--), the dactyl 
(--w), or the proceleusmatic (- — ), may stand for the 
anapaest. 

A dactyl very seldom precedes an anapaest in the same 
dipody. 

§ 253. The anapaestic monometer consists of two feet. 
E. g. (^schyl. Agam. 57, 83, 86) 

yoov 6- I ^v^oav, 
av dsy Tvv- I dageco, 
Tivog dy- j yehag. 

§ 254. 1. The anap^stic dimeter acatalectic consists 
of four feet, the last of which is either an anapirst, a spondee, 
or a trochee. The legitimate verse-caesura is in the second 



274 VERSIFICATION. § 255 — § 256. 

arsis : it is often made however in the short syllable imme- 
diately after the second arsis. E. g. (Eurip. Ale. 29 & seq.) 

Ti av ngog | fxsladQOig ; || iv crv t?^- | de noleig^ 
0Oi§' ; d.di' I ^eig «v, || rx^ag | ivegcov 
dcpogi^' I 'Qo/uevog || xui, xaTa- I navwv, 

Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar 
Gives hope to the valiant || and promise of war. 
All the sons of the mountains || arise at the note, 
Chimariote, Illyrian, !| and the dark Suliote. 

2. The ANAP^sTic DIMETER catahcHc (called alsoparce- 
miacus, naQoifxiamg) consists of three feet and a syllable. 
It has no caesura. (iEschyl. Pers. 7, 20) 

Ellexo I xwgag | icpoQSv- I 8lv. 
Ttolsfiov I crncpog I nags /or- I reg. 

Note. Anapaestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees 
are not uncommon. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 154 & seq.) 

deilaia decXalov yrigcog, 

dovleiag rag oi) xAaTag, 
rag od (peQjag ^ fioi fiov. 

§ 255. The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic (called 
also Aristophanean) consists of seven feet and a syllable. 
The verse-caesura comes after the fourth foot; in some in- 
stances, after the short syllable immediately following the 
fourth foot. E. g. (Aristoph. Ach, 627 &< seq.) 

i^ o{) I ye xoQOi^' 1 atv icpe- 1 arrjitsv |j TQvyiTcovg I 6 dida- 1 (jualog 

o^Tto) I nage^r] I rcgog to S'S' I argov \\ Is^cov^ | (hg ds- | ^wg i- I crxv' 
dva^aX- I Xo^svog I J' -1)710 rcov I e^^gcov || iv ^Ad^rj- 1 vacovg | laxv- 



CRETIC VERSE. 

§ 256. The cretic verse, of which the fundamental foot 
is the cretic (- o -), admits a first paeon (- « o *.), and some- 
times a fourth paeon {ki x, ^ -) 

The cretic dimeters^ trimeters^ and tetrameters are the 
most common. E. g. (iEscbyl. Suppl. 421 <fc seq.) 



§ 257. CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 275 

^rjd' Idr^Q [ fi' i^ edgav dimeter 
TioXvd^eMv I ^vcria- I cr&eicrav d) trimeter 
Tiav xQaTog e- I x^^ x^ovog dimeter 
yvoj&t. (5' vSgvp I ayeocov do. 

The verse-caesura of the tetrameter is after the second 
foot. E. g^ (Simmias apud Heph.) 

juaTEQ d) TCOTVLa, II xlvd-L, vvfxcpav 6.3oav, 

Note. Sometimes the first foot of a cretic verse is pre- 
ceded by a syllable (called anacrusis). E. g. (Aristoph. 
Pac. 1128) 

r^doual y\ r^douav 

xga- I vovg dcni^XlaYiuevog, 

TV- I gov T6 xal xgofifivcov . 



CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 

§ 257. 1. Some choriambic dimeters acatalectic consist 
of two choriambuses (- v. o -). E. g. (Aristoph. Vesp. 526) 

VVV da TOV ix j d-r^USTBQOV. 

Others consist of a choriambus and a diiambus [^- y, -), or 
the contrary. E. g. (id. Eq. 581 & seq.) 

d) Ttohov- I /s Tlallag, d) 
TTjc legoi)' I rdr?;, drra- 
am' Ttoleucj I ts, xccl noii]^ 
Toug, &c. 

Others consist of a spondee or trochee, a choriambus and an 
iambus. E. g. (Soph. Ant. 341-2) 

TovTO I xal noliov \ negap 
novTov I x^v/uegl(D ] votcd, 

2. The choriambic dimeter catalectic consists of a chori- 
ambus and a bacchius (- - -), or of a spondee, a choriambus, 
and a syllable. E. g. (Aristoph. Eq. 555, 564) 

mcT&ocpogov j Tgn^^geig. 
. . . . • '^^z/- 
valovg I ngdg rd nags- I arcu;;. 



276 VERSIFICATION. § 258. 



PiEONIC VERSE. 

<5 258. The pceonic tetrameter catalectic on three sylla- 
bles consists of three first paeons (- v^ ^ u), and a dactyl or 
cretic. The verse-caesura occurs at the end of the second 
foot. E. g. (A^ristoph. Vesp. 1275, & seq.) 

w fiaxdov^ I Aihdfievsgy [I c)g ore fLiaxcc- I qII^oubv' 
naidag icpv- I Tevcrag oic || /ecgojexPt^- I xwiuTovg. 



GREEK INDEX. 



In the following indices the figures designate the sections (§), and 
their divisions : N. stands for Note. 



d privative, 135. 4. 

ayxi' com parison of, 125. N. 2. 

adelqiog see o^oiog, 

adr]g patronymics in, 127. 1. 

at^po) and ccpo) verbs in, 96. 7. 

(XLog adjectives in, 131. 1. 

dcxovoj, 179. N. 

alsog adjectives in, 131. 3. 

dhxalvoj, 163. 2. 

dllog, d?^lolog^ dlXoTgwg, with 

genitive, 186. N. 2. 
dXibpai with grenitive, 183. 1. 
au(pijj, 137. N. 6. 
ixvdaaix), 184. N. 
(ii'^o, 136. N. 3. 
Hvd-QLOTcog, ibid. 
(kvTiaiQocpog with genitive, 

186. N. 3. 
Ce^to^, d^too), 190. N. 3. 
\4n6llix)v acc. and voc. of, 37. 

N. 2 ; 38. N. 2. 
d.Toareoeai, 165. N. 3. 
a^to^ diminutives in, 127. 2. 
a? patronymics in, 127. 1. 
daaa = Jtvdc, 71. 
are see w?. 
aT?/g national appellations in, 

127. 3. 
avjdg, 65; 144. 
diCpatqiofxav^ 165. N. 3. 
|?ail, 1. N. 3. 

§U7XM with acc, 163. N. 1. 
^ovg, 43. 2. 

24 



ye^o), 179. N. 

y^ omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

yv(x)(j.rj, omitted after the arti- 
cle, 140. N. 5. 

*/^a£5?, 43. 2. 

yi^^i 36. N. 2. 

dai/Liovtog with gen., 177. N. 3. 

<^ei: subject of, 159. 1. — fol- 
lowed by the acc. and gen. 
181. N.— ^er^ 220. N. 1. 

Sstva, 71. 2; 140. N. 6. 

deq^of-mv with acc, 163. N. 1. 

dsvregog with gen., 186. N. 2. 

diaq)iQUj^ diacpsgdvTOjg^ 186. 
N 3. 

dL&cpoQog with gen., 186. N. 3. 

dlyafiiLia, 1. N. 3. 

(^tog with gen., 177. N. 3. 

<Jt(/;dw contract, of, 23. N. 1. 

doxetp, 220. N. 1. 

doQvcpoQm, 163. 2. 

^ou^e, 137. N. 6. 

^t^o, ibid. 

fa pluperfect in, 85. N. 4. 

f^tJoji; and iniai6.f.ievog with 
gen., 185. N. 2. 

e^wt ^(7, 209. N. 4. 

f?/^«t a[)parently superfluous, 
221. N. 3. 

et'Vog adjectives in, 131. 1 
and 2. 

€toc adjectives in, 131. 1. 



278 



GREEK INDEX. 



Bliti, 93. N. 3. 

Big omitted before the gen., 
177. N. 6. — elg synony- 
mous with 6 avTog^ 195. 
N. 2. 

Bldlv ot Uyovcnv, 148. 3. 

EycaaTog, 140. 4 ; 157. N. 3. 

a&^, 93. N. 3. 

ivavTiog with gen., 186. N. 2. 

Bi^oxng, 183. N. 3. 

£^0/0^ with gen., 177. N. 3. 

hQTix'ru), SO. N. 3. 

«o? adjectives in, 131. 1. 

iTTwgxm, 163. 2. 

£TaGT(ji}j.evog see Bldcog. 

iTTVTQOTTSuO), 163- 2. 

£^og adjectives in, 131. 3. 

f'arti/ oi', 157. N. 1. 

sTsgog with gen., 186. N. 2. 

€t» and xay.^g with verbs sig- 
nifying to do, to say, 165. 
N. 2. 

eigi, 93. N. 3. 

Bvg nouns in, 127. 3 and 6. 

e/o) and rixoj with gen., 188. 
N. 1. 

£0) contract, of dissyllabic 
verbs in, 116. N. 1. 

t, 5. N. 2. 

£(iw contraction of, 23. N. 1. 

Lb) verbs in, 96. 3 and 4. 

rjei^g adjectives in, 131. 5. 

TiKco with gen., see e/co. See 
also 209. N. 1. 

'^liHog, 149. N. 1. 

?;^og adjectives in, 131. 3. 

7lui6hog with gen., 186. N. 2. 

^1/, 210. N. 

7/rog nouns in, 127. 3. 

rjQ syncopated nouns in, 40. 

r]Qog adjectives in, 131, 3. 

'i^a&i^v, 212. N. 4. 

7]TT]g nouns in, 127. 3. 



'&av(jLrov after verbs of con- 
demnation, 183. N. 2. 

'&LyY(^vcu, 173. N. 

la nouns in, 128. 1. 

ladr^g patronymics in, 127. 1. 

m or i'de, 93. N. 3. 

t^drjg patronymics in, 127. 1. 

idior diminutives in, 127. 2. 

i'^tog with gen., 174. N. 

t^Big adjectives in, 131. 5. 

iBgog with gen., 174. N. 

i^yiog adjectives in, 131. 1. 

i^^uog adjectives in, 131. 4. 

^^^ and lojvT] patronymics in, 
127. 1. 

t'rog adjectives in, 131. 1. — 
national appellatives in, 
127. 3. 

lov diminutives in, 127. 2. 

t^og adjectives in, ibid. — na- 
tional appellatives in, 127. 
3. 

*b patronymics, diminutives, 
and national appellatives 
in, 127. 1 and 2 and 8. 

laxog, tuKTj^ diminutives in, 
127. 2. 

tTTjg and twT;yg nouns in, 127. 
3 and 5. 

I'OJv patronymics in, 127. 1. 

y.axfbg see Bi). 

itard drops the final vowel 
before a consonant, 10. 
N. 2. 

XaTTjyOQBU), 183. N. 1. 

xBlgo/uaL with ace, 207. N. 1. 
xhjoovofdo), 178. N. 1. 
y.vdo) contraction of, 23. N. 1. 
xoipog with gen., 174. N. — 

with dat., 195. N. 1. 
xonna, 1. N. 3. 
xvxed)v accusative of, 37. 

N. 2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



279 



la^i and U^e, 93. N. 3. 
lav&dvoj with acc, 163. 2. 
).6v(T(T(x) with acc, 163. N. 1. 
lluj verbs in, 96. 6. 
f.Kx^ nouns in, 129. 4. 
fi(jc and J^^ with acc, 171. 
fmla com pa I is on of, 125.N.2. 
ftUkloj with iniin., 219. N. 1. 
umcTTL, 178. N. 2. 

(JeTi;^a), 178. N. 1. 

i?^?? nouns in, 129, 5. 

/«/^ not, 224. 

/UfivriCTXOj, 182. N. 1. 

/t/^j^ and ^/^, 64. N. 2. 

(<^0i? nouns in, 129. 3. 

f^wv adject, in, 131. 7. 

*' changes of, 12. 

^'aiJb, 43, 2. 

^'rj see f-iu, 

viyA(M, 164. N. 2. 

^tV see ///^. 

pvxT(x)o comparison of, 125. 

N. 2. 
WO) and rviut verbs in, 95. 9. 
6 at^To^ w4th dative, 195. N. 2. 
656? omitted after the article, 

140. N. 5. 
oeig adjectives in, 131. 5. 
olxslog with gen., 174. N. 
oFo?, 149, N. 1 ; 219. N. 2. 
otog adject, in, 131. 1. 
oig, 43. 2. 

oI(r>9'' 5oa(70i^, 218. N. 3. 
olog, 140. 4. 

ouvvuv with acc, 163. 2. 
ouotOs and d(^£^gpob, 195. N. 1. 
oouw with acc, 163. N. 1. 
05 neuters in, 128. 4. 
oa(7f, 137. N. 6. 
01., 224. 1. 
nag, 140. 4. 

7i6Qai6oLictL with acc, 207. N.l. 
neoijiug with gen., 186. N. 2. 



noaeidibv acc and voc of, 
37. N. 2 ; 38. N. 2. 

nouy^a omitted after the ar- 
ticle, 140. N. 5. 

TTQinei subject of, 159. 1. 

nooGr^xsL, 178. N. 2. — subject 
of, 159. 1. 

nqovoyov comparison of, 125. 
N. 2. 

TTToi verbs in, 96. 2. 

^ doubled, 13. 

^(> for Qd-, 6. N. 

or between two consonants, 
11. 

aav or ouutiI, 1. N. 3. 

od (Doric) == 1% 6. N. 

Gig nouns in, 123. 3. 

oKov and cryofiriv imperf. in, 
85. N. 5. 

axcx) verbs in, 96. 8 and 14. 

audio contraction of, 23. N. 1. 

aaa femin. in, 127. 7. 

aorw verbs in, 96. 3 and 4. 

crvvTj nouns in, 128. 3. 

avvoida followed by the par- 
ticiple, 222. N. 1. 

G'/Jxliog with gen., 177. N. 3. 

(jwrrjo voc of, 38. N. 2. 

jdlag \\\i\\ gen., 177. N. 3. 

Tavvv, 141. N. 1. 

TBiQa see T^ta. 

Tfo; verbals in, 132. 2. — leoy, 
162. 2 and N. 1. 

Ti]g, Tr;o, nouns in, 129. 2. 

T;yc femin. in, 128. 2. 

Tig; preceded by the article, 
140. N. 6. — equivalent to 
noXog ; 1 53. N. 

ilg omitted before the gen., 
177. N. 6. 

ToiovTog preceded by the ar- 
ticle, 140. N. 6. 



280 



GREEK INDEX. 



t6 Xsydfievov, to tov ^^Ofxr^Qov, 

TOlUPaVTlOP, 167. N. 3. 
rondlat^, 141. N. 1. 
ronolv, ibid. 
Tongiv, ibid, 
roc verbals in, 132. 1. 
TO? (article), 63. N. 2. 
TOV = Tlvog or rtyog, 70 ; 71. 
rova, TQvg, reigoi, femin. in, 

127. 9. 
TT for Off, 6. N. 
TO) = Tivi^ or T(j^i 70 ; 71. 
vdQWP diminutives in, 127. 2. 
vi^ (long v) diphthong, 3. N. 1. 
t^l(5? omitted after the article, 

140. N. 5. 
vlXiop diminutives in, 127. 2. 
vlXog and f^o? dimin. in, ibid. 
vq)iov dimin. in, ibid. 



(pByyo) with gen., 183. 

q)i or q>i^v gen. and dat. in, 31. 

N. 3 ; 33. N. 4 ; 35. N. 2. 
(po^^ofiai, with ace, 207. N. 1. 
XQdo/uai. contraction of, 23. N. 

1.— with dat., 198. N. 1. 
xgri subject of, 159. 1. — with 

ace. and gen., 181. N. 
X^^oc omitted after the article, 

140. N. 5. 
ipdix) contraction of, 23. N. 1. 
yj^ pronoun, 64. N. 2. 
o)dr]g adject, in, 131. 6. 
ojXog adject, in, 131. 3. 
o)v nouns in, 127. 4. 
ojj/ta nouns in, ibid. 
(hg, S)an6Q, &(jjs, are, with gen.- 

192. N. 2. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



Abstract for concrete, 196. 
N. 4. 

Accent, 19-21. 

Accusative sing, of the third 
declens., 37. — ^two accusa- 
tives after certain verbs, 
165 ; 166. — accusative of 
limitation, 167. — of time, 
168— absolute, 168. N. 1. 
—terminal, 170. — after ^(^ 
and ^^, 171.— with prepo- 
sitions, 172. 

Active voice, 205. 

Adjectives, 48-56. 

Adverbs of manner 119 — 
of quantity, 120 — of place, 
121.— of time, 122.— cor- 
relative, 123. — compari- 
son of, 125.— negative, 224. 

Anastrophe, 226. N. 1. 

Antepenult, 16. 1. 

Aorist, 212.— -passive, 206. 
N.2. 

Apodosis, 213. 2. 

Apostrophe, 27. 

Apposition, 136. 

Arsis, 232. 2. 

Article, 63 ; 139-142 ; posi- 
tion of the, 141. — before 
adverbs, 141. 1, — before 
an entire proposition, 141. 
2. — before any word, 141. 
3. — equivalent to the de- 
monstrative and relative 
pronoun, 142. — before a 
participle, 140. N. 3 ; 177. 
N. 1. 



Attraction with the relative, 
149. — with the infinitive, 
158. N. 2; 161. 

Augment, 75. — syllabic, 76- 
79.— temporal, 80-81 .—of 
compound verbs, 82. 

B. 

Barytones, 19. 2. 
Breathings, 4. 

C. 

Csesura, 234. 

Causative verbs, 205. N. 5. 

Collective nouns, 137. N. 5; 

157. N. 3. 
Colon, 27. 
Comma, 27. 
Comparison of adjectives, 57 

-59. — of adverbs, 125. 
Composition of words, 135. 
Conjunctions, 228. 
Connecting vowel, 85. 
Consonants, 5. 
Contraction, 23. 
Copula, 160. 1. 
Coronis, 27. 
Crasis, 24. 

D. 

Dative after adjectives, verbs, 
and adverbs, 195-196. — 
after slul^ 196. N. 2.— of 
limitation, 197. — in con- 
nection with comparatives, 
197. N. 3. — apparently su- 
perfluous, 197. N.2. — after 
substantives, 197, N. 4. — 



282 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



of cause, manner, nneans, 
and instrument, 198. — of 
accompaniment, 199. — af- 
ter passive forms, 200. — 
of time, 201. — of place, 
202.— absolute, 201. N. 2. 

Deponent verbs, 208. 

Derivation of words, 125. 

Desideratives, 134. 4. 

Digamma, 1. N. .3. 

Diminutives, 127. 2. 

Diphthongs, 3. 

Doubtful vowels, 2. N. 1. 



E. 



Elision, 25. 
Enclitics, 22. 

F. 

Final consonants, 16. N. 2. 

Future, 209. — Future third, 
211. 

G. 

Gender, 30. 2. 

Genitive adnominal, 173. — 
after possessive pronouns 
and adjectives, 174. — after 
sl^i^ 175. — after a neuter 
article, 176. — denoting a 
whole, 177. — of the reflex- 
ive pronoun, 1 77. N. 5. — af- 
ter verbs whose action re- 
fers to a part, 178. — after 
verbs, to take hold of, (fee, 
179._^oZe^g'o,&c.,180.— 
after words implying /wZ- 
Ties^jik-c, 181. —after verbs, 
to remember, &c., 182. — 
to accuse, &c., 183. — to he- 
gin, &c., 184.~after ver- 
bal adjectives, 185. — ^after 
comparatives, 186. — of 
cause, agent, instrument, 



187.— of limitation, 188. 
of material, 189. — of price, 
190.— of time, 191.— abso- 
lute, 192.— of place, 193. 
— after prepositions, 194. 

I. 

Imperative perf , 209, N. 3. 

Imperfect, 210. 

Impersonal verbs, 157. N. 8. 

Indicative, 213. 

Infinitive, 219-221. — subject 
of, 158. — for the impera- 
tive, 219, N. 6.— with oiy, 
220. N. 2. 

Interjections, 229. 

Intransitive verbs, 205. 2. 

Interrogation, mark of, 27. 

Inversion, 148. 2. 

Iota subscript, 3. 

Irregular construction, 230. 

K. 

Koppa, 1. N. 3. 

L. 

Labials, changes of, 7-8. 
Linguals, changes of, 10. 

M. 

Metathesis, 26. 2. 
Middle verbs, 207. 
Moveable consonants, 15. 

. N. 

National appellatives, 127. 1. 

Negatives, 224-225. 

Neuters in o, 33. N. 2. — neu- 
ter adjectives with the ar- 
ticle, 138. N. 2. 

Nominative sing, of the third 
declension, 36. — Nomina- 
tive for voc. 157. N. 8.— 
absolute, 230. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



283 



Nouns, 30. — indeclinable, 45. 
— defective, 47. — anoma- 
lous, 46. 

Numerals, 60-62. — tables of, 
L N. 5-6. 

O. 

Object, 162.-immediate, 163. 
Optative, 216-217. — Opta- 
tive perf. pass. 91. 2. 
Oxytones, 19. 2. 

P. 

Palatals, changes of, 7 ; 9. 

Parenthesis, marks of, 27. 

Paroxytones, 19, 2. 

Participle, 222. 

Passive voice, 206. 

Patronymics, 127. 1. 

Penult, 16. 1. 

Perfect, 209. 

Period, 27. 

Perispomenon, 19. 2. 

Pluperfect, 209. 

Predicate, 156; 160. 

Prepositions, 226-227. 

Present, simple or original, 
96.— syntax, 209. 

Privative, cf, 135. 4. 

Pronominals, 73. 

Pronouns, 64-73. — syntax, 
143-155. — personal not 
expressed, 157. N. 5. 

Pronunciation, 28. 

Proparoxytones, 19. 2. 

Properispomena, ibid. 

Q. 
Quantity, 17-18. — marks of, 
27. 

R. 

Reduplication, 76. 1. — of the 
2 aorist, act. and mid., 78. 
N. 2.— Attic, 81. 



Relative pronoun for demon- 
strat., 150. — for interro- 
gat., 151. — equivalent to 
%va, 152. 

Root of a verb, and tense- 
root, 83. 

Rough consonants, changes 
of, 14. 

S. 
San or Sampi, 1. N. 3. 
Subject of a proposition, 156 

-161. — of a finite verb, 

157.— omitted, 157. N. 8. 

— of the infinitive, 158. 
Subjunctive, 214-215.— Subj. 

perf. pass., 91. 2. 
Substantives used adjective- 

ly, 136. N. 3. 
Syllables, 16. 
Synecphonesis or synizesis, 

23. N. 2. 

T. 

Tenses, 209-112. 

Terminations, verbal, 84. 
Thesis, 232. 2. 
Tmesis, 226. N. 2. 
Transitive verbs, 201. 1. 



Vau, 1. N. 3. 

Verbs, pure, mute, and liquid, 
94. — penult of pure verbs, 
95. — contract, 116. — in/i*, 
117. — anomalous, 118. 

Versification, 22, & seq. 

Vocative, 204. 



Zeugma, 231. 



Z. 



284 





ERRATA. 




age 8 line 25 for '/g&S-ao), read yQi'xqi-au. 


" 11 ' 


' 13 


" ^xa%l(JX(x)^ 


" d)caxl'Q(o. 


" 24 ' 


' 2 


' TO, OV, 


" rd oi5. 


(( H i 


' 7 


'' XTJJ', 


'^ Xl\d6\ 


" 28 ' 


' 15 ' 


' from TTacrug, 


" from Trac 


" 91 ' 


' 25 


" Note 4., 


" Note 5. 


" 93 ' 


' 19 


' Note 5., * 


^ Note 6. 


<< " I 


' 29 ' 


' iyevovTO, 


" iyivBTo. 


" 165 ' 


' 8,12,24 


^' §155,, 


" § 157. 


" 167 ' 


' 31 


' 0, ' 


' 6, 


" 180 ' 


' 26 


'< (XQludlTOt^, < 


' aqfi6TT0i,, 


" 172 ' 


' 38 


' § 146., 


' § 147. 



1 *^'i» 1 1 






>^>3 









S^-^ 




.'V^' Ja^ 



myi^i ^^"^ 



- - " " ' * .■"<?!. " *' ' ^-^^ - 









^\ 



,^^ "'^^ 






.-^'^ 



xO^.. 






^""'-^^P^ 



OO' 



J-^' 



^ %,■;^^o5 



xV ./>. 



' ' . ■'o 






« , » - \V 



<-. 



% .,X^'^ 



.-S <> 






,A^^' '^^ 







"^, c^' 



; '■i' 






xO O. 



\^ 



1 * -<> . — 



* ., „ o' z^' 



■^^^^>^mx\,, ^^" 



V^^rt'^^y: 




.^^ '■ 



L'BRARYOFC 



